Home

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

1. Figure 11 94 Managed disk performance report filter specification 5 Click Generate Report to see a report as shown in Figure 11 95 Selection Managed men ran Susan Parc ron ok BB Managed Disk nme eri _sackend Read VORote _wackend re 1 0 Rate Tool takend 1 0 nord E waaraan a Se ee 88 Si es ae rea era ei armaan e ora Sia BRI IRIS nere dl Mnara ms seh Dera 524 Figure 11 95 MDisk performance report Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 639 6 Click the upper left icon to see a history chart report of the selected MDisk as shown in Figure 11 96 election Managed Disks History Chart Hela chart pps a I imeda rom mesi Wescordrsadlocoro masto yc zise ma a doen E ETET EEEN N BEN a ra ht Sm a ve ase Gerard Pat ik ZU lice 028 Badond toli Pas dil XC 2148 nale OLIEN Seiad ite Yo P ni licher Figure 11 96 MDisk history chart 640 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 11 9 3 Generating reports using Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web console In this section we describe how to generate reports using the Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web console 1 To connect to the web page browse to the following URL https tpchostna
2. Figure 8 21 Remove host task completed 372 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 1 5 Host properties This section describes the host properties which provide the following information gt Overview gt Mapped Volumes Definitions open the Host Details pane complete the following steps 1 Select the host and from the Actions menu click Properties You also can highlight the host and right click it as shown in Figure 8 22 Modify Mappings Generic No All Volumes Generic 2 Generic 2 Yes Import Mappings Figure 822 Opening host properties Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 373 374 2 Figure 8 23 shows the Overview tab of the Host Details pane Select the Show Details box in the lower left to see more information about the host Host Details Win2012 Host ame Host status Host Type Hof FC Porte Ports Hof SAS Ports ISCSI CHA secret Fait Overview Mapped Volumes Port Definitions wiez012 Fc 1 v omme Genere Figure 8 23 Host details This tab provides the following information Host Name Host ID Status of FC Ports of iSCSI Ports of SAS Ports iSCSI CHAP Secret Host abject name Host object identification ID number The current host object status Online Offline or Degraded The number of host Fibre Channel FC ports The number of host Internet SCSI iSCSI n
3. Figure 11 49 Update System Confirm Update 11 4 2 Upgrading drive firmware In previous versions of IBM Storwize code it was only possible to upgrade the drive firmware from the CLI using the applydrivesoftware command after manually uploading the firmware files to the home admin upgrade directory of the IBM Storwize V3700 This process is detailed in Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN on page 647 As of Storwize software V7 4 the drive firmware can be upgraded using the GUI The user can choose to upgrade all drives or select an individual drive Download the latest Drive Upgrade package from the IBM Support site http www ibm com support entry portal support 608 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Upgrading the firmware on individual drives To upgrade an individual drive complete the following steps 1 Navigate to Pools Internal Storage right click the drive to be upgraded and select Upgrade from the action menu as shown in Figure 11 50 465 26 GIB Nearline lt 27250618 Enterprise GIB Nearline a x lt ex 771 30 GiB Enterprise Enterprise u amp E F1 Propertios wm mur Customize Columns ene Figure 11 50 Upgrade an individual drive 2 Select the Drive Upgrade package which was previously downloaded from the IBM Support site by clicking the folder icon Click Upgrade as shown in F
4. Figure 5 82 The mapped volumes listed in VMware vSphere Client 9 Check the UIDs that you recorded earlier and confirm that all of the mapped volumes are listed The mapped volumes are now ready to be managed by the host operating system The next section describes how to create a data store from a mapped volume Creating a data store from a mapped volume To create data store from a mapped volume in VMware ESXi 5 5 complete the following steps 1 Go to Configuration Storage This opens the window shown in Figure 5 63 Figure 5 63 The storage view in VMware vSphere Client Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 To create a new data store click Add Storage to open the Add Storage wizard The window shown in Figure 5 64 opens Select Disk LUN and click Next Select storage Type Specfy you want to format a cem volume or use a shared fer over the remork Seroz Twe osen Creste a desire on Fre Cran SCSI or beni 5 5 dek or mountan esist WES vore metworkrie system esa co Conse Choos tis you want to eate a Syston ii on Fitre Carne or iSCSI v ed s deste to al hosts hat have acess V ate serae a ee me m9 Figure 5 64 The Add Storage wizard Chapter 5 Volume configuration 239 240 3 The available disks and LUNs mapped volumes will be listed on the next page as sh
5. Figure 3 5 Systems pane Actions menu Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 75 3 The Overview link at the upper right toggles an Overview pane as shown Figure 3 6 Actions qembSGR Figure 3 6 System pane overview For full details about the System pane see System pane on page 94 3 2 Navigation Navigating the management tool is simple and like most systems there are many ways to navigate The two main methods are to use the Function Icons section or the Overview menu This section describes the two main navigation methods and introduces the well known breadcrumb navigation aid and the Suggested Tasks aid Information regarding the navigation of panes with tables is also provided 3 2 1 Function icons navigation To navigate the function icons complete the following steps 1 Hover the mouse pointer over one of the seven function icons on the left side of the pane to enlarge the icon and provide a menu with which to access various functions 2 Move the pointer to the required function and click the function Figure 3 7 on page 77 shows the results of hovering the mouse pointer over the Pools function icon 76 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 3 7 Hovering over the Pools function icon 3 Figure 3 8 shows all of the menus with options under the list of function icons Figure 3 8 Options that are listed under Function Icons section C
6. Qc Ex j p BS Fasncopjuo sca son H ov TS 4 FlashCopy Voi Rename Target Volume Delete Mapping Show Raat Vues test ft Cote Qe tt Figure 10 41 Edit Properties menu 3 You can then modify the value of the background copy rate and cleaning rate by moving the pointers on the bars as shown in Figure 10 42 Edit FlashCopy Mapping T Background Copy Rate 50 Cleaning Rate 50 Figure 10 42 Change the copy and cleaning rate 4 Click Save to save changes 492 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Restoring from a FlashCopy Complete the following steps to manipulate FlashCopy target volumes to restore a source volume to a previous known state from a snapshot 1 Identify the FlashCopy relationship that you want to restore In this example you want to restore FlashCopyVol6 as shown in Figure 10 43 Restore from FlashCopyVol7 which is a snapshot of the data from an earlier point in time Volume Naine E Pi Capacity Group Flac LU Fasncopyvon sso ie ag NN samen fianco camcn secs aR 0 nemen E ncn RiVolume 20060 p voca soon Comme Oe Figure 10 43 Starting FlashCopy restore Note The mapping progress in the case of a snapshot indicates the percentage of
7. Figure 3 12 Actions menu lt cs cee a S hj 2 i Toke om lt 097 86 GiB Enterprise Show Dependent volumes Properties Customize Columns Figure 3 13 Right clicking an item to access the Actions menu 80 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 2 6 Task progress An action starts a running task and shows a task progress pane as shown in Figure 3 14 1 Click View more details to see the underlying command line interface CLI commands 2 The commands are highlighted in blue and can be copied and pasted into a configured IBM Storwize V3700 SSH terminal session if required This is useful when developing CLI scripts Create RAID Arrays vf Task completed View more details Creating BATDI suctask mkmiiskcrp ext 1024 ouiid 0 nane Pool_01 warning so pool ID 6 was successfully created gunning comanc svctask mkarray drive 21 19 level raidi 0 Successfully created PAID array ID ae 400 Figure 3 14 Task progress pane 3 2 7 Navigating panes with tables Many of the configuration and status panes show information in a table format This section describes the following methods to navigate panes with rows and columns vv vv Sorting columns Reordering columns Adding or removing columns Multiple selections Filtering objects Chapter 3 Graphical user int
8. eoe MMOL WOEDUEMIEDDSFEBDOINUUROLID 2 FiashCopyor eaosoronoenonr snoacoaooonconos IB Tuashops oH ovsoreoooennnr saovooooonoonoos Hime o 20000 SONOS 2 Soung ties See CM Figure 8 5 Modify Host Mappings Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 363 3 Click the Right Arrow icon to move the volume to the right pane as shown in Figure 8 6 The changes are marked in yellow and the Map Volumes and Apply buttons are enabled ody Host tapping x Host Waania TC unmapped Volumes B CENT 620GB 6008078000EB01F58000000000000000 D TishCopyuo s00s07eocoxsorFsso000000000003 FHeshCopjit consazenoenorrsnnonoanavonooas 00 68 E NUSOQUDOIFSDODUONCGGQUDUM 2 FashopyVol2 StUSTGIONERPIFt C0bsoUoNCN00 Fasncopyvon 01 oDSIMOOOEBOIFESOOODIONOCOOODC Feshcopyvle tOEOTBIUEBPIFSSococoontotceco 7 200 8 coasozavovenonr sovovooooonooooto Volume 2 2006 consozeoavenorrsnoaonoooaoooots sasur 006 toosortbocetoYrstooeooonocoess Stowe 12 vouen Soectng o veure I salsena o macpns Figure 8 6 Modify Host Mappings 4 Click Map Volumes to apply the changes and the Modify Mappings pane shows that the task completed successfully as shown in Figur
9. PO Tetske rsss Sipe Pac UNE Pte eee Soe buc NTS VE duc NS VRAT TT Ee tene Spe te are barons Bre V iso Severn B Dalvemogone is Severson epit E ey rey rte Sonno M Figure 6 68 Bringing volumes online Windows 2012 Chapter 6 Storage migration 305 3 The only difference now is that these volumes are presented from the Storwize V3700 using the IBM SDDDSM MPIO driver You can see this by right clicking any disk label Disk 1 Disk 2 or Disk 3 and clicking the properties as shown in Figure 6 69 4 As you can see these disks are now reported as IBM 2145 device type indicating that they are now presented by a Storwize device and not the previous external IBM DS3200 device Gene Fakes Votes MP Be Bii Ee Maa Dk Ones Mater imam PRED OR LUNG One aana oon tua ey Figure 6 69 Device properties 306 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Storage Pools This chapter describes how IBM Storwize V3700 manages physical storage resources All storage resources that are under IBM Storwize V3700 control are managed using Storage Pools Storage Pools make it easy to dynamically allocate resources maximize productivity and reduce costs Advanced internal storage managed disks MDisks and Storage Pool management are covered in this chapter Storage Pools can be conf
10. Less severe faults are often fixed with the resolution of the most severe fault 11 6 Collecting support information If you have an issue with an IBM Storwize V3700 and call the IBM Support Center you might be asked to provide support data as described in the next section 11 6 1 Support information from the GUI 624 We show how to obtain support information using the GUI Download Support Package wizard The Download Support Package wizard provides a selection of various package types IBM Support provides direction on package type selection as required To download a Support package complete the following steps 1 Browse to Settings gt Support as shown in Figure 11 71 Figure 11 71 Accessing Support files Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 Click Download Support Package as shown in Figure 11 72 Looking for individai iog Show foll log isting a x Figure 11 72 Download Support Package Figure 11 73 shows the Download Support Package pane from which you can select one of four different types of the support package Download Support Package x Selectthe cf support package to download This package can be several hundred megabytes Standard logs Standard logs plus ono existing statosavo Standard logs plus most recent statesave from each node Standard jogs plus new statesaves Figure 11 73 Support Package selection 3 Select the type depending on t
11. Warning x Write access to the master volume RemoteSource4 will be lost write access to the auxiliary volume RemoteTargetd will be enabled Lx cum Figure 10 115 Warning message for switching direction of a Remote Copy relationship 3 After the switch completes your Remote Copy relationship is tagged as shown in Figure 10 116 and shows you that the primary volume in this relationship was changed to the auxiliary IIIS reran Consiatont syncronzea nemotesoureat Romotorargor Consistent Synchronized Remote saurez reren Consistent synchronized Remotesourcez RemoteTarged Consistent Synchronized RemoteSouree3 Hemotetarget 7 Consistent synchronized 55 Remotesoureet RemoteTargot eurem m yer Q 77557715 NND M Figure 10 116 Switch icon on the state of the relationship Chapter 10 Copy services 553 Renaming a stand alone Remote Copy relationship The Remote Copy relationship can be renamed by completing the following steps 1 Select the relationship and then click Rename from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 117 or highlight the relationships and right click Create Consistency Group Create Reitonsnp Auxiliary Volume Ac to Consistency Group Remotstaret Start stop reet Remotssoureaz Romoterarast2 ES Suiten Remote Source RemoteTarge ren Rename Romotesouress omoteterastt Delete fetabonsh
12. mo Pe Figure 2 40 Storage Pool selection Chapter 2 Initial configuration 63 10 As shown in Figure 2 41 the wizard shows the internal storage presets Click Cancel if you do not want to continue with the configuration shown or click Finish and the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI creates the arrays shown in the Summary Select Enclosure Summary Configure Storage dauid het spares Summary Jett nest oe Need Help nich Figure 2 41 Add Enclosures Summary 11 Click Close when the task completes as shown in Figure 2 42 Greate RAID Arrays Task completed View more detai Figure 2 42 Add enclosure Task completed 64 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The new expansion enclosure is configured within the IBM Storwize V3700 as shown in Figure 2 43 Sytem States Serzeca Figure 2 43 Expansion Enclosure included For more information about how to provision the new storage in the expansion enclosures see Chapter 7 Storage Pools on page 307 2 9 2 Configure Call Home email alert and inventory Email and alert notification enables the administrators to receive the events from IBM Storwize V3700 If your system is under warranty or you have a hardware maintenance agreement itis advised to configure your system to send email reports to IBM if an issue that requires hardware i
13. Proprie Figure 6 9 Identifying Storwize V3700 SAS port WWPN Chapter 6 Storage migration 257 11 A list of the SAS port WWPNS is presented as shown in Figure 6 10 Record the WWPN of the ports that are used to connect to the external System Storage DS3200 EEEE Figure 6 10 Storwize V3700 SAS port list 12 To find the SAS port WWPN from the IBM System Storage DS Storage Manager go to the Subsystem Management summary window and click Storage Subsystem Profile 13 Scroll through the Controllers tab to find the SAS port WWPN that is used to connect to the Storwize V3700 as shown in Figure 6 11 Sese sene i pneum Figure 6 11 Obtaining 053200 SAS port WWPN DS Storage Manager GUI Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 14 Record the information shown Table 6 3 Table 6 3 SAS port WWPN for Storage Controllers Array Controller WWPN 053200 500 088680722008 053200 500 08858074000 v3700 canister 1 500507680368006 v3700 canister 2 500507680368C0D6 15 1 addition make sure that you pay attention to the following tasks Make sure that the current OS service pack and fixes are applied to your Microsoft server Use the current firmware and driver levels on your host system adapters 6 3 Storage migration example Avoiding data loss The ri
14. oo Figure 3 85 FlashCopy Mappings pane For more information about how to create and administer FlashCopy mappings see Chapter 10 Copy services on page 453 Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 123 Remote Copy pane This pane shows both individual and grouped Remote Copy relationships To maintain these relationships and groups complete the following steps 1 Click Remote Copy in the Copy Services menu to open the pane shown in Figure 3 86 2 The Actions menu provides options to start stop switch rename and delete relationships 3 You can also use it to create and modify relationships and consistency groups Consistzney Group 7 Finar ELITS inconsistent Copying Remotesourcea RemoteTargetd Inconsistent Cooma Hemotesourtet emoteTaraett inconsistent Copying Remotesource RemoteTarget2 Inconsistent Copying jrS0_v2700 so vsooo consistent Copying Bemotesourees RemoteTaroets inconsistent Copying Remotesoureot Wemotelorgett a w n meer een RR ei Figure 3 86 Remote Copy pane 124 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Partnerships pane To manage partnerships complete the following steps 1 Click Partnerships to open the pane shown in Figure 3 87 2 From this pane itis possible to set up a new partnership or delete an existing partnership with another IBM Storwize or IBM SAN Volume Controller sy
15. uas 65 28 40 065 28 G0 cos G0 05 28 G0 P Candid Candid Candid Candid Candid Candid Coni Candid Candid Candid v onimo v onimo v Online v Online v Online v Online v Online Online v Online v Online v Enclosure 10 EI n Figure 7 46 MDisk swap drive Step 2 The exchange process starts and then runs in the background The volumes on the affected MDisk remain accessible iv Ifthe GUI process is not used for any reason the CLI command in Example 7 7 can be run Example 7 7 command to swap drives IBM_Storwize ITSO_V3700 superuser gt charraymember balanced member oldDriveID newdrive newDrivelD mdiskID Chapter 7 Storage Pools 341 342 c Delete i Array MDisk can be deleted by clicking RAID Actions Delete To select more than one MDisk press Ctri left mouse click ii A confirmation is required by entering the correct number of MDisks to be deleted as shown in Figure 7 47 You must confirm the number of MDisks that you want to delete If there is data on the MDisk it can be deleted only by selecting the Dele the RAID array MDisk even if it has data on it option Delete Array NDISK x You selected 4 array delete Verify ihs errar to delete Verify the af
16. AONE Pascow y Onine oooga VIRG Poo arose y Onine Vare TERT rc ____ Figure 3 76 Volume by Host pane 3 4 4 Hosts menu As shown in Figure 3 77 the Hosts menu provides access to the Hosts Ports by Host Host Mappings and Volumes by Host functions Figure 3 77 The Hosts menu 118 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Hosts pane Select Hosts in the Hosts menu to open the pane as shown in Figure 3 78 The Hosts pane shows all of the hosts that are defined in the system Add Host Modify Mappings All Volumes Generic 2 Yes Duplicate Mappings Figure 3 78 Hosts pane Host Actions Host Actions such as Add Host Modify Mappings Volumes Duplicate Mappings Rename Delete and Properties can be performed from the Hosts pane Figure 3 78 shows the actions that are available from the Hosts pane For more information about the Hosts Actions menu see 8 1 Advanced host administration on page 360 Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 119 Adding a host add a host complete the following steps 1 Click Add Host to open the Add Host window 2 Choose the type from Fibre Channel Host Internet Small Computer System Interface iSCSI Host or SAS Host and the applicable host configuration pane is shown 3 After the host type is determined the
17. O Bypass check for volumes that will go afine and remove the node immediately without flushing cache gt Figure 11 41 Remove node warning message 10 The non configuration node is removed from the Management GUI Update System pane and shown as Unconfigured when hovering over the node in the Monitoring gt System pane 11 the Service Assistant SA tool for the node that you just removed 604 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 12 In the SA tool the node that is ready for upgrade must be selected Select the node that shows Node status as service mode displays an error code of 690 and has no available cluster information as shown in Figure 11 42 ren goucan view decal status and summary and manage serce actione for the current node The carer node nade when sernee related sons are e sormeen ose the acre mestre ed Doves the totace er woking wih cr nodes onthe system To manage a frt node selec 2 node om the Fatowna tabe Attention oriy rom serie tine on odes when dreed by sence procedures I used naporaprateiy service cn cause a faces to data ar even data ass T the node SANUS SERCE Pontormz 2Eent m QUI toe erore a ars related to he rede m ry Figure 11 42 Select node in Service GUI for update 13 In the SA tool select Upgrade Manually and select t
18. Overwrite Differences Use this option to overwrite contents from the primary volume copy to the other volume copy The command corrects any differing sectors by copying the sectors from the primary copy to the copies that are compared Upon completion the command process logs an event that indicates the number of differences that were corrected Use this option if you are sure that the primary volume copy data is correct or that your host applications can handle incorrect data 410 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Return Media Error to Host Use this option to convert sectors on all volume copies that contain different contents into virtual medium errors Upon completion the command logs an event which indicates the number of differences that were found the number that were converted into medium errors and the number that were not converted Use this option if you are unsure what the correct data is and you do not want an incorrect version of the data to be used 2 Select which action to perform and click Validate to start the task The volume is now checked Click Close Figure 8 74 shows the output when the volume copy Generate Event of Differences option is chosen Repair Volume Copy Task complotod 100 View more detaiis uciask repairv skccpy vaiidate 30 Synchronizing cache Figure 8 74 Volume copy validation output The validation process runs as a backgro
19. node id node name 1 1 online node 1 nodel 1 2 online node 2 node2 2 1 online expansion 2 2 online expansion IBM Storwize 50 V3700 superuser The initial IBM Storwize V3700 system setup should be done using the process and tools that are described in 2 8 First time setup 2 8 First time setup 40 This section describes how to perform a first time IBM Storwize V3700 system setup IBM Storwize V3700 has an easy to use initial setup process that is contained in Universal Serial Bus USB key The USB key is delivered with each storage system and contains the initialization application file InitTool exe The tool is configured with your IBM Storwize V3700 system management IP address the subnet mask and the network gateway address by first plugging the USB stick into a Windows or Linux system The IBM Storwize V3700 starts the initial setup when you plug the USB key with the newly created file in to the storage system USB key If you are unable to find the official USB key that is supplied with the IBM Storwize V3700 you can use any USB key that you have and download and copy the initTool exe application from the following IBM Storwize V3700 Support website https ibm biz BdEz8s The USB stick contains a readme file that provides details abut how to use the tool with various OSs The following OSs are supported gt Microsoft Windows 7 64 bit Microsoft Windows XP 32 bit only Apple Mac
20. these pocis Storage Found Q ares 7880 68 Enters 10 rpm U drives 27890 GIB Enterprise 15K rom 10 arves 25 Nearne 7200 rom Games 257 86 68 10K rom Use the recommended configuration Select this option to recommended valves for the RAID ieve and d Selecta preset uration uses all the drives to build arrays Rap 5 amount of spare drives Select different cg PAD Drive Class ram Preset Talci a proso DRE Neca Ho Figure 3 11 Internal storage preset selection 3 2 5 Actions The IBM Storwize V3700 functional panes provide access to various actions that can be performed such as modify attributes and rename add or delete objects The Action menu options change depending on the pane accessed Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 79 The available Actions menus be accessed by using one of two main methods gt Highlight the resource and use the Actions drop down menu as shown in Figure 3 12 gt Right click the resource as shown in Figure 3 13 las Filter BG rm 5 _ 1 1 L z 78901 eee mercem a egy m notes moomo m m quomm Tome om m d cum Komae m more 4m v Show Dependent ues cone m E Onimo masks cmewecens
21. 6 To get a more detailed view of a volume run the 1svdisk volume name command as shown in Example 9 6 on page 443 This output shows two copies of a volume Both copies now have Easy Tier turned on However Copy 0 is in a multitiered Storage Pool and automatic data placement is active as indicated by the easy tier status line Copy 1 is in the single tiered Storage Pool and Easy Tier mode is measured as indicated by the easy tier status line Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Example 9 6 Volume details IBM Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lsvdisk RedbookVolume id 6 name RedbookVolume status online capacity 1 006B copy_count 2 copy id 0 status online mdisk name EasyTier Pool type striped mdisk id mdisk name fast write state empty used capacity 1 0068 real capacity 1 0068 free capacity 0 00MB overallocation 100 easy tier on easy tier status active tier ssd tier capacity 0 00 tier enterprise tier capacity 1 0068 tier nearline tier capacity 0 00 parent mdisk grp name EasyTier Pool copy id 1 status online mdisk name Nearline Pool type striped mdisk id mdisk name fast write state not empty used capacity 1 0068 real capacity 1 0068 free capacity 0 00MB overallocation 100 easy tier on easy tier status measured tier ssd tier capacity 0 00MB tier enterprise tier capacity 1 0068 tier nearline tier capacity 0 00 parent mdisk grp name Nearline Pool
22. Indicates that a partnership is defined between a local and remote cluster However the remote cluster was excluded This state can occur when the fabric link between the two clusters was compromised by too many fabric errors or by slow response times of the cluster partnership gt Fully Configured Remote Exceeded Indicates that a partnership is defined between a local and remote cluster and the remote is available However the remote cluster exceeds the number of allowed clusters within a cluster network A maximum of four clusters can be defined in a network If the number of clusters exceeds that limit the IBM Storwize V3700 system determines the inactive cluster or clusters by sorting all of the clusters by their unique identifier in numerical order The inactive cluster partner that is not in the top four of the cluster unique identifiers shows Fully Configured Remote Exceeded Remote Copy relationships Remote Copy relationship is a relationship between two individual volumes of the same size These volumes are called a master source volume and an auxiliary target volume Typically the master volume contains the production copy of the data and is the volume that the application normally accesses The auxiliary volume often contains a backup copy of the data and is used for disaster recovery DR The master and auxiliary volumes are defined when the relationship is created and these attributes never change Howe
23. On another system _ Figure 10 122 Remote Copy consistency group auxiliary volum le location window 4 Next you are prompted to create an empty consistency group or add relationships to it as shown in Figure 10 123 Create Consistency Group x Where are the auxiliary volumes located On this system On another system Figure 10 123 Creating an empty consistency group or adding relationships Chapter 10 Copy services 557 5 If you select No and click Finish the wizard completes and creates empty Remote Copy Consistency Group Selecting Yes prompts for the type of copy to create as shown in Figure 10 124 Create Consistency Group x Select the type of copy that you want to create o gud rowo saam ipg Global Mirror with Change Volumes Figure 10 124 Selecting copy type consistency group wizard 6 Choose the relevant copy type and click Next A consistency group cannot contain both Metro Mirror and Global Mirror volumes It must contain only one type or the other In the following window you can choose existing relationships to add to the new consistency group Only existing relationships of the type that you chose previously either Metro Mirror relationships or Global Mirror relationships are displayed This step is optional 7 Use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select multiple relationships to add If yo
24. v FlashCopy Remote Copy Troubleshooting Remote Copy Managing Remote Copy using the GUI vv Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 453 10 1 FlashCopy Using the FlashCopy function of the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system you can create a point in time copy of one or more volumes In this section we describe the structure of FlashCopy and provide details about its configuration and use You can use FlashCopy to solve critical and challenging business needs that require the duplication of data on your source volume Volumes can remain online and active while you create consistent copies of the data sets Because the copy is performed at the block level it operates below the host operating system OS and cache and therefore is not apparent to the host Flushing Because FlashCopy operates at the block level below the host operating system and cache those levels do need to be flushed for consistent FlashCopy copies While the FlashCopy operation is performed input output VO to the source volume is disabled briefly to initialize the FlashCopy bitmap and then is allowed to resume Although several FlashCopy options require the data to be copied from the source to the target in the background which can take time to complete the resulting data on the target volume copy appears to complete immediately This task is accomplished by using bitmap or bit array that tracks changes to the data after the FlashCop
25. 0 local C Remote User Grew Day stilt operators sers must have a passu SSM ey or ton Verity passwort Ssn pume kev mes Noe Bir IZ Figure 3 93 Create User pane 4 The authentication mode can be set to local or remote Select local if the IBM Storwize V3700 authenticates locally Select remote if a remote service such as an LDAP server authenticates the connection If remote is selected the remote authentication server must be configured in the IBM Storwize V3700 by using the Settings menu Security pane 5 Optional Use an SSH configuration to establish a more secure connection to the CLI For more information see Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 128 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Audit Log pane The audit log tracks action commands that are issued through a CLI session or through the management GUI The Audit Log pane shown in Figure 3 94 displays information about the command such as the time stamp user and any associated command parameters It is not Possible to delete or alter the Audit log To open it complete the following steps 1 Select Audit Log in the Access menu to open the pane 2 To reduce the number of listed items select Filter by Date or Show entries within Audit Loa 15714120258 PM MA 50 2 Fiter by Date SESS ats
26. 1 Click Show Dependent Volumes to show the volumes that are dependent on the selected drive Volumes are dependent on a drive only when their underlying MDisks are in degraded or inaccessible state and removing further hardware causes the volume to go offline This condition is true for any RAID 0 MDisk or if the associated MDisk is degraded already Use the Show Dependent Volumes option before you perform maintenance to determine which volumes are affected Important A lack of listed dependent volumes does not imply that there are no volumes using the drive 2 Figure 7 13 shows an example if no dependent volumes are detected for a specific drive Figure 7 13 Internal drive no dependent volume Chapter 7 Storage Pools 315 3 Figure 7 14 shows the list of dependent volumes for drive when its MDisk is in a degraded state Figure 7 14 Internal drive with dependent volume 4 Example 7 3 shows how to view dependent volumes for a specific drive using the CLI Example 7 3 Command to view dependent vdisks for a specific drive Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lsdependentvdisks drive driveID 316 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Properties To view the drive properties complete the following steps 1 Click Properties as shown in Figure 7 15 in the Actions menu or double click the drive to see the vital product data and the configuration information The Show
27. 10 4 2 Managing stand alone Remote Copy relationships 10 4 3 Managing a Remote Copy consistency group Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 11 1 Reliability availability and serviceability 11 2 IBM Storwize V3700 components i 11 2 1 Enclosure midplane assembly 11 2 2 Node canisters Ports and light emitting diode LED 11 2 3 Node canister replaceable hardware components 11 24 Expansion canister Ports and LED 11 2 5 Disk subsystem 11 2 6 Power supply unit Contents 417 418 418 419 420 428 425 426 426 426 426 427 428 428 429 481 481 488 440 441 444 446 447 448 458 454 454 455 468 465 474 500 514 515 521 525 529 529 581 532 532 540 556 575 576 577 577 2577 581 585 586 590 vii 11 8 Configuration backup procedure 591 11 3 1 Generating a manual configuration backup by using the CLI 591 113 2 Downloading a configuration backup by using the graphical user interface 592 11 4 Updating software 595 11 4 1 Node canister software 595 11 4 2 Upgrading drive firmware 608 11 5 Eventlog on 612 11 5 1 Managing the event log 3 613 11 52 Alert handling and recommended actions 617 11 6 Collecting support information 624 11 6 1 Support i
28. 424 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Note Extent migrations occur only between adjacent tiers Figure 9 11 shows the Easy Tier extent migration Storage Pool a Flash Tier im ee gt Promote Swap Warm Demote Ji d Enterprise Tier V 060 Expanded or Cold Demote Figure 9 11 Easy Tier process 9 4 Easy Tier process Easy Tier is based on an algorithm with a threshold to evaluate if an extent is cold warm or hot and consists of four main processes These processes ensure that the extent allocation in multitiered Storage Pools is optimized for the best performance based on your workload in the last 24 hours The processes are described in the following list Y VO Monitoring Data Placement Advisor Data Migration Planner Data Migrator Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier Figure 9 12 shows the flow between these processes Easy Tier Sofware Figure 9 12 Easy Tier process flow The four main processes and the flow between them are described in the following sections 9 4 1 I O Monitoring The Monitoring IOM process operates continuously and monitors host volumes for I O activity It collects performance statistics for each extent at five minute intervals and derives averages for a rolling 24 hour period of O acti Easy Tier makes allowances for large block I Os and therefore considers only I Os up to 64
29. 6Gb e fimwerelevek FRU Pw movza28 FRU identity ATSADETAAGODUCG2SSTE 5000 016041158 Figure 3 43 Properties for drive 98 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 gt Canister The Canister properties pane shows various information such as Configuration node state WWNN memory and central processing unit CPU specifications and FRU part number Figure 3 44 shows the canister properties Properties for Canister 1 NES o Controller Connguranon node wy Memory FRU PW FRU ldontity Canister ves 0087580300006 2 core Intel R Celeron R CPU G530T 200691 ovens ATS00LA5DTYH T4 GB2G 001 Figure 3 44 Properties for Canister Power Supply Right clicking the Power Supply shows the Power Supply properties Figure 3 45 and Battery properties Figure 3 46 on page 100 The Power Supply properties pane shows various information such as state and FRU part number Properties for Power Supply Unit 1 Safetoremove Yes ac FRU P aswosst 11945W8841YM10NH248VPB Figure 3 45 Properties for Power Supply Unit Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview The Battery properties pane shows various information such as state charge state and FRU part number as shown in Figure 3 46 pem US 2 dec Chorei 100 hare fuso ceu FRU Identity T1944X3320Y8 12663280A0 Figure 3 46
30. Figure 10 8 Create a snapshot using the preset You now have a snapshot volume for the volume you selected 468 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Creating a clone To create a clone complete the following steps 1 In the FlashCopy window choose a volume and click Create Clone from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 9 2 Alternatively highlight your chosen volume and right click to access the Actions menu La rie reato snapshot Create cione ront Backup RETE C cx Show Roistod Vom ate Properties nan dues EI amp eC d X Figure 10 9 Create a clone from the preset You now have a clone volume for the volume you selected Chapter 10 Copy services 469 Creating a backup To create a backup complete the following steps 1 In the FlashCopy window choose a volume and click Create Backup from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 10 2 Alternatively highlight your chosen volume and right click to access the Actions menu FiashCopy Create Snapshot zE m3 ZBE Ca El Figure 10 10 Create a backup from the preset You now have a backup volume for the volume you selected 470 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 In the FlashCopy window and in the FlashCopy Mappings window you can monitor the progress of the running FlashCopy operat
31. GUI screen captures CLI commands and output Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved xvii xviii Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system This chapter provides an overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 architecture and includes a brief explanation of storage virtualization This chapter includes the following topi IBM Storwize V3700 overview IBM Storwize V3700 terminology IBM Storwize V3700 models IBM Storwize V3700 hardware Storwize V3700 terms Storwize V3700 features Problem management and support yrvyvyyy Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 1 1 IBM Storwize V3700 overview The IBM Storwize V3700 solution provides a modular storage system that includes tho capability to virtualize its own internal storage The IBM Storwize V3700 system is a virtualizing Redundant Array of Independent Disks RAID entry level storage system IBM Storwize V3700 features the following benefits Enterprise technology brought to entry level storage gt Speciality administrators not required Easy client setup and service Ability to grow the system incrementally as storage capacity and performance needs change Simple integration into the server environment The IBM Storwize V3700 addresses the block storage requirements of small and midsize organizations and consists of one 2U contro enclosure Optionally you can ad up to nine 2U e
32. Important Ensure that you have no unfixed errors in the log and that the system date and time are correctly set Start the fix procedures and ensure that you fix any outstanding errors before you attempt to concurrently update the code Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 595 Updating software automatically The software update can be performed concurrently with normal user O operations and each node in the system updates individually There might be some degradation in the maximum I O rate that can be sustained by the system while the code is uploaded to a node during the update while the node is rebooted and while the new code is committed This is because write caching is disabled during the node canister update process The updating node is temporarily unavailable and all O operations fail to that node As result the I O error counts increase and the failed I O operations are directed to the partner node of the working pair Applications do not see any I O failures When new nodes are added to the system the update package is automatically downloaded to the new nodes from the original IBM Storwize V3700 system Multipathing requirement Before an update ensure that the multipathing drivers are fully redundant with every path available and online You might see errors that are related to the paths These errors go away failover and the error count increases during the update When the paths to the nodes retur
33. It is possible to set a maximum rate at which the volume processes I O requests The limit can be set in I Os to megabytes per second MBps This feature is an advanced feature and it is possible to enable it only through the CLI as described in Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 After creation or if a volume copy is offline the mirror sync rate weights the synchronization process Volumes with a high sync rate 100 complete the synchronization faster than volumes with a lower priority By default the rate is set to 50 for all volumes Shows if the cache is enabled or disabled for this volume Provides feedback if open I O requests are inside the cache that are not destaged to the disks The unit device identifiers UDIDs are used by OpenVMS hosts to access the volume Provides information about which pool the copy is in what type of copy it is generic or thin provisioned the status of the copy and IBM Easy Tier status Shows the allocated used and the virtual real capacity from both each storage tier and the warning threshold and the grain size for Thin Provisioned volumes It is possible to modify some of these settings Click Edit to change the available settings as shown in Figure 8 55 voume Datas 2 Vol 01 Overview Hostttaps Member Disk Volume a sawe v ome smse 0 Operi GEI Y Copy 0
34. Rooney ane EIE EEE Shae th gt J amom nm Lomas inae Lineas zac nar saeua pa0s031 11305211003217 Figure 11 79 Single snap memory dump on USB stick 11 7 Powering on and powering off the IBM Storwize V3700 In the following sections we describe the process to power on and power off the IBM Storwize V3700 system by using the GUI and the CLI 11 7 1 Powering off the system In this section we show how to power off shutdown the IBM Storwize V3700 system by using the GUI and CLI Attention You should never power off an IBM Storwize V3700 by powering off the PSUs removing both PSUs or removing both power cables from a running system Powering down by using the GUI You can power off a node canister or the entire cluster When you shut down only one node canister all of the running tasks remain active because the remaining node takes over Note If a canister or the enclosure is powered down a local visit is required to either reseat the canister or power cycle the enclosure Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 629 Complete the following steps to perform a power off 1 Power off a canister a Browse to Monitoring System b Rotate the enclosure to the rear view c Right click the required canister d Select Power Off as shown in Figure 11 80 hy Show Dopendoat ome Sense oa Figure 11 80 Powering off a canister
35. Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser Easy Tier measured mode does not carry out any data placement It only collects statistics for measurement For more information about downloading and analyzing the I O statistics see 9 5 2 Downloading Easy Tier I O measurements on page 438 Chapter 9 IBM Easy 443 7 These changes are also reflected in the GUI as shown in Figure 9 29 Click Pools gt Volumes by Pool select Near ine Poo1 and find the volume RedbookVolume 8 Then click Actions Properties to view the details of the Easy Tier for each of the volume copies rem erc Rea x GER E ES T pu ems gus iesus me mem onn omar lt Figure 9 29 Volume properties for Easy Tier 9 6 2 Enabling or disabling Easy Tier on single volumes If you enable Easy Tier on a Storage Pool all volume copies inside the Easy Tier pools also have Easy Tier enabled by default This setting applies to multitiered and single tiered Storage Pools It is also possible to turn Easy Tier on and off for single volume copies To disable Easy Tier complete the following steps 1 Before disabling Easy Tier on a volume run sveinfo Ismdisgrp Storage Pool name gt command to show all configured Storage Pools as shown in Example 9 7 In this example EasyTier Poo is the Storage Pool used as a reference Example 9 7 Listing the Storage Pool Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser svcinfo lsmdis
36. The two nodes act as a single processing unit and form an I O Group that is attached to the SAN fabric an iSCSI infrastructure or directly attached to hosts with FC or SAS The pair of nodes is responsible for serving I O to a volume The two nodes provide a highly available fault tolerant controller so that if one node fails the surviving node automatically takes over Nodes are deployed in a pair that is called an 1 O Group One node is designated as the configuration node but each node in the control enclosures holds a copy of the control enclosure state information The IBM Storwize V3700 only supports one I O group in a clustered system The terms node canister and node are used interchangeably throughout this book Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 9 1 4 2 Expansion enclosure The optional IBM Storwize V3700 expansion enclosure contains two expansion canisters disk drives and two power supplies Figure 1 7 shows an overview of the expansion enclosure Figure 1 7 Expansion enclosure of the IBM Storwize V3700 The expansion enclosure power supplies are the same as the control enclosure There is a single power lead connector on each power supply unit Figure 1 8 shows the expansion canister ports uu Figure 1 8 Expansion canister ports Each expansion canister that is shown in Figure 1 8 provides two SAS interfaces that are used to connect to the control enclosure
37. volumes to hosts on page 215 for instructions about mapping volumes manually after host creation Chapter 5 Volume configuration 207 5 1 3 Creating mirrored volumes create mirrored volumes complete the following steps 1 Select Mirror as the preset as shown in Figure 5 12 2 From the list shown in Figure 5 12 for each mirrored copy select a pool to provision storage from To take full advantage of the redundancy offered the mirroring feature each copy should ideally be provisioned from separate pools 3 The view shown in Figure 5 12 opens From here you can choose how many mirrored pairs to create the capacity of each volume and what to name the volumes Creato Volumes x Selesta Preset Gori This Provision Mirror Thin Miror Primary Foot masoro Selecta Secondary Poot Sears Poot mia Volume cent capacty navel Summary 0 volumes bytes tll 5 44 TB pool 3 51 TB pool nasa LII Figure 5 12 Creating mirrored volumes using the Create Volumes wizard Note The capacity specified is per so the total capacity required is the number of mirrored pairs multiplied by the capacity then multiplied by two 4 Click Advanced to view more options 208 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 The Characteristics and Capacity Management tabs are the as for generic volumes How
38. 1 c RE m rm ff re Pm Eh comptee Youhere succes sepe host group V370 t he eal ve Viel Ot ou you eet rete mother dive nenne Figure 6 41 Creating further host volume mappings IBM 053200 282 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 Click Yes if you have more volumes to map to the new Storwize V3700 host definition repeat the steps from Figure 6 38 on page 280 Click No if there are no more volumes to be mapped to exit the wizard The following tasks have been completed All of the existing external volumes have now been mapped to your new Storwize V3700 host group definition Cabling or zoning has been changed to ensure that the external storage system can connect to the Storwize V3700 and that hosts can connect to the Storwize V3700 Volumes have been removed from the host configuration MPIO drivers have been updated to reflect the impending connection to the Storwize 3700 9 We are now in a position to move to the next stage of the Storwize V3700 Data Migration wizard Click Next to continue as shown in Figure 6 36 on page 278 10 The Storwize V3700 runs the Discover Devices task After the task is complete click Close to continue Figure 6 42 shows the results of the Discover Devices task You can see in the background that it has successfully detected MDisks 9 10 and 11 These are the three volumes that were presented from the Sys
39. 4 IBM Storwize V3700 term Event Definition An occurrence that is significant to a task or system Events can include completion or failure of an operation a user action or the change in the state of a process Expansion canister hardware unit that includes the SAS interface hardware that enables the node hardware to use the drives of the expansion enclosure Expansion enclosure A hardware unit that includes expansion canisters drives and power supply units Fibre Channel port FC ports are connections for the hosts to get access to the IBM Storwize V3700 Host mapping The process of controlling which hosts can access specific volumes in a IBM Storwize V3700 iscsi Internet Protocol IP based storage networking standard for linking data storage facilities Internal storage Array MDisks and drives that are held in enclosures and nodes that are part of the IBM Storwize V3700 Managed disk component of a Storage Pool that is managed by a clustered system An MDisk is part of a RAID array of internal storage An MDisk is not visible to a host system on the storage area network SAN Node ca hardware unit that includes the node hardware fabric and service interfaces SAS expansion ports and battery Physical layer PHY A single SAS lane There are four PHYs in each SAS cable Power supply unit PSU Each enclosure has two PSUs Quo
40. Enter the authorization codes abcde abcdo abcdo abcde abcde IE Figure 9 6 Activating license automatically 4 Choose Activate License Manually to activate Easy Tier function manually and click in the folder icon to import the activation license file as shown in Figure 9 7 Activation x Enter the license keys spo or pastonconso noys ori Figure 9 7 Activating license manually 422 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 Change to the directory where the activation license file is saved and click Open as shown in Figure 9 8 File Upload ial gt ten TA eee EEE Droite nl me Y roues tane S Liban diia D C1 nc Fe sone TED feces Fn emn Figure 9 8 Importing the Easy Tier license file 6 Click Close when the import of the activation license file completes 7 As shown in Figure 9 9 the Easy Tier function is licensed on your IBM Storwize V3700 foe eee 4 Figure 9 9 Easy Tier function licensed 9 3 2 Tiered Storage Pools With IBM Storwize V3700 you must differentiate between the following types of Storage Pools Single tiered Storage Pools gt Mulitiered Storage Pools Figure 9 10 on page 424 shows that single tiered Storage Pools include one type of disk tier attribute Each disk should have the same size and performance characteristics Multitiered Storag
41. Figure 11 1 Rear view of Enclosure Midplane Assembly For more information about replacing the control or expansion enclosure midplane see the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center at this website http www 01 ibm con support know edgecenter STLMSA wel come 11 2 2 Node canisters Ports and light emitting diode LED There are two node canister slots along the top of the unit The left slot is canister 1 and the right slot is canister 2 Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 577 578 Figure 11 2 shows the back a fully equipped node enclosure Figure 11 2 Node canister USB ports There are two USB connectors side by side and they are numbered as 1 on the left and as 2 on the right There are no indicators associated with the USB ports Figure 11 3 shows the USB ports Figure 11 3 Node Canister USB ports Ethernet ports There are two 10 100 1000 megabits per second Mbps Ethernet ports side by side on the canister and they are numbered 1 on the left and 2 on the right Port 1 is required and port 2 is optional The ports are shown in Figure 11 4 Figure 11 4 Node canister Ethernet ports Each port has two LEDs and their status is shown in Table 11 1 Table 11 1 Ethernet LEDs status LED Color Meaning Link state Green On There is an Ethernet link Activity Yellow Flashing There is activity on the link Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700
42. Follow this part of the wizard to select or configure new hosts as required 1 Figure 6 45 shows the Configure Hosts pane In this example scenario there is no host definition for the Windows 2012 host so define one at this stage Before you begin install drivers on host systems and ensure hosts are zoned and connected to this system Create any new hosts as needed below Figure 6 45 Configure hosts pane If hosts are already defined they show up listed in the pane as shown in Figure 6 45 286 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 In this case create the host by selecting the Add Host option This begins the process of defining a host with the choice of connectivity shown in Figure 6 46 Figure 6 46 Add host connection type Chapter 6 Storage migration 287 3 Select your connection type and the wizard moves to the next pane Here you can name the host assign ports in this case SAS WWPNs from the drop down selection and in the advanced settings assign a host type as shown in Figure 6 47 In this example there are two ports listed that the Storwize V3700 can see as host connections If there are no connections displayed check your cabling and zoning to ensure that your host is properly connected to the Storwize V3700 or any SAN fabric and click Rescan 4 Select each of the port WWPNs and click Add port to List to add them to the host definition rire sit Vict
43. Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Easily manage and deploy systems with embedded GUI Experience rapid and flexible provisioning Protect data with remote mirroring Jon Tate Adam Lyon Jones Lee Sirett Chris Tapsell Paulo Tomiyoshi Takeda ibm com redbooks Re d b 0 0 ks International Technical Support Organization Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 March 2015 5024 8107 02 Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the information Notices page ix Third Edition March 2015 This edition applies to IBM Storwize V3700 running software version 7 4 Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2014 2015 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents Notices ix Trademarks x IBM Redbooks promotions x Preface xii Authors xiv Now you can become a published author too xi Comments welcome xvi Stay connected to IBM Redbooks xvi Summary of changes xvii February 2015 Third Edition Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 1 1 IBM Storwize V3700 overview 1 2 IBM Storwize V3700 terminology 1 3 IBM Storwize V3700 models 1 4 IBM Storwize V3700 hardware 1 4 1 Control enclosure 1 4 2 Expansion enclosure 1 4 3 Host interface cards 1 4 4 Disk drive typ
44. Stipes onime asy Sis Measures PookEssyTier Pool Thin Frovisioned Spe Stats Onine Easy Te Sis Acie Capacity rese Ter zoe expan Waring S0 Thin Frovisianed Gram Si Figure 8 55 Modify Volume Details pane In the Modify Volume Details window the following properties can be changed Cache Mode UDID 4 Make any required changes and click Save Volume Name Mirror Sync Rate Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 399 8 5 2 Host Maps tab The second tab of the Volume Details pane is Host Maps as shown in Figure 8 56 All hosts that are mapped to the selected volume are listed in this view pours Oversee Host Maps Member x Figure 8 56 Volume Details Host Maps To a host from the volume complete the following steps 1 Highlight the volume and click from Host 2 Confirm the number of mappings to remove and click Unma Unmap Host pane Figure 8 57 shows the nmap Host You selected to 4 volume from 4 host Verity the following Information and cick Unman Tho folowing volumes wit bo unmapped The following hosts wil be removed from the volume mapping Verily the number of hosts that this action affects Figure 8 57 Host pane 3 When the changes are applied to the system the selected host no l
45. The SA is a web based GUI that is used to service individual node canisters primarily when a node has a fault and is in a service state A node cannot be active as part of a clustered system while it is in a service state The SA is available even when the management GUI is not accessible The following information and tasks are included Status information about the connections and the node canister Basic configuration information such as configuring IP addresses Service tasks such as restarting the Common Information Model CIM object manager CIMOM and updating the worldwide node name WWNN Details about node error codes and hints about what to do to fix the node error Important The SA can only be accessed using the superuser account The SA GUI is available using a service assistant IP address on each node The SA GUI is accessed through the cluster IP addresses by appending service to the cluster management Uniform Resource Locator URL If the system is down the only other method of communicating with the node canisters is through the SA IP address directly Each node can have a single SA IP address on Ethernet port 1 It is advised that these IP addresses are configured on all IBM Storwize V3700 node canisters The default IP address of canister 1 is 192 168 70 121 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 The default IP address of canister 2 is 192 168 70 122 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 open th
46. ay Publi key pasting inta OpenSSH authorized keys fie cesa AAAA SNACI yeZEAASABJOAAAEADS HDI ev FSNcGASTuzre opis Cd MOCACCG W PWeDiUeG acbalewiGTF0PCPF VEMM paz Valse NNKT PEALN me Em INGWE NE eO Lara ZABx Pepoh 211219 Actors Generate apublc pivate ke pair Load ar existing private key Save he generated key Save putic key Kay 1 ahd 958 Bb IETS a7 7a ach Koycomert pour Type ot key o neat Osshansa Ries ma 27 Savepiete Figure A 4 Save private key 7 You receive a warning message as shown in Figure A 5 Click Yes to save the private key without a passphrase A you sure you want to seve this hey thot a passphrase to protect ES Figure 5 Confirm the security warning 8 When prompted enter a name for example icat select a secure place as the location and click Save Key generator The PuTTY key generator saves the private key with a PPK extension 9 Close the PuTTY key generator For more information about generating the SSH in the Help drop down menu in the PuTTY GUI Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 keys see the PuTTY user manual found Uploading the SSH public key to the IBM Storwize V3700 After you create your SSH key pair you must upload your SSH public key onto the IBM Storwize V3700 system Complete the fol
47. in this case by Node Canister 1 2 4 1 Management IP address considerations 34 Because Ethernet port 1 from each node canister must be connected to the LAN a single management IP address for the clustered system is configured as part of the initial setup of the IBM Storwize V3700 system The management IP address is associated with one of the node canisters in the clustered system and that node then becomes the configuration node Should this node go offline planned or unplanned the management IP address fails over to the other node s Ethernet port 1 For more clustered system management redundancy you should connect Ethernet port 2 on each of the node canisters to the LAN which enables a backup management IP address to be configured for access if necessary Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 2 6 shows a logical view of the Ethernet ports that are available for configuration of the one or two management IP addresses These IP addresses are for the clustered system and therefore are associated with only one node which is then considered the configuration node H li n EEN TETS 8 H amp SEB aro ned Ports noon ISn Figure 2 6 Ethernet ports available for configuration 2 4 2 Service IP address considerations Ethernet port 1 on each node canister is used for system management and for service access when required In normal operation the service IP a
48. reuse Esc Pte Tete sis Figure 11 91 Create Probe option Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 637 2 Add the IBM Storwize V3700 probe for collecting information shown in Figure 11 92 Gronks Probe vun PROBE Who FROME eno tun tae Cusen Selections a 12 Storage Subsystems Computers atleta nca dusters 1 TapeLibrary Tape Library 1 Strage Subrytem Groupe Storage Subsystems Seaton Figure 11 92 Adding IBM Storwize V3700 in probe 3 After you create a probe you can click Create Subsystem Performance Monitor shown in Figure 11 93 deae m poten eei Storage Subsystems omina and Schn Alen moins ring oem ail ee iat a her data every fiw mnes 1 TI forem ignoto Dats deor bera e you save th mere fe y only hn Figure 11 93 Create subsystem performance monitor 638 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 eye 4 To check the MDisk performance click Disk Manager Reporting Storage Subsystem Performance gt By Managed Disk You see many options to include in the wizard to check MDisk performance as shown in Figure 11 94 uam 4 B aixi q
49. used capacity 5 006B real capacity 5 0068 free capacity 0 00MB overallocation 100 autoexpand warning grainsize se copy no easy tier off easy tier status measured tier ssd tier capacity 0 00MB tier enterprise tier capacity 5 0068 tier nearline tier capacity 0 00MB compressed copy no parent mdisk grp id 3 parent mdisk grp name EasyTier Pool Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser Chapter 9 IBM Easy 445 4 To enable Easy Tier on a volume run the svctask chvdisk easytier volume name command as shown in Example 9 11 and Easy Tier changes back to on as shown in Example 9 12 Notice copy 0 status also changed back to active Example 9 11 Easy Tier enabled IBM_Storwize ITSO_V3700 superuser gt svctask chvdisk easytier on Volume001 Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser 9 12 Easy Tier on single volume enabled 1BM_Storwize ITSO_V3700 superuser gt svcinfo Isvdisk Volume001 190 name Volume001 status online mdisk name EasyTier Pool capacity 5 0068 parent mdisk grp id 3 parent mdisk grp name EasyTier Pool copy id 0 status online mdisk name Pool used capacity 5 0068 real capacity 5 0068 free capacity 0 00MB overallocation 100 easy tier on easy tier status active tier ssd tier capacity 1 0068 tier enterprise tier capacity 4 0068 tier nearline tier capacity 0 00MB compressed copy no parent mdisk grp id 1
50. 2 rect tme mse Fepor ng NE Reporting ode are nee Root Sequence imber vent Test Array ng tre cscraoeo an aray Sonap jie 1018 01 000912240 13092425 00 00 a545 s0 54 Sense yes 161031 00 00 00 00 00 00 0069000000 00 00 c0 00 00 o o0 00 00 00 00000000000 0000000000 Sense bytes Btn 63 00 00 0D 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 00000000 Sone byte 6407 o0 o0 o0 00 0o o0 o0 o0 00 no 90 o0 0000 00 9 Sense yee 0000000002000002000200 002000200 Sense bytex mn no on 00 oo 0 noon 0000020000 Figure 3 50 Properties And Sense Data for Event Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 101 102 Show entries within To show events that occurred within a certain time of a particular event complete the following steps 1 Select the required event entry 2 Select Show entries within from the Actions menu and set the period value Figure 3 51 shows the selection of the Show entries within option with a period value of 10 minutes This shows all events within 10 minutes of the selected event Refresh Array mdisk hes started exchanging an arr Array m isk rebuild finish iar Ses Pm Message amp APA 6 36 50 pU Message Maintenance modo ended Figure 3 51 Showing Events within a set time Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Select Performance in the Monitoring menu to open the Performance pane This pane shows graphs that repre
51. 2 Click the SAS Ports menu to see list of all available SAS ports If the SAS WWPNs are not available try the Rescan option or check the physical connections Important The IBM Storwize V3700 enables you to ad an offline SAS port To do this enter the SAS WWPN in the SAS Port field and then click Add Port to List 3 Select the required SAS WWPN and click Add Port to List as shown in Figure 8 32 Repeat this step to add more ports to a host xU Hostname Van sas Figure 8 32 Adding an online SAS port 4 Click Add Ports to Host to apply the changes 380 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 2 4 Adding an iSCSI host port To add an iSCSI port complete the following steps 1 After clicking Add as shown in Figure 8 29 on page 378 select iSCSI Port to open the Add iSCSI Ports pane shown in Figure 8 33 x Host ame Yrndows 2012 031 AS Ports fo Host Figure 8 33 Adding iSCSI Host ports 2 Enter the initiator name of your host and click Add Port to List as shown in Figure 8 33 Click Add Ports to Host to apply the changes The iSCSI port status remains unknown until it is added to the host and a host rescan process is completed 4 Click Close to return to the Ports Host pane Important An error message with code CMMVC6581E is shown if one of the following conditions occurs The IQNs exceed the maximum number that is allowed There is a dupl
52. 3 Verify compatibility 4 Follow all IBM recommendations and prerequisites 5 Finally to update the software of the IBM Storwize V3700 click Update as shown in Figure 3 111 For more information see 11 4 Updating software on page 595 Update System Current software levet Version 7 4 00 build 103 4 1408231000 ASolware update is available The latest lave 40 1 Downlosc and insta ine update as soon as possibia Ator me download completes go to Setinas 2 Sustem 2 Update System and cick Update to apply he Figure 3 111 Update System pane Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Support pane As shown in Figure 3 112 this pane provides access to the IBM support package which is used by IBM to assist with problem determination 1 Select Support in the Settings menu to open the Support pane 2 Click Download Support Package to access the wizard cuon Logane Lavet Figure 3 112 Support pane Download Support Package wizard The Download Support Package wizard provides a selection of various package types IBM Support provides direction on package type selection as required To download the package complete the following steps 1 Select the type and click Download 2 The output file be saved to the user s workstation Figure 3 113 shows the Download Support Package wizard Download support Package x Select he ype of support package to download This package can be se
53. 5 2 Mapping volumes to hosts This section describes how to create mappings between volumes and hosts on IBM Storwize V3700 When this task is complete the mapped storage is available for use by host systems The first part of this section describes how to map volumes to hosts if you clicked Create and Map to Host in 5 1 Creating volumes in IBM Storwize V3700 on page 200 The second part of this section describes the manual host mapping process that is used to create customized mappings 5 2 1 Mapping newly created volumes using Create and Map to Host In this section we assume that you are following one of the procedures in 5 1 Creating volumes in IBM Storwize V3700 on page 200 and clicked Create and Map to Host followed by Continue when the Create Volumes task completed as shown in Figure 5 19 Create Volumes Task completed 100 view more aetas Figure 5 19 Continuing to map volumes after the Create Volumes task has completed map the volume complete the following steps 1 After clicking Continue the window shown in Figure 5 20 opens Modify Host Mappings x Figure 5 20 Selecting the O Group and host to assign the mappings to Chapter 5 Volume configuration 213 214 2 Select the host that you want to assign the mappings to The window expands to the view shown in Figure 5 21 BEEN I E T Figure 5 21 The Modify Host Mappings wizard showing Volume
54. 8373814 ED pr Figure 3 102 Management IP Addresses configuration pane po o ed Service IP addresses Service IP addresses are used to access the Service Assistant Tool Each node canister should have its own Service IP address The address can be an IPv4 address IPv6 address or both For more information see 2 9 3 Service Assistant tool on page 67 The Service IP addresses are configured on Ethernet port 1 of each node canister 1 Click Service IP Addresses 2 Select the Control Enclosure and Node Canister to configure 134 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 3 103 shows the Service IP addresses configuration pane Service IP Addresses fares can te uncontgurez by m Pv elas or by sen In adores to 0010 arie Pie adress to 0 0 sis s SgemeRSm pm Eug NEL 5 Cummmmmiidimemeu Figure 3 103 Service IP Addresses configuration pane Ethernet Ports The Ethernet ports can be used for iSCSI connections host attachment and remote copy 1 Click Ethernet Ports to view the available ports 2 Figure 3 104 shows the Ethernet Ports pane and associated Actions menu Click Actions Modify IP Settings to modify the port settings Network CCS Management IP The Eharelporis can be uses for iSCSI connections host tachment and remole copy Figure 3 104 Ethernet Ports pane Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 135 iSCSI
55. Determining the amount of I O on single extents is too complex for monitoring I O statistics moving them manually to an appropriate storage tier and reacting to workload changes Easy Tier is a performance optimization function that overcomes this issue because it automatically migrates or moves extents that belong to a volume between different storage tiers as shown in Figure 9 2 Because this migration works at the extent level it is often referred to as sub logical unit number LUN migration IBM Storwize V3700 A a meris tk You can enable Easy Tier for storage on a volume basis It monitors the I O activity and latency of the extents on all Easy Tier enabled volumes over a 24 hour period Based on the performance log it creates an extent migration plan and dynamically moves high activity or hot extents to a higher disk tier within the same Storage Pool It also moves extents whose activity dropped off or cooled from higher disk tier MDisks back to a lower tier MDisk Figure 9 2 Easy Tier Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 419 enable this migration between managed disks MDisks with different tier levels the target Storage Pool must consist of MDisks with different characteristics These pools are named multitiered Storage Pools IBM Storwize V3700 Easy Tier is optimized to boost the performance of Storage Pools that contain flash Enterprise and Nearline drives identity the pote
56. ELEMENT aml object gt E lt ATTLIST xnl label CDATA gt lt ATTLIST xnl timestamp CDATA gt 7 lt ATTLIST mnl version CDATA gt a lt IELEMENT property gt lt ATTLIST object type CDATA FREQUTRED gt 20 lt ELEMENT property ECDRTA gt m VIRTTLISI property neme CORTA REQUIRED gt a lt ATTLIST property value gt E s Figure 11 24 Timestamp in backup XML file 594 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 11 4 Upda g software The system update process involves updating the entire IBM Storwize V3700 environment The node canister software and disk firmware are separate updates and these tasks are described separately 11 4 1 Node canister software Allow sufficient time to plan your tasks review your preparatory update tasks and complete the update of the IBM Storwize V3700 environment The update procedures can be divided into the following general update tasks shown in Table 11 11 Table 11 11 Software update tasks Sequence Upgrade tasks 1 Decide whether you want to update automatically or manually During an automatic update procedure the clustered system updates each of the nodes systematically The automatic method is the preferred procedure for updating software on nodes However you can update each node manually 2 Ensure that Common Information Model CIM object manager CIMOM clients are working correctly
57. For more information about SAN Boot see the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center http www 01 ibm com support know edgecenter search SAN 20Boot scope STHGUJ For more information about SAN Boot support for different operating systems with IBM Subsystem Device Driver SDD see the IBM System Storage Multipath Subsystem Device Driver User s Guide GC52 1309 which is available on the following website http www ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S7000303 666 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Related publications The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed description of the topics covered in this book IBM Redbooks The following IBM Redbooks publications or later versions as they become available provide more information about the topics in this book Some publications that are referenced in the following list might be available in softcopy only gt Implementing the IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller V7 2 8624 7933 Implementing the Storwize V7000 V7 2 SG24 7938 System Storage SAN Volume Controller and Storwize V7000 Best Practices and Performance Guidelines SG24 7521 Implementing an IBM b type SAN with 8 Gbps Directors and Switches SG24 6116 SAN Volume Controller and Storwize Family Native IP Replication REDP 5103 You can search for view download or order these documents and other Redbooks Redpapers Web Docs draft
58. Graphical user interface overview 109 2 Using this wizard is it possible to configure the RAID properties and pool allocation of the internal storage Figure 3 64 shows the Configure Internal Storage wizard For full details about using the Configure Internal Storage wizard see Chapter 7 Storage Pools on page 307 Conngure Internat storage E Use this wizard to alocate RAID arrays to pools Atter this configuration wizard completes you can create volumes Lg these pocis Storage Found 11 ves 278606 terse 10K pm arves 27680 B Eneas 15 10 anvas 46525 Nears 7200 p 4 eves 09196 B Enerorse 10 rom Use the recommended configuration Select this option to configure avaliable drives based on recommended values Tor mo RAID lovat and de clase The rocommongod uses al Mo drives to build arrays that are protected with the appropriate amount of spare drives Select a diferent configuration Figure 3 64 Configure Intemal Storage wizard Figure 3 65 shows allocating the internal storage to a pool Torngure Storage AN Preset Expand an existing pool Create one or more new pools ux a Figure 3 65 Configure Internal Storage wizard Pool allocation 110 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 MDisks by Pool pane Select MDisks by Pool in the Pools menu to open the MDisk
59. If the volume copy is in image or sequential mode or is being migrated the Easy Tier status of the volume copy is measured rather than active d When the volume copy status is active the Easy Tier function operates in automatic data placement mode for that volume When the volume Easy Tier status is Balanced the Easy Tier is actively managing the extents by rebalancing them among the MDisks within the tier 430 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 9 5 Easy Tier configuration using the GUI This section describes how to activate Easy Tier to a Storage Pool using the IBM Storwize Va700 9 5 1 Creating multitiered pools Enabling Easy Tier This section describes how to create multitiered Storage Pools using the GUI When Storage Pool changes from single tiered to multitiered Easy Tier is enabled by default for the pool and on all volume copies inside this pool In this example you create a pool containing Enterprise and Nearline MDisks To create a multitiered pool complete the following steps 1 Click Pools Internal Storage Figure 9 15 shows all of the internal drive classes installed in the IBM Storwize V3700 a qm SSS g u gae D P x Figure 9 15 Creating Easy Tier Pool Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 431 2 Select the class of drive that you want to include in the multitiered and click Configure Storage In this scenario we provision one Redundant Array of Indepen
60. If you did not choose Create and Map to Host in Step 5 see 5 2 2 Manually mapping volumes to hosts on page 215 for instructions on mapping volumes manually after host creation 210 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 1 4 Creating tl rored volumes To create thin mirrored volumes complete the following steps 1 Select Thin Mirror as the preset as shown in Figure 5 16 2 From the list shown in Figure 5 16 for each mirrored copy select a pool to provision storage from To take full advantage of the redundancy offered by the mirroring feature each copy should ideally be provisioned from separate pools 3 The view shown in Figure 5 16 opens From here you can choose how many mirrored pairs to create the capacity of each volume and what to name the volumes Create Volumes x Selesta Preset Gori This Provision Mire Thin Mirror Select a Pool Primary Poot masoro Selecta Secondary Foot Secon Poot Volume Detals copacty Summary Otin mirores voles t bytes irs virtual capaciy 0 bytes cel ree capscty 5 44 ree pool 3 61 TB pool LIE Figure 5 16 Creating thin mirrored volumes using the Create Volumes wizard Note The capacity specified is per copy so the total virtual capacity is the number of mirrored pairs multiplied by the capacity shen multiplied by two 4 Click Advanced to
61. Partially Configured Indicates that only one cluster partner is defined from a local or remote cluster to the displayed cluster and is started For the displayed cluster to be configured fully and to complete the partnership you must define the cluster partnership from the cluster that is displayed to the corresponding local or remote cluster gt Fully Configured Indicates that the partnership is defined on the local and remote clusters and is started Chapter 10 Copy services 517 Remote Not Present Indicates that the remote cluster is not present for the partnership gt Partially Configured Local Stopped Indicates that the local cluster is only defined to the remote cluster and the local cluster is stopped gt Fully Configured Local Stopped Indicates that a partnership is defined on the local and remote clusters and the remote cluster is present but the local cluster is stopped Fully Configured Remote Stopped Indicates that a partnership is defined on the local and remote clusters and the remote cluster is present but the remote cluster is stopped gt Fully Configured Local Excluded Indicates that a partnership is defined between a local and remote cluster However the local cluster was excluded This state can occur when the fabric link between the two clusters was compromised by too many fabric errors or by slow response times of the cluster partnership Fully Configured Remote Excluded
62. SAS ports There are four 6 gigabits per second Gbps serial attached Small Computer System Interface SAS ports side by side on the canister They are numbered 1 on the left to 4 on the right IBM Storwize V3700 uses ports 1 2 and 3 for host connectivity and uses port 4 to connect optional expansion enclosures The ports are shown in Figure 11 5 Figure 17 5 Node canister SAS ports The SAS LED status meanings are described in Table 11 2 Table 11 2 SAS LED Status State Meaning Green Indicates that at least one of the SAS lanes on this connector is operational If the light is off when it is connected there is a problem with the connection Amber If the light is on one of the following errors occurred or more but not all of the four lanes are up for this connector if none of the lanes are up the activity light is off or more of the up lanes are running at a different speed than the others or more of the up lanes are attached to a different address than the others IBM Storwize V3700 uses SFF 8644 mini SAS HD connector cable to connect enclosures as shown in Figure 11 6 Figure 11 6 Min SAS HD SFF 8644 connector Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 579 Battery status Each node canister houses a battery the status of which is displayed on three LEDs on the back of the unit as shown in Figure 11 7 Figure 11 7 Node ca
63. amp o Z E E um ma pem Figure 6 5 Storage Subsystem Profile System Storage DS Storage Manager 254 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 Use the information in the tabs to complete the information shown in Table 6 1 Table 6 1_ Example table for capturing external LU information LU name Controller Array SCSI Hostname Capacity Host Volume ID Win2012vol 01 SlotA 053200 1 mcrhost 27 15 GB Redbookvol2 Win2012vol 02 SlotA 053200 2 mcrhost 127 10GB Redbookvol Win2012vol 03 SlotA 053200 o mer host 127 Redbookvolt SCSI ID Record the SCSI ID of the LUs to which the host is originally mapped Some operating systems do not support changing the SCSI ID during the migration 6 Next record the host information The easiest way of determining the WWPN of host adapters is to look on the host profile for the existing storage In this case from the summary pane of the IBM System Storage DS Storage Manager select the Configured Hosts option to show the host SAS ports as shown in Figure 6 6 a esr BINE RR 19 18 ER mo ds3200 01 poen Euer p perennes p pee e Figure 6 6 Obtaining host WWPN from the external storage Remember Don t forget to record the WWPN of the existing host It can sometimes
64. and other materials at the following website http www ibm com redbooks IBM Storwize V3700 publications Storwize V3700 publications are available on the following website https ibm biz BdxyDL IBM Storwize V3700 support Storwize V3700 support is available on the following website https ibm biz BdxyD9 Help from IBM IBM Support and downloads ibm com support IBM Global Services ibn con services Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 667 668 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 1 07 spine 0 875 1498 460 lt gt 788 pages Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Easily manage and deploy systems with embedded GUI Experience rapid and flexible provisioning Protect data with remote mirroring Organizations of all sizes are faced with the challenge of managing massive volumes of increasingly valuable data However storing this data can be costly and extracting value from the data is becoming more and more difficult IT organizations have limited resources but must stay responsive to dynamic environments and act quickly to consolidate simplify and optimize their IT infrastructures The IBM Storwize V3700 system provides a smarter solution that is affordable easy to use and self optimizing which enables organizations to overcome these storage challenges Storwize V3700 delivers efficient entry level configurations that are specifically
65. copy Expand eansareoseenatrsad amp create volum pul wo enosoreomennrene RBVolume 2 Mo Figure 8 41 Action menu for a volume 386 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Depending on the volume selected the following Volume options are available Create Volumes Map to Host All Hosts View Mapped Host Duplicate Volume Rename Shrink Expand Migrate to Another Pool Delete Volume Copy Actions Create Volumes Add Mirrored Copy Properties For thin provisioned volumes the following Volume Copy Actions are available Create Volumes Add Mirror Thin Provisioned Shrink Expand Edit Properties These options are described in the next sections 8 4 2 Mapping a volume to a host map a volume to a host complete the following steps 1 Select Map to Host from the Action menu 2 Select the Host to which you want to map the volume Figure 8 42 shows the Modify Host Mappings pane Modify Host Mappings x Host chooseanosi Choose a host vrindows_2008_FC Viindows 2012 rC Viindows 2012 isCst Figure 8 42 Modify Host Mappings pane Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 387 3 After a host is selected the Modify Host Mappings pane opens In the upper left the selected host is displayed The volume that is to be mapped is highlighted in
66. gt Monitoring Pools Volumes Hosts Copy Services Access Settings The System view section shows a 3D representation of the IBM Storwize V3700 Hovering over any of the components shows a component overview where right clicking a component shows an Action menu appropriate to that component Clicking the arrow at the lower right of the graphic rotates it to show the rear of the system This arrow can be blue yellow or red Blue indicates no issues yellow indicates a warning and red indicates an issue of some kind with a component 74 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The Status Indicators section in Figure 3 4 on page 74 shows the following horizontal status bars gt Allocated Virtual Status that is related to the storage capacity of the system Running Tasks Status of tasks that are running and the recently completed tasks gt Health Status Status relating to system health which is indicated by using the following color codes Green Healthy Yellow Degraded Red Unhealthy access more information and other menus complete the following steps 1 Hover over or click the horizontal bars to access the menus which are described in 3 3 Status Indicators menus on page 89 2 There are also two links at the top of the System pane The Actions link at the upper left opens an Action menu as shown in Figure 3 5 Rename System OTT AI doni LEDs
67. kilobytes KB as migration candidates This is an efficient process and adds negligible processing effect to the IBM Storwize V3700 node canisters 9 4 2 Data Placement Advisor The Data Placement Advisor DPA uses workload statistics to make a cost benefit decision about which extents should be candidates for migration to a higher performance tier This process also identifies extents that must be migrated back to a lower tier 9 4 3 Data Migration Planner Using the previously identified extents the Data Migration Planner DMP process builds the extent migration plan for the Storage Pool 9 4 4 Data Migrator 426 The Data Migrator DM process involves scheduling and the actual movement or migration of the volume s extents up to or down from the high disk tier The extent migration rate is capped to a maximum of up to 15 MBps This rate equates to around two terabytes TB per day being migrated between disk tiers as shown in Figure 9 13 on page 427 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Multi Tier Storage Pool Enterprise MDisk Figure 9 13 Easy Tier Data Migrator 9 4 5 Easy Tier operating modes IBM Storwize V3700 offers the following operating modes for Easy Tier Easy Tier Off Easy Tier can be turned off No statistics are recorded and no extents are moved Easy Tier On When the Easy Tier function is turned on Easy Tier measures the I O activity for all extents When you have a multi
68. naman amies E MggedigpnetesCossGem Copying Flash Time Mow 5 2014 25028 P gig Copying Time tiov 5 FlashCopyol Genes Ce Figure 10 60 Consistency group started 506 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Stopping a consistency group The consistency group can be stopped by completing the following steps 1 Select Stop from the Actions menu or right click as shown in Figure 10 61 rT A XXI Mm djpeigmemescesene Copying Flash Tne 5 2014 25828 I WIE S p oum eR Create riashCopy mapping Sep o Rename Sess Ca Figure 10 61 Stop a consistency group Chapter 10 Copy services 507 2 Afterthe stop process completes the FlashCopy mappings in the consistency group are in the Stopped state and a red X icon displays on the function icon of this consistency group to indicate an alert as shown in Figure 10 62 Source Volume Target Volume PE Asma cum Flash Time Nov 5 2014 2 58 28 PM ushCopiWeH FashGopyvoit da Figure 10 62 Consistency group stop completes Any previously copied relationships that were added to a consistency group that was later stopped before all members of the consistency group completed synchronization remain in
69. s Boston asin esos 2 0078 ma J mem corel Figure 5 70 Completing the Add Storage wizard The Create VMFS datastore task starts and displays under Recent Tasks as shown in Figure 5 71 Wait for this to complete ae Tee LIE M SE E dy 8 scisco 8 Gnome me RUSS ananz maT Ear Figure 5 71 The Create VMFS data store task under Recent Tasks 10 When the task is complete the new data store displays under Configuration Storage as shown in Figure 5 72 atin Sue senes Se IUE es tans mex wes tian M or SD S ana wes Figure 5 72 The new data store listed in the storage view Chapter 5 Volume configuration 245 Configuring multipath settings for mapped volumes To configure multipath settings for a mapped volume managed by VMware as a data store complete the following steps 1 Go to Configuration Stor 2 Right click the data store and click Properties The window shown in Figure 5 73 opens 0 fedbookDatestore Properties x m Talca osan moam Yommmriese 20018 ee imu eae ie T poe Sic E a Primary Pestilions Cececi e Figure 5 73 Data store properties 3 Click Manage Paths The window shown in Figure 5 74 on page 247 opens Select either Most Recently Used Round Robin or Fixed and then click Change to confirm R
70. snapshots The command completes as shown in Figure 10 69 Start FashCopy Consistency Group Task complete View more oetans Ranning command Task compiewed mm 1005 Figure 10 69 Consistency Group restore command Chapter 10 Copy services 513 Important The IBM Storwize V3700 automatically appends the restore option to the command 7 Click Close and the command pane returns to the Consistency Group window The reverse consistency group is now reported as Copying as shown in Figure 10 70 The progress reported is the opposite of the original mappings because the direction is reversed The restore process is now complete and the original data from the snapshots is available on the source volumes LAF worms coe Empty retoonconsiniouy Copying Flash Time Mov 6 2014 10 03 04 com met E Mor Copying Flash Tima Mov 6 2044 3008 AU cms BIEN orn n noni ar Comos een etn cona DI sc M M M S Figure 10 70 Consistency Group restored 10 2 Remote Copy In this section we describe how the Remote Copy function works in IBM Storwize V3700 We also provide the implementation steps for Remote Copy configuration and management using the GUI Remote Copy consists of three m
71. states of the ralasionship and the consistency Group co nor i The sast completed with errors om Figure 10 129 Error on creating consistency group when states do not match Chapter 10 Copy services 561 14 Click Close to close the task window and the new consistency group is now shown in the GUI as shown in Figure 10 130 Notice that the relationship that we tried to add Master Volume RemoteSource4 Auxiliary volume RemoteTarget4 is not listed under the new consistency group but remains under those Not in a Group IP cmm ag rent eee ey mera ab spero rst samo H Figure 10 130 New Remote Consistency group created In this example we created a consistency group with two relationships Other Remote Copy relationships can be added to the consistency group later Just as for individual Remote Copy relationships each Remote Copy Consistency Group displays the name and the status of the consistency group beside the Relationship function icon Also shown is the copy direction in our case this is ITSO V3700 gt ITSO V5000 18 Itis easy to change the name of a consistency group by right clicking the entry selecting Rename and then entering a new name 16 Alternatively highlight the consistency group and select Rename from the Actions menu 562 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 17 Similarly beneath the
72. the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator is preinstalled To enable it complete the following steps 1 To start the iSCSI Initiator open Server Manag shown in Figure 4 4 and go to Tools iSCSI Initiator as Component Services Computer Management Defragment and Optimize Drives Event Viewer Intenet Information Services 15 Manager iSCSI iter Local Seciiny ODAC Data Sources 32 bit ODBC Data Sources 64 bit Performance Monitor Resource Monitor security Configuration Wizard Service Figure 4 4 Starting the iSCSI Initiator 2 If this is the first time you have started the iSCSI Initiator the window shown in Figure 4 5 should open Click Yes to enable the iSCSI Initiator service which should now start automatically on restart The Microsoft iSCSI cerziceis net running The cervices required to be stated for SCSIto function correcty To start the service now and have the service start automatically each time the computer restarts click the Yes button Figure 4 5 Enabling the iSCSI Initiator service on restart 156 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 The iSCSI Initiator window should open Select the Configuration tab as shown in Figure 4 6 reges nce rere Tages ehe Confguraten settings here are giobal nd wil affect any future connectors made mith puero Any aetna comectore t wark bu
73. them by MDisk Group The list includes several attributes such as capacity volume type and type Important Tivoli Storage Productivity Center and IBM SAN Volume Controller use the following terms gt MDisk Group is the equivalent of a Storage Pool on a Storwize device gt Virtual Disk is the equivalent of a Volume on a Storwize device 636 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 If you click Create Virtual Disk the Create Virtual Disk wizard window opens as shown in Figure 11 90 Use this window to create volumes and specify several options such as size name thin provisioning and add MDisks to an MDisk group ES forthe EI E erased ose 71 59 stows Mens Stats rsa Ore irem nts ie Figure 11 90 Virtual Disk wizard Creation 11 9 2 Generating reports by using Java GUI In this section we describe how to generate sample reports by using the GUI We also create a probe to collect information from IBM Storwize V3700 1 Navigate to IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center gt Monitoring Probe right click and select Create Probe as shown in Figure 11 91 configuration tity Configure Devs Sob Management Reporting e
74. 1 Discovering Fibre Channel volumes from Windows 2012 R2 on page 218 This procedure is common to all attachment types Configuring multipath settings for mapped volumes configure MPIO settings for mapped volumes in Windows 2012 R2 you can use the mpclaim exe CLI tool 1 To save details of the current MPIO configuration including all connected devices and paths to a text file open Powershell terminal and run mpclaim v directory path Mile For example you could run mpclaim v C multipath_config txt Some sample output is shown in Example 5 3 Example 5 3 MPIO configuration details MPIO Storage Snapshot on Monday 27 October 2014 at 14 57 03 169 Registered DSMs 1 DSM Name Version PRP RC RI E pve Microsoft DSM 006 0002 09200 16384 0020 0016 0001 060 True Microsoft DSM MPIO Disk0 04 Paths Round Robin with Subset Implicit Only SN 6057630AF0484800000028 Supported Load Balance Policies FOO RRHS LQD WP LB Path ID State SCSI Address Weight 0000000077040002 Active Optimized 004 000 002 000 0 State Active Optimized Id 0 TP Id 2432 Adapter Microsoft iSCSI Initiator B D F 000 000 000 Controller 46616B65436F6E74726F6C6C6572 State Active 0000000077040003 Active Optimized 004 000 003 000 0 State Active Optimized Id 0 TP Id 2432 Adapter Microsoft iSCSI Initiator B D F 000 000 000 Controlle
75. 1 6 1 Volume mirroring 20 IBM Storwize V3700 provides a function that is called storage volume mirroring which enables a volume to have two physical copies Each volume copy can belong to a different Storage Pool and can be generic or thin provisioned which provides a high availability HA solution When a host system issues a write to a mirrored volume IBM Storwize V3700 writes the data to both copies When a host system issues a read to a mirrored volume IBM Storwize V3700 requests it from the primary copy If one of the mirrored volume copies is temporarily unavailable the IBM Storwize V3700 automatically uses the alternative copy without any outage for the host system When the mirrored volume copy is repaired IBM Storwize V3700 resynchronizes the data mirrored volume can be converted into non mirrored volume by deleting one copy or by splitting away one copy to create a non mirrored volume The use of mirrored volumes can also assist with migrating volumes between Storage Pools that have different extent sizes Furthermore mirrored volumes can provide a mechanism to migrate fully allocated volumes to thin provisioned volumes without any host outages The Volume Mirroring feature is included as part of the base machine code and no license is required Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 1 6 2 Thin provisioning 1 6 3 Easy Volumes can be configured to be tin provisioned or fully allocated Concerning application
76. 10 2 FlashCopy maximum configurations FlashCopy property Maximum FlashCopy targets per source 256 FlashCopy mappings per cluster 4096 FlashCopy consistency groups per cluster 255 FlashCopy mappings per consistency group 512 Chapter 10 Copy services 463 464 FlashCopy presets The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides three FlashCopy presets Snapshot Clone and Backup to simplify the more common FlashCopy operations as shown in Table 10 3 Table 10 3 FlashCopy presets Preset Snapshot Purpose Creates a point in time view of the production data The snapshot is not intended to be an independent copy Instead it is used to maintain a view of the production data at the time that the snapshot is created This preset automatically creates a thin provisioned target volume with none of the capacity that is allocated at the time of creation The preset uses a FlashCopy mapping with none of the background copy so that only data written to the source or target is copied to the target volume Clone Creates an exact replica of the volume which can be changed without affecting the original volume After the copy operation completes the mapping that was created by the preset is automatically deleted This preset automatically creates a volume with the same properties as the source volume and creates a FlashCopy mapping with a background copy rate of 50 The FlashCopy mapping is configur
77. 2 SG24 7938 also has information about the use of the CLI The commands in that book also apply to the IBM Storwize V3700 system because it is part of the Storwize family Basic setup 648 In the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI authentication is done using a user name and a password The CLI uses a Secure Shell SSH to connect from the host to the IBM Storwize V3700 system A private and public key pair or user name and password is necessary The following steps are required to enable CLI access with SSH keys 1 A public key and private key are generated as a pair 2 A public key is uploaded to the IBM Storwize V3700 system using the GUI 3 Aclient SSH tool is configured to authenticate with the private key 4 A secure connection is established between the client and IBM Storwize V3700 system SSH is the communication vehicle that is used between the management workstation and the IBM Storwize V3700 system The SSH client provides a secure environment from which to connect to a remote machine It uses the principles of public and private keys for authentication SSH keys are generated by the SSH client software The SSH keys include a public key which is uploaded and maintained by the clustered system and a private key which is kept private on the workstation that is running the SSH client These keys authorize specific users to access the administration and service functions on the system Each key pair is associated with a user defin
78. 4 Example A 4 Map volumes to host Storwize ITSO V3700 superuseremkvdiskhostmap host ESKi l scsi 0 force ESXi Redbooks Virtual Disk to Host map id 0 successfully created To verify the host mapping enter Isvdiskhostmap as shown in Example A 5 Example A 5 List all hosts that are mapped to a volume IBM Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lshostvdiskmap ESXi 1 id name SCSI id vdisk id vdisk vdisk UID 4 ESXi 10 ESXi Redbooks 600507680185853FF000000000000011 In the CLI there are more options available than in the GUI All advanced settings can be set for example l O throttling To enable I O throttling change the properties of a volume by using the changevdi sk command as shown in Example A 6 To verify the changes run the 1svdisk command Example A 6 Enable advanced properties l O throttling Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser chvdisk rate 1200 unit mb ESKi Redbooks IBM Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lsvdisk ESXi Redbooks id2 name ESXi Redbooks vdisk UID 600507680185853FF000000000000011 virtual disk throttling MB 1200 preferred node id 2 Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser Command output The 1svdi sk command lists all available properties of a volume and its copies To make it easier to read lines in Example A 6 were deleted Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 If you do not specify the unit parameter the throttling is
79. 416 Chapter 9 IBM Easy 9 1 Generations of IBM Easy Tier 9 2 New Features in Easy Tier 3 9 3 Easy Tier overview 9 3 1 Easy Tier licensing 9 3 2 Tiered Storage Pools 9 4 Easy Tier process 94 1 VO Monitoring 9 4 2 Data Placement Advisor 9 4 8 Data Migration Planner 9 4 4 Data Migrator 9 4 5 Easy Tier operating modes 9 4 6 Easy Tier status 9 4 7 Storage Poo Balancing 9 4 8 Easy Tier rules 9 5 Easy Tier configuration using the GUI 9 5 1 Creating multtiered pools Enabling Easy Tier 9 5 2 Downloading Easy Tier I O measurements 9 6 Easy Tier configuration using the CLI 9 6 1 Enabling Easy Tier measured mode 9 6 2 Enabling or disabling Easy Tier on single volumes 9 7 IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool 9 7 1 Processing heat log files 9 7 2 Storage Tier Advisor Tool reports Chapter 10 Copy services 10 1 FlashCopy 10 1 1 Business requirements for FlashCopy 10 1 2 FlashCopy functional overview 10 1 3 Planning for FlashCopy 10 1 4 Managing FlashCopy using the GUI 10 1 5 Managing FlashCopy mappings 10 1 6 Managing a FlashCopy consistency group 10 2 Remote s 10 2 1 Remote Copy concepts 10 2 2 Global Mirror with Change Volumes 10 2 3 Remote Copy planning 10 3 Troubleshooting Remote 10 3 1 1920 error 10 3 2 1720 error 10 4 Managing Remote Copy using the GUI 10 4 1 Managing cluster partnerships
80. 5 5 complete the following steps 1 Browse to the Configuration tab and select Networking as shown in Figure 4 17 Figure 4 17 network Configuration tab in VMware vSphere Client 2 Click Add Networking to start the Add Network Wizard as shown in Figure 4 18 a Connection Type evotng ervore eo be partenza to accomodate each server that requres come Eois oen m ene The What TEP NP stack hands aff for the olov ES serias volere tan SSE NFS E ETEDE EET Figure 4 18 The Add Network Wizard in VMware vSphere Client 3 Select VMkernel and click Next Chapter 4 Host configuration 169 170 4 Create a new vSwitch by selecting one or more network interfaces to use for iSCSI traffic and click Next as shown in Figure 4 19 sandar mich ura Duncan penah libr Setet wineh sper ener hw fede the netverk refte fr Ya may aes create a new createa vspherestandardswidh ss intel Corporation 825108 Gigabit Controller en end e a pm Deas INE E 5 E um Figure 4 19 Creating a new vSwitch using two physical adapter ports Note It is advised to select at least two interfaces for failover purposes Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5
81. 62 Volume copies ig tl The processes that are used to modify the volume size that is presented to a host described in 8 4 7 Shrinking a volume on page 392 and 8 4 8 Expanding a volume on page 393 However with a thin provisioned volume itis also possible to edit the allocated size and the warning thresholds ined volume properties To edit these settings complete the following steps 1 Select the volume then select Actions gt Volume Copy Actions Thin Provisioned as shown in Figure 8 63 on page 404 Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 403 The following options are available as shown in Figure 8 63 Shrink Expand Edit Properties Create Actions Lo tar Create Volumes ag OTT eee NIETO 5 n gue 3 Lgs pen ener ot comm Hg unes Domica votumo anole pepe Testvok memo 200 00 GiB Nearline_Poot Yes G0us076000E504FS0C erm 9 hearin Fol Yes amp perm anro SS EU j Figure 8 63 Working with thin provisioned volumes Shrinking thin provisioned space To shrink thin provisioned space complete the following steps 1 Select Shrink as shown in Figure 8 63 to reduce the allocated space of a thin provisioned volume 2 Enter the amount by which the volume should shrink or enter the new
82. 8 3 Host mappings overview 8 8 1 Unmap Volumes 8 3 2 Properties Host 8 3 3 Properties Volume 84 Advanced volume administration 8 4 1 Advanced volume functions 8 4 2 Mapping a volume to a host 8 4 8 Unmapping volumes from all hosts 8 4 4 Viewing which host is mapped to a volume 8 4 5 Duplicating a volume 8 4 6 Renaming a volume 8 4 7 Shrinking a volume 8 4 8 Expanding a volume 8 4 9 Migrating a volume to another Storage Pool 8 4 10 Deleting a volume 8 5 Volume properties 8 5 1 Overview tab 8 5 2 Host Maps tab 8 5 3 Member MDisks tab 8 5 4 Adding a mirrored volume copy x 8 5 5 Editing thin provisioned volume properties 8 6 Advanced volume copy functions 8 6 1 Thin provisioned menu 8 6 2 Splitting into a new volume 8 6 3 Validate Volume Copies option 8 6 4 Duplicate Volume option 8 6 5 Delete Volume Copy option zt 8 6 6 Migrating volumes by using the volume copy features 8 7 Volumes by Storage Pool 88 Volumes by Host Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 339 848 848 851 352 855 856 357 357 359 360 362 367 870 371 878 377 378 378 380 881 382 388 384 884 384 884 885 387 889 890 390 391 392 393 898 395 896 897 400 401 402 408 406 408 408 410 412 412 418 414
83. Action menu and its options Create volumes To create volumes complete the following steps 1 Click Create Volumes to open the Create Volumes pane as shown in Figure 3 73 Using this pane it is possible to select a preset of the type of volume to create The presets are designed to accommodate most user cases Generic Thin provisioned Mirror Thin mirror 2 After a preset is determined select the Storage Pool from which the volumes are to be allocated An area to name and size the volumes is shown For more information see Chapter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 and Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration on page 359 Create Volumes x Selecta Preset Generic Thin Provision 4 Thin Miror Selecta Pool Primary Fool VS700_RSPool 01 E Volume Details 1 1 3700 VoL Summary 1 thir provsioned volure 20 40 HiD real capacity 227 TD free in pool Figure 3 73 Create Volumes pane Creating multiple volumes A useful feature is available for quickly creating multiple volumes of the same type and size 1 Specify the number of volumes required in the Quantity field 2 Complete the volume capacity and name A number range can also be specified The Create Volumes pane displays a summary that shows the real and virtual capacity that is used if the proposed volumes are created Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 115 3 Clic
84. Add Host to start the wizard described in Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 Figure 8 28 shows the Action menu and associated tasks for a host ux i22 sas m uc CET e beds Cu a 4 E s Hu Figure 8 28 Ports by Host Action menu Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 377 8 2 1 Adding a host port add a host complete the following steps 1 Select the host from the left pane and click Add 2 Choose a Fibre Channel SAS or iSCSI port as shown in Figure 8 29 EE os Gos MED asus g 2 Win2012 FC in2012 FC E zb X Figure 8 29 Adding a host port Important A host system can have a mix of FC iSCSI and SAS connections If Configuration requires a mix of protocols check the capabilities of the OS and plan carefully to avoid miscommunication or data loss 8 2 2 Adding a Fibre Channel port add an FC port complete the following stej 1 After clicking Add as shown in Figure 8 29 click Fibre Channel Port to open the Add Fibre Channel Ports pane 2 Click the Fibre Channel Ports menu to display a list of all available FC host ports If the FC WWPN of your host is not available in the menu check the SAN zoning and rescan the SAN from the host or try clicking Rescan 378 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 Select the required WWPN and click Add Port to List This adds t
85. After you logged in a welcome window opens as shown in Figure 2 21 cuu promi 3 Welcome Welcome to System Setup eration Y ov haw nad preemie abi and gb labia ate ane aset an Dae and m Figure 2 21 GUI Welcome window 3 Click Next to start the configuration wizard 4 The next window that is opened is the System Name Set up the system name and click Apply and Next as shown in Figure 2 22 EE Welcome System Name system Hame tor anamo ror ird Tine Evert Nhat we ooo Figure 2 22 Storwize V3700 System Name setup window Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 The IBM Storwize V3700 shows the CLI as you go through the configuration steps Click Close when the tasks complete as shown in Figure 2 23 Modify System Properties V Task competed 100 View more detaiis Figure 2 23 1 Storwize V3700 tasks 6 There are two options for configuring the date and time Select the required method and enter the date and time manually or specify a network address for an NTP server After this is done the Apply and Next option becomes active as shown in Figure 2 24 sens O Date and Time syn Namo Select and date You can enter these senings manually recla Time NTP sever synchronize
86. Block Devices 10 VO Timeout for Sequential Devices 10 VO Timeout for Other Devices 10 LUNs to Scan for Block Devices All LUNs to Scan for Sequential Devices All LUNs to Scan for Other Devices All Enabling multipath support for SAS on Windows For multipathing with SAS you need to enable MPIO and install SDDDSM See Chapter 4 2 1 Windows 2012 R2 Preparing for FC attachment on page 151 for instructions about this These are the basic steps to prepare a Windows 2012 R2 host for SAS attachment For information about configuring SAS attachment on the IBM Storwize V3700 side see Chapter 4 3 5 Creating SAS hosts on page 195 For information about discovering mapped SAS volumes from Windows 2012 R2 see 5 3 3 Discovering SAS volumes from Windows 2012 R2 4 2 4 VMware ESXi 5 5 Preparing for FC attachment Complete the following actions to prepare for FC attachment Installing and updating supported HBAs Configuring Brocade HBAs for VMware ESX Configuring QLogic HBAs for VMware ESX Configuring Emulex HBAs for VMware ESXi Configuring multipath support for FC on VMware ESXi Determining host WWPNs Installing and updating supported HBAs Install a supported HBA with the current supported firmware and drivers for your configuration 1 A list of the current supported HBAs and levels for VMware ESXi 5 5 are available at this website http www ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S1004388 2 Install t
87. Disks RAID RAIDO array or a RAIDS array with a failed drive To perform the disk drive firmware upgrade you require the following files gt Upgrade Test Utility The Drive firmware package Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot 661 These files be downloaded from the IBM Support site http www 947 bm com support entry porta support When downloaded copy the Upgrade Test Utility and Drive Firmware package to your PUTTY folder Like the Storwize controller firmware upgrade the disk drive upgrade requires the use of the Upgrade Test Utility which shows the drives that need to be upgraded and checks if there are likely to be any issues Copying installing and running the Upgrade Test Utility on the Storwize unit The following steps provide the details to run the upgrade test utility Copying the Upgrade Test Utility to the Storwize unit copy the Upgrade Test Utility complete the following steps 1 From a Windows command prompt upload the Upgrade Test Utility to the Storwize unit using the PuTTY Secure Copy client PSCP 2 Run the following command from the PuTTY folder on your notebook or PC normally c program files putty or c program files x86 putty pscp i hursley ppk IBM2072 INSTALL upgradetest 12 26 superuser89 174 152 17 home admin upgrade In this case the following components are part of the command lt hursley ppk gt is the private key file generated w
88. Figure 11 66 shows step 3 of the DMP for the Fibre Channel ports not operational event and recommends replacing the SFP connections at each end of the FC cable After re enabling the port on the SAN switch to emulate the replacement of the SFP the link to Refresh the port status table was clicked The port status table now shows that the port is active and the option to mark the service action as fixed is clicked SFP replacement 1 Ti pith diui mu we E pM bn ra d d Cis ofthe Fre Channel ables Aer pertomng Ue sevice aun cic Nea connu Salat ane ofthese before king Nex Tia Five hanna par are eese A canister CES EU es Mardware Pomier Name demie Serisi Number Name Poston 1m ms mms 2 o2 mgr uec IT ETE Mdopter siot 1D Port 1D Port ww Conse es eer 1 17 500507680304caD6 i 2 500507680308c00 i svosozesosoccooe i 300807680310c006 tmactve _thacve Serene Node SFP repocomont tas J uaes a omer eve emu E ve E x ae 2 asveaza aso cops ss m aso 248 Gips Short and long wave SFP connectors zb Figure 11 66 Recommended action DMP for Fibre Channel port not operational Step 3 Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 621 Figure 11 67 shows step 4 of the DMP for the Fibre Channel ports not operational event and confirms that the Fibre Channel ports are correctly configured
89. Fire Channel ports nat operational Confirm fibre channel ports correctly configured The fibre channal port reconfiguration event is about to be marked as fixed The curently active ports willbe taken as the naw configuration and this event wil not be logged again one of the currenti activa ports becomes inactive The current status of the Fibre Channel ports Adapter slot 1D Port 1D Port WWPN Current status Expected status 1 1 500507680304C0D6 Inactive Inactive 1 soosozeaososcone Active active 4 1 SODSOZ5003OCCODS Active active 1 a SODSOZS00310CODS Inactive mactive Ihe ere channel ports ae not configured corectiv ick Cancel If he configuration is corect cie Next to fx event ma Figure 11 67 Recommended action DMP for Fibre Channel port not operational Step 4 Figure 11 68 shows step 5 of the DMP for the Fibre Channel ports not operational event Event has been marked as fixed This event relates to the storage system controller The reduced device logins event is now fned Closet es Figure 11 68 Recommended action DMP for Fibre Channel port not operational Step 5 When all of the steps of the DMP are processed successfully the recommended actionis complete and the problem should be fixed Figure 11 69 on page 623 shows the red color of the event status changed to green The System Health status is green and the Recommended Action box has disappeared implying that there ar
90. FlashCopy mapping in this consistency group is in the Preparing state Prepared The consistency group is ready to start While in this state the target volumes of all FlashCopy mappings in this consistency group are not accessible Copying At least one FlashCopy mapping in the consistency group is in the Copying state and no FlashCopy mappings are in the Suspended state Stopping At least one FlashCopy mapping in the consistency group is in the Stopping state and no FlashCopy mappings are in the Copying or Suspended state Stopped The consistency group is stopped because you issued a command or an VO error occurred Suspended At least one FlashCopy mapping in the consistency group is in the Suspended state Empty The consistency group does not have any FlashCopy mappings Chapter 10 Copy services 461 462 Reverse FlashCopy Reverse FlashCopy enables FlashCopy targets to become restore points for the source without breaking the FlashCopy relationship and without waiting for the original copy operation to complete It supports multiple targets and multiple rollback points A key advantage of Reverse FlashCopy is that it does not delete the original target therefore enabling processes that use the target such as a tape backup to continue uninterrupted You can also create an optional copy of the source volume that is made before the reverse copy operation is started This copy restores the original source d
91. Fushcopyvos p 9 25 0068 sevolume p y RedrookVolume p p Showing 12 Sabin e Showing E raepngr Sewing t raspns Figure 8 9 Editing SCSI ID 9 Click Edit SCSI ID select the required SCSI ID then click OK to save the change 10 Click Apply to submit the changes and complete the host volume mapping Important The IBM Storwize V3700 automatically assigns the lowest available SCSI ID if none is specified However you can set a SCSI ID for the volume The SCSI ID cannot be changed while volume is assigned to host Attention It is also possible to map a volume to multiple hosts However this would normally only be done in a clustered host environment because data corruption is possible 366 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 11 1f you map a volume to multiple hosts a warning is displayed as shown in Figure 8 10 x The following volumes are already mapped to another Attention If a volume is mapped to multiple hosts the hosts must coordinata accoss to avold corrupting data val St CMM Figure 8 10 Volume mapped to multiple hosts warning 8 1 2 Unmapping volumes from a host To unmap a volume from a host complete the following steps 1 Select the volume and click the Left Arrow icon to move the volume to
92. Hot data eapacy oF total Dara vay E storage capacity Poot tp GIB Configuration Tier status Data Management status summas eno asper a 1668 enterprise ET T 1 Enternse a anz nemis m poe LE 1 lt gt gt i Displaying Page 1of1 Figure 9 30 STAT report System Summary The first page of the report shows the following information Storage facility Total number of Storage Pools and volumes monitored Total capacity monitored Hot data capacity Data validity System state vvYvvvv As shown in In Figure 9 30 the prediction generated by the STAT is pool based The next table shows how data is managed in the particular Storage Pools and is denoted by different colors The total capacity of the Storage Pool is divided into two parts The data managed by Easy Tier The unallocated space The green portion of the bar represents the data managed by Easy Tier The black portion of the bar represents the unallocated space or data that is not being managed by Easy Tier In our example a total of five Storage Pools were monitored with a total capacity of 1853 0 gibibytes GiB Therefore the total of hot data capacity is approximately 3 or 69 GiB as shown in the system summary page Click the Storage Pool P1 as shown in Figure 9 31 on page 449 448 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 System Summary Thu Hov 06 123207 2018 Sto
93. IBM Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser The utility lists all drives in the system that require a firmware upgrade if using the d switch Copying the code to the Storwize unit It is assumed that the disk drive firmware has already been downloaded and placed in the PUTTY folder To copy the code complete the following steps 1 From a Windows command prompt upload the disk drive firmware to the Storwize unit using the PSCP 2 Run the following command from the PuTTY folder on your notebook or PC normally c program files putty or c program files x86 putty pscp i hursley ppk IBM2072 DRIVE 20140826 superuser amp 9 174 152 17 home admin upgrade In this case the following components are part of the command hursley ppk is the private key file generated when SSH was set up IBM2072 DRIVE 20140826 is the name of the firmware file superuser is the user name 9 174 152 17 is the management IP address or name of the Storwize unit Change these components as appropriate to your environment 3 Itis also possible to upload the disk drive firmware to the Storwize unit using the Storwize user name and password not using a SSH private key by using the following command pscp IBM2072 DRIVE 20140826 superusert9 174 152 17 home admin upgrade You are prompted for a password for the user name in this case Applying the disk drive software Depending on the Storwize code being used there are several d
94. In the left pane of the view is the Host Filter Selecting a host shows its properties in the right pane such as the host name number of ports and host type The Host icons show an orange cable for a FC host a black cable for an SAS host and a blue cable for an iSCSI host The volumes that are mapped to this host are listed as shown in Figure 8 82 Windows 2012 FC Poal pm v onime 8 mosai smgener Foot Vol Online 1200618 EasyTior Poo v Onine 9 120068 EasyTier Poo Figure 8 82 Volumes by Host 3 also possible to create a volume from this pane Clicking Create Volumes opens the same wizard as described in 5 1 Creating volumes in IBM Storwize V3700 on page 200 4 Selecting a volume and opening the Actions menu or right clicking the volume shows the same options as described in 8 4 Advanced volume administration on page 384 416 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 IBM Easy Tier In today s storage industry flash drives are emerging as an attractive alternative to hard disk drives HDDs Because of their low response times high throughput and input output operations per second IOPS energy efficient characteristics flash drives have the potential to allow your storage infrastructure to achieve significant savings in operational costs However the current acquisition cost per gigabyte GB for flash is higher than for Enterprise serial attached Small Computer System Interface
95. Mapped to the Host 3 The newly created volume should already be mapped to the host To confirm the mapping click Map Volumes to complete the operation and close the window Alternatively click Apply to complete the operation but leave the Host Mapping wizard open 4 After clicking Map Volumes the wizard completes as shown in Figure 5 22 Modify Mappings Task completed 100 View more mm Figure 5 22 Completion of the Modify Mappings wizard Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 Click Close to return to the Volumes view which now lists your newly created volume as shown in Figure 5 23 PETI Figure 5 23 The Volumes view with the newly created and mapped volume listed 5 2 2 Manually mapping volumes to hosts In this section we assume that you have followed one of the procedures in 5 1 Creating volumes in IBM Storwize V3700 on page 200 and clicked Create This section describes how to manually map these volumes to hosts after volume creation To manually map volumes to hosts complete the following steps 1 Go to Volumes Volumes select the volumes that you want to map and then click Actions Map to Host as shown in Figure 5 24 Genesee E M Figure 5 24 Manually creating host mappings from the Volumes view Chapter 5 Volume configuration 215 2 This opens the window shown in Step 1 of the procedure in 5 2 1 Mapping newly creat
96. Metro Mirror and Global Mirror are the IBM branded terms for the functions that are synchronous Remote Copy and asynchronous Remote Copy The Metro Mirror and Global Mirror Copy Services features enable you to set up relationship between two volumes so that updates that are made by an application to one volume are mirrored on the other volume The volumes can be in the same system or on two different systems For Metro Mirror and Global Mirror copy types one volume is designated as the primary and the other volume is designated as the secondary Host applications write data to the primary volume and updates to the primary volume are copied to the secondary volume Normally host applications do not perform I O operations to the secondary volume The Metro Mirror feature provides a synchronous copy process When a host writes to the primary volume it does not receive confirmation of O completion until the write operation has completed for the copy on both the primary volume and the secondary volume This ensures that the secondary volume is always up to date with the primary volume if failover operation must be performed The Global Mirror feature provides an asynchronous copy process When a host writes to the primary volume confirmation of O completion is received before the write operation has completed for the copy on the secondary volume If a failover operation is performed the application must recover and apply any updates that we
97. Pools 357 3 After you expand the size of a Child Pool you might need to run sveinfo Ismdiskgrp to have a detailed view of Child Pool as shown in Example 7 11 Example 7 11 View of the Child Pool Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser svcinfo lsmdiskgrp V37K ChildP 1 190 name V37K ChildP 1 status online mdisk count 0 vdisk count 0 capacity 120 0068 extent size 1024 free capacity 120 0068 virtual capacity 0 00MB used capacity 0 00MB real capacity 0 00MB overallocation 0 warning 80 easy tier auto easy tier status active tier ssd tier mdisk count 0 tier capacity 0 00 tier free capacity 0 00MB tier enterprise tier mdisk count 0 tier capacity 0 00 tier free capacity 0 00MB tier nearline tier mdisk count 0 tier capacity 0 00 tier free capacity 0 00MB site id site name parent mdisk grp id 3 parent mdisk grp name V3700 Pool2 child mdisk grp count 0 child mdisk grp capacity 0 00MB type child thick 4 Assuming that the child pool capacity is 120 GB and you want to reduce the capacity by 40 GB use the svctask chndiskgrp command with the size parameter to reduce the capacity to 80 GB as shown in Example 7 12 Example 7 12 Shrinking a Child Pool Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser svctask chmdiskgrp size 80 unit gb V37K ChildP 1 388 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Advanced host and volume administration The IBM Storwize V3700 offers many functions for volume and host c
98. Port Definitions tab which shows the configured host ports and their status This tab provides the following information The worldwide port names WWPNs for SAS and FC hosts for iSCSI hosts The Type column shows the port type information The Status column states whether a port is Active or Inactive The Nodes Logged In column lists the number of IBM Storwize V3700 node canisters that each port initiator port is logged in to Host Details Win2012_FC x Overview Mapped Volumes Pori Definitions as XE A Filter 24000024FF20076C re V Active 2 210c0024FF200700 rc v 2 Figure 8 26 Host Details Port Definitions 7 Using this pane you can also Add and Delete Host Ports as described in 8 2 Adding and deleting host ports on page 377 Selecting the Show Details option does not show further information 8 Click Close to close the Host Details section Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 2 Adding and deleting host ports To configure host ports complete the following steps 1 Browse to Hosts Ports by Host to open the Ports by Host pane as shown in Figure 8 27 Qi 7 Qd Figure 8 27 Ports by Host pane Hosts are listed in the left pane The Host icons show an orange cable for a FC host a black cable for an SAS host and a blue cable for an iSCSI host 2 The properties of the selected host are shown in the right pane Click
99. Problem management and support In this section we introduce problem management and support topics 1 7 1 IBM Assist On site and remote service The IBM Assist On site tool is a remote desktop sharing solution that is offered through the IBM website With it the IBM service representative can remotely view your system to troubleshoot a problem You can maintain a chat session with the IBM service representative so that you can monitor this activity and understand how to fix the problem yourself or allow the representative to fix it for you use the IBM Assist On site tool the management PC that is used to manage the IBM Storwize V3700 must be able to access the Internet For more information about this tool see the following website http www ibm com support assistonsite When you access the website you sign in and enter code that the IBM service representative provides to you This code is unique to each IBM Assist On site session A plug in is downloaded on to your PC to connect you and your IBM service representative to the remote service session The IBM Assist On site contains several layers of security to protect your applications and your computers You also can use security features to restrict access by the IBM service representative 1 7 2 Event notifications 24 IBM Storwize V3700 can use Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP traps syslog messages and a Call Home email to notify you and the IBM Supp
100. Properties for Battery Events pane Select Events in the Monitoring menu to open the Events pane The machine is optimal when all errors are addressed and no items are found in this pane as shown in Figure 3 47 Figure 3 47 Events pane with all errors addressed Filtering events view To view Recommended Actions Unfixed Messages and Alerts or to Show All select the appropriate option from the Recommended Actions menu as shown in Figure 3 48 refresh Actons Recommended gigas 1 Fiter XC Recommendes m Messages and Alerts Show All to tens toura Figure 3 48 Recommended Actions menu 100 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Event properties To show actions and properties that are related to an event or to repair an event that is not the Next Recommended Action right click the event to show other options Figure 3 49 shows the selection of the Properties option discovery occured contgurmion changes compiere tscovey occured contguraion changes senaing iscoven occured no coniguraion changes were detected ie by Date Show entries within Cer tog Figure 3 49 Selecting event Properties ik not protected by sf iert aparer Figure 3 50 shows the properties and sense data for event Proper Sanoa Data for Even 035304 xj Sense bytes 1240 127 Soquoncotumber 30 Object Type
101. RAID MDs that you are cene 1 Doloto tho RAID array MDisk even if it has data on it Tho syetom migrates the data to other MDisks in the pool Figure 7 47 MDisk delete confirmation Data that is on MDisks is migrated to other MDisks in the pool if enough space is available on the remaining MDisks in the pool Available capacity Make sure that you have enough available capacity left in the Storage Pool for the data on the MDisks to be removed After an MDisk is deleted from a pool its former member drives return to Candidate mode ili The alternative CLI command to delete MDisks is shown in Example 7 8 Example 7 8 CLI command to delete MDisk IBM Storwize lTSO V3700 superuserermmdisk mdisk list force mdiskgrpID If all the MDisks of a Storage Pool were deleted the pool remains as an empty pool with 0 bytes of capacity as shown in Figure 7 48 EKETE Lac soon cn 27300 Ca em vom ITI EI vow TE Acao Figure 7 48 Empty Storage Pool after MDisk deletion Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 7 2 8 More actions on MDisks The following actions can be performed on MDisks 1 Detect MDisks The Detect MDisks action available from the Actions menu at the upper left of the MDisks by Pools window is useful if you have external storage controllers in your environment for more information see Chapter 6 Storage migration on page 249
102. Relationship function icon are the Remote Copy relationships in this consistency group The actions on the Remote Copy relationships can be applied here by using the Actions menu or right clicking the relationships as shown in Figure 10 131 Waster Volume Aurihary Velim Li Coveitent Gmeivonized __ RamolsSourteb RomoteTuret Consistent Synchronized RemoleSourcet RemoteTargett Consistent Setuonized 53 Remotesourcet Remotetargts Remotelargots Create Consistency Group Create ieiationshi Seis e aa T i Figure 10 131 Drop down menu options Chapter 10 Copy services 563 18 Notice however that unlike those options for individual Remote Copy relationship those under the control of a consistency group cannot be stopped or started individually This is shown in Figure 10 132 Remote Copy ruse create Consistency Groug rimar Waster Volume 7 Peay Volume Consistent syne Conzitent sync emcisrarosm RemoteSoureet emoteTargert gl Remotesoureet RemoteTorget Consistent Synchronized 750 2700 ITSO rs Bemcierargetr Create Consistency Group re Romovo from Consistency Group Rename Delete Relatonship Sem ee Qor ooo Figure 10 132 Consistency group member options 564 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Adding Remote Copy to a c
103. Repeat steps 1 14 for the remaining node or nodes leaving the Configuration node until last 606 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 16 After you remove the configuration node from the cluster for the update warning displays as shown in Figure 11 46 Click Yes to continue Warning x A nodo failover has boon dotoctod Information that is displayed on the panel might be out of data Do you want to refresh the panel Figure 11 46 Configuration node failover warning Important The configuration node remains in Service State when it is readded to the cluster Therefore exit Service State manually 17 To exit from service state browse to the home pane of the SA tool and open the Action menu Select Exit Service State as shown in Figure 11 47 ee aaa Pete Figure 11 47 Exit service state to add node back cluster Both the nodes are now back in the cluster as shown in Figure 11 48 and the system is running on the new code level nens hier Senice OD Figure 11 48 Cluster is active again and running the new code level Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 607 18 If the canister software is updated to Storwize software V7 4 from V7 3 or lower an extra confirmation step is included Click Confirm Update to proceed as shown in Figure 11 49 Update System Dos Em ATES B m ES
104. Robin multipath policy PS C Program Files IBM SDDDSM gt datapath exe set device 1 policy DEV 1 DEVICE Diskl PartO TYPE 2145 POLICY ROUND ROBIN SERIAL 6005076300AF00484800000000000027 LUN SIZE 10 068 Path Adapter Hard Disk State Mode Select Errors 0 Scsi Port2 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 0 0 1 Scsi Port2 BusO Diskl PartO NORMAL 0 0 2 Scsi Port2 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 43 0 3 Scsi Port2 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 29 0 4 Scsi Port3 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 0 0 5 Scsi Port3 BusO Diskl Part OPEN NORMAL 0 0 6 Scsi Port3 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 7 0 7 Scsi Port3 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 6 0 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 For more information about configuring SDDDSM see the Multipath Subsystem Device Driver User s Guide This can be found on the following website http www ibm com support docview wss rs 540 amp context ST5267 amp q ssg1 amp uid ssg1S7000 303Bloc en US amp cs utf 8Rlang ent20en 5 3 2 Discovering iSCSI volumes from Windows 2012 R2 This section describes how to discover iSCSI volumes Discovering mapped volumes discover mapped iSCSI volumes from Windows 2012 R2 complete the following steps 1 Connect to your Windows server and open the iSCSI Initiator by opening Server Manager and going to Tools iSCSI Initiator as shown in Figure 5 44 Component Services Computer Management Defragme
105. SAS and Nearline SAS NL SAS Enterprise SAS drives replaced the old Small Computer System Interface SCSI drives and have become common in the storage market They are offered in a wide variety of capacity spindle speeds and form factors NL SAS is the low cost large capacity storage drive class commonly offered at 7200 revolutions per minute RPM spindle speed It is critical to choose the right mix of drives and the right data placement to achieve optimal performance at low cost Maximum value can be derived by placing data as follows gt Hot data with high I O density and low response time requirements on flash gt Warm data targeted on Enterprise class disks gt Cold data accessed more sequentially and at lower rates on Nearline disks This chapter describes the function provided by the IBM Easy Tier disk performance optimization function of the IBM Storwize V3700 It also describes how to activate the Easy Tier process for both evaluation purposes and automatic extent migration This chapter includes the following topics Generations of IBM Easy Tier New Features in Easy Tier 3 Easy Tier overview Easy Tier process Easy Tier configuration using the graphical user interface GUI Easy Tier configuration using the command line interface CLI IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool STAT vrvyvyyy Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 417 9 1 Generations of IBM Easy Tier IBM Storwize Family softwar
106. Supported browsers 3 1 2 Access the management GUI 3 1 3 System pane e layout 3 2 3 2 1 Function icons navigation 3 2 2 Breadcrumb navigation aid 3 2 3 Suggested Tasks feature 3 2 4 Presets 3 2 5 Actions 3 2 6 Task progress 3 2 7 Navigating panes with tables 3 3 Status Indicators menus 2 3 3 1 Allocated Virtual Capaciy status bar menu 3 3 2 Running Tasks bar menu 3 3 3 Health Status bar menu 3 4 Function icon menus 3 4 1 Monitoring menu 3 4 2 Pools menu 3 4 3 Volumes menu 3 4 4 Hosts menu 3 4 5 Copy Services menu 3 4 6 Access menu 3 4 7 Settings menu 3 5 Management GUI help 3 5 1 IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center 145 3 5 2 Watching an e Learning video 45 3 5 3 Embedded pane help 145 3 5 4 Hidden question mark help 146 3 5 5 Hover help 147 3 5 6 IBM endorsed YouTube videos 147 iv Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Chapter 4 Host configuration 4 1 Host attachment overview 4 2 Preparing the host operating system 4 2 1 Windows 2012 R2 Preparing for FC attachment 4 2 2 Windows 2012 R2 Preparing for iSCSI attachment 4 2 8 Windows 2012 R2 Preparing for SAS attachment 4 24 VMware ESXi 5 5 Preparing for FC attachment 4 2 5 VMware ESXi 5 5 Preparing for iSCSI attachment 4 2 6 VMware ESXi 5 5 Preparing for SAS attachment 4 3 Configuring hosts in IBM Storwize V3700 4
107. Technical Support Services for 10 years providing support on a range of IBM Products including IBM Power Systems Lee has 24 years of experience in the IT Industry He is IBM Storage Certified and both an Certified IBM XIV Administrator and Certified XIV Specialist Chris Tapsell is a Certified Storage Client Technical Specialist for IBM Systems and Technology Group STG in the UK In his 25 years at IBM he has worked as an IBM Service Representative covering products such as Office Products to IBM AS 400 IBM System i8 as a Support Specialist for all of the IBM Intel server products PC Server Nettinity xSeries and IBM System x PCs and notebooks and a Client Technical Specialist for System x Chris holds several IBM Certifications covering System x and Systems Storage products Paulo Tomiyoshi Takeda is a SAN and Storage Disk specialist at IBM Brazil He has over nine years of experience in the IT arena and is an IBM Certified IT Specialist He holds a Bachelors degree in Information Systems from Universidade da Funda o Educacional de Barretos UNIFEB and is IBM Certified for IBM System Storage 0580009 and IBM Storwize 7000 His areas of expertise include planning configuring and troubleshooting DS8000 IBM SAN Volume Controller and IBM Storwize V7000 He is involved in storage related projects such as capacity growth planning SAN consolidation storage microcode upgrades and copy services in the Open Sy
108. The system did nat initialize successfully Falow these steps ping the system IP address if peint your web browser to the T across and dick O ta this wizard 2 Contin tat the miele LED ie blinking an the system It LED fs not and the system hes been powered on or ak least 10 minutes contact TBM Support Pemnsert the USA flash che into the system It the faut LED on the right does not start and step binking which ould take up to 3 utes contact TBM Support cick Cancel and reinsert the US flash drive into your personal computer Figure 2 17 Initialization failure 11 Follow the instructions to resolve any issues The wizard assumes that the system that you are using can connect to the Storwize V3700 through the network If it is not you must follow step 1 from a machine that does have network access to the IBM Storwize V3700 After the initialization process completes successfully click Finish Chapter 2 Initial configuration 47 12 The initial setup is now complete If you have a network connection to the IBM Storwize V3700 the wizard shows the initialization completed successfully as shown in Figure 2 18 Storwize V3500 V3700 System Initialization Summary v Welcome The following changes have bean applied to tha system Management IP System TP address USE Hash Drive Waitress 9174151136 Subnet mask 235 252 248 0 gt Summary 1 System
109. Total Devices 1 DEV 1 DEVICE NAME Diskl PartO TYPE 2145 POLICY OPTIMIZED SERIAL 6005076300AF00484800000000000027 LUN SIZE 10 068 Path Adapter Hard Disk State Mode Select Errors 0 Scsi Port2 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 0 0 1 Scsi Port2 BusO Diskl PartO NORMAL 0 0 2 Scsi Port2 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 43 0 3 Scsi Port2 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 29 0 4 Scsi Port3 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 0 0 5 Scsi Port3 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 0 0 6 Scsi Port3 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 7 0 7 Scsi Port3 BusO Diskl Part NORMAL 6 0 The output provides multipath information about the mapped volumes In our example one disk is connected Disk 1 and eight paths to the disk are available State Open You also confirm that the serial numbers match the UIDs recorded earlier Important Correct storage area network SAN switch zoning must be implemented to allow only eight paths to be visible from the host to any one volume Volumes with more than eight paths are not supported 4 To set the multipath policy for a device run datapath exe set device device ID policy lt rr fo tb df gt where the variables represent the following actions rris Round Robin fois Failover Ibis Load Balancing reported as optimized dfis Default which should be Load Balancing In Example 5 2 we have changed the policy from Load Balancing to Round Robin Example 5 2 Setting a Round
110. Ume onthe ceed freto C NTP Serer Detected Enclosures Date woma Chapter 2 Initial configuration 51 7 The next window of the system setup that is opened is the Licensed Functions window as shown in Figure 2 25 In our example the functions Remote Copy and Turbo Performance are licensed It is possible to activate licensed functions now or later O Wisleome Licensed Function Sydom Kamo Date and ime Licensed Functions Enlace td Figure 2 25 Initial setup Licensed Functions To learn more about the Licensed Functions of the IBM Storwize V3700 see Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview on page 71 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 The configuration wizard continues with the hardware configuration Verify the hardware as shown in Figure 2 26 Welcome Detected Enclosures Syrum Name The following enclosures have boon detected Date and Time Enclosures Figure 2 26 Setup wizard the detected hardware 9 Click Apply and Next Chapter 2 Initial configuration 53 10 The next window in the initial system setup is setting up Email Event Notifications Select Yes and click Next to set up email notification and call home as shown in Figure 2 27 EE 5 O Email Event Notifications Lic Ena can ve
111. a useful tool for ensuring peak performance and availabilty The following options are available per port Any Allow local and remote communication between nodes Local Allow only local node communication Remote Allow only remote node communication None Do not allow any node communication v vv all cases host I O is still permitted so the None option could be used to exclusively reserve a port for host O There is a limit of 16 logins per node from another node before an error is logged A combination of port masking and SAN zoning can help to manage this and support optimum performance with local remote and host traffic Chapter 4 Host configuration 185 186 To configure FC ports complete the following steps 1 Go to Settings Network as shown Figure 4 39 am en Cs Figure 4 39 Opening the Settings gt Network view Select Fibre Channel Ports and the FC port configuration view should open as shown in Figure 4 40 F z i m amp ee _ Figure 4 40 The Fibre Channel Ports pane Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 To configure port right click the port and select Modify Connection This should open the window shown in Figure 4 41 Modify Connection for Port 1 Select the systems that can be accessed from the port any Local Remote None Figure 4 41 Modifying Connecti
112. access this click iSCSI while in the network settings view as shown in Figure 4 54 Figure 4 54 Advanced iSCSI configuration 194 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 3 5 Creating SAS hosts To create an SAS host complete the following step 1 Click SAS Host The SAS host configuration wizard opens as shown in Figure 4 55 Aad Host B sas Porte Port Definitions Advanced Settings Host Type HPUX Opeavms TPGS ic defaut Host Name eum You nave nor cod any SAS pers yet Figure 4 55 The SAS host configuration wizard Chapter 4 Host configuration 195 2 Enter a descriptive Host Name and click the SAS Ports drop down menu to view a list of all FC WWPNSs visible to the system as shown in Figure 4 56 Host u DN SAS Ports 5000628200556140 5000628200556141 Acvancea Settings Host Type Generic defaut Tess m Figure 4 56 SAS WWPNs visible to the system 3 If you have previously prepared a SAS host as described in Chapter 4 2 Preparing the host operating system on page 151 the WWPNs that you recorded in this section should display 4 If they do not display in the list verify that you have completed all of the required steps and check your cabling then click Rescan in the configuration wizard In particular make sure that the ends of the SAS cables
113. affects host access so make sure that these settings are what you need If so click OK to continue Warning x Write access to the master volumes in the system ITSO_V3700 Will be lost and write access to the auxiliary volumes in the system 1750 V5000 will be enabled Figure 10 141 Warming message to confirm the switch 3 This option is used for disaster recovery and DR testing Ensure that host access to the primary volumes is stopped before switching You can then mount hosts on the auxiliary volumes and continue production from a DR site As before with individual remote copy relationships all of the relationships switched as part of the consistency group now show an icon indicating that they have been swapped around This is shown in Figure 10 142 Crews Consistency Group Fiter rm Waser Volume Ausiiary Volume 79 a men syectronied Renoisicucet emotions e a onse d temete soun B Consistent Synchronize so varoo so D 2 Remotsourenz emos at Consistent Sneronied dj amp w Figure 10 142 Consistency group after a switch roles action has taken place 570 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Removing Remote Copy relationships from a consistency group Remote Copy relationships can be removed from a consistency gr
114. an IBM Storwize V3700 storage system see Chapter 6 Storage migration on page 249 The 1sndiskgrp command returns a concise list or a detailed view of the Storage Pools that are visible to the system as shown in Example 7 5 Example 7 5 CLI Ismdiskgrp command Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser lsmdiskgrp IBM Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser lsmdiskgrp mdiskgrpID 338 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 7 2 7 RAID action for MDisks Internal drives in the IBM Storwize V3700 are managed as Array mode MDisks on which several RAID actions can be performed 1 Select the appropriate Array MDisk by clicking Pools MDisks by Pools 2 Then click Actions RAID Actions as shown in Figure 7 43 Figure 7 43 MDisk RAID actions 3 You can choose the following RAID actions a Set Spare Goal i Figure 7 44 shows how to in the GUI set the number of spare drives that are required to protect the array from drive failures Spare Goal x Set Number or Spares Goap 0 oe Figure 7 44 MDisk set spare goal ii The alternative CLI command is shown in Example 7 6 Example 7 6 command to set spares IBM Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser charray sparegoal mdiskID goal If the number of drives that are assigned as Spare does not meet the configured spare goal an error is logged in the event log that reads Array MDisk is not protected by sufficient spares This error can be fi
115. and any optional expansion enclosures The ports are numbered 1 on the left and 2 on the right SAS port 1 is the IN port and SAS port 2 is the OUT port The use of the SAS connector 1 is mandatory because the expansion enclosure must be attached to a control enclosure or another expansion enclosure SAS connector 2 is optional because it is used to attach to more expansion enclosures Each port includes two light emitting diodes LEDs to show the status The first LED indicates the link status and the second LED indicates the fault status For more information about LED or ports see the following website http www ibm com support knowl edgecenter STLMSA 7 4 0 com ibm storwize v3700 740 doc tbrd4 expcanindi html 10 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 1 4 3 Host interface cards In addition to onboard 1 Gb iSCSI and 6 Gb SAS there are options to purchase HICs for the control enclosure Table 1 3 lists the IBM Storwize V3700 configurations available Table 1 3 IBM Storwize V3700 configurations available Standard Optional 1 Gb iSCSI 6 Gb SAS 1Gbiscsi 6GbSAS 8GbFC 10Gb ISCSVFCoE 4 ports 6 ports 4 ports 6 ports 8 ports E 4 ports 6 ports 8 ports 4 ports 6 ports 8 ports 4 ports 6 ports 4 ports 1 4 4 Disk drive types IBM Storwize V3700 enclosures support flash SAS and Nearline SAS drive types Each drive has two ports two PHYs and I O
116. application data to be copied from source volumes to new target volumes while applications remain online After the volumes are fully copied and synchronized the application can be stopped and then immediately started on the new server accessing the new FlashCopy target volumes This mode of migration is faster than other migration methods that are available through the IBM Storwize V3700 because the size and the speed of the migration is not as limited Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Rapidly creating copies of production data sets for application development and testing Under normal circumstances to perform application development and testing data must be restored from traditional backup media such as tape Depending on the amount of data and the technology in use this process can easily take a day or more With FlashCopy a copy can be created and be online for use in just a few minutes The time varies based on the application and the data set size Rapidly creating copies of production data sets for auditing purposes and data mining Auditing or data mining normally require the usage of the production applications This situation can cause high loads for databases that track inventories or similar data With FlashCopy you can create copies for your reporting and data mining activities This feature reduces the load on your production systems which increases their performance Rapidly creating copies of production data
117. based on input outputs I Os rather than throughput as shown in Example 7 Example 7 Throttling based on I O IBM Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser chvdisk rate 4000 ESKi Redbooks Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lsvdisk ESXi Redbooks id2 name ESXi Redbooks vdisk UID 600507680185853FF000000000000011 throttling 4000 preferred node id 2 IBM Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser 7 To disable I O throttling set the I O rate to 0 as shown in Example 8 Example A 8 Disable O Throttling IBM Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser chvdisk rate 0 ESKi Redbooks Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lsvdisk ESXi Redbooks id2 vdisk UID 600507680185853FF000000000000011 throttling 0 preferred node id 2 Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser Upgrading Drive Firmware using the CLI Note Before upgrading any disk drive firmware the Storwize system should be checked for any failures and any that are found should be rectified before continuing Disk drives should not be upgraded if their associated arrays are not in a redundant state Although the update process is designed not to take the drives offline this cannot be guaranteed Running the following command for the drive that you are upgrading informs you of any possible issues lsdependentvdisks drive drive id This returns notification of a possible issue if the drive in question is part of a non redundant array for example a Redundant Array of Independent
118. can be issued down both paths simultaneously Table 1 4 shows the IBM Storwize V3700 disk drive types that are available at the time of writing Table 1 4 IBM Storwize V3700 Disk Drive types Drive type Speed Size 2 5 inch form factor flash N A 200 GB 400 GB and 800 GB 2 5 inch form factor SAS 10 000 revolutions 600 GB 900 GB 1 2 terabytes per minute RPM TB and 1 8 TB 2 5 inch form factor SAS 15 000 RPM 146 GB 300 GB and 600 GB 2 5 inch form factor Nearline SAS 7 200 RPM 1T8 3 5 inch form factor SAS 10 000 RPM 900 GB 1 2 TB and 1 8 TB 3 5 inch form factor SAS 15 000 RPM 300 GB and 600 GB 3 5 inch form factor Nearline SAS 7 200 RPM 2TB 3 TB 4 TB and 6 TB 2 5 inch drive in a 3 5 inch drive carrier Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 11 1 5 IBM Storwize V3700 terms In this section we introduce the terms that are used for the IBM Storwize V3700 throughout this book 1 5 1 Hosts A host system is a server that is connected to IBM Storwize V3700 through an FC connection an iSCSI connection or through an SAS connection Hosts are defined on IBM Storwize V3700 by identifying their worldwide port names WWPNs for FC and SAS hosts iSCSI hosts are identified by using their iSCSI names The iSCSI names can be iSCSI qualified names IQNs or extended unique identifiers EUIS For more information see Chapter 4 Host con
119. confirm that the FC cables are not defective and move on to the next service action Fire Channol ports not operational Check the Fibre Channel cabling i Forthe ports that curertiy have statue and are nat expected to be check the Fibre Channel cable Ensure the correct type of cable is being used the cable appears damaged replace t there are any sharp bands in the cable re route or replace it Reseat the cable connector by unplugging the cable for two seconds and then reconnecting it Ater performing this service action dick Next to check the port status Select one ofthese options before clicking Next Fibre Channel status is incorrect next service action Fibre Channel status is correct mark as fixed The Fibre Channel ports are located on this nodo Wardunee type Node mode Enclosure enclosure canister panel 2M T en fer Mame Sariai Number Mame Oson I 1 __ gt or2 The current satus of the Fibre Channel ports ID Port ID Port WPN Current status Expected status 1 sooso7ssozoscons madive Imactive 1 2 soosozoaoaoacone mde active i soosozesasoccnne Ace active i 500507600310 006 Inactive Refresh port status table Fiore channel ports Em mei Figure 11 65 Recommended action DMP for Fibre Channel port not operational Step 2 620 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700
120. contgurepreerences for he management GUL irure jar Genes oa Aw extent size selection during pool create rate nw raphe mode Figure 3 115 GUI Preferences pane To configure GUI preferences follow these steps 1 Select GUI Preferences in the Settings menu to open the panel 2 Select the Allow extent size selection during pool creation option to toggle the Advanced Settings button to enable you to specify the size of the extents when creating a new pool as can be seen in 7 3 1 Create Pool option on page 351 3 Select the Enable low graphics mode option if you require remote access over low bandwidth links The Function Icons no longer enlarge and list the available functions However it is possible to navigate by clicking a Function Icon and by using the breadcrumb navigation aid After selecting the Enable low graphics mode box the user must log off and log on again for this to take effect For more information about the Function Icons see 3 1 3 System pane layout on page 74 For more information about the breadcrumb navigation aid see 3 2 2 Breadcrumb navigation aid on page 78 Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 143 Figure 3 116 shows the management GUI in low graphics mode nations dg a ak H amp LEE Figure 3 116 Management GUI low graphics mode 3 5 Management GUI help T
121. creation option is selected in the Settings gt GUI Preferences The size of the extent is selected at creation and it cannot be changed later Figure 7 61 shows an example of how to create a Pool choosing an extent size Greate Pont 16 00 MIB 3200 MiB 64 00 Min 42000 MiB 256 00 MiB Maximum addressitlo ize 4 00 aho Figure 7 61 Creating a pool choosing the extent size Chapter7 StoragePools 351 The new pool is included in the pool list with 0 bytes as shown in Figure 7 62 ram Mov Poot v Online BC 40 GiB Allocated 2 27 Titl Online 88 71 7 tt GiB Allocated 12 27 TiB vom Poon v Online 8T 28 GiB Allocated 131 Til E vom Poo Online TE bates Aillocoted 10 bytes Figure 7 62 Creating an empty pool 7 3 2 Actions on Storage Pools There are several actions that can be performed on Storage Pools using the Actions menu shown in Figure 7 63 gj e Change lean ium y Online BC qun Gib Alocated 221 V pg ees Online 08 1 7 19 Gib Allocated 227 Tib Delete Pact LIUC v Online LT t Git Allocated i 1n 0E z Online 0 bytes Allocated bytes Figure 7 63 Pool action overview Create Pool As shown in 7 3 1 Create Pool option on page 351 this option is used to create an empty Pool Detect MDisks As detailed in 7 2 8 More actions on MDisks on page 343 the Detect MDisk option s
122. e Rue 0 ae i Sess Figure 11 60 Events pane as Event log filter options The following log filter options are available gt Show all This option lists all available events gt Unfixed Messages and Alerts This option lists unfixed events This option is useful to find events that must be handled but no actions are required or recommended gt Recommended Actions default Only events with recommended actions Status Alert are displayed Important Check for this filter option if no event is listed There might be events that are not associated to recommended actions Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 615 616 Figure 11 61 shows an event log with no items found which does not necessarily mean that the event log is clear To check whether the log is clear use the filter option Show all Figure 17 61 No items found in event log Actions on a single event Right clicking a single event gives the following options that might be used for that specific event gt Mark as Fixed Itis possible to start the Fix Procedure on this specific event even if it is not the recommended next action Some events such as messages must be set to Mark as Fixed gt Show entries within minutes hours days This option is to limit the error log list to a specific date or a time slot The following selectable values are available Minutes 1 5 10 15 30 and 45 Hour
123. editor locate the following key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControl Set Services Disk TimeOutValue If the value for the TineQutValue key is not 60 decimal value change the value to 60 For more details about configuring the disk O timeout value see 4 2 1 Windows 2012 R2 Preparing for FC attachment 7 Restart Windows for these changes to take effect Multipath support for iSCSI on Windows For multipathing with iSCSI you need to enable MPIO See 4 2 1 Windows 2012 R2 Preparing for FC attachment for instructions on enabling MPIO It is important to note that SDDDSM is not supported for iSCSI attachment so do not follow the steps to install this as for FC or SAS These are the basic steps to prepare a Windows 2012 R2 host for iSCSI attachment For information about configuring iSCSI attachment on the IBM Storwize V3700 side we provide more information later in this book 4 2 3 Windows 2012 R2 Preparing for SAS attachment 162 In Windows 2012 complete the following actions to prepare for SAS attachment gt Installing and updating supported HBAs Determining host WWPNs Configuring SAS HBAs on Windows Enabling multipath support for SAS on Windows Installing and updating supported HBAs Install a supported SAS HBA with the current supported firmware and drivers for your configuration 1 Determine the current supported HBAs and levels for Windows 2012 R2 which are available on the following website
124. enough drives for performance optimization Figure 7 33 shows that there are a suitable number of drives to configure performance optimized arrays 5 Selecta dirrerent conriguration Drive GI 278 0 GiB Enterprise 10K rpm Preset Automatically configure spares Optimize for Performance Optimize for Capacity Configuration Summary RAD 5 276 90 018 Ertemrise 10K ipm 8 8 8 arivos 2 Hot Spares f Unconfigured Drives Figure 7 33 Arrays match performance goals Three RAID 5 arrays are possible and 26 out of 31 provisioned drives are used Five drives remain 332 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Optimize for Capacity Optimizing for capacity creates arrays that allocate all of the drives that are specified in the Number of drives to provision field This option results in arrays of different capacities and performance The number of drives in each MDisk does not vary by more than one drive as shown in Figure 7 34 4 After all of these choices are made click Next 5 Selecta different configuration Drive Class Preset RAD Automatically configure spares Op for Performance for Number of drives to provision Configuration Summary 2XRAD 5 276 90 GIB Enterprise 10 rari 5 4 dives 0 Hot Spares 22 Uncontigured Drives 278 90 cin Figure 7 34 Capacity optimized config
125. final size and then click Shrink Deallocating extents Only extents that do not include stored data can be deallocated If the space is allocated because there is data on the extent the allocated space cannot be shrunk and an out of range warning message displays 404 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 8 64 shows the Shrink Volume window Shrink Volumo Win2012 Nol 03 Copy 0 You selected to shrink the capacity copy in volume WIn2012 Vol 03 Currentreal capacity 2153 me Shrink by 15 Finat reat 2003 Figure 8 64 Shrink Volume pane 3 After the task completes click Close The allocated space of the thin provisioned volume is reduced Expanding thin provisioned space expand the allocated space of a thin provisioned volume complete the following steps 1 Select Expand as shown in Figure 8 63 on page 404 2 Enter the amount by which space should be allocated or the new final size and click Expand In this example shown in Figure 8 65 we are expanding the thin provisioned space by 15 mebibytes MiB Expand Volume Win2012_Vol_03 Copy 0 You selected to expand the capacity copy in Win2012 Vel 03 This acton increases tha avaliable real capacity of mirrored copy of a volume Cumontrescspacy 2152 me Expand oy es wa Fmareacapacy 2303 me mfnalsize 258 435 456 00 MiB 3 The new space is now a
126. for migration Follow the instructions given in this pane carefully 1 When all of the required tasks are complete click Next to continue Figure 6 18 shows the Prepare Environment for Migration pane wnor you avo oco stops click host o proceed Stop octoporations or stop to volumes iat ou ae migrating 2 Upcate your host dence drvers eluting your mumpatn arver ana conngure tem Tor anacnment to ris system 3 Create a host or bost group in the external storage syster wth the VAY lor this system 4 Configure the storaye systom for with this systom Figure 6 18 Instructions to prepare the migration environment SAS attached storage 264 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 Slightly different instructions are given if only FC external storage is attached or if you have chosen an FC attached migration as shown in Figure 6 19 Umen you nave completes these stapa enes Nexto proceed Stop host operatons or stop al O to volumes that you are migrating Remove zones Detween me hosts and me storage system trom which you are ratio Update your host derico driver including your multipath driver and thom for attachment to this system Create a storage system zone between the storage system being migrated this system and nost zones forme nosta being migrated Croato a oct or net group in Do extemal storage system with ho WW Tor this systern Nonton fh extornal s
127. host name and port definitions can be configured Figure 3 79 shows the Choose the Host Type pane For more information about how to create hosts see Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 mr x Choose the lat Type bre crane Host iscsi Host SAS Host mmm Figure 3 79 Choose the Host Type pane Ports by Host pane perform actions against host ports complete the following steps 1 Select Ports by Host in the Hosts menu to open the pane as shown in Figure 3 80 The pane shows the Name Type Status and the Nodes Logged In for ports that are assigned to the host definition 2 You can Add and Delete host ports by clicking the respective icon 3 Aclions such as Create Host Modify mappings Unmap Duplicate Mappings Rename and Properties can be performed from this pane by clicking the Actions menu Win2012 rc a reet e i SES mue z 8 rd Figure 3 80 Ports by Host pane 120 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Host Mappings pane To map or unmap volumes complete the following steps 1 Select Host Mappings in the Hosts menu to open the pane as shown in Figure 3 81 This pane shows the volumes that each host can access with the corresponding SCSI ID 2 The Unmap Volume action can also be performed from this pane STW Volumo Name rc 1 FlashCoprVelt g vee 2 TisshCoprioz Unmap Volumes TisshCoprVo
128. http www ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S1004388 2 Install the driver using Windows Device Manager or vendor tools 3 Also check and update the firmware level of the HBA using the manufacturer s provided tools 4 Always check the readne file to see whether there are Windows registry parameters that should be set for the HBA driver For LSI cards the following website provides some guidance on flashing the HBA firmware and BIOS http mycusthelp info LSI _cs AnswerDetai 1 aspx sSessionID 8aid 8352 Determining host WWPNs The worldwide port names WWPNs of the SAS HBA are required to configure host attachment on the IBM Storwize V3700 The host WWPNs can be found using vendor tools or the HBA BIOS Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 However the easiest way is to determine the host WWPNs is to complete the following steps 1 Connect the SAS cables to the ports on the IBM Storwize V3700 2 Log on to the Storwize CLI with Secure Shell SSH Run svcinfo Issasportcandidate as shown in Example 4 3 Example 4 3 The svcinfo command 18M_Storwize ITSO_V3700 superuser gt svcinfo Isssasportcandidate sas 5000628200556140 5000628200556141 For information about connecting to IBM Storwize V3700 with SSH and using the Storwize CLI see Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 Configuring SAS HBAs on Windows The following settings are suggested Timeout for
129. iater E mman Figure 6 59 Storage Pool selection 2 In this example you have chosen the EasyTier_Pool2 Storage Pool Click Next to continue Chapter 6 Storage migration 297 3 The task to create volumes in the internal Storage Pool completes as shown in Figure 6 60 Click Close to continue Figure 6 60 Adding volume copies to target pool 298 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Finish the Storage Migration wizard We are now at the end of the Storage Migration wizard 1 Click Finish to end as shown in Figure 6 61 miraonnes begun Atertus comple use line management Lio he rige cope Then remove Ie oral Stage sitem Figure 6 61 Finishing the data migration wizard 2 The end of the Storage Migration wizard is not the end of the data migration task It is still in progress A percentage indicator is displayed in the Storage Migration pane as shown in Figure 6 62 Genes M Qh Ca Figure 6 62 Storage Migration progress Chapter 6 Storage migration 299 Finalize migrated volumes finalize the migration process complete the following steps 1 When the migration completes with all of the progress indicators at 100 select all of the volume migrations you want to finalize by holding the Ctrl key and clicking to select each one Select the Actions box and the Finalize option as s
130. includes links to various other panes and the Information Center Volumes A volume is logical disk thatthe system presents to attached hosts Application servere access volumes nat Disks or To keep a volume accessible even when an MDisk on which i depende haz become unavailable a mifrorad be added to a selected volume Eac voluma can have maximum of mo copies Each volume copy is cested from a eet of exes na oat bin provisioned volumes hes vou rente s volume you con designate as thin povisoned A thin orovisioned volume has a etus capacity and a real capacity volane By using volume mirroring a volume can have to physical copies Each volume copy can belong to diferent pool and each copy has the same virtual as ne volume Inthe management GUL an eters the primary copy af the mirrored volume The prmary copy intimes he referred volume for read request Hove volumes to another 1 0 aroun Yau can mave s volume isa new E workload across the canisters in the system witht stopping hod activity a the volumes The waard changes only the UG group forte volume and doas not change where the data resides on he backend storage Hovina volumes mapped to ISCSI hosts to another 1 0 aroun Ta move volumes at are mapped te SCSI hose ts another UD group oa must unmep the volore from the hose bore you run the Move Volume is Brother UG Group wiesa Parent topic 2225 Fig
131. intended to be an independent copy but is used to maintain a view of the production data at the time that the snapshot is created Therefore it holds only the data from regions of the production volume that changed since the snapshot was created Because the snapshot preset uses thin provisioning only the capacity that is required for the changes is used Clone The clone preset creates an exact replica of the volume which can be changed without affecting the original volume After the copy completes the mapping that was created by the preset is automatically deleted Backup The backup preset creates a point in time replica of the production data After the copy completes the backup view can be refreshed from the production data with minimal copying of data from the production volume to the backup volume Reverse FlashCopy enables target volumes to become restore points for the source volume without breaking the FlashCopy relationship and without waiting for the original copy operation to complete IBM Storwize V3700 supports multiple targets and therefore multiple rollback points The base FlashCopy feature which requires no license provides up to 64 mappings An optional license is available to upgrade FlashCopy mappings up to 4096 mappings 22 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 1 6 7 Remote Remote Copy can be maintained in one of two modes Synchronous Asynchronous With the IBM Storwize V3700
132. is loading Flashing The node is in candidate or service state It cannot perform input output It is safe to remove the node gt Fast flash code upgrade is running gt On The node is part of a cluster Amber right Fault gt Off The node is in candidate or active state This state does not mean that there is no hardware error on the node Any eror that is detected is not severe enough to stop the node from participating in a cluster or there is no power Flashing Identifies the canister The node is in service state or there is an error that is stopping the software from starting 11 2 3 Node canister replaceable hardware components The Storwize V3700 node canister contains the following customer replaceable components Host interface card HIC gt Memory Battery Figure 11 9 shows the location of these parts within the node canister Host interface card HIC Memory Battery BBU Figure 11 9 Node canister customer replaceable parts Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 581 Host interface card replacement For more information about the HIC replacement process see the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center on the following website http www 01 ibm con support knowl edgecenter STLMSA welcome At the website select a specific product version and browse to Troubleshooting gt Replacing parts Replacing ho
133. level configurations that are specifically designed to meet the needs of small and midsize businesses Designed to provide organizations with the ability to consolidate and share data at an affordable price Storwize V3700 offers advanced software capabilities that are usually found in more expensive systems Built on innovative IBM technology Storwize V3700 addresses the block storage requirements of small and midsize organizations Storwize V3700 is designed to accommodate the most common storage network technologies This design enables easy implementation and management Storwize V3700 includes the following features gt Web based GUI provides point and click management capabilities gt Internal disk storage virtualization enables rapid flexible provisioning and simple configuration changes Thin provisioning enables applications to grow dynamically but only use space they actually need Enables simple data migration from external storage to Storwize V3700 storage one way from another storage device Remote Mirror creates copies of data at remote locations for disaster recovery IBM FlashCopy creates instant application copies for backup or application testing This IBM Redbooks publication is intended for pre sales and post sales technical support professionals and storage administrators The concepts in this book also relate to the IBM Storwize V3500 This book was written at a software level of version 7 r
134. mom co Figure 2 37 Select a drive class 7 Next select the level of the disk RAID and click Next As shown in Figure 2 38 ETE Select Enclosure Configuie Storage iom Configuration Dive Class 20 27890 GB Enterprise T cpm aure Panis Figure 2 38 Internal storage preset selection 62 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 As shown in Figure 2 39 the IBM Storwize V3700 offers the suggested internal RAID arrays based on the class of drive and the level of RAID previously chosen The configuration is shown at the bottom of the window in the summary section Accept the defaults and click Next TTE x Select Enclosure Configure Storage Custom Configuration Drive Cass CEL man v Antomaticaby configure spares optimize far Performance 5 Optinre ror capacity 0 Number uf drives to provision Cconnguration summary Fa RAS 2750 rero oHa spares mesane Eom Figure 2 39 The suggested configuration 9 Choose whether an existing pool is expanded or whether a new pool is created for the configuration as shown in Figure 2 40 In our example we create a new Storage Pool named V3700 Pool2 x Soloct Enclosure Expand an existing pool Configure Storage v Custom Configuration Configure Pooks Create one or more new pouls amp 5 eme
135. node canister exactly two FC ports should be zoned to exactly two FC ports from each node canister in the partner cluster If dual redundant inter switch links ISLs are available the two ports from each node should be split evenly between the two ISLs Therefore exactly one port from each node canister should be zoned across each ISL For more information about ISLs see the following website http www ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1 1003634 amp myns s033 amp mynp fami lyin d5329743 amp mync E All local zoning rules should be followed A properly configured SAN fabric is key to not only local SAN performance but Remote Copy For more information about these rules see the following website www 01 ibm com support knowledgecenter STLM5A 7 4 0 com ibm storwize v37 00 740 doc svc configrulessummary 02171530 html cp STLM5AS2F0 6 0 0 Important When a local fabric and a remote fabric are connected for Remote Copy purposes the ISL hop count between a local node and a remote node cannot exceed seven Remote Copy link requirements The following link requirements are valid for Metro Mirror and Global Mirror gt Roundtrip latency The total round trip latency must be less than 80 ms and less than 40 ms in each direction Latency simulations should be performed with your applications before any network links are put in place to see whether the applications perform an acceptable level while they meet the roun
136. o sasvot Properties Host ia Properties volume Figure 3 81 Host Mappings pane Volumes by Host pane For more information see Volumes by Host pane on page 118 3 4 5 Copy Services menu The Copy Services menu provides access to the FlashCopy Consistency Groups FlashCopy Mappings Remote Copy and Partnership functions Figure 3 82 shows the Copy Services menu Figure 3 82 Copy Services menu Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 121 122 FlashCopy pane Select FlashCopy in the Copy Services menu to open the pane as shown in Figure 3 83 The FlashCopy pane displays all of the volumes in the system Creato snapchor Creato Clone Create backup Fashcopyver TashCopyVol Sense aa recon Tesco Er U properties ee ES duum 5 Figure 3 83 FlashCopy pane FlashCopy actions FlashCopy actions such as Create Snapshot Create Clone Create Backup Advanced FlashCopy and Delete can be performed from this pane Figure 3 83 shows of all the actions that are available from the FlashCopy pane Consistency Groups pane A consistency group is a container for FlashCopy mappings Grouping enables FlashCopy mapping actions such as prepare start and stop to occur at the same time for the group rather than coordinating actions individually This feature can help to ensure that the group s target volumes are consistent to the sam
137. occurred The target volume is offline and its data is lost To access the target volume you must restart or delete the mapping The source volume is accessible and the read and write cache is enabled If the mapping is incremental the mapping is recording write operations to the source volume The source and target volumes go offline if the connection to both nodes in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system that the mapping is assigned to is lost Stopping The mapping is copying data to another mapping If the background copy process is complete the target volume is online while the stopping copy process completes If the background copy process did not complete data is discarded from the target volume cache The target volume is offline while the stopping copy process runs The source volume is accessible for I O operations Suspended The mapping did start but it did not complete Access to the metadata is lost which causes the source and target volume to go offline When access to the metadata is restored the mapping returns to the copying or stopping state and the source and target volumes return online The background copy process resumes Any data that was not flushed and was written to the source or target volume before the suspension is in cache until the mapping leaves the suspended state Chapter 10 Copy services 459 460 FlashCopy consistency groups Consistency groups address the requirement to preserve point in t
138. outdated compared to the primary volumes This state can occur when a relationship was in the ConsistentSynchronized state and experienced an error that forced a freeze of the consistency group or the Remote Copy relationship gt ConsistentSynchronized The primary volumes are accessible for read and write I O operations The secondary volumes are accessible for read only I O operations gt Idling The primary volumes and the secondary volumes are operating in the primary role Therefore the volumes are accessible for write I O operations ldlingDisconnected The volumes in this half of the consistency group are all operating in the primary role and can accept read or write I O operations InconsistentDisconnected The volumes in this half of the consistency group are all operating in the secondary role and cannot accept read or write I O operations ConsistentDisconnected The volumes in this half of the consistency group are all operating in the secondary role and can accept read I O operations but not write I O operations Empty The consistency group does not contain any relationships 10 2 3 Remote Copy planning Before you use Remote Copy you must plan for its usage General guidelines for Remote Copy General guidelines for Remote Copy include the following considerations gt Partnerships between up to four IBM Storwize V3700 storage systems IBM SAN Volume Controller systems IBM Storwize V7000 o
139. over long distances Chapter 10 Copy services 527 528 Adding this technology at each end of WAN Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP link significantly improves the utilization of the link It does this by applying patented artificial intelligence to hide latency normally associated with WANs Instead the Storwize technology uses TCP IP latency to its advantage In a traditional IP link performance drops off as more data is sent because each transmission must wait for acknowledgment before the next can be sent Rather than wait for the acknowledgment to come back the Storwize technology sends more sets of packets across other virtual connections The number of virtual connections is controlled by the AI engine This improves WAN connection use which results in a data transfer rate approaching full line speed and is similar to the use of buffer to buffer credits in FC If packets are lost from any virtual connection the data is retransmitted and the remote unit waits for it Presuming that this is not a frequent problem overall performance is only marginally affected because of the delay of an extra round trip for the data that is resent The implementation of this technology can greatly improve the performance of Remote Copy especially Global Mirror with Change Volumes over long distances For more information about Native IP replication and how to use it see the separate publication IBM SAN Volume C
140. periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the products andor the program s described in this publication at anytime without notice Any references in this information to non IBM websites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those websites The materials at those websites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those websites is at your own risk IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment Therefore the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Some measurements may have been made development level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems Furthermore some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation Actual results may vary Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other cla
141. power the entire enclosure for redundancy Figure 11 18 shows the power supplies mm mf Figure 11 18 Power supply The left side PSU is numbered 1 and the right side PSU is numbered 2 PSU LED indicators The PSU indicators are the same for the control and expansion units Figure 11 19 shows the PSU LED indicators Figure 11 19 PSU LED Indicators Table 11 9 shows the colors and meaning of the LEDs Table 11 9 PSU LED definitions Position Color Marking Name Definition 1 Green In Status Main power is delivered 2 Green DC DC Status DC power is available 3 Amber Faultexclamation Fault Fault on PSU mark 4 Blue Service action that is allowed Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 PSU replacement procedure For more information about the PSU replacement process see the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center on the following website http www 01 ibm com support knowledgecenter STLMSA wel come At the website select a specific product version and browse to Troubleshooting gt Replacing parts Replacing a Power Supply Unit 11 3 Configuration backup procedure If there is a serious failure that requires the system configuration to be restored the configuration backup file must be used The file contains configuration data such as arrays pools and volumes but no customer data The backup file is updated by the cluster every day and stored in t
142. select a file right click the file and select Download 3 To change to the file listing to show the files on a partner node canister select the node canister from the Node menu cmon Loggng Levat Low aces Jaumpsiopa Atumpstape heatocorosc a ab 020 p dumpsiBump 3G07D6C 4 2 424455 dumpsice makevpd 0GU7D5C 4tre Figure 11 74 Full log listing Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 11 6 2 Support information from the Service Assistant The IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI collects information from all of the components in the system The Service Assistant collects information from all node canisters The snap file is the information that is collected and packaged in a single file access the gathered information complete the following steps 1 If the package is collected by using the SA tool ensure that the node from which the logs are collected is the current node as shown in Figure 11 75 Storwize V3700 Service Assistant Tool Connected to D1 1 nodet Current 01 1 nodet You can view datailad status and error summary and manage service actions for the current node Tho current nade is the node cn which service elated actions are performed The connected node displays the Service assistant and provides the interface for working with other nodes on the system To manage a different node s
143. services 555 10 4 3 Managing a Remote Copy consistency group A Remote Copy consistency group can be managed from the Remote Copy window as well Creating a Remote Copy consistency group To create a Remote Copy consistency group complete the following steps 1 Click Create Consistency Group as shown in Figure 10 120 Greate Group i Actions 5 rinor Consistent Synchronized RemoteSourced Conslatent Syenronies nomatesourest omoteTergot Conetentyehronted Remotesoursel RemoteTarge Consistent Synchronized RemoteSources Consistent synenronted 55 Hemotescurset Romctejargot Figure 10 120 Create a Remote Copy consistency group 2 You must enter a name for your new consistency group as shown in Figure 10 121 In this case name it RedbookGroup Craaie Consistency Group x Enter a name for the consistency group Consistency Group Name ReubookGroun Figure 10 121 Enter a name for the new consistency group 556 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 You are prompted for the location of auxiliary volumes as shown in Figure 10 122 In this example these volumes are on another system Select the relevant option and from the drop down menu select the correct remote system In this example there is only one remote system defined Click Next to continue Create Consistency Group x Where are the auxiliary volumes located On this system
144. sets for quality assurance Quality assurance is an interesting case for FlashCopy Because traditional methods involve so much time and labor the refresh cycle is typically extended Because FlashCopy reduces the time that is required it enables much more frequent refreshes of the quality assurance database 10 1 2 FlashCopy functional overview FlashCopy occurs between a source volume and a target volume The source and target volumes must be the same size Multiple FlashCopy mappings source to target relationships can be defined and point in time consistency can be maintained across multiple point in time mappings by using consistency groups For more information about FlashCopy consistency groups see FlashCopy consistency groups on page 460 The minimum granularity that the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system supports for FlashCopy is an entire volume It is not possible to use FlashCopy to copy only part of a volume Additionally the source and target volumes must belong to the same IBM Storwize V3700 storage system but they do not have to be in the same Storage Pool Before you start a FlashCopy regardless of the type and options that are specified the IBM Storwize V3700 must put the cache into write through mode which flushes the I O that is bound for the source volume If you are scripting FlashCopy operations from the command line interface CLI you must run the prestartfcmap or prestartfcconsistgrp command However this
145. shown in Figure 5 7 M Tl _ Figure 5 7 The Volumes view with the newly created volume listed 9 Repeat these steps for all generic volumes you want to create If you did not choose Create and Map to Host in Step 5 see 5 2 2 Manually mapping volumes to hosts on page 215 for instructions about mapping volumes manually after host creation 204 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 1 2 Creating thin pro ned volumes To create thin provisioned volumes complete the following steps 1 Select Thin Provision as the preset as shown in Figure 5 8 2 From the list shown in Figure 5 8 select a pool to provision storage from 3 The view shown in Figure 5 8 opens From here you can choose how many volumes to create the capacity of each volume and what to name the volumes Payot Volume Details 1 Capacty cB namel Summary Othin provisoned volumes byes total virtual capaci 0 byes totalreal capac 5 44 TB freein oo Figure 5 8 Creating thin provisioned volumes using the Create Volumes wizard Note The capacity specified is the virtual capacity of the volume where the real capacity is 2 of this value The real capacity can be modified in the advanced settings Chapter 5 Volume configuration 205 Click Advanced to view more options The Characteristics tab is the same as for generic volumes However th
146. shows the controller rear view of IBM Storwize V3700 models 12C and 24 Figure 1 4 Storwize V3700 controller rear view Models 12C and 24C Figure 1 4 shows the two power supply slots at the bottom of the enclosure The PSUs are identical and exchangeable There are two canister slots at the top of the chassis Figure 1 5 shows the rear view of an IBM Storwize V3700 expansion enclosure 1066660006660006066000 99 099990999 US Figure 1 5 1 Storwize V3700 expansion enclosure rear view Models 12E and 24E The only difference between the control enclosure and the expansion enclosure are the canisters and vital product data written to the backplane The canisters of the expansion have only the two SAS ports For more information about the expansion enclosure see 1 4 2 Expansion enclosure on page 10 1 4 1 Control enclosure Each IBM Storwize V3700 system has one control enclosure that contains two node canisters disk drives and two power supplies Figure 1 8 shows a single node canister Figure 1 6 Storwize V3700 node canister 8 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Each node canister contains the following hardware Battery Memory 4 GB memory upgradable to 8 GB HIC slot different options are possible Four 6 gigabits per second Gbps SAS ports Two 10 10 1000 megabits per second Mbps Ether
147. step is managed for you and carried out automatically by the GUI This is not the same as flushing the host cache which is not required After FlashCopy is started an effective copy of a source volume to a target volume is created The content of the source volume is immediately presented on the target volume and the original content of the target volume is lost This FlashCopy operation is also referred to as a time zero copy Immediately following the FlashCopy operation the source and target volumes are available for use The FlashCopy operation creates a bitmap that is referenced and maintained to direct VO requests within the source and target relationship This bitmap is updated to reflect the active block locations as data is copied in the background from the source to target and updates are made to the source Chapter 10 Copy services 455 456 Figure 10 1 shows the redirection of the host I O toward the source volume and the target volume To FlashCopy star commands issued The Copy immediately availabe alter te bitmaps metadata are bull eadhurte to copy is possible Blocks that are not yet writton to tne target oro road from the sourco Before write to the source data is copied to the target When a background copy is complete ELA EL the source and target are logically Incapencent and tho FlashCopy mapping be deleted without affecting the target Figure 10 1 Redirection of host V
148. task progress 394 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Depending on the size of the volume the migration process can take some time The status of the migration can be monitored in the Running Tasks bar at the bottom of the graphical user interface GUI pane Volume migration tasks cannot be interrupted 5 After the migration completes the Copy 0 from the Win2012 Vol 01 volume is shown in the new Storage Pool as shown in Figure 8 52 09000000090 v Onine 10008 MisratonPcol 1024 oi Ot Online Poot Copy v E Copy v Online 8 s00cis ERSTE Poot v onne 500 615 tasyner Poot sasvor Onine 4 00 Gio Figure 8 52 The volume Volume showing in new Storage Poo migrates to the new Storage Pool without any downtime It is also possible to migrate both volume copies to other Storage Pools The volume feature can also be used to migrate volumes to a different pool with different extent size as described in 8 6 6 Migrating volumes by using the volume copy features on page 413 8 4 10 Deleting a volume To delete a volume complete the following steps 1 Select Delete from the Action menu 2 Confirm the number of volumes to be deleted if you want to force the deletion select the Delete the volume even if it has host mappings option as shown in Figure 8 53 Delete A You selected 1
149. the original data that has changed since the snapshot was taken Because this old data no longer exists on the source volume it has been physically copied to the target volume rather than being bitmap referenced to the source The greater the percentage of data changed the longer the snapshot restore process takes because more data needs to be physically copied back to the source Therefore it is good practice to take regular snapshots so that data can be restored quickly Chapter 10 Copy services 493 Senso oa 2 Create a mapping using the target volume of the mapping to be restored In this example itis FlashCopyVol7 as shown in Figure 10 44 Select Advanced FlashCopy gt Use Existing Target Volumes uGtume Warne l ile ANS vocat on cn Ashcan awen Pasncopyvon awc masncopyiot ot 287 Mors za Tabs ashy it s Create Snapshot 0 Croato Backup RVclume 2 l Create Hew Target Volumes z v I is L Volume PESE j eontroliert DIOUDIOUOID0O0 sais Figure 10 44 Create reverse mapping 494 3 The Source Volume is preselected with the target volume that was selected in the previous step Select the Target Volume from the drop down menu you select the source volume that you want to restore In this example se
150. the entered value Figure 3 23 shows the text Redbook was entered into the filter field 2 Now only volumes with the text Redbook in any column are listed and the filter word is also highlighted 2880068 varoo acbocko v omine No sats Asima varoo RSPooLOP Figure 3 23 Filtering objects to display a subset of the volumes 86 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Advanced Filter use the Advanced Filter feature complete the following steps 1 Click in the Filter field 2 Click the Advanced Filter icon as shown in Figure 3 24 Internal spare Capacity Use D 2703000 Member Online TUSOGIB Member V Online Figure 3 24 Advanced Filter Figure 3 25 shows the Advanced filter column menu 3 Select a column name which enables you to filter by column 4 Select the appropriate operand which changes depending on the column being filtered 5 Finally enter a filter value Click Apply to display the filtered data gm Jy li intemal Capacity Capacity Allocation spare Capacity 12778 E Actions aise fee Lii Drive fonem Use Status Firmware Level Disk Name isk 1D Member in Enclosure ID 5 Part Number Part entity 12 2185098 Member Onine 2256 mdiskz Figure 3 25 Advanced Filter Choosing values Chapter 3 Graphical user interface ove
151. the left Unmapped Volumes pane Multiple volumes can be unmapped by selecting them with the Ctrl or Shift key as shown in Figure 8 11 diy Host Mappings x Host win20t2 Fe nmap Volumes ses Mapped the Host Pep S Fer csi som mmap Finer Bi SODHUHADEBMFEBOODDDNNOOUUD D TshCopjob SOEUTPMIEBMMTiCoCoDODD COD IG sosoremoesotrssovovoooooovooos Snowing a voues seeng o vounes srewna racpngs Selena Figure 8 11 Unmapping volumes Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 367 2 all volumes from a host select a host from the Hosts pane and using the Action menu click all Volumes as shown in Figure 8 12 ol Pore Woetlisppinge Generi Genere 2 eet SEE 2 ves Duplicate Mappings Rename Remove Properties Figure 8 12 all volumes 3 A promptis displayed requesting confirmation of the number of mappings to be removed Enter the number of mappings to be removed and click Unmap In the example five mappings are removed as shown in Figure 8 13 from Hast x Are you sure you want io the flowing FC Neil te number of maopinos that this operation affects gt NIA Figure 8 13 Enter the number of mappings to be removed Unmapping When you click Unmap acce
152. the software update are shown in Figure 11 32 N us Ca a i OM Figure 11 32 Updating system 12 If the canister software is updated to Storwize software V7 4 from V7 3 or lower an additional confirmation step is included Click Confirm Update to proceed as shown in Figure 11 33 ioe PE State Waiting for final user confirmation Click Confirm Update start the completion process eeu corren 2 Utonsing oc Wm m aeons System Yang or cmi Tano ok 03 45 44402000 Seres Figure 11 33 Update System Confirm Update Nodes are upgraded and rebooted one at a time until the upgrade process is complete 600 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Updating software manually Important It is highly advised to upgrade the IBM Storwize V3700 automatically by following the Update wizard If a manual update is used make sure that you do not skip any steps The steps for a manual update are shown in the Update System help See Figure 11 34 1035410113200 me support center to Figure 11 34 Update Software help Complete the following steps to manually upgrade the software 1 In the management GUI click Settings gt System Update System and run the Update wizard 2 When updating the node canister software a Test utility and the node software must first be downloaded from the internet This can be downloaded either usi
153. to Port Definitions as shown in Figure 4 36 Host x Host Name optional Fibre Chenne Ports 0 Port Definitions v 21coonaarr2no7oe x 21000024FF200760 Advanced Settings Host Type Generic derautt HPIUX Openvms mes Figure 4 36 Adding the host WWPNs 6 In the Advanced Settings it is possible to choose the Host Type If using HP UX OpenVMS or TPGS this needs to be configured Otherwise the default option Generic is fine 7 Click Add Host and the wizard completes as shown in Figure 4 37 Add Host Task completed 100 view more cetats Figure 4 37 Completion of the Add Host wizard 184 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 Click Close to return to the host view which should now list your newly created host object as shown in Figure 4 38 oe a 91 Figure 4 38 The Hosts view with the newly created host object listed 9 Repeat these steps for of the FC hosts After the host objects have been created see Chapter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 to create volumes and map them to the hosts 4 3 2 Configuring IBM Storwize V3700 for FC connect ity It is possible to configure the FC ports on IBM Storwize V3700 to only be used for certain connections This is sometimes referred to as Port Masking In a system with multiple VO groups and remote partnerships this is
154. value suggested by IBM However depending on your requirements you might want to adjust this higher or lower The following link explains in detail why it might be useful to adjust the timeout http blogs msdn com b san archive 2011 09 01 the windows di sk timeout value u nderstanding why thi s should be set to a smal value aspx Installing Microsoft MPIO multipathing software Microsoft Multipath I O MPIO solutions are designed to work with device specific modules DSMs that are written by vendors The MPIO driver package does not form a complete solution on its own By using this joint solution the storage vendors can design device specific solutions that are tightly integrated with the Microsoft Windows OS MPIO in Microsoft Windows 2012 R2 is a DSM designed to work with storage arrays that support the Asymmetric Logical Unit Access control model such as active active storage controllers The intent of MPIO is to provide better integration of multipath storage solution with the operating system It also enables the use of multipath in the SAN infrastructure during the boot process for SAN Boot hosts To enable MPIO on Windows 2012 R2 complete the following steps 1 Open Server Manager 2 Click Manage Add Roles and Features 3 On the Installation Type pane select Role based or feature based installation and click Next 4 On the Server Selection pane select the server that you want to configure and click N
155. volume FlashCopy mappings can be stand alone mappings or a member of a consistency group as described in FlashCopy consistency groups on page 460 Incremental FlashCopy mappings In an incremental FlashCopy the initial mapping copies all of the data from the source volume to the target volume Subsequent FlashCopy mappings copy only data that was modified since the initial FlashCopy mapping This action reduces the amount of time that it takes to re create an independent FlashCopy image You can define a FlashCopy mapping as incremental only when you create the FlashCopy mapping Multiple target FlashCopy mappings You can copy up to 256 target volumes from a single source volume Each relationship between a source and target volume is managed by a unique mapping such that a single volume can be the source volume for up to 256 mappings Each of the mappings from a single source can be started and stopped independently If multiple mappings from the same source are active in the copying or stopping states a dependency exists between these mappings If a single source volume has multiple target FlashCopy volumes the write to the source volume does not cause its data to be copied to all of the targets Instead itis copied to the newest target volume only The older targets refer to new targets first before they refer to the source A dependency relationship exists between a particular target and all newer targets that share a source until a
156. window that shows the RAID configuration that the IBM Storwize V3700 implements as shown in Figure 2 32 Sens Wotcame Gamay sprem name A date ana Time Functions detected Enclosures Truman QQmahteencaors er mmo Storage summary Figure 2 32 System Setup Summary window The arrays and the Storage Pool are created when you click Finish Depending on the disks available this process might take some time to complete as a background task Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 16 Closing the task box completes the Initial Configuration wizard and the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI directs you to the Suggested Tasks as shown in Figure 2 33 Create Volumes Create volumes in the pools Add Hosts Create settings for hosts connected to the system Figure 2 33 Storwize V3700 Suggested Tasks If you choose to create volumes at this stage see Chapter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 To work with hosts see Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 17 Selecting Cancel exits to the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI There is also a shortcut link that redirects to a useful web portal about the IBM Storwize V3700 2 9 1 Adding expansion enclosures after initial configuration When the initial installation of the IBM Storwize V3700 is complete all expansion enclosures that were purchased at that time should be installed as part of th
157. writes by waiting for each step to complete before it starts the next step However if the database log updates 1 and 3 and the database update 2 on separate volumes it is possible for the FlashCopy of the database volume to occur before the FlashCopy of the database log This situation can result in the target volumes seeing writes 1 and 3 but not 2 because the FlashCopy of the database volume occurred before the write was completed Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 In this case if the database was restarted using the backup that was made from the FlashCopy target volumes the database log indicates that the transaction completed successfully when in fact it had not This situation occurs because the FlashCopy of the volume with the database file was started bitmap was created before the write completed to the volume Therefore the transaction is lost and the integrity of the database is in question To overcome the issue of dependent writes across volumes and to create a consistent image of the client data it is necessary to perform a FlashCopy operation on multiple volumes as an atomic operation using consistency groups A FlashCopy consistency group can contain up to 512 FlashCopy mappings The more mappings that you have the more time it takes to prepare the consistency group FlashCopy commands can then be issued to the FlashCopy consistency group and simultaneously for all of the FlashCopy mappings that are de
158. your u ey mitted ves by nece a volame and cing ost Alter he manping scm lar new deact eat very Figure 6 54 Selecting volumes to map Chapter 6 Storage migration 293 8 A box opens to allow you to choose the host to which the volumes are to be mapped as shown in Figure 6 55 In this example you have chosen the previously defined Windows 2012 host Figure 6 55 Modify host mappings The Modify Host Mappings pane is now displayed listing the volumes that you have chosen to be mapped to your particular host as shown in Figure 6 56 on page 295 The volumes are shown in yellow in the Modify Host Mappings pane The yellow highlighting means that they are not yet mapped to the host 9 Ifthe SCSI ID was not set correctly when mapping the external volume to the Storwize V3770 as shown in Figure 6 38 on page 280 it can be changed now Click Edit SCSI ID and modify as required The SCSI ID should reflect the same SCSI ID that was recorded in 6 2 5 Recording migration information on page 252 294 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 lues Mapped oe 2 So soosorsoooenonrsnooooooooononoan 10 If the selections are correct click Apply to complete the task Chapter 6 Storage migration 295 11 When you click Close the program returns to the Modify
159. 0 1 5 Managing FlashCopy mappings The FlashCopy presets cover the most frequently used FlashCopy configurations for general situations However customized FlashCopy mappings are still necessary in some complicated scenarios Creating FlashCopy mappings You can create FlashCopy mappings through the FlashCopy window 1 Select the volume that you want to be the source volume for the FlashCopy mapping and click Advanced FlashCopy from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 14 2 Alternatively select the volume and right click E Actions c Fior Volume Raro ES Capacly TeshCom vot amcm eencopyvort EA a FeshcopsVolt exe Fusncopyop w Fusncomvies Create Snapahot Fastcopyveis 2805 Tashcomven Create Backup a u Faencopyverr Advanced FlashCopy Create New Target voumes lt I Redrookvole show Rolatoa Volumos Use Existing Target Volumes T nom x Eu LOS MB Figure 10 14 Create advanced FlashCopy 3 You can Create New Target Volumes as part of the mapping process or Use Existing Target Volumes We describe creating volumes next To use existing volumes see Using existing target volumes on page 480 Creating target volumes Complete the following steps to create target volumes 1 Click Create new target volumes if you have not yet created the target volume
160. 08 tese Pot 9 50098 Wearine Poor 3 50068 Meacine Poot PAAT Delotothis Copy EasyTier Poot Poot Mescine Poot Figure 8 69 Make primary Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 407 If high read performance is demanded another possibility is to place the primary copy in an solid state drive SSD pool and the secondary copy in an hard disk drive HDD pool This action maximizes the read performance of the volume and makes sure that you have synchronized second copy in your less expensive disk pool It is possible to migrate online copies between Storage Pools For more information about how to select which copy you want to migrate see 8 4 9 Migrating a volume to another Storage Pool on page 393 2 Click Make Primary and the role of the copy is changed to primary 3 Click Close when the task completes The volume copy feature is also a powerful option for migrating volumes as described in 8 6 6 Migrating volumes by using the volume copy features on page 413 8 6 1 Thin provisioned menu The Thin Provisioned menu includes the same functions that are described in Shrinking thin provisioned space on page 404 Expanding thin provisioned space on page 405 and Editing thin provisioned properties on page 406 Figure 8 70 shows the Thin Provisioned menu items es esc ee Create Voume
161. 14 should open Software SCS Adapter A new software iSCSI adapter will be added tothe Storage Adapters list After it has been added select the software ISCSL adapter in the list and click on Properties to complete the configuration Figure 4 14 Confirm addition of the Software iSCSI Adapter Click OK to confirm The Software iSCSI Adapter should now be listed under Storage Adapters as shown in Figure 4 15 gar a us p rem Figure 4 15 The Storage Adapters view showing the newly added iSCSI Software Adapter Chapter 4 Host configuration 167 6 To find the iSCSI initiator name and configure the iSCSI Software Adapter right click the adapter and click Properties The window shown in Figure 4 16 should open Make a note of the initiator name and perform any other necessary configuration rer tesis Practice sioe sciret pu la is08 0Lcon reed Xara pel Twroetdaoveynehuds send Targets curs Mene 22 Figure 4 16 Properties of the iSCSI software adapter The VMware ESXi 5 5 iSCSI initiator is now enabled and ready for use with Storwize V3700 The next step required is to configure the Ethernet adapter ports 168 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Configuring Ethernet ports To configure Ethernet adapter ports for iSCSI attachment in VMware ESXi
162. 141021 332321 Figure 9 27 Download dpa heat fle Log file creation Depending on your workload and configuration it can take up to 24 hours until a new Easy Tier log file is created 4 You can also use the search field on the right to filter your search as shown in Figure 9 28 ddumps dpa heat 1802267 1 141021 142015 dat ddumpssidpa heat 7002207 1 141023 111255 at2 ump host 100220744540 2061 aata dumpeidpa_heat 7802207 1 441026 110419 data Figure 9 28 Filter your search 5 Depending on your browser settings the file is downloaded to your default location or you are prompted to save it to your computer This file can be analyzed as described in 9 7 IBM Storage Tier Advisor Too on page 446 9 6 Easy Tier configuration using the CLI The process used to enable IBM Storwize V3700 Easy Tier using the GUI is described in 9 5 Easy Tier configuration using the GUI on page 431 Easy Tier can also be configured using the CLI For the advanced user this method offers more options for Easy Tier configuration Before you use the CLI you must configure CLI access as described in Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 440 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Readability In most examples shown in this section many lines were deleted in the command output or responses so that you can concentrate on the information that is related to Easy Tier 9 6 1 Enablin
163. 2 Power down the system a Browse to Monitoring System b Click the Actions menu c Select Power Off as shown in Figure 11 81 Ada Enclosure Rename system Turn OFF Al Identify LEDS Update Figure 11 81 Powering off the system 3 Power Off confirmation window opens prompting for confirmation to shut down the cluster Ensure that all FlashCopy Metro Mirror Global Mirror data migration operations and forced deletions are stopped or allowed to complete before continuing 630 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 Enter the provided confirmation code and click Power Off to begin the shutdown process as shown in Figure 11 82 Power Off System ITS0_V3700 x Powering off the system causes all data to become inaccessible until the system is powered back on To confirm enter the code Figure 11 82 Power Off system confirmation 5 Wait for the power LED on both node canisters in the control enclosure to flash at 1 Hz which indicates that the shutdown operation completed 1 Hz is half as fast as the drive indicator LED Tip When you shut down an IBM Storwize V3700 it does not automatically restart You must manually restart the system by removing and reapplying power Shutting down by using the CLI The CLI can also be used to shut down an IBM Storwize V3700 The CLI can be accessed on Windows using the PuTTY utility Warning If you are shutting down the entire system you
164. 3 1 1 5 15 online member hdd 136 268 3 0 1 4 16 online spare sas hdd 136 28 1 3 17 online candidate sas hdd 278 968 1 24 18 online candidate sas hdd 278 958 1 21 2 Run the command to apply drive firmware as shown in Example 11 8 Example 11 8 Applying drive firmware to a single disk Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser applydrivesoftware file 182072 DRIVE 20140826 type firmware drive 12 1BM_Storwize 1750 13700 superuser gt 3 With Storwize code V7 2 or later as shown in Example 11 9 is possible to upgrade all drives using the a11 switch Example 11 9 Applying drive firmware to all drives Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser applydrivesoftware file 1BM2072 DRIVE 20140826 type firmware a11 Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser 4 The command takes roughly two minutes per drive to complete To confirm that all disks have been upgraded rerun the upgrade test utility or check the internal storage from the GUI Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot 665 SAN Boot IBM Storwize V3700 supports SAN Boot for Windows VMware and many other operating systems OSs It is also possible to migrate SAN Boot volumes from other storage systems onto the Storwize V3700 Each implementation or migration will be subtly different depending on the OS host bus adapter HBA and multipath driver to be used SAN Boot support can also change This is therefore beyond the scope of this book
165. 3 1 Creating FC hosts 4 3 2 Configuring IBM Storwize V3700 for FC connectivity 4 3 3 Creating iSCSI hosts 4 3 4 Configuring IBM Storwize V3700 for iSCSI host connectivity 4 3 5 Creating SAS hosts aes E P Chapter 5 Volume configuration 5 1 Creating volumes in IBM Storwize V3700 5 1 1 Creating generic volumes 5 1 2 Creating thin provisioned volumes 5 1 3 Creating mirrored volumes 5 1 4 Creating thin mirrored volumes 5 2 Mapping volumes to hosts 5 2 1 Mapping newly created volumes using Create and Map to Host 5 2 2 Manually mapping volumes to hosts 5 3 Discovering mapped volumes from host systems 5 3 1 Discovering Fibre Channel volumes from Windows 2012 R2 5 3 2 Discovering iSCSI volumes from Windows 2012 R2 5 3 3 Discovering SAS volumes from Windows 2012 R2 5 3 4 Discovering Fibre Channel volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 5 3 5 Discovering iSCSI volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 5 3 6 Discovering SAS volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 Chapter 6 Storage migration 6 1 Interoperability and compatibility 6 2 Storage migration considerations 6 2 1 External virtualization capability 6 2 2 Overview of the Storage Migration wizard 6 2 3 Storage Migration wizard tasks 6 2 4 Storage migration example configuration 6 2 5 Recording migration information 6 3 Storage migration example Chapter 7 Storage Pools 7 1 Working with internal drives 7 1 1 Internal Storage w
166. 4 Creating generic volumes using the Create Volumes wizard 202 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 Click Advanced to view more options as shown in Figure 5 5 haracteristics Capacity Management Mirroring Figure 5 5 Advanced Settings for volume creation Some important points to note For generic volumes capacity management and mirroring do not apply There is an option to set the preferred node within the input output Group that owns the volume The suggested option here is to set this to Automatic and allow the system to balance volume I O across both node canisters in the I O Group 5 When you are done click OK to return to the main wizard 6 Click Create or Create and Map to Host when you are finished Create and Map to Host creates the volumes and then takes you to the Host Mapping wizard which is described in 5 2 Mapping volumes to hosts on page 213 Important The Create and Map to Host option is disabled if no hosts are configured on the IBM Storwize V3700 For more information about configuring hosts see Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 Chapter 5 Volume configuration 203 7 If you clicked Create the wizard completes as shown in Figure 5 6 Create Volumes Task completed 100 View more aetas Figure 5 6 Completion of the Create Volumes wizard Click Close to return to the Volumes view which now lists your newly created volume as
167. 474 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 The wizard guides you to choose a preset as shown in Figure 10 15 Choose one preset that has the most similar configuration to the one that is required Create FlashCopy Mapping x id ra g Advanced Stings 8 Figure 10 15 Choose a preset most similar to your requirement 3 Click Advanced Settings to make any appropriate adjustments to the advanced setlings a The following default advanced settings for the Snapshot preset are shown in Figure 10 16 Background Copy 0 Incremental No Auto Delete after completion No Cleaning Rate 0 Create FlashCopy Mapping x Advanced Settings Background Copy Rate No Background Incremental Delete mapping after completion CleaningRate 0 a Figure 10 16 Default settings for the snapshot preset Chapter 10 Copy services 475 476 b The following Advanced Settings for the Clone preset shown in Figure 10 17 Background Copy 50 Incremental No Auto Delete after completion Yes Cleaning Rate 50 Create FlashCopy Mapping x Select a Preset g d Snapshot Clone Backup Advanced Settings Background Copy Rate Slower 0 star 100 Z Incremental v Delete mapping after completion Cleaning Rate 50 Figure 10 17 Default settings for the clone preset I
168. 5 complete the steps described in 5 3 5 Discovering iSCSI volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 on page 235 This procedure is common to all attachment types 5 3 5 Discovering iSCSI volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 This section describes how to discover iSCSI volumes Discovering mapped volumes To discover mapped iSCSI volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 complete the following steps 1 Connect to your ESXi Server using the VMware vSphere Client Browse to the Configuration tab and select Storage Adapters Chapter 5 Volume configuration 235 236 2 This opens the view shown in Figure 5 57 ons m Figure 5 57 The storage adapters view in VMware vSphere Client Right click the iSCSI Software Adapter and click Properties The iSCSI initiator properties window opens Go to Dynamic Discovery and click Add as shown in Figure 5 58 General Netnerk Configuration Dynan Discovery statie Send Targets Discover SCS targets dynamical y from the folowing Pr Pv hostname ELTE T fates nene cose Figure 5 58 Discover iSCSI targets dynamically from the iSCSI Initiator Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The window shown in Figure 5 59 opens Enter a target IP address which should be of the IPs configured during setup as described earlier in this book The target IP address is the iSCSI IP addre
169. 5 5 on page 235 This procedure is common to all attachment types Chapter 5 Volume configuration 247 248 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Storage migration This chapter describes the steps involved in using the Storage Migration wizard The Storage Migration wizard is used to migrate data from existing external storage systems to the internal capacity of the IBM Storwize V3700 Migrating data from other storage systems to the Storwize V3700 storage system consolidates storage and enables the Storwize V3700 functionality This includes the graphical user interface GUI internal virtualization thin provisioning IBM Easy Tier and IBM FlashCopy to be realized across all volumes When the migration is complete the external system can be retired This chapter includes the following topics Interoperability and compatibility gt Storage migration considerations Storage migration example configuration Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 249 6 1 Interoperability and compatibility Interoperability is an important consideration when a new storage system is set up in an environment that contains existing storage infrastructure This section describes how to check that the storage environment the existing storage system and IBM Storwize V3700 are ready for the data migration process ensure system interoperability and compatibility between all elements connected to the storage area network SA
170. 59 3 To configure the IP address click Properties The window shown in Figure 4 9 should open Netmokkra Shang Cornet usna bac PROTON PT Dual Fot Seve leper Cotone cometon usesthe folowng tens 1 f Gient for Microsoft Networks 1 Packet V anc Shara fr Meet mo terse Adapter pier toe L klarer Topology Discovery VO Drvar f LricLaver Topology Discover esconder 19 intemat Protacel Version TCF IFv6 AB is Voin Figure 4 9 Ethernet Properties 4 Ifyou are using IPv6 select Internet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 and click Properties Otherwise select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and click Properties to configure an IPv4 address 5 For IPv4 the window shown in Figure 4 10 on page 161 should open To manually set the IP select Use the following address and enter an IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway Set the DNS server address if required Click OK to confirm 160 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 General Conf raton fou cen cet settings assioned automaticaly f your rear supports thie canabty Othermice you need to ask your network adririctrator forthe appropriate IP Ose the folowing DNS server addresses ertnos upon ext Figure 4 10 Configuring an IPv4 address in Windows 2012 R2 6 Repeat th
171. 60 400600 MigrationPoct 1024 Wo LS pet Sy 25 ETE el a oo or me See e amp Testo Migrate io Another Pool J i Figure 8 60 Add Mirrored Copy 2 Select if the volume should be Generic or Thin Provisioned select the Storage Pool in which the new copy should be created and click Add Copy as shown in Figure 8 61 ere apy VOL Emir Pom x creates two identical copies of e volume ad 1 ench copy belongs toa derent pool Gure cone ro LLL Figure 8 61 Select Storage Pool 402 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The copy is created after clicking Add Copy and data starts to synchronize as background task Figure 8 62 shows that the volume named Win2012 Vol 02 now has two volume copies that are stored in two different Storage Pools and that the new copy is thin provisioned conretere 0000000000001 13068 Migrs onPoo 1024 Vol 02 Online 8j 590GB Poo copy ar v Onine 54068 EasyTer Poo Copy Nearline Pool WITZ VOLU Wesriine Poo Voiumeoot Onine 800GB EasyTier Poo v omne 200 90 615 Neartine Poot Testvol4 Onine 200 00 GB Neartine Pool Teswols v onn 200 00 6B Figure 8
172. 7 8e card and did not have to configure HBA parameters beyond the default settings It is advised to check the parameters using the HBA BIOS or vendor tools to confirm that they are suitable for your requirements Confirming multipath support for SAS on VMware ESXi As with FC we can use native ESXi multipathing for SAS attachment on VMware ESXi 5 5 See Chapter 4 2 4 VMware ESXi 5 5 Preparing for FC attachment on page 163 for more details Determining host WWPNs The worldwide port names WWPNs of the SAS HBA are required to configure host attachment on the IBM Storwize V3700 The host WWPNs are not directly available through VMware vSphere Client However you can find them using vendor tools or the HBA BIOS The method described in Chapter 4 2 3 Windows 2012 R2 Preparing for SAS attachment on page 162 also works These are the basic steps required to prepare a VMware ESXi 5 5 host for SAS attachment We provide more information later in this book For further information and guidance on attaching storage with VMware ESXi 5 5 the following document published by VMware is useful resource http pubs vmware com vsphere 55 topic com vmware ICbase PDF vsphere esxi vcenter server 552 storage guide pdf Chapter 4 Host configuration 179 g hosts in IBM Storwize V3700 This section describes how to create FC iSCSI and SAS hosts using the IBM Storwize 3700 GUI We assume that the hosts have been previously prepar
173. 740 doc v3700 ichome 740 html The IBM Storwize V3700 is a virtualized storage solution that groups its internal drives into RAID arrays which are called managed disks MDisks These MDisks are then grouped into Storage Pools ftom which volumes are created and provisioned out to hosts Storage Pools are normally created with MDisks of the same type and capacity of drive Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Volumes can be moved non disruptively between Storage Pools with differing performance characteristics For example a volume can be moved between a Storage Pool made up of NL SAS drives to a Storage Pool made up of SAS drives The IBM Storwize V3700 system also provides several configuration options that are aimed at simplifying the implementation process It also provides configuration presets and automated wizards called Directed Maintenance Procedures DMP to help resolve any events that might occur IBM Storwize V3700 system provides a simple graphical user interface GUI that is designed to allow storage to be deployed quickly and efficiently The GUI runs on any supported browser The management GUI contains a series of preestablished configuration options called presets that use commonly used settings to quickly configure objects on the system Presets are available for creating volumes and IBM FlashCopy mappings and for setting up a RAID configuration You can also use the command line interface CLI to set up or control the sy
174. 9 PuTTY 2 In the right side pane under the Specify the destination you want to connect to section select SSH 3 Under the Close window on exit section select Only on clean exit which ensures that if there are any connection errors they are displayed in the user s window Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot 655 4 From the Category pane on the left side of the Configuration window click Connection SSH to open the PuTTY SSH Configuration window as shown in Figure 10 Protocol options IE Dort eat a hel or command aal E Eneble compression Prefered SSH protocol version Ofmy Ot Enoytioneotione Ercvoton achetselecton olev AES SSH ory ie a na ese Denn IE Ena legacy c inde DES in SSH 2 ome Con Figure A 10 SSH protocol version 2 5 In the right side pane in the Preferred SSH protocol version section select 2 656 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 From the Category pane on the left side of the Configuration window click Connection SSH Auth 7 As shown in Figure A 11 the right side pane in the Private key file for authentication field under the Authentication Parameters section browse to or manually enter the fully qualified directory path and file name of the SSH client private key file that was created earlier for example C Support UtilsVPuTTYVicat PPK F IBiess sut
175. Add the FlashCopy mapping is listed as shown in Figure 10 26 Click the red X to delete it if the FlashCopy mapping is not the one that you want to create 4 Additional mappings can be made by selecting further source and target volumes from the drop down boxes and clicking Add When all of the FlashCopy mappings that you want are defined click Next to continue Croate Flash Copy Mapping x Scloct tho sourco and target volumes for tho FlashCopy mapping a Target Volume FlashCoprVolS FlashCopyVol4 x Figure 10 26 Add FlashCopy mapping Chapter 10 Copy services 481 5 Select the preset and if necessary adjust the settings by using the Advanced Settings section as shown in Figure 10 27 For more information about the Advanced Settings see Creating target volumes on page 474 Confirm that the settings meet your requirements and then click Next Create FlashCopy Mapping x 1 Advanced Setings Background Copy Rato Mo Sachgreund Copy Incromontal Delete mapping atter completion Cleaning Rate 0 221 er Figure 10 27 Selecta preset and make your adjustments 6 You can now add the FlashCopy mapping to a consistency group if necessary as shown in Figure 10 28 Selecting Yes displays a drop down menu from which you can select a consistency group Click Finish and the FlashCopy mapping is created with the status of 19 as shown in Figu
176. BM Storwize V3700 and insert it in your system to check the results This process can take up to 3 minutes to complete When it stops return the USB stick to the personal computer PC as shown in Figure 2 14 Storwize V3500 V3700 System Initialization Reinsert USB flash drive into personal computer 1 Remove the use fash drive fram the canister ERR 2 Romncer o Tach ni Perera emptor Management IP o gt Reinsert Drive into PC Summary 9 nesate Figure 2 14 Returning the USB stick to a PC Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 The wizard then attempts to verify connectivity to the IBM Storwize 3700 as shown in Figure 2 15 Verifying connectivity to the system Figure 2 15 Verify system connectivity Chapter 2 Initial configuration 45 9 If successful a summary page is displayed that shows the settings that were applied to the IBM Storwize V3700 as shown in Figure 2 16 Storwize V3500 3700 System Initialization Summary v Wislcome Tasks Management iP System IP Address 25 IP address 9174161198 Subnet mask 253 255 248 0 gt summary Gateway 9274167256 The following changes have been applied to the system Figure 2 16 System Initialization Summary 46 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 10 If the connectivity to the IBM Storwize V3700 cannot be verified the wizard displays the error message shown in Figure 2 17
177. Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 591 The three files that are created by the backup process are described Table 11 10 Table 11 10 File names that are created by the backup process File name Description svc config backup xnl This file contains the cluster configuration data svc config backup sh This file contains the names of the commands that were issued to create the backup of the cluster svc config backup log This file contains detail eror information that about the backup including any it be reported 11 3 2 Downloading a configuration backup by using the graphical user interface The IBM Storwize V3700 also automatically saves the configuration daily to the dunps directory Note Although the files in the dump directory are the same as those generated using the sveconfig backup command the user has no control over when they are generated To download a configuration backup file using the graphical user interface GUI complete the following steps 1 Browse to Settings Support as shown in Figure 11 20 0009 Oe Figure 11 20 Configuration backup open support pane 592 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 Select the Show full log listing option to list of the available log files that are stored on the configuration node as shown in Figure 11 21 CMON Logging Levet Low Looking for individual iog fles Show tl lo l
178. Click Email to open the pane 2 Click Enable Notifications to open the Email Event Notifications wizard Notifications Email Use his panel to configure email servers lo send alerts o specfed users ai watch s Lean Contaure Support Notifications E Figure 3 96 Notifications pane Email 130 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Email Event Notifications wizard The Email Event Notifications wizard as shown in Figure 3 97 guides the user through system location account contact and email configuration tasks welcome Welcome System Loca Fall oles con be sent to the support enter your staff or both Call woos o support conlata events coc and sends Inventory repons Support personnel can contact you to problems f Emal Senere Conor Detail gon Emal Figure 3 97 Email Event Notifications wizard SNMP event notification shown in Figure 3 98 the Notifications pane provides access to the SNMP pane To set up SNMP notification complete the following steps 1 Click SNMP to open the pane and view the configured SNMP servers Email suu Syslog ZSS Ga Figure 3 98 SNMP pane 2 A Management Information Base MIB file for SNMP can be used to configure a network management program to receive SNMP messages that are sent by the system This file can be used with SNMP messages from all versions of the software C
179. Configuration The IBM Storwize V3700 supports iSCSI connections for hosts Click iSCSI to configure the System Name iSCSI Aliases and ISNS settings Figure 3 105 shows the iSCSI Configuration pane 2 Management i Corigue system presto comeet ECS etched tasts domes GB Im m toma Pors di CORRI e m Lg Fibre Channel Por Sense gi oan car conten eS TS NN T RR e Figure 3 105 iSCSI Configuration pane Fibre Channel Connectivity The Fibre Channel Connectivity pane displays the connectivity between nodes and other storage systems and hosts that are attached through the FC network 1 Click Fibre Channel Connectivity 2 Select the required view from the View connectivity for menu 3 Click the Show Results button 136 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 3 106 shows the Fibre Channel pane with the nodes storage systems and hosts option selected Ii Fibre Channel Connectivity CO Beale 0 Nier mea a dE a Figure 8 106 Fibre Channel Connectivity pane Fibre Channel Ports The Fibre Channel Ports pane displays the Fibre Channel ports used by the system Each port is allowed to communicate with hosts and storage systems Figure 3 107 shows the Fibre Channel Ports pane A rire channel Ports Management ach pts eral across a nodes in he sten The connection adem ih wich stems me potis He
180. Details option was selected to show more information Figure 7 15 Internal drives properties Part1 2 If the Show Details option is not selected the technical information section is reduced as shown in Figure 7 16 p mom Figure 7 16 Internal drives properties no details Chapter 7 Storage Pools 317 3 A tab for the Drive Slot is available in the Properties pane as shown in Figure 7 17 to get specific information about the slot of the selected drive m Figure 7 17 Internal drive properties slot 4 Example 7 4 shows how to use the svcinfo 1sdrive CLI command to display configuration information and drive VPD Example 7 4 The use of the Isdrive command to display configuration information and drive VPD Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser svcinfo Isdrive 19 1D 19 status online error sequence number use member UID 5000cca01604272c tech type sas hdd capacity 278 966 block size 512 vendor id IBM A040 product id 109030 5560 FRU part number 00Y2429 FRU identity 11549Y7446YXXXKLG2BTYF RPM 10000 firmware level J2E9 FPGA level mdisk id 0 mdisk name mdiskl member id 6 enclosure id 1 slot id 11 node id node name quorum id port 1 status online 318 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 port 2 status online interface speed 6Gb protection enabled no drive auto manage idle Customize Columns customize columns complete the following ste
181. EqMG Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center https ibm biz BdEqPS IBM Redbooks publications about IBM Storwize V3700 https ibm biz BdEqSB IBM e learning tutorials about IBM Storwize V3700 https ibm biz BdEqMQ Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 25 IBM Storwize V3700 learning videos on YouTube Videos are available on YouTube that describe the Storwize GUI and are available at the Uniform Resource Locators URLs shown in Table 1 6 Table 1 6 Videos available on YouTube Video description Introducing IBM Storwize V3700 URL http www youtube con watch v AePPKiXE amp XM IBM Storwize V7000 Volume management http ww youtube con watch v YXeKqHBSd9o IBM Storwize V7000 Migration http www youtube con watch v dXxnUNGdk74 IBM Storwize V7000 Introduction to FlashCopy http www youtube com watch v MXWgGWjBZG4 IBM SAN Volume Controller and Storwize V7000 Performance Panel Sped up HD http www youtube con watch v 7noC7 1tLkiis IBM Storwize V3700 Hardware Installation http ww youtube con watch v VuEfnfXihrs IBM Storwize V3700 Effortless Management http www youtube con watch v BfGbKicCsRA IBM Storwize V3700 Initial Setup http w youtube con watch v ojSuhTYe6gg IBM Storwize V7000 Installation http www youtube con watch v kCCFXMSZHVA These videos are applicable not only to IBM Storwize V3700 but also to other
182. FC or SAS portis identified by their physical port number and worldwide port name WWPN 1 3 IBM Storwize V3700 models The IBM Storwize V3700 platform consists of several different models More information For more information about the features benefits and specifications of IBM Storwize V3700 models see the following website http www ibm com systems storage disk storwize_v3700 overview html The information in this book is accurate at the time of writing However as the IBM Storwize V3700 matures expect to see new features and enhanced specifications The IBM Storwize V3700 models are described in Table 1 2 All models have two node canisters C models are control enclosures and E models are expansion enclosures Table 1 2 Storwize V3700 models Model Total System Cache Drive slots 2072 12C with two node 8 gigabytes GB upgradeable 12x 3 5 inch per enclosure canisters 1016 GB 2072 24C with two node 8GB upgradeable to 16GB 24x 2 5 inch per enclosure canisters 2072 2DC direct current dc 8 GB upgradeable to 16GB 24x 2 powered with two node inch per enclosure canisters 2072 12E one expansion 12x 3 5 inch enclosure 2072 24E one expansion 24x 2 5 inch enclosure 2072 2DE dc powered with N A 24x 2 5 inch one expansion enclosure Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 5 Figure 1 1 shows the front view of t
183. Figure 1 PuTTY key generator 2 Make sure that the following options are selected Type of key to generate SSH2 RSA Number of bits in a generated key 1024 Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot 649 Click Generate and move the cursor over the blank area to generate the keys as shown in Figure A 2 PuTTY Key Generator Kev Conversus Hep key Please generate some randomness novia the mouse over the Herk area Actions Germ a kev pat Leod on editing pivate ey fie i oeneiiedkey k Parametere Typs ol keyto geri HARSA Munter of Ets na generated key Figure A 2 Generate keys Generating keys The blank area that is indicated in this step is the large blank gray rectangle on the GUI inside the section of the GUI labeled Key indicated by the mouse pointer Continue to move the mouse pointer over the blank area until the progress bar reaches the far right side This action generates random characters to create a unique key pair More information about generating keys can be found in the PuTTY user manual This is in the Help drop down menu in the PuTTY GUI 650 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 After the keys are generated save them for later use Click Save public key as shown in Figure A 3 Attention You should always set a key pass phrase before saving the key Not doing means that the key will be stored on you
184. Figure 6 47 Naming host selecting ports and setting advanced options 288 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 Click Add Host to complete the task as shown in Figure 6 48 Notice that the new host now displays in the background list Task completed View more deta Creating the bost Kindows2012 Running command svetask abhost forse iogrp io name Windovs20t2 Coe 5000625200556140 S000625200556061 erpe generic The host ITD 0l was successfully created Symchcontzing memory cache The task 2008 complete Figure 6 48 Create host task complete Chapter 6 Storage migration 289 6 Click Close and select the new host definition as shown in Figure 6 49 Click Next to move to the next phase of the data migration Figure 6 49 Configure host with host listed 290 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Map volumes to hosts This step of the wizard enables you to select the newly migrated volumes rename them and map them to hosts 1 Start in the Map Volumes to Hosts pane as shown in Figure 6 50 Storage ration War Map your nosts 1o newy migrate volumes by seectng volume an Map to Host Aere mapping complete scan for new den oss vey ne Actions ite Figure 6 50 Map Volumes to Hosts pane 2 The image mode volumes are listed the names of which are assigned automatically by the Storwize V3700 storage system The names can
185. Hoo c gt E zx E S minute Peak 3t MBps SAS ET Figure 3 54 Peak SAS Interface usage value over the last 5 minutes 3 4 2 Pools menu The Pools menu provides access to the Volumes by Pools Internal Storage MDisks by Pools and System Migration functions as shown in Figure 3 55 Figure 3 55 Pools menu 104 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Volumes by Pool pane Select Volumes by Pool in the Pools menu to open the pane The Pool Filter can be used to view volumes associated to a particular Pool This view makes it easy to manage volumes and determine the amount of real capacity that is available for further use Figure 3 56 shows the Volumes by Pool pane V3700_R5PooL 01 Online BS PTT m deu 5 E 295 DATUR TRU eed PlaehCopyVol Online S000 Ga Figure 3 56 Volumes by Pools pane Volume Allocation The upper right corner of the Volumes by Pool pane shows the Volume Allocation which in the following example shows physical capacity of 738 00 gibibytes GiB and a used capacity 52 00 GiB in the green portion The red bar shows the threshold at which a warning is generated when the used capacity in the pool first exceeds the threshold that is set for its physical capacity By default this threshold is set to 80 but can be altered in the Pool properties Figure 3 57 shows the volume allocation information that is displayed in the Volum
186. Host Adapter BIOS Queue depth 4 isabled unless the host is configured for SAN Boot Configuring QLogic HBAs for Windows After the device driver and firmware are installed you must configure the HBAs 1 Use the QLogic QConvergeConsole software or reboot into the HBA BIOS 2 Load the adapter defaults 3 Setthe following values Host Adapter BIOS Disabled unless the host is configured for SAN Boot Adapter Hard Loop ID Disabled Connection Options 1 point to point only LUNs Per Target 0 Port Down Retry Count 15 Configuring Emulex HBAs for Windows After the device driver and firmware are installed you must configure the HBAs 1 Use the Emulex HBAnyware software or reboot into the HBA BIOS 2 Load the defaults 3 Set topology to 1 10F Port Fabric Setting the Windows disk I O timeout value To configure the disk I O timeout value on Windows 2012 R2 complete the following steps 1 Press Win R 2 In the Run window enter regedit and press Enter This opens the registry editor 3 In the registry editor go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE System CurrentControl Set services Disk TimeOutValue 4 Double click TimeOutValue or right click it and select Modify to view and modify the current timeout value The window shown in Figure 4 1 opens Figure 4 1 Editing the disk O timeout value on Windows 2012 R2 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The default timeout is 60 seconds and this is the
187. Host Mappings pane If any errors were made you can volumes at this stage 12 1 everything is correct use the Cancel option as shown in Figure 6 58 This is normal and is not an indication that the wizard is being canceled The volumes have been successfully mapped indicated by the fact that there are no volumes highlighted in yellow and the only option available is Cancel If you use the Map Volumes button rather than the Apply button the Modify Host Mappings closes when the task window closes Figure 6 58 Canceling out of Modify Host Mappings Click Cancel to return to the data migration wizard and click Next to continue 296 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Select Storage Pool To continue with the Storage Migration wizard complete the following steps 1 You must now select a Storage Pool to migrate the imported volumes to as shown in Figure 6 59 The destination Storage Pool must be an internal Storage Pool on the Storwize V3700 Ensure that there is enough space in the selected Storage Pool to accommodate the migrated volume The migration task runs in the background and results in a copy of the data being placed on the MDisks in the selected Storage Pool The process uses the volume mirroring function that is included with the Storwize V3700 tect ne pot to migrate me porte volumes 1 yov elec poci no data wie mirate use me maraon nan ma managamant Ao sentu mara
188. IBM Storwize products because the GUI interface functions and features are similar to all products Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Initial configuration This chapter provides a description of the initial configuration steps for the IBM Storwize 3700 This chapter includes the following topics gt gt gt gt Planning for IBM Storwize V3700 installation First time setup Initial configuration steps Call Home email event alert and inventory settings Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 27 2 1 Hardware installation planning Proper planning before the actual physical installation of the hardware is required The following checklist of requirements can be used to plan your installation Install the hardware as described in IBM Storwize V3700 Quick Installation Guide GC27 4219 02 For more information about planning the IBM Storwize V3700 environment see the following website https ibm biz BdEzvz T An appropriate 19 inch rack with 2 20 U of space should be available depending on the number of enclosures to install Each enclosure measures 2 U and a single control enclosure with up to nine expansion enclosures constitutes an IBM Storwize V3700 system D There should be redundant power outlets in the rack for each of the two power cords that are included per enclosure In all 2 20 outlets are required depending on the number of enclosures to install The power cords con
189. If you must attach hosts running any other supported operating system OS the required information can be found in the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center http www ibm com support knowl edgecenter STLM5A 1anding V3700 welcome html Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 2 Preparing the host operating system This section describes how to prepare the host attachment that is required to use IBM Storwize V3700 with FC iSCSI or SAS connectivity general the following steps are required to prepare a host to connect to IBM Storwize V3700 1 Make sure that the current supported system updates are applied to your host operating system 2 Make sure that the HBAs are physically installed on the host 3 Make sure that the current supported HBA firmware and driver levels are installed on your host 4 Configure the HBA parameters Although settings are given for each Host OS in the following sections review the IBM V3700 Information Center to determine the currently supported settings Configure host input output I O parameters for example the disk I O timeout value Install and configure multipath software Determine the host worldwide port names WWPNs Connect the HBA ports to switches using the appropriate cables or directly attach to the ports on IBM Storwize V3700 9 Configure the switches if applicable 10 Configure SAN Boot optional Steps 1 9 are covered in this chapter For information ab
190. Initialization System initialization completed successful ou are being redirected to the management E NL Figure 2 18 System Initialization complete 13 Click OK and the wizard automatically redirects you to the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI and you are prompted to enter new password for the superuser account as shown in Figure 2 19 Choose the password and click Log in to continue the initial setup of the IBM Storwize V3700 For more information see 2 9 Initial configuration on page 49 Storwize V3700 Storage Management c Login uae eee Figure 2 19 First log on 48 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 9 Initial configuration This section describes how to complete the initial configuration including the following tasks Setting name date and time gt Initial storage configuration using the setup wizard If you just completed the initial setup you must log on to the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI Otherwise complete the following steps to complete the initial configuration process 1 Start the configuration wizard using a web browser on a workstation and point it to the system management IP address that was defined in step 3 on page 42 Enter the superuser password set in step 13 on page 48 as shown in Figure 2 20 277 Storage Management User name passwort Login S Figure 2 20 Setup wizard Log in Chapter 2 Initial configuration 49 2
191. MDisks Their volume definition is deleted but the data on the imported MDisk remains untouched After you delete the pool all of the managed or image mode MDisks in the pool return to a status of unmanaged Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Child Pools Figure 7 67 shows the list of Child Pools that are dependent on a storage parent pool A Storage Pool can be either a Parent or Child type In our example we show the Child Pools underlying on the Y3700 Poo12 parent Storage Pool For more information about Child Pools see 7 4 Working with Child Pools Child Pools for iter 8 V3TK_ChildP 4 1000098 1000068 0 e Figure 7 67 Child Pools list 7 4 Working with Child Pools A Child Pool is an object similar to a Storage Pool and is a user configurable object However a user can create a Child Pool through the CLI only A storage parent pool is a collection of MDisks that provides the pool of storage from which volumes are provisioned A Child Pool is in and gets capacity exclusively from one Storage Pool A user can specify the Child Pool capacity at creation The Child Pool can grow and decrease non disruptively The Child Pool shares the properties of the parent Storage Pool and provides most of the functions that Storage Pools have The Child Pool has the following common properties and behaviors ID Name Status Volume Count Warning Thresholds Child Pools can have t
192. Mak TOPS zs Exceeded Figure 9 32 Storage Pool performance statistics Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 449 The blue portion of the bar represents the percentage range which is below the tier average utilization of MDisk IOPS The red portion of the bar represents percentage range which is above the maximum allowed IOPS threshold In this example the STAT shows 131 of utilization for the Enterprise Tier so the IOPS exceeded the threshold by 31 The blue portion shows 90 out of 131 approximately 69 did not exceed the threshold for this particular tier The red portion shows 41 out of 131 approximately 31 of IOPS exceeded the threshold and the extents are potential candidates to move to a higher tier In the Workload Distribution Across Tier section the STAT shows the skew of the workload of the Storage Pool selected The X axis horizontal denotes the percentage of extents in use The Y axis vertical denotes the percentage of extents that are busy out of the given percentage from the X axis In this graph for instance when you look at 10 of the extents in the pool about 84 of these are determined to be very busy Figure 9 33 shows an example of this graph Projected Workload Distribution on Top Tier on Secondary Storage Device made Figure 9 33 STAT Tool project workload distribution 450 In the Volume Heat Distribution section the STAT shows volume heat distribution of all vo
193. Mapping in the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 34 Create FlashCopy Mapping _ i Actions Fiter El Mapping State x Coming Fuscop oD Fasncopyvoit ES 3 temast conina Vol temap2 Pasncopyvoiz Create FlashCopy More to Consistency Group D Derete Hasna per Edi Proportios Figure 10 34 Rename a FlashCopy mapping 3 Enterthe new name forthe FlashCopy mapping as shown in Figure 10 35 Click Rename to finish Rename FlashCopy Mapping x New Name femap2 femap2 Figure 10 35 Enter a new name for the FlashCopy mapping Chapter 10 Copy services 487 Deleting a FlashCopy mapping delete FlashCopy mapping complete the following steps 1 Select the FlashCopy target volume in the FlashCopy window 2 Click Delete Mapping in the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 36 or right click the selected volume tons V fimer EI Source Volume Target Volume Progress Group FlsshCopyioit EX 1 Create FlashCopy Mapping Move to Consistency Group Figure 10 36 Select Delete Mapping FlashCopy Mapping state If the FlashCopy mapping is in the Copying state it must be stopped before it is deleted 488 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 You must confirm your action to delete FlashCopy mappings in the window that opens as shown in Figure 10 37 Verif
194. N fabric check the proposed configuration with the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center SSIC SSIC can confirm whether the solution is supported and provide recommendations for hardware and software levels If the required configuration is not listed for support in the SSIC contact your IBM sales representative and ask for a request for price quotation RPQ for your specific configuration For more information about the IBM SSIC see the following website http www ibm com systems support storage ssic interoperability wss 6 2 Storage migration considerations The Storwize V3700 Storage Migration wizard simplifies the migration task The wizard features easy to follow panes that guide you through the entire process 6 2 1 External virtualization capability To migrate data from an existing storage system to the Storwize V3700 it is necessary to use the built in external virtualization capability of the Storwize V3700 This capability places external Fibre Channel FC connected logical units LUs under the control of the Storwize V3700 External virtualization also enables Storwize V3700 to control serial attached Small Computer System Interface serial attached SCSI known as SAS connected LUs When the volumes are virtualized hosts continue to access them but do so through the IBM Storwize V3700 which acts as a proxy Restriction The IBM Storwize V3700 only supports external virtualization for the purposes of data mi
195. NEN NE e i S ERNE E le TANG Mee 7 One i E 2 95 B ammon Member omne a H Greene 5 emos V omme E p Mete i amp z A EE ne eum a a Figure 7 22 Click Configure Storage 324 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 configuration wizard opens and guides you through the process of configuring internal storage Figure 7 23 shows an example in which 38 drives are available for configuration Tonngure Storage Select this opt RAD ie Use this wizard to allocate RAID arrays to After this configuration wizara completes you can create volumes from these ponis Storage Four 22arves 276 99 GI Enterprise 10K rom lives 278 30 GIB Erterre 15K pm 1 drives 46525 GB Nearline 7200 im disce 887 86 Errore 10K Use the recommended configuration configure ind drive cias figuration Abu le drives based on recommendad values recommended configuration uses the build arrays that are protected with the appropriate amount of spare Figure 7 23 Available drives for new MDisk 4 If there are internal drives with a status of Unused a window opens which gives the option to include them in the RAID configuration as shown in Figure 7 24 ate corau You havo 6 unused dros Wou
196. O When data is copied between volumes it is copied in units of address space known as grains Grains are units of data that are grouped to optimize the use of the bitmap that track changes to the data between the source and target volume You have the option of using 64 kilobytes or 256 KB grain sizes 256 KB is the default The FlashCopy bitmap contains 1 bit for each grain and is used to track whether the source grain was copied to the target The 64 KB grain size uses bitmap space at a rate of four times the default 256 KB size The FlashCopy bitmap dictates the following read and write behaviors for the source and target volumes Read I O request to source Reads are performed from the source volume the same as for non FlashCopy volumes gt Write I O request to source Writes to the source cause the grains of the source volume to be copied to the target if they were not already and then the write is performed to the source Read I O request to target Reads are performed from the target if the grains were already copied Otherwise the read is performed from the source Write I O request to target Writes to the target cause the grain to be copied from the source to the target first unless the entire grain is being written in which case the write completes to the target only Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 FlashCopy mappings A FlashCopy mapping defines the relationship between a source volume and a target
197. OS R X 10 7 Red Hat Enterprise Linux RHEL Server 5 Ubuntu desktop 11 04 We use Windows in the following examples Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Complete the following steps to complete the initial setup using the USB key 1 Plug the USB key into Windows system and start the initialization tool If the system is configured to autorun USB keys the initialization tool starts automatically Otherwise open My Computer and double click the InitTool bat file The opening window of the tool is shown in Figure 2 9 After the tool is started select Next Storwize V3500 V3700 System Initialization Welcome gt welcome e The wizard configures a rev system resats the suneruser password or edits the service eH IP address Use Hash onve Note This process requires that you have physical access to the system Eau Figure 2 9 System Initialization Welcome window Mac OS or Linux For Mac OS or Linux complete the following steps Open a terminal window b Locate the root directory of the USB flash drive For Mac systems the root directory is often in the Volunes directory For Linux systems the root directory is often in the media directory automatic mount system is used the root directory can be located by entering the mount command c Change the directory to the root directory of the flash drive d Enter the following command sh InitTool sh Chapter 2 Init
198. PROMOTIONS Find and read thousands of IBM Redbooks publications Search bookmark save and organize favorites Get up to the minute Redbooks news and announcements gt Link to the latest Redbooks blogs and videos E3 Extending Your Business to Mobile Devices with IBM Worklight Get the latest version of the Redbooks Mobile App Promote your business in an IBM Redbooks publication Place a Sponsorship Promotion in an IBM Redbooks publication featuring your business or solution with a link to your web site Qualified IBM Business Partners may place a full page promotion in the most popular Redbooks publications Imagine the power of being seen by users who download milions of Redbooks publications each year About Redbooks Business Partner Programs THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Preface Organizations of all sizes are faced with the challenge of managing massive volumes of increasingly valuable data However storing this data can be costly and extracting value from the data is becoming more and more difficult IT organizations have limited resources but must stay responsive to dynamic environments and act quickly to consolidate simplify and optimize their IT infrastructures The IBM Storwize V3700 system provides a solution that is affordable easy to use and self optimizing which enables organizations to overcome these storage challenges Storwize V3700 delivers efficient entry
199. S3200 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 Select the volume to be mapped to the host and using the data recorded in 6 2 5 Recording migration information on page 252 configure the correct SCSI ID for the volume Click Finish to make the mapping as shown in Figure 6 39 deem Mro D somo gt Centon tse ee Create Hostto Logical Drive Mappings Select Logical Drives iw ad aste Wap one or es den ect mare than one ges deve LuNnarbers generated aerate for ges cme Sec toda ds pM Fliegen cela rit uri Ei Figure 6 39 Selecting volume to map to Storwize V3700 host IBM DS3200 Chapter 6 Storage migration 281 6 Aconfirmation box opens to show that the mapping has been created as shown in Figure 6 40 Sytem Sarge DS forage Manager 10 Subsystem Management Cantare gt Crente Hast agen Ore peo iy Croato Host to cgi ent sie Map cone vel thene dre Logen De gt Processed Lof logea dives Carpeta mans as Lu RADI p RAIDS sega Figure 6 40 Mapping complete IBM DS3200 7 Click OK and you are then prompted to create another mapping as shown in Figure 6 41
200. Telephone Ahernate p Figure 2 46 Email notification 4 You must enter accurate and complete information about both the company and the contact The Email Contact is the person who will be contacted by the support center about any issues and for further information You might want to enter a network operations center Email Address here for 24x7 cover Enter the IP address and the server port for one or more of the email servers that send an email to IBM If you would like email alerts to be sent to other recipients in addition to IBM add their addresses into the Email Notification section Use the plus symbol to add further recipients and select one or more event types for each user A maximum of 12 users and a maximum of six email servers are supported 5 Click Save when you finish 2 9 3 Service Assistant tool The IBM Storwize V3700 is initially configured with three IP addresses gt One service IP address for each of two node canisters One management IP address which is set when the cluster is started Chapter 2 Initial configuration 67 The following methods are available to configure the IBM Storwize V3700 system The InitTool program as described in 2 8 First time setup on page 40 The Service Assistant SA tool which is described next Additionally the Management IP and Service IP addresses can be changed within the GUI as described in Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview on page 71
201. The d switch shows firmware details for every disk drive Omitting the d switch gives a summary Example 11 6 shows the output of this command with both switches included Example 11 6 Test utility output IBM Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser svcupgradetest f d svcupgradetest version 12 26 Please wait the test may take several minutes to complete Warning found This tool has found the internal disks of this system are not running the recommended firmware versions Details follow Model Latest FW Current FW Drive Info 57914685355 B63E B63D Drive in slot 13 in enclosure 1 Drive in slot 12 in enclosure 1 Drive in slot 4 in enclosure 1 Drive in slot 3 in enclosure 1 MK3001GRRB scat scac Drive in slot 24 in enclosure 1 Drive in slot 21 in enclosure 1 Drive in slot 23 in enclosure 1 Drive in slot 22 in enclosure 1 Drive in slot 11 in enclosure 1 We recommend that you upgrade the drive microcode at an appropriate time If you believe you are running the latest version of microcode then check for a later version of this tool You do not need to upgrade the drive firmware before starting the software upgrade Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot 663 664 Results of running svcupgradetest The tool has found warnings For each warning above follow the instructions given The tool has found 0 errors and 1 warnings
202. The Detect MDisks action starts a rescan of the fibre channel FC or SAS network It discovers any new LUNs that were mapped to the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system and rebalances MDisk access across the available controller device ports This action also detects any loss of controller port availability and updates the IBM Storwize V3700 configuration to reflect any changes When external storage controllers are presented to the IBM Storwize V3700 environment the IBM Storwize V3700 automatically discovers the controllers and the LUNs that are presented by those controllers are listed as unmanaged MDisks However if you attached new storage and the IBM Storwize V3700 did not detect it you might need to use the Detect MDisks action before the system detects the new LUNs If the configuration of the external controllers is modified afterward the IBM Storwize V3700 might be unaware of these configuration changes Use the Detect MDisks action to rescan the FC network and the SAS ports to update the list of unmanaged MDisks Figure 7 49 shows the Detect MDisks action dE mmn OO GI Mad 7M GB Tarren Figure 7 49 Detect MDisks MDisks detecti appears to be fini The Detect MDisks action is asynchronous Although the task jed it might still be running in the background 2 Include Excluded MDisks An MDisk can be excluded from the IBM Storwize V3700 because of multiple input output
203. The wizard then prompts you to create a single VMkernel port within the new vSwitch as shown in Figure 4 20 6 Enter a meaningful Network Label and if using VLAN tagging enter a VLAN ID or select All from the drop down menu There are other options available See VMware documentation for details about configuring these rore connection settings le eher t en Vere vile raragng pur Fri md dcr fer voten eter ab Eeexumb _ m O Use tne port grouo f ong Use th port rouo fa maracanert athe Tete Sto m Figure 4 20 Configuring a VMkernel port on the new vSwitch 7 Click Next to continue Chapter 4 Host configuration 171 8 Enter an IP address for your iSCSI network You should use a dedicated network for iSCSI traffic as shown in Figure 4 21 C Otan P ceting automates use the lous m sermos LEES d 3 T mm m Figure 4 21 Configuring IP settings for the new VMkernel port 9 Click Next to see what is added to the host network settings and Finish to exit from iSCSI configuration The network configuration page should now look like Figure 4 22 Figure 4 22 The network Configuration page with the newly created vSwitch and VMkernel port 172 Im
204. There are several actions that can be performed on the internal drives when you select them and right click or click the Actions menu as shown in Figure 7 5 gd mono Eee pod suce pepe d me 20 p NT E eos Gif Nearline n mv a ehem tere imum D E E ans ca Mene 5 a 5 dram oa Srov nepersona vonmes 5 Wy Properties D Member a Gao mde m b msn menter Orne mds D Figure 7 5 Internal drive Actions menu Depending on the status of the drive selected the actions available are Take Offline The internal drives can be taken offline if there are problems with them 1 When you attempt to take a drive offline a confirmation window opens as shown in Figure 7 6 Take Drive Orne inve 9 x This actontakas the isto ne used when tere proton The system preverts ne rive being taten crine tree wal be resutna Omytake a ome rra spare arve is Take the drive evenit redundancy is last an the array Figure 7 6 Take internal drive offline warning Chapter7 StoragePools 311 2 Adrive should be taken offline only if a spare drive is available If the drive fails as shown in Figure 7 7 the MDisk of which the failed drive is a member remains online and a hot spare is
205. Tier 433 434 Using the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI you can check the properties of the EasyTier Pool Because the Storage Pool contains only one Enterprise MDisk type the Easy Tier status remains nactive as shown in Figure 9 18 p ramon ing Throat Sinon pp restet br Figure 9 18 Storage Pool properties 5 From the main page click Pools Internal Storage and repeat step 1 on page 431 and step 2 on page 432 to create a further disk class MDisk using the available storage In this example we used Nearline SAS Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 As shown in Figure 9 19 select Expand an existing pool and select the pool that you want to change to a multitiered pool In this example EasyTier_Poo is selected Tomigure memar Storage Preset RAD 10 Expand an existing pool Name Free Capacity Capacity T ied One Gawn ase tasyner poor ssa cm y Online ase use MiwetonPosl 1024 Y Online Create one or more new pools Figure 9 19 Configure Internal Storage window 7 Click Finish and Close when the task completes Add further MDisk and classes by repeating the previous steps 8 In Figure 9 20 you see that the EasyTier Poo Storage Pool contains Enterprise MDisk and Nearline MDisk types Samo Ashe Fer rmm Onine 08 0byi
206. V3700 2 Show Dependent Volumes a Figure 7 53 shows the volumes that are dependent on an MDisk b The volumes can be displayed by selecting the MDisk and clicking Show Dependent Volumes from the Actions menu The volumes are listed with general information tans Donato on ERT x Figure 7 53 Show dependent volumes Chapter7 StoragePools 345 3 Display Properties a The Properties action for an MDisk shows the information that you need to identify it In the MDisks by Pools window select the MDisk and click Properties from the Actions menu b The following tabs are available in this information window i The Overview tab as shown in Figure 7 54 contains information about the MDisk To show more details click Show Details Oves Dependent volumes Member Dives we Feste state 79 vane vey Spare Goa Stab orton Figure 7 54 MDisk properties overview 346 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 ii The Dependent Volumes tab as shown in Figure 7 55 lists all of the volumes that use extents on this MDisk ROT Dea a edo ume imos von Figure 7 55 MDisk dependent volumes Chapter 7 Storage Pools 347 iii In the Member Drives tab as shown in Figure 7 56 you find of the member drives of this MDisk Also all of the actions that are described in 7 1 2 Actions on internal drives on page 311 can
207. VO failures These failures might be caused for example by link errors After fabric related problem fixed the excluded disk can be added back into the Storwize 3700 a Select the MDisks b Click Include Excluded MDisk from the Actions menu 3 Select Tier Internal drives and external MDisks have their tier assigned automatically by the IBM Storwize V3700 The tier of an internal MDisk cannot be changed but if the disk tier of an external MDisk is recognized incorrectly by the IBM Storwize V3700 use this option to manually change the disk tier Chapter 7 Storage Pools 343 specify a new tier select the MDisk and click Actions Select Tier as shown Figure 7 50 Select MDISK x Select the desired drive class for Easy Tier manayernent Enterprise Figure 7 50 Select the wanted disk tier Some of the other actions are available by clicking MDisk by Pool Actions as shown in Figure 7 51 Create Pool Detect MDisks RAID Actions Rename Show Dependent Volumes Properties Figure 7 51 MDisk actions on externally virtualized storage You can perform the following additional actions 1 Rename a Select the MDisk and clicking Rename from the Actions menu b Enter the new name of your MDisk as shown in Figure 7 52 and click Rename Rename Nisi p misit Figure 7 52 Rename MDisk 344 Implementing the IBM Storwize
208. When necessary update these clients so that they can support the new version of IBM Storwize V3700 code Examples might be OS versions and options such as IBM FlashCopy Manager or VMWare plug ins 3 Ensure that multipathing drivers in the environment are fully redundant If you experience failover issues with muitipathing driver support resolve these issues before you start normal operations 4 Update other devices in the IBM Storwize V3700 environment Examples might include updating hosts and switches to the correct levels 5 Update your IBM Storwize V3700 Important The amount of time it takes to perform a node canister update can vary depending on the amount of preparation work that is required and on the size of the environment Generally to actually update the node software allow 20 40 minutes per node canister and a single 30 minute wait when the update is halfway complete The 30 minute wait enables the recently updated node canister to come online and be confirmed as operational and enables time for host multipathing to recover Some code levels support upgrades only from specific previous levels If you upgrade to more than one level later than your current level you might be required to install an intermediate level See the following Concurrent Compatibility and Code Cross Reference for Storwize V3700 support document for further details https www 304 ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S1004172
209. Wols Fisncopyor Rename Target Volume Roaboonveio Delete Mapping Eon Propertos Figure 10 38 Show Related Volumes menu 3 The FlashCopy mapping dependency tree opens as shown in Figure 10 39 Related Volumes Sources Fassncopy vo Targets 93 mrono ot Figure 10 39 FlashCopy mapping dependency 490 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 Clicking either volume shows the properties of the volume as shown in Figure 10 40 Dotsts rlasncopyVoiz 01 Volume name Capacity SorFtssncopy Mappings Volume Un Preferred tode Mirror Syme Rate Cache Mode Cache stete pI Open VAS overview Host Member mDisks Festcopyunt enotreoccteoirsonononoooooococ Done E ables Ery v Copy 0 Poot V3700_RSPooLM Stipes Status Orne Capacite Entrees ner soo Gs Figure 10 40 Target FlashCopy Volume details Chapter 10 Copy services 491 Editing properties The background copy rate and cleaning rate can be changed after the FlashCopy mapping is created To do so complete the following steps 1 Select the FlashCopy target mapping in the FlashCopy window 2 Click Edit Properties in the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 41 or right click the FlashCopy target mapping FlashCopy 7 s Vou 204 nanas A E scm
210. able or rezone your external storage system to connect to the IBM StorwizeV3700 2 Now click Next as shown in Figure 6 18 on page 264 to move to the next stage of the migration Chapter 6 Storage migration 277 Map storage The next pane shown in Figure 6 36 directs you to record information about the LUNs to be migrated their hosts the host adapter WWPNs and the SCSI IDs It also prompts you to unmap those volumes to be migrated from their hosts and to remap them to the new host group definition for the Storwize V3700 When you have completed these steps click Next to map storage to your system l Croatoa tet of external storaga system volumes that aro boing migrated Record the hosts that use each volume Record the WWPHs associated with each host Unmap ali volumes being migrated from the hosts in the storage system and mao ten to te host or host group you created when preparing your environ Record the storage system LUN used to map each volume to this system ness tp Figure 6 36 Directions to ime migration data In this example scenario you have already collected this data in 6 2 5 Recording migration information on page 252 In addition in the last section you unmapped the volumes on the external IBM DS3200 storage system from their Windows 2012 host Therefore all that remains for you now is to remap those external LUNs to the new Storwize V3700 host definition in the IBM Sy
211. age Tier Advisor Tool Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 21 Easy Tier is described in more detail in Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier on page 417 The IBM Easy Tier feature is licensed per IBM Storwize V3700 Storage system 1 6 4 Turbo Performance Turbo Performance is a licensed function that provides enhanced performance for the system A 90 day trial version of this function is available If a license is not purchased and activated before the trial period expires the system reverts to non turbo performance The Turbo Performance feature does not require hardware changes and is a nondisruptive upgrade The Turbo Performance feature is licensed per IBM Storwize V3700 Storage system 1 6 5 Storage Migration The IBM Storwize V3700 Storage Migration feature enables you to easily move data from other FC or SAS attached external storage to the internal capacity of the IBM Storwize V3700 Migrating data from other storage to the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides benefits from more functionality such as the easy to use GUI internal virtualization thin provisioning and Copy Services The Storage Migration feature is included as part of the base machine code and no license is required 1 6 6 FlashCopy The FlashCopy function copies a source volume to a target volume There are three types of FlashCopy preset Snapshot The snapshot preset creates a point in time view of the production data It is not
212. age system In our example as shown in Figure 10 100 we choose another system to build an inter cluster relationship Click Next to continue Cresie Relationship x Where are the auxiliary volumes located On this system On another system Figure 10 100 Select Remote Copy partner Chapter 10 services 543 4 Now the Remote Copy master and the auxiliary volume must be specified Both volumes must have the same size As shown in Figure 10 101 use the drop down boxes to select the Master and Auxiliary volumes The system offers only appropriate auxiliary candidates with the same volume size as the selected master volume After selecting the volumes click Add Create Relationship x Select master and auxitary volumes to use in the relationship Master Auxiliary notesourced RemoteSourcet RemoteSource Remotesource3 RemoteSources Figure 10 101 Select the master and auxiliary volumes 5 You can define multiple and independent relationships by choosing another set of volumes and clicking Add again Incorrectly defined relationships can be removed by clicking the red x In our example we create five independent Remote Copy relationships as shown in Figure 10 102 Create Relationship x Select the master and auxiliary volumes to use in the relationship Master RomoteSourcs0 RemoteTargato Re
213. all a supported HBA model with the current supported firmware and drivers for your configuration 1 Determine the current supported HBAs and levels for Windows 2012 R2 which are available on the following website http www ibm com support docview wss uidsssg1S1004388 2 Install the driver using Windows Device Manager or vendor tools Also check and update the firmware level of the HBA using the manufacturer s provided tools 4 Always check the readne file to see whether there are Windows registry parameters that should be set for the HBA driver Important For Converged Network Adapters CNAs that are capable of both FC and iSCSI itis important to ensure that the Ethernet networking driver is installed in addition to the FCoE driver This is required for configuring iSCSI If you are using a hardware iSCSI HBA see the manufacturer s documentation and Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center for further details about hardware and host OS configuration http www ibm com support knowl edgecenter STLM5A 1anding V3700 wel come html Chapter 4 Host configuration 155 The following section describes how to configure iSCSI using the software initiator Enabling the iSCSI Initiator On Microsoft Windows systems the Microsoft iSCSI Initiator can be used to connect to external storage attached with Ethernet Using the iSCSI protocol enables the use of block storage in a SAN at low cost compared to FC or SAS In Windows 2012 R2
214. am trating voot mages system cabi ta the SAS storage system atto migrate Mire ESX hosts ara set to alow copies hobe recoge or not using iie ESX hosts Figure 6 16 Step 1 of the Storage Migration wizard Restrictions Confirm that the following conditions are met gt You are not using the Storage Migration wizard to migrate cluster hosts including clusters of VMware hosts and Virtual I O Servers VIOS You are not using the Storage Migration wizard to migrate SAN boot images If the restrictions options cannot be selected the migration must be performed outside of this wizard because more steps are required For more information see the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center on the following website http www ibn con support knowl edgecenter STLMSA 1anding V3700_welcome html The VMware vSphere Storage vMotion feature might be an alternative for migrating VMware clusters For more information see the following website http www vmware com products vsphere features storage vmotion html For more information about migrating SAN boot images see Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 262 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Prerequisites Confirm that the following prerequisites apply Make sure that the Storwize V3700 the existing storage system and host FC ports physically connected to the SAN fabrics or that SAS connectivity exists betwee
215. ames or host iSCSI qualified name IQN IDs The number of host serial attached SCSI SAS ports The Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP information if it exists or is configured Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 To change the host properties click Edit and several fields can be edited as shown Figure 8 24 Host Details Win2012 FC x Overview Mappod Volumes Port Dofinitons Host mame fwin2012_Fc Hostio 1 Statue Onine cenene Oper vus TGs Host Type Hot Fc Porte Porte fof SAS Porte Figure 8 24 Host properties Editing host information 4 Make any necessary changes and click Save to apply them and then click Close to return to the Host Details pane Figure 8 25 on page 376 shows the Mapped Volumes tab which provides an overview of the volumes mapped to the host This tab provides the following information scsi ID Volume name Caching input output Group ID Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 375 376 5 Clicking the Show Details option does not show any detailed information as shown in Figure 8 25 Host Detals WIn2012 TC Ovorviow Happod Volumes Port Dofinitons Volumes Mapped to the Host i aL FlechCopyVol5 6005076000E301F5B000000000000000 0 toro 1 manong Seectng o mappings a soroen Figure 8 25 Host Details Mapped Volumes 6 Figure 8 26 shows the
216. and secondary volumes and depending on application requirements its use might be limited based on the distance between sites Chapter 10 services 519 Global Mirror Global Mirror provides an asynchronous copy which means that the secondary volume is not an exact match of the primary volume at every point The Global Mirror function provides the same function as Metro Mirror Remote Copy without requiring the hosts to wait for the full round trip delay of the long distance link However some delay can be seen on the hosts in congested or overloaded environments Make sure that you closely monitor and understand your workload In asynchronous Remote which Global Mirror provides write operations are completed on the primary site and the write acknowledgment is sent to the host before it is received at the secondary site An update of this write operation is sent to the secondary site ata later stage which provides the capability to perform Remote Copy over distances that exceed the limitations of synchronous Remote Copy The distance of Global Mirror replication is limited primarily by the latency of the wide area network WAN link that is provided Global Mirror requires a 80 millisecond ms round trip time for data that is sent to the remote location The propagation delay is roughly 8 2 microseconds ps per mile or 5 us per kilometer for FC connections Each device in the path adds more delay of about 25 us Devices t
217. are aligned properly Important It is possible to enter WWPNs manually However if these are not visible to Storwize V3700 the host object shows as offline and is unusable for I O operations until the ports become visible 196 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 Select the WWPNs for your host and click Add Port to List for each These are added to Port Definitions as shown in Figure 4 57 Aad Host SAS Ports Port Denintions Soons26200885140 soooszez00ss6141 Aovancea settings 10 Group Host Type Generic Operis 1 65 Figure 4 57 Adding the host WWPNs 6 In the Advanced Settings it is possible to choose the Host Type If using HP UX OpenVMS or TPGS this needs to be configured Otherwise the default option Generic is fine 7 Click Add Host and the wizard completes as shown in Figure 4 58 Host V Task completed view more mm 100 Figure 4 58 Completion of the Add Host wizard Chapter 4 Host configuration 197 8 Click Close to return to the host view which should now list your newly created host object as shown in Figure 4 59 M 2 Figure 4 59 The Hosts view with the newly created host object listed 9 Repeat these steps for all of your SAS hosts After the host objects have been created see Chap
218. are available from the Volumes by Pool pane V3700 RSPool 01 PEL a Sa i pud pem eB 225 cgo Shrink pm Pa cms 1 ond oS a Migrate to Another Poot LLL o Dobis Volume copy Actions Properties Figure 3 60 Volume functions are available from the Volumes by Pool pane Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 107 amp Internal Storage pane Select Internal Storage in the Pools menu to open the Internal Storage pane as shown in Figure 3 61 The internal storage consists of the drives that are contained in the IBM Storwize V3700 control enclosure and any SAS attached IBM Storwize V3700 expansion enclosures Using the Internal Storage pane it is possible to configure the internal storage into RAID protected storage MDisks The Drive Class Filter can be used to display the drive list by drive class G Aea egit mem y lt 77630 GIB Enterprise 19 x pee pho GiB Enterprise upgrade T mas wwe masks Show Dependent voumes oe wwe mA Customize Com Figure 3 61 Drive Actions menu of the Internal Storage pane 108 Drive actions Drive level functions such as identifying a drive and marking a drive as offline unused candidate or spare can be accessed here 1 Right cl
219. as one iSCSI name which stays constant for the life of the node The terms initiator name and target name also refer to an iSCSI name An iSCSI address specifies the iSCSI name of an iSCSI node and a location of that node The address consists of a host name or IP address a TCP port number for the target and the iSCSI name of the node An iSCSI node can have any number of addresses which can change at any time particularly if they are assigned by way of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP An IBM Storwize V3700 node represents an iSCSI node and provides statically allocated IP addresses Each iSCSI node that is an initiator or target has a unique IQN which can have a size of up to 255 bytes The IQN is formed according to the rules that were adopted for Internet nodes The IQNs can be abbreviated by using a descriptive name which is known as an alias An alias can be assigned to an initiator or a target The IBM Storwize V3700 also supports the use of the FCoE protocol which encapsulates the native FC frames into Ethernet frames 1 5 12 SAS SAS standard is an alternative method of attaching hosts to the IBM Storwize V3700 The IBM Storwize V3700 supports direct SAS host attachment that provides easy to use affordable storage needs Each SAS port device has a worldwide unique 64 bit SAS address 1 6 IBM Storwize V3700 features The features that are available with the IBM Storwize V3700 are described in this section
220. ashCopy target volume in the FlashCopy window 2 Select the Start option from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 30 or right click and select Start The status of the FlashCopy mapping changes from Idle to Copying Actions ch file Move to Consistency Group san Rename Target Volume Delete Mapping Show Volumes Edit Properties Geiss soon FashCopyict ance soe FashCopyveiz pe sivo tocn Cdi Qoo o oaeo 000 Figure 10 30 Stan FlashCopy mapping 484 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Stopping a FlashCopy mapping To stop FlashCopy mapping complete the following steps 1 Select the FlashCopy target volume in the FlashCopy window 2 Click the Stop option from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 31 After the stopping process completes the status of the FlashCopy mapping is changed to Stopped ea Progress Tapaciy 10 00 60 100060 E Rename Target ume Dee Mapping S000 60 snow omes sone Ean Propertes Qeass oa som ce FlshCopWolt uon FisnCopjvois summ HaehCopyVols 500 6 TieshCopjVo 5006 920 00 60 E Ca ree Quilt Figure 10 31 Stopping a FlashCopy mapping Chapter 10 Copy services 485 Re
221. assigned MDisks which contains all unmanaged MDisks if any exist Each defined Storage Pool is displayed with the following information Assigned icon and name Numerical ID Status A graphical indicator of pool capacity percentage that is allocated to volumes rmm se I E re ee amp 222 i etc Qe Figure 7 59 Pool window 4 When you expand a pool s entry by clicking the plus sign to the left of the pool s icon you can access the MDisks that are associated with this pool You can perform actions on these MDisks as described in 7 2 Configuring internal storage on page 320 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 7 3 1 Create Pool option New Storage Pools are built when an MDisk is created if this MDisk is not attached to an existing pool To create an empty pool complete the following steps 1 Click the Create Pool option in the pool window The only required parameter for the pool is the pool name as shown in Figure 7 60 Greate x Puol Name optional Warning Threshold fo js Figure 7 60 Create pool name input 2 The IBM Storwize V3700 GUI has a default extent size value of 1 GiB when you define a new Storage Pool Therefore if you are creating an empty Pool using the GUI and you want to specify the size of the extents you must ensure that the Allow extent size selection during pool
222. at the following website https ibm biz BdEzp7 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Complete the following steps to open the Management GUI from any web browser 1 Browse to one of the following locations a http s host name of your cluster gt J cluster IP address of your cluster gt for example 192 168 70 120 2 Use the following default login information User ID superuser Password passw rd with a zero in place of the o For more information about how to use this interface see the following website https ibm biz BdEzBc After the initial configuration that is described in 2 9 Initial configuration on page 49 is completed the Storwize V3700 Welcome window opens as shown in Figure 2 8 System Senko mee __ alii Figure 2 8 Setup wizard Welcome window 2 7 2 Command line interface The CLI is a flexible tool for system management that uses the SSH protocol A public private SSH key pair is optional for Secure Shell SSH access For more information about setting up SSH access for Windows Linux or UNIX systems see Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 Chapter 2 Initial configuration 39 The storage system be managed by using the CLI as shown in Example 2 1 Example 2 1 System management using the CLI IBM Storwize ITS0 V3700 superuserssvcinfo Isenclosurecanister enclosure id canister id status type
223. ata which can be useful for diagnostic purposes Figure 10 3 shows an example of the reverse FlashCopy scenario Original Relationships Figure 10 3 Reverse FlashCopy scenario To restore from a FlashCopy backup using the GUI complete the following steps 1 Optional Create a target volume volume Z and run FlashCopy on the production volume volume X to copy data on to the new target for later problem analysis 2 Create a FlashCopy map with the backup to be restored volume Y or volume W as the source volume and volume X as the target volume 3 Start the FlashCopy map volume Y to volume X The restore option In the CLI you must add the restore option to the svetask startfcmap command manually For more information about using the CLI see Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 The GUI adds this suffix automatically if it detects that you are mapping from a target back to the source Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Regardless of whether the initial FlashCopy map volume X to volume Y is incremental the Reverse FlashCopy operation copies only the modified data Consistency groups are reversed by creating a set of new reverse FlashCopy maps and adding them to new reverse consistency group Consistency groups cannot contain more than one FlashCopy map with the same target volume 10 1 3 Planning for FlashCopy There are several items that must be c
224. automatically reassigned LIIS SG Member onime 98 Member v onime D a maman Fated D ar D Comte v Online D sanan sore omine 4 Figure 7 7 Internal drive taken offline 3 If no sufficient spare drives are available and one drive must be taken offline the second option for no redundancy must be selected This option results in a degraded Storage Pool because of the degraded MDisk as shown in Figure 7 8 MM ci Aleena 62 T roy tsi aay E ES DI Arey Figure 7 8 Internal drive that is failed with MDisk degraded The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system prevents the drive from being taken offline if there might be data loss as a result A drive cannot be taken offline as shown in Figure 7 9 if no suitable spare drives are available and based on the RAID level of the MDisk drives are already offline Hark drive as failed Ihe tesk completed with errors 100 View mora details Toe task ns pm suing 1 32 Unable to crve I 10 as failed 1 32 returned erroz messege 1 32 m The command cannot be initiated because you did nos 1 32 me specity the allowdegraied peraneter end the cesociatad array menbar nas ineurticient spere protectio Sgnehzenizing menory cache Tae cach d Figure 7 9 Internal drive offline not allowed because of
225. ave been unmapped return to the host and perform a drive rescan For a Windows 2012 host go to the Windows 2012 Server Manager Dashboard select Tools gt Computer Management Storage Disk Management and select Rescan Disks from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 6 24 SAMA DED Ee ms hay rd Eus HM ET _ lt Figure 6 24 Performing a drive rescan Windows 2012 The volumes no longer display in the windows configuration Update host device drivers and configure fhost to access Storwize V3700 The three volumes are currently under the control of the native MPIO driver with the added IBM DSM for System Storage DS3x00 This needs to be removed from the volumes that you are going to migrate They then need to be put under the control of IBM SDDDSM for use with the Storwize V3700 Chapter 6 Storage migration 269 270 To update the drivers and configure fhost complete the following steps 1 To remove the existing MPIO from the server Manager Dashboard select Tools gt MPIO The MPIO properties pane opens as shown in Figure 6 25 Dewees Discover Malt athe DSM install Ceniiguraton Snapshot ade for anen device cick add and enter the Vendor and Products ase sting of 6 characters falowed by 16 characters Devices can be specfid using com celon as the demit Ta remova support fr eurreny MPIC devices elect the devi
226. be difficult getting this information from the host after it has been removed from the existing storage Chapter 6 Storage migration 255 256 7 Go to the Windows 2012 Server Manager Dashboard and select Tools gt Computer Management Device Manager 8 Select the storage controller used to connect to the external storage as shown in Figure 6 7 7I e aisi e s amp 6 BF Corp rage call RIEN i ru n M b E pera V E DvD RON des P B di Poppy tects Pr a tence N sencer dense f p BE Mane y Im 19 Senge gp tape 52520 aeRO 9 Morse Enter Figure 6 7 Selecting host HBA Windows 2012 9 From here use the tabs to record the information about the controller as shown in Figure 6 8 Computer Management Sram Toots LS Adar SAS2 21 Mer ROCE Task Scheda 18 b B Sand rate 8 Local Users ond Groups metas 2 pom Daso don ain Mp dow Serves aca 87 Disk Management Semicesand Applications To vow esteso io etis o verso o the denco denes fals ater the ae Dest the elected dove diver Figure 6 8 Host details Windows 2012 Implementi
227. be changed to reflect something more meaningful to the user by selecting the volume and clicking Rename in the Actions menu or by right clicking the volume and selecting Rename Names The names of the image mode volumes must begin with a letter The name can be a maximum of 63 characters The following valid characters can be used gt Uppercase letters A Z Lowercase letters a z Digits 0 9 Underscore _ Period Hyphen Blank space The names must not begin or end with a space Chapter 6 Storage migration 291 3 Use the information collected in 6 2 5 Recording migration information on page 252 to rename the volumes to their original names in the external IBM DS3200 Storage array as shown in Figure 6 51 Figure 6 51 Renaming an image mode volume 4 Enter the new name and click Rename to complete the operation The task completes as shown in Figure 6 52 Tast compensa 292 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 Click Close to return to the Map Volumes pane as shown in Figure 6 53 Figure 6 53 Renamed volume 6 Notice that the volume now has a new name Follow the process from Figure 6 50 on page 291 to rename the rest of the volumes 7 After all of the volumes have been renamed select the volumes that you want to map to your host Hold Ctrl and click to select multiple volumes and then click Map to Host as shown in Figure 6 54 Meg
228. be performed on the drives that are listed here z Dopondent Volumes Mombor Dive Figure 7 56 MDisk properties member 7 3 Working with Storage Pools 348 The next sections provides a detailed overview about the concept and use of the Storage Pools and Child Pools Storage Pools or Pools act as container for MDisks and provision the capacity to volumes IBM Storwize V3700 organizes storage in to Storage Pools to ease storage management and make it more efficient Child Pools act as subcontainers and they inherit the parent Storage Pool s properties They can also be used to provision capacity to volumes For information about the Child Pools see 7 4 Working with Child Pools on page 355 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Storage Pools and MDisks are managed the MDisks by Pools window 1 You can access the MDisks by Pools window by clicking the upper right option Overview Pools as shown in Figure 7 57 Senso oe Figure 7 57 Pools from the overview window 2 Analternative path to the Pools window is to click Pools MDisks by Pools as shown in Figure 7 58 Figure 7 58 Pools from MDisk by Pools window Chapter 7 Storage Pools 349 3 Using the MDisk by Pools window as shown in Figure 7 59 you can manage internal and external Storage Pools All existing Storage Pools are displayed row by row The first row features Un
229. ber Mbisks voume fame ez eL a state V One smo ofTiashCopy Mappings 0 Volume Un Boosa7eonotno1F55000000000000025 Danwa syne rate Cache Modo craves Cache stato DD Opens Stipes Statue nn Easy status opacity Entorpree Tae 600 0E Tea 00 GE v Copy E I Poot EasyTier_Pooi2 Thin Frovisioned Striped Copy Ses Sine Easy Te Salis Acre Capacity nes Ter expan Thin Gram Sizs Figure 8 54 Volume Details Overview The following details are available Volume Properties Volume Name Shows the name of the volume Volume ID Shows the ID of the volume Status Gives status information about the volume which can be online offline or degraded Capacity Shows the capacity of the volume If the volume is thin provisioned this number is the virtual capacity The real capacity is displayed for each copy of FlashCopy Mappings The number of existing FlashCopy relationships For more information see Chapter 10 Copy services on page 453 Volume UID The volume unique identifier Preferred Node Specifies the ID of the preferred node for the volume Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 397 398 VO Throttling Mirror Sync Rate Cache Mode Cache State UDID OpenVMS Copy Properties Storage Pool Capacity Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700
230. ber drives with one parity strip on every stripe RAID 5 arrays have single redundancy The parity algorithm means that an array can tolerate no more than one member drive failure A RAID 5 array can be formed by 3 16 drives RAID 6 arrays stripe data over the member drives with two parity stripes which is known as the P parity and the Q parity on every stripe The two parity strips are calculated by using different algorithms which gives the array double redundancy A RAID 6 array can be formed by 5 16 drives RAID 10 arrays have single redundancy Although they can tolerate one failure from every mirrored pair they cannot tolerate two disk failures One member out of every pair can be rebuilding or missing at the same time A RAID 10 array can be formed by 2 16 drives 1 5 6 Managed disks An MDisk refers to the unit of storage that IBM Storwize V3700 virtualizes This unit is a RAID array consisting of internal drives The IBM Storwize V3700 then can allocate these MDisks into Storage Pools An MDiskis not visible to host system on the SAN because it is internal in the IBM Storwize V3700 system An MDisk features the following modes gt Array mode MDisks are constructed from internal drives by using the RAID functionality Array MDisks are always associated with Storage Pools gt Image Image MDisks are LUNs presented by external storage systems to an IBM Storwize 3700 and assigned directly to a volume with a o
231. blished by VMware is a useful resource http www vmware com files pdt techpaper vmware multipathing configuration softwa re iSCSI port binding pdf 4 2 6 VMware ESXi 5 5 Preparing for SAS attachment To prepare for SAS attachment complete the following steps Y Installing and updating supported Configuring SAS HBAs on VMware ESXi Confirming multipath support for SAS on VMware ESXi Determining host WWPNs 178 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Installing and updating supported HBAs Install a supported HBA with the current supported firmware and drivers for your configuration 1 Determine a list of the current supported HBAs and levels for VMware ESXi 5 5 which are available on the following website http www ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S1004388 2 Install the driver using VMware vSphere Client the ESXi CLI or vendor tools 3 Also check and update the firmware level of the HBA using the manufacturer s provided tools 4 Always check the readne file to see whether there is further configuration required for the HBA driver See the VMware Compatibility Guide for more information http www vmware com resources compatibility search php For LSI cards the following website provides some guidance on flashing the HBA firmware and BIOS http mycusthelp info LSI _cs AnswerDetail aspx sSessionID 8aid 8352 Configuring SAS HBAs on VMware ESXi In this example we used an LSI 920
232. bookVol 3 Online 10000618 Yes 60050750002604FS600000000000001E RedbookVolt v Online 160 000 Yes Fse0D90000C000001F RecbaokVol S Onine 100 0018 Yes DOSU7SDODEBDHFSEOD0000000000000 medbookVolame v Onine 10068 6bostr60GOEBOFSEO00COD000000015 Volumetot Online 00cis Me G006075000 804F EO0000000000001 amp Winzonz voez v Onine 50005 6005678000EB0FSE0000000c0000030 voios _ v Onine 9 500 18 Me 6005075000EB04FSE00000000000002 Figure 8 80 Volumes by Storage Pool 3 It is also possible to create volumes from this pane Click Create Volume to start the Volume Creation pane as described in Chapter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 4 Selecting a volume and opening the Actions menu or right clicking the volume shows the same options as described in 8 4 Advanced volume administration on page 384 Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 415 8 8 Volumes by Host see an overview on which volumes a host can access complete the following steps 1 Click Volumes by Host from the Volumes menu and the Volumes by Host window opens as shown in Figure 8 81 Windows 2012 FC eae ves Fier Took B Win2042_VoLOt Online 9 190068 SingieTier_Poot 2 onine temm onne 8 saannin Poot amp amp morem NN S ICT Gia Figure 8 81 Volumes by Host 2
233. c of the system shows capacity usage including physical installed capacity the amount of capacity allocated and over provisioned capacity Actions menu The Actions link at the upper left of the System pane opens an Actions menu as shown in Figure 3 39 Add Enclosure Rename System Turn Alden tiy LEDE Upsate Figure 3 39 System pane Actions menu Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 95 The Actions menu enables the user to do the following Add a new enclosure Rename the System Turn off any illuminated Identity LEDs Update the System and Drive software Power Off the system Display System properties which includes the software version and environment Overview The Overview link at the upper right of the System pane toggles an Overview pane as shown in Figure 3 40 External MDisks a Figure 3 40 Overview pane showing all labels Clicking any of the Overview icons takes the user to the associated pane As an example clicking Arrays takes the user to the Pools Internal Storage pane System 3D view On the System pane hovering over any of the components in the 3D view shows a component overview and right clicking a component shows an Action menu appropriate to that component The following component properties can be displayed System The System properties pane shows various information such as software version number of enclos
234. cal partnership topologies between multiple IBM Storwize V3700 systems are available gt Daisy chain topology as shown in Figure 10 72 IEM Storwize V3700 Storwize V3700 IBM Storwize v3700 Storwize v3700 cai eer erc Figure 10 72 Daisy chain partnership topology for IBM Storwize V3700 gt Triangle topology as shown in Figure 10 73 Storwize V3700 4 gt IBM Storwize V3700 Cluster A Cluster B IBM Storwize V3700 Cluster C Figure 10 73 Triangle partnership topology for IBM Storwize V3700 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 gt Startopology as shown in Figure 10 74 IBM Storwize V3700 IBM Storwize V3700 Cluster A Cluster B IBM Storwize V3700 Cluster C IBM Storwize V3700 Cluster D Figure 10 74 Star topology for IBM Storwize V3700 Full meshed topology as shown in Figure 10 75 IBM Storwize V3700 IBM Storwize V3700 Cluster A Cluster B IBM Storwize V3700 IBM Storwize V3700 Custer C luster D Figure 10 75 Full meshed IBM Storwize V3700 Partnerships These partnerships are valid for configurations with IBM SAN Volume Controllers and IBM Storwize V3700 systems if the IBM Storwize V3700 systems are using the replication layer They are also valid for IBM Storwize V5000 and V7000 products Partnership states A partnership has the following states gt
235. ce action that should be followed to resolve an error condition Not all events have error codes that are associated with them Many event IDs can have the same error code because the service action is the same for all of the events gt Sequence number A number that identifies the event Event count The number of events that are coalesced into this event log record gt Fixed When an alert is shown for an error condition it indicates whether the reason for the event was resolved In many cases the system automatically marks the events that are fixed when appropriate There are some events that must be manually marked as fixed If the event is a message this field indicates that you read and performed the action The message must be marked as read gt Last time The time when the last instance of this error event was recorded in the log Root sequence number If set this number is the sequence number of an event that represents an error that probably caused this event to be reported Resolve the root event first Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Event log pane options Figure 11 60 shows the main Event log pane options that should be used to handle system events Recommended Actions Bd una ea messages Alerts show A d E e anges enims Mark as Fed ae iter by Date morangos pending swwenneswmn ii mmues dr ms s cm A Moris tum wenst a A onore
236. ces and then ackRenove Devices Device Hardware 14 M IM 1722500 IM 1722550 IM 1722550 FAST 1724 0100 Figure 6 25 Windows 2012 MPIO properties 2 Select the device for which you want support to be removed and click Remove In this example for clarity you remove all support for all System Storage DS and IBM InfoSphere FastTrack FASIT devices This is because there is only one System Storage 053200 We only need to remove support for the 1726 2xx device System Storage 053200 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 This action requires reboot and the operating system prompts you to perform although you can defer it as shown in Figure 6 26 MPIO Properties xi Reboot Required dh Areboot required te cempiets the aeration Reboot Now Device Hardware d mM 1732 300 vs TM 0 FAT TM Geo FAST TM 52200 FAST TM 188 FAST MSFT2DLISASEUEType_OxA Vendor Product 15 Mare sbout sddna and removing MPLO supoort E Figure 6 26 Windows 2012 reboot prompt Next you must install MPIO support for the IBM Storwize V3700 The IBM Storwize family uses the IBM SDDDSM for MPIO support in Windows 2012 This can be obtained from the following website http www ibm com support docview wss rs 540 amp context ST5267 amp dc D4308uid ssg1S4 00035081oc en US amp cs utf 8 amp lang enfStorwize3700 Chap
237. ces is selected Click OK to confirm ge F Scan for lev Storage Devices Rescan al host bue adapters for new storage devices Rescanning al adapters can be so F scan for tien Yers Volumes Rescan alllnown storage devices for nen WES volumes that eve been added snc the last scan Rescanning noun storage fer rev fie systems s faster than resceming for rew storage Figure 5 54 Rescan all adapters 234 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 The rescan task starts and displays under Recent Tasks as shown in Figure 5 55 Wait or this to finish Tu Sese Vei nanana Figure 5 55 The Rescan all HBAs task in progress 5 If you now select the FC adapters the mapped volumes are listed as shown in Figure 5 56 Figure 5 56 The mapped volumes listed in VMware vSphere Client 6 Check the UIDs that you recorded earlier and confirm that all of the mapped volumes are listed The mapped volumes are now ready to be managed by the host operating system Creating a data store from a mapped volume To create a data store from a mapped volume in VMware ESXi 5 5 complete the steps described in 5 3 5 Discovering iSCSI volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 on page 235 This procedure is common to all attachment types Configuring multipath settings for mapped volumes To configure multipath settings for a mapped volume in VMware ESXi 5
238. cess the files complete the following steps 1 Click Start Run enter cmd and then click OK to open a command prompt 2 Typically the tool is installed in the C Program Files x86 I8M STAT directory Enter the command to generate the report as shown in Example 9 13 C Program Fi Tes x86 IBM STAT STAT exe o c lt directory_where_you_want_the output to go c location_of_dpa_heat_data_file If you do not specify o c V directory where you want the output to go the output goes to the directory where the STAT exe file is located Example 9 13 Generate HTML file C EasyTier gt STAT exe o C EasyTier C StorwizeV3700_Logs dpa_heat 01010KV 1 101 209 141106 data CMUA00019I The STAT exe command has completed C EasyTier gt 3 The Storage Tier Advisor Tool creates a set of HTML files Browse to the directory where you directed the output file and find the file named index html Open the file using your browser to view the report Typically the STAT tool generates the report as described in 9 7 2 Storage Tier Advisor Tool reports Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 447 9 7 2 Storage Tier Advisor Tool reports When you open the index html file of an IBM Storwize V3700 system a window opens that gives you a complete system summary report as shown in Figure 9 30 storwize V3700 gt pm System Summary storage Tiar 92 1 EI meacre naorosc t Tatai capacity monitored 1863 0 08
239. connector if none of the lanes are up the activity light is off One or more of the up lanes are running at a different speed than the others gt or more of the up lanes are attached to a different address than others Canister status Each expansion canister has its status displayed by three LEDs as shown in Figure 11 16 Figure 17 16 Enclosure canister status Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 585 The LED status is described Table 11 6 Table 11 6 Enclosure canister status Color Name Definition Green left Power Indicates that the canister is receiving power Green mid Status gt Ifthe light is on the canister is running normally gt Ifthe light is flashing there is an error communicating with the enclosure Amber right Fault If the light is solid there is an error logged against the canister or the firmware is not running 11 2 5 Disk subsystem The IBM Storwize V3700 disk subsystem is made up of control and expansion enclosures The system can have only one control enclosure and cannot be clustered with other control enclosures As of IBM Storwize software V7 4 each control enclosure can attach to up to nine expansion enclosures This section describes the parts of the disk subsystem SAS cabling Expansion enclosures are attached to control enclosures by SAS cables There is one SAS chain and up to nine expansion encl
240. continue Figure 10 65 Confirming deletion of a consistency group 3 Click Yes to delete the group Consistency groups do not have to be empty to be deleted Any FlashCopy mappings that exist in them are moved to the Not in a Group mappings list when the consistency group is deleted 510 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Restoring from a FlashCopy Consistency Group Itis possible to manipulate FlashCopy snapshots that were captured as part of a consistency group to restore the source volumes of those mappings to the state that they were all in at the time the snapshot was taken 1 To restore a consistency group from a FlashCopy you must create a reverse mapping of of the individual volumes that are contained within the original consistency group In this example there are two FlashCopy mappings fcmap0 and fcmapl in a consistency group called RedbookConsistGroup as shown in Figure 10 66 These mappings are both snapshots Soares Val Target Vu f eme Empty gris Copying Fish Tims Nov 6 204 10 09 04 M ces rr s 3 i ces Feet Vert t ATO TAIN Qoo ny el Figure 10 68 Creating FlashCopy reverse mapping 2 Click New Consistency Group in the upper left corner as shown in Figure 10 66 and create a consistency group In this example we created a group called RedBookReverseConsistGroup Follow the procedure that is desc
241. crease this size Packet Size Link Size Serialization Delay Time Required to Send Unit IDEE Kops 20 vicrasecands EX microsecond 52100 Mops 5 TE CD microseconds 8 156 Mops 100 microseconds B4 EZZ Wins 2E microseconds Bafi Gbps 5 1 0 rierasaconds B10 Gbps 3 1E 05 rrierasaconds 1500 ZE Kops ATE3CA victoseconds 150015 Mbps BDE microseconds 71500 100 Mhps 125302 rierosaconds 1500 155 Wope JEU microsecond 1800 622 Mbps T9830 rricrosaconds 150011 Gbps 227301 microseconds 150010 Gbps 2240 microseconds ZB EE ape TESU vicraseconds 214815 Mbps microseconds 2140 106 Mbps 2 7E3C2 ricmseconds 2148 155 Mbps 118302 riemseconds E22 Nps microseconds 1 Gbps 178301 vricrosaconds 2148 10 Chps 1TECS ricroseconds Figure 10 83 Effect of packet size in bytes versus link size Before you proceed take a quick look at the second largest component of your RTT serialization delay Serialization delay is the amount of time that is required to move a packet of data of a specific size across a network link of a specific bandwidth This delay is based on a simple concept that the time that is required to move a specific amount of data decreases as the data transmission rate increases In Figure 10 83 there are orders of magnitude of difference between the different link bandwidths It i
242. ct us review Redbooks form ibm com redbooks Send your comments in an email redbooks us ibm your comments IBM Corporation International Technical Support Organization Dept HYTD Mail Station P099 2455 South Road Poughkeepsie NY 12601 5400 Stay connected to IBM Redbooks xvi Find us on Facebook http www facebook com IBMRedbooks Follow us on Twitter http twitter com ibnredbooks Look for us on Linkedin http www linkedin com groups home amp qid 2130806 Explore new Redbooks publications residencies and workshops with the Redbooks weekly newsletter https www redbooks ibm com Redbooks nsf subscribe 0penForm Stay current on recent Redbooks publications with RSS Feeds http w redbooks ibm com rss html Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Summary of changes This section describes the technical changes made in this edition of the book and in previous editions This edition might also include minor corrections and editorial changes that are not identified Summary of Changes for SG24 8107 02 for Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 as created or updated on March 1 2015 March 2015 Third Edition This revision includes the following new and changed information New information gt Scalability data gt Drive support New graphical user interface GUI look and feel command line interface CL commands Changed information
243. d It also is possible to supply list of MDisks to use Figure 1 9 shows how a striped volume is allocated assuming 10 extents are required Volume Storage pool Figure 1 9 Storwize V3700 striped volume Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 17 Sequential sequential volume is a volume in which the extents are allocated one after the other from one MDisk to the next MDisk as shown in Figure 1 10 Volume Storage pool Extenta Extent3a Createa xtent1c Extent3b sequential ezm Extent 1d gt Extent1e Extent 1f Bamsa Figure 1 10 Sequential volume gt Image mode Image mode volumes are special volumes that have a direct relationship with one MDisk They are used to migrate existing data into and out of the clustered system to or from external FC SAN atlached storage When the image mode volume is created a direct mapping is made between extents that are on the MDisk and the extents that are on the volume The logical block address LBA x on the MDisk is the same as the LBA on the volume which ensures that the data on the MDisk is preserved as it is brought into the clustered system 18 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 1 11 illustrates creating in image mode volume Storage pool Volume MDisk 1 Create image mode volume gt Figure 1 11 Image mode volume Some virtualizati
244. d in the restriction document must not be exceeded The document is available at the following website http www ibm con support docview wss uidessg151004921 Chapter 2 Initial configuration 31 Connectivity issues If you have any connectivity issues between IBM Storwize V3700 ports and Brocade SAN Switches or Directors at 8 Gbps see the following website for the correct setting of the 111 port config parameter in the Brocade operating system http www ibm con support docview wss rs 5918u1d 559151003699 IBM Storwize V3700 can be used with a direct attach FC host configuration The suggested configuration for direct attachment is to have at least one FC cable from the host connected to each node of the IBM Storwize V3700 to provide redundancy in the event that one of the nodes goes offline as shown in Figure 2 3 1234 Node i y Canister 1 Host 1 IBM Storwize V3700 Host 2 Node Canister 2 1234 Figure 2 3 FC direct attach host configuration Verify direct attach interoperability with the IBM Storwize V3700 and the supported server operating systems by following the requirements provided on the following website http www ibm com systems support storage ssic interoperability wss 2 3 SAS direct attach planning 32 There are three SAS ports ports 1 2 and 3 per node canister that are available for direct host attach on an Storwize V3700 Do not use port 4 because it is reserved for
245. d trip latency requirement Bandwidth The bandwidth must satisfy the following requirements Ifyou are not using Change Volumes be able to sustain the peak write load for all mirrored volumes and background copy traffic Ifyou are using Change Volumes with Global Mirror be able to sustain the change rate of Source Change Volumes and background copy traffic Consider other background copy rate the leading practice is 10 to 20 of maximum peak load for initial synchronization and resynchronization Remote Copy internal communication at idle with or without Change Volumes is approximately 2 6 megabits per second Mbps This amount is the minimum amount Redundancy If the link between two sites is configured with redundancy so that it can tolerate single failures the link must be sized so that the bandwidth and latency requirements can be met during single failure conditions Native Internet Protocol replication With the advent of version 7 2 code the IBM Storwize V3700 now supports replication over native Internet Protocol IP links using the built in networking ports of the cluster nodes This gives greater flexibility in creating Remote Copy links between Storwize and IBM SAN Volume Controller products FC over IP FCIP routers are no longer required It uses SANslide technology developed by Bridgeworks Limited of Christchurch UK They specialize in products that can bridge storage protocols and accelerate data transfer
246. dary site When the relationship is restarted the synchronization process for new data is started During this process the relationship is in the inconsistent copying state The secondary volume for the relationship cannot be used until the copy process completes and the relationship returns to the consistent state When this situation occurs start a FlashCopy operation for the secondary volume before you restart the relationship While the relationship is in the Copying state the FlashCopy feature can provide a consistent copy of the data If the relationship does not reach the synchronized state you can use the FlashCopy target volume at the secondary site 10 3 Troubleshooting Remote Copy Remote Copy Global Mirror and Metro Mirror has the following primary error codes 1920 This error is a congestion error that means that the source the link between source and target or the target cannot keep up with the rate of demand 1720 This error is a heartbeat or cluster partnership communication error This error tends to be more serious because failing communication between your cluster partners involves some extended diagnostic time 10 3 1 1920 error A 1920 error event ID 050010 can have several triggers The following official probable cause projections are available Primary cluster or SAN fabric problem 10 Primary cluster or SAN fabric configuration 10 Secondary cluster or SAN fabric problem 15 Secondary clust
247. ddresses are not needed However in the event of a node canister problem it might be necessary for service personnel to log on to the node to perform service actions Chapter 2 Initial configuration 35 Figure 2 7 shows a logical view of the Ethernet ports that are available for configuration of the service IP addresses Only port one on each node can be configured with a service IP address Service IP Addresses E e li some acne D u ak 4 2 amp ghe cman re port sara IP address for a canter The sanie adras tan ba uncataurd by daring ha Prt or lev elds m w satra re DOO ore is edes D Fig lable for configuration 2 5 Host configuration planning Hosts should have two FC connections for redundancy but the IBM Storwize V3700 also supports hosts with a single HBA port connection However if that HBA its link to the SAN fabric or the fabric fails the host loses access to its volumes Even with a single connection to the SAN the host has multiple paths to the IBM Storwize V3700 volumes because that single connection must be zoned with at least one FC port per node Therefore a multipath driver is required This is also true for direct attach SAS hosts They can be connected by using a single host port that enables up to six hosts to be configured However two SAS connections per host are advised for redundancy If two connections per host are us
248. de canister in a control enclosure connects over an Ethernet cable from Ethernet port 1 of the canister to an enabled port on your Ethernet switch or router Optionally you can attach an Ethernet cable from Ethernet port 2 on the canister to your Ethernet network Configuring IP addresses There is no issue with configuring multiple Internet Protocol IP v4 or IPV6 addresses on an Ethernet port or the use of the same Ethernet port for management and iSCSI access However you cannot use the same IP address for management and iSCSI host use Table 2 1 shows possible IP configuration of the Ethernet ports on the IBM Storwize V3700 system Table 2 1 Storwize V3700 IP address configuration options per node canister Storwize V3700 Management Node Canister 1 Storwize V3700 Partner Node Canister 2 1 4 6 management address ETH PORT 1 IPv4 6 service address ETH PORT 1 IPv4 6 service address IPv4 6 iSCSI address 1 4 6 iSCSI address IPv4 6 management address ETH PORT 2 IPv4 6 iSCSI address ETH PORT 2 1 4 6 iSCSI address IP management addresses The IP management address that is shown on Node Canister 1 in Table 2 1 is an address on the configuration node In case of failover this address transfers to Node Canister 2 and this node canister becomes the new configuration node The management addresses are managed by the configuration node canister only 1 or 2
249. dent Disks RAID 10 MDisk array using the Enterprise drive class as shown in Figure 9 16 Click Next to continue Configure Internal Storage x Use this wizard to allocate RAID arrays to pools After this Configuration wizard completes you can create volumes from these pools Use the recommended configuration RAIDS Select this option to configure all available drives based on recommended values Tor the RAID levoland rivo class The recommended configuration all tho drives to build arrays that are protected with the appropriate amount of spare drives Select a different configuration reset RAD 10 7 Automatically configure spares Optimize for Performance Optimize for Capacity Number of drives provision Configuration Summary 4 X RAID AD 278 90 GB Enterprise 10K rom dures d Hot Spares Uncortigurea Dives Figure 9 16 Creating a new MDisk 432 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 Select Create one or more new pools and include the pool name or prefix In this example scenario we create a new Storage Pool named EasyTier Pool shown in Figure 9 17 Configure Internal Storage x pm Expand an existing pool Croate ono or more now pools Poot ame Ease Poal Warning Threshold choose kon I IE Figure 9 17 Creating a new pool 4 Click Finish Chapter 9 IBM Easy
250. designed to meet the needs of small and midsize businesses Designed to provide organizations with the ability to consolidate and share data at an affordable price Storwize V3700 offers advanced software capabilities that are usually found in more expensive systems Built on innovative IBM technology Storwize V3700 addresses the block storage requirements of small and midsize organizations Storwize V3700 is designed to accommodate the most common storage network technologies This design enables easy implementation and management This IBM Redbooks publication is intended for pre sales and post sales echnical support professionals and storage administrators The concepts in this book also relate to the IBM Storwize V3500 This book was written at a software level of version 7 release 4 5024 8107 02 15 0738440361 Redbooks INTERNATIONAL TECHNICAL SUPPORT ORGANIZATION BUILDING TECHNICAL INFORMATION BASED ON PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE Redbooks are developed by the IBM International Technical Support Organization Experts from IBM clients and IBM Business Partners from around the world create timely technical information based on realistic scenarios Specific recommendations are provided to help you implement IT solutions more effectively in your environment For more information ibm com redbooks
251. e Select file system settings Festes ma Vome labet Rebcotioiund C Generate shore names not recommended Short names B characters with 3 chararier enero are red for sme niin on cert conquien bak eub ses Figure 5 47 Configuring File System Settings 224 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 7 Confirm the new volume configuration on the next page click Next and confirm that volume creation is successful as shown in Figure 5 42 Completion ly completed the New Volume Progress athe infomation opted Create new partion E Cope Formet volume Comptes dances pl pde cache Li Figure 5 42 New volume success 8 The new volume displays under the Volumes view of File and Storage Services as shown in Figure 5 43 Figure 5 43 The new volume listed under the Volumes view Configuring multipath settings for mapped volumes To configure SDDDSM multipath settings for mapped volumes in Windows 2012 R2 you can use the datapath exe command line interface CLI tool To query paths to discovered devices complete the following steps 1 Open a Powershell terminal 2 Change to the SDDDSM directory Chapter 5 Volume configuration 225 226 Run datapath exe query device as shown in Example 5 1 Example 5 1 Datapath query device PS C Program Files IBM SDDDSM gt datapath exe query device
252. e as shown in Figure 9 23 Volumes inherit the Easy Tier state of their parent pool p T Mee Se Rate Figure 9 23 Easy Tier enabled volume Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 437 11 If a volume has more than one copy Easy Tier can be enabled and disabled on each copy separately This action depends on the Storage Pool where the volume copy is defined You can see a volume with two copies that are stored in two different Storage Pools as shown in Figure 9 24 ves Doi Fiume 3 Overview Hot Maps tember lk som ta remme F copo p gus Poot Easier 4 mm Eihar Saue Mae tunasoma 0 pes sre ate E oes UM Esm Terit hte Er Figure 9 24 Easy Tier by Copy 12 If you want to enable Easy Tier on the second copy change the Storage Pool of the second copy to a multitiered Storage Pool by repeating the steps in this section When external MDisks are presented to an IBM Storwize V3700 you can select the tier manually and then add it to a Storage Pool for migration purposes as described in Chapter 6 Storage migration on page 249 9 5 2 Downloading Easy Tier I O measurements 438 Easy Tier is now enabled and automatic data placement mode is active Extents are automatically migrated to or from disk tiers and the statistic summary collection is now active The statistics log file can be downloaded to analyze how the extent
253. e storage area network SAN switch The following example shows how faults are represented in the error log how information about the fault can be gathered and how the recommended action DMP can be used to fix the error 1 Detect an alert The Health Status indicator shows a red alert for more information see Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview on page 71 The Status Alerts indicator to the right of the Health status bar is also visible and shows two alerts Click the alert to retrieve the specific information as shown in Figure 11 62 E m TTE me LI GA oe x Seay o s H DONEC 55 SS c mc cH Figure 11 62 Health Status shows degraded system 2 Review the event log for more information Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 617 3 Gather additional information Alert properties More details about the event can be found in the Properties option as shown in Figure 11 63 This information might be of interest for problem fixing or for root cause analysis feeder zm E EU ES Figure 11 63 Alert properties 4 Run the recommended action DMP a Use of the DMP is highly recommended to fix any alerts It is possible to miss background running tasks when the DMP is bypassed Not all alerts have DMPs available b To start the DMP right click the alert record or click Run this fi
254. e 8 17 Rename Host pane 370 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 After the changes are applied to the system click Close as shown in Figure 8 18 Rename Host Task completed 1008 View more deti Figure 8 18 Rename a host task completed 8 1 4 Removing a host To remove a host complete the following steps 1 Select the host and from the Actions menu click Remove as shown in Figure 8 19 Add Host ForPors Host Mappings Modity Mappings Generic 5 No All Volumes 2 e Generic 2 Yes Import Mappings Figure 8 19 Removing a host Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 371 2 Apromptis displayed requesting confirmation of the number of hosts to removed Enter the number of hosts to be removed and click Remove as shown in Figure 8 20 Remove Host 4 ees Verity the ruber of hosts hat you are removing ig Remove the hosts even if volumes to them These Volumes WI no tonger bo accoseibl to tno nost lial Figure 8 20 Removing a host If itis necessary to remove a host with volumes assigned deletion must be forced by selecting the option to Remove the hosts even if volumes are mapped to them see Figure 8 20 This removes both the host and its associated volume mappings 3 After the task is complete click Close to return to the Hosts pane as shown in Figure 8 21 Remove Host Task completes
255. e 8 7 Mappings Task completed View more detas Task samples c Figure 8 7 Modify Mappings task completed 5 Click Close and the Modify Mapping pane closes 364 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 If Apply had been clicked in the pane shown Figure 8 6 on page 364 the changes would have been submitted to the system but the Modify Host Mappings pane remains open for further changes 7 From the Modify Host Mappings pane it is possible to modify another host by selecting it from the Hosts menu as shown in Figure 8 8 uci Host Mappings FostCopyon Kj shopper HG FoshCopyVo Tistcopyvoe ip Festopyor WE 0 2 0 6 0 906 20608 s SOON s 5000201F G000000od0900 ASQ DF 00000 J09008t Volumes tota Hoet Shown t raping Seng O mappings we Figure 8 8 Selecting another host to modify Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 365 8 After moving a volume to the right pane in the Modify Host Mappings pane itis possible to right click the yellow unmapped volume and change the SCSI ID used for the host mapping shown in Figure 8 9 Modify Host Mappings x Most Volumes mapped to me Hest lt unman ETTE FasMCopyoH GUQMSODREDRrSGUDIN Q0 sonoro 2 Fusncopywoiz ot mooc
256. e Consistency Groups window The Consistency Groups window is where you can manage consistency groups and FlashCopy mappings within these groups 2 All FlashCopy mappings are shown those in consistency groups and those that are not Click Not in a Group and then expand your selection by clicking the plus sign icon next to it All of the FlashCopy mappings that are not in any consistency groups are displayed underneath 3 Individual consistency groups are displayed underneath those not in groups and you can discover the properties of a consistency group and the FlashCopy mappings in it by clicking the plus sign to the left of the group name You can also take action on any consistency groups and FlashCopy mappings within the Consistency Groups window as allowed by their state For more information see 10 1 5 Managing FlashCopy mappings on page 474 500 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Creating a FlashCopy consistency group To create a FlashCopy consistency group complete the following steps 1 Click Create Consistency Group at the top of the Consistency Groups window as shown in Figure 10 54 Pa SSE Source Progress rrr Tomapi stopped Axa woo avanan teman2 B e 2 _ _ 09 0 ReibockConsist rcup Copying Flash Time Nov 5 2014 2 58 28 PM 7 covying Fuencopries Fashcopmion Sembee aa Figure 10 54 New Consistency Group o
257. e Pools are populated with two or more different disk tier attributes high performance flash drives enterprise SAS drives and Nearline drives Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 423 A volume migration is when the complete volume is migrated from one Storage Pool to another Storage Pool An Easy Tier data migration moves only extents inside the Storage Pool to different performance attributes as shown in Figure 9 10 p Enterprise SAS Storage Pool A ese gt DESC S Nearline SAS in y Storage Pool ee gt 860 _ CUN MR A mattered d Storage Pool Easy Tier Enabled volume based data migration Easy Tier automated extent migration Figure 9 10 Tiered Storage Pools When licensed Easy Tier is enabled on any pool that contains two or more classes of disk drive The Easy Tier function manages the extent migration as follows gt Promote Moves the candidate hot extent to a higher performance tier Warm Demote Prevents performance overload of a tier by demoting a warm extent to a lower tier Triggered when bandwidth or IOPS exceeds predefined threshold gt Cold Demote Coldest extent moves to a lower tier Expanded or Cold Demote Demote appropriate sequential workload to the lowest tier to better use Nearline bandwidth Swap This operation exchanges a cold extent in a higher tier with a hot extent in a lower tier or vice versa
258. e SA GUI enter one of the following URLs into any web browser gt http s lt cluster IP address of your cluster gt service gt http s lt service IP address of a node gt service For example you might use the following addresses Management address http 1 2 3 4 service gt SA access address http 1 2 3 5 service 68 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Complete the following steps to access the SA 1 When you are accessing SA by using cluster IP address gt service the configuration node canister SA GUI login window opens Enter the Superuser Password as shown in Figure 2 47 IC arm Figure 2 47 Service Assistant Tool login Chapter 2 Initial configuration 69 2 After you are logged in you see the Service Assistant Home window as shown in Figure 2 48 The SA interfaces can view the status of and run service actions on other nodes in addition to the node where the user is connected SII IET orent 01121 node peu E Home You can view detailed status and error summary and manage servie actions for the current node The currant node is tha reda on which sarves lated acions are performed The conmoctad rode displays the saria assistant and brav dos Ung mtartace Yor woking wih tha nodes ho syst Ta 4 d foren nado cesta rad rm ti tabi Attention Orly perform service actions on nodes when directed by service proceduras If used inappropriately serica Ste
259. e following steps to replace the 1 Grasp the blue touch points on each end of the battery as shown in Figure 11 12 Am ES Ve Figure 11 12 BBU replacement Step 1 2 Lift the battery vertically upwards until the connectors disconnect Important During a BBU change the battery must be kept parallel to the canister system board while it is removed or replaced as shown in Figure 11 13 Keep equal force or pressure on each end Figure 11 13 BBU replacement Step 2 584 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 11 2 4 Expansion canister Ports and LED There are two expansion canister slots along the top of the unit as shown in Figure 11 14 a Figure 17 14 Rear of an expansion enclosure SAS ports SAS ports are used to connect the expansion canister to the node canister or to connect an extra expansion canister to the chain Figure 11 15 shows the SAS ports that are on the expansion canister Figure 17 15 Expansion canister SAS ports The meaning of the SAS port LEDs is described in Table 11 5 Table 11 5 SAS LED status meaning State Meaning Green Indicates that at least one of the SAS lanes on these connectors is operational If the light is off when connected there is a problem with the connection Amber If the light is on one of the following errors occurred Oneormore but not all of the four lanes up for this
260. e has benefited from software development work for the IBM System Storage DS8000 product in which there have been six versions of Easy Tier Of those versions versions 1 and 3 have been implemented within IBM Storwize Family software The first generation of Easy Tier introduced automated storage performance management efficiently boosting enterprise class performance with flash drives and automating storage tiering from enterprise class drives to flash drives The second generation of Easy Tier introduced the combination of Nearline drives with the objective of maintaining optimal performance at low cost The second generation also introduced auto rebalancing of extents and was implemented within DS8000 products only The third generation of Easy Tier introduces further enhancements that provide automated storage performance and storage economics management across all three drive tiers flash Enterprise and Nearline storage tiers It enables you to consolidate and efficiently manage more workloads on a single IBM Storwize V3700 It also introduces support for Storage Pool Balancing in homogeneous pools 9 2 New Features in Easy Tier 3 418 The following enhancements are included in Easy Tier 3 Support for three tiers of disk or a mixture of any two tiers Storage Pool Balancing gt Enhancements to the Storage Tier Advisor Tool including additional graphing from the STAT utility Figure 9 1 shows the supported Easy Tier p
261. e information about the limits and restrictions see the following website http www 01 ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S1004923 7 4 2 Actions on Child Pools By selecting a Child Pool and clicking the action menu only the following actions are applicable to Child Pools Change Icon described in Change Icon on page 353 this option helps to manage and differentiate between pools and drive classes gt Rename Select this option to rename a Child Pool Actions are explained in Rename on page 353 Delete Pool If the Child Pool is not provisioning any capacity to volumes use this option to delete Child Pool Properties The properties of the Child Pool can be seen by choosing this option ing a Child Pool A Child Pool can be easily expanded and reduced However re sizing a Child Pool can only be performed through CLI 1 If you are certain that the Parent Pool has sufficient free extents you can use the svctask chndiskgrp command with the size parameter to set the new size of the Child Pool 2 The capacity of the Child Pool can also be reduced You cannot reduce the size of the Child Pool to less than its used capacity Assuming that the Child Pool capacity is 100 00 GB Example 7 10 shows how to use the CLI to increase the capacity by 20 GB Example 7 10 Expanding Child Pool 1BM_Storwize ITSO_V3700 superuser gt svctask chmdiskgrp unit gb size 120 V37K ChildP 1 Chapter 7 Storage
262. e initial configuration This process enables the system to make the best use of the enclosures and drives that you have If you are expanding the IBM Storwize V3700 after the initial installation by adding expansion enclosures follow the physical installation procedures as described in IBM Storwize V3700 Quick Installation Guide GC27 4219 After the hardware is installed cabled and powered complete the following steps to add an expansion enclosure 1 Change to the Monitoring tab and you can find two different options to initiate the wizard to add a new enclosure Each guides the user to the same wizard Chapter 2 Initial configuration 59 2 Click Add Enclosure or Click to add to add the new enclosure as shown in Figure 2 34 Sytem Tum OT Aldon LEDS Update Pomer Of Properties Figure 2 34 Adding new expansion enclosure 3 A message displays that informs you that there are unused drives in the new expansion enclosure The wizard prompts you to include them into optimal RAIDs to be used as MDisks Choose whether you want to configure the new drivers In our example we choose NO However if you choose Yes the IBM Storwize V3700 automatically configures the drives as candidates To learn more about the status of the drivers see Chapter 7 Storage Pools on page 307 60 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 The wizard shows the details of hardware to be added Highlight the enclosure that you wa
263. e lTSO V3700 superuser Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 441 442 3 To enable Easy Tier on single tiered Storage Pool in measured mode run the chmdiskgrp easytier measure Storage Pool name command as shown in Example 9 3 Example9 3 Enable Easy Tier on a single tiered Storage Pool Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser chmdiskgrp easytier measure Nearline Pool Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser 4 Check the status of the Storage Pool again by running the Ismdiskgrp Storage Pool name command again as shown in Example 9 4 9 4 Storage Pool details Easy Tier Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lsmdiskgrp Nearline Pool id T name Nearline Pool status online mdisk count 1 easy tier measure easy tier status measured tier ssd tier mdisk count 0 tier capacity 0 00MB tier free capacity 0 00MB tier enterprise tier mdisk count 1 tier capacity 0 00 tier free capacity 0 00MB tier nearline tier mdisk count 0 tier capacity 1 63TB tier free capacity 1 63TB IBM_Storwize 1750 13700 superuser gt 5 To get list of all of the defined volumes run the 1svdisk command as shown in Example 9 5 For this example we are only interested in the RedbookVolume volume Example 9 5 All volumes list IBM Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lsvdisk id name I0 group id IO group name status mdisk grp id 6 RedbookVolume 0 io_grp0 online 1 IBM_Storwize 1750 13700 superuser gt
264. e no further actions that must be addressed Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 9 59 01 Fibre Channel ports not operational we P Ben i c MM ae M pet cmm uc NECCEE C e M M 2 C eR REM eee PE See eee Des Figure 11 69 Recommended action Completed Handling multiple alerts If there are multiple alerts logged the IBM Storwize V3700 recommends an action to fix the problem or problems Figure 11 70 shows the event log that displays multiple alerts Qe stay musk has lost redundancy ha sd redd Em lot orotectea y sumciont aparos E eso de AAD Oa ii Figure 11 70 Multiple alert events displayed in the event log Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 623 The Next Recommended Action function orders the alerts by severity and displays the events with the highest severity first If multiple events have the same severity they are ordered by date and the oldest event is displayed first The following order of severity starts with the most severe condition gt Unfixed alerts sorted by error code where the lowest error code has the highest severity Unfixed messages Monitoring events sorted by error code the lowest error code has the highest severity Expired events Fixed alerts and messages
265. e point and remove several FlashCopy mapping administration tasks modify consistency groups complete the following steps 1 Select Consistency Groups in the Copy Services menu to open the pane The Consistency Group pane shows the defined groups with their associated FlashCopy mappings 2 Group Actions such as FlashCopy mapping Start Stop and Delete can be performed from this pane 3 Create FlashCopy Mapping and Create Consistency Group can also be selected from this pane For more information see FlashCopy Mappings pane in the following section Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 3 84 shows the Consistency Groups pane Imm gt Reeser gt e ak H amp EX Properties Figure 3 84 Consistency Groups pane FlashCopy Mappings pane FlashCopy mappings define the relationship between source volumes and target volumes The FlashCopy Mappings pane shows information that relates to each mapping such as status progress source and target volumes and flash time To perform FlashCopy mappings complete the following steps 1 Select FlashCopy Mappings in the Copy Services menu to open the pane 2 Select Create FlashCopy Mapping to configure a new mapping or use the Actions menu to administer the mapping Figure 3 85 shows the FlashCopy Mappings pane E 9 E epe amp Ep Eie
266. e previous steps for each port that you want to configure for iSCSI attachment The Ethernet ports should now be prepared for iSCSI attachment Setting the Windows registry keys You can adjust the system registry to make iSCSI operations more reliable on Windows 2012 R2 To do this complete the following steps You must also look at the suggested guidance for your application To set the registry keys complete the following steps 1 Press Wins 2 In the dialog box enter regedit and press Enter This will open the registry editor 3 In the registry editor locate the following key HKEY LOCAL NACHINEVSYSTEMVCurrentContro SetVContro VClass V 4D36E97B E325 11CE B FC1 08002BE10318 lt bus ID Parameters VLinkDownTime If the value for the LinkDownTime key is not 120 decimal value change the value to 120 4 In the registry editor locate the following key LOCAL MACHINEVSYSTEMVCurrentContro SetVContro VClass V 4D36E97B E325 11CE B FC1 08002BE10318 lt bus ID Parameters MaxRequestHoldTime If the value for the MaxRequestHol dTime key is not 120 decimal value change it to 120 5 In the registry editor locate the following key HKEY LOCAL MACHINEVSYSTEMVCurrentContro SetVContro VClass V 4D36E97B E325 11CE B FC1 08002BE10318 V bus ID gt Parameters MaxPendingRequests If the value for the MaxPendingRequests key is not 2048 decimal value change it to 2048 Chapter 4 Host configuration 161 6 In the registry
267. e previous two steps for all iSCSI IPs that you want to connect to 5 In the iSCSI Initiator properties the connected ports should now be listed under Discovered targets as shown in Figure 5 47 Em poU i296 co biis fun pas Figure 5 47 Discovered iSCSI targets 6 The next step is to scan for disks Follow the steps in 5 3 1 Discovering Fibre Channel volumes from Windows 2012 R2 on page 218 to do this The number of disks listed should be the number of mapped volumes multiplied by the number of paths because you have not yet enabled MPIO for iSCSI devices Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 7 To enable MPIO for iSCSI devices first go to Tools MPIO in Server Manager as shown in Figure 5 48 Component Services Computer Maragenent Deren and Optimise nue Bere Viewer Interet ifomston Service i Manager Manageabi tocs Security Plc ORC Dea Sauce GE Data Sources 64 Performancs pertrmance Monitor Everts Services Warte I Reece Secutty Confguaion Ward sytem Figure 5 48 Opening the MPIO properties window This opens the window shown in Figure 5 49 MPIO Devices Gscover Mul Paths sv instal Configuration snapshot To add support for anew device idc Add and enter te Vendor and Product ida caa org of 3 caractere foloned by 16 characters Devices car be specitec uang sen
268. ean AM MIA SES 5250 AM Se superuser superuser sas AM superuser svctask erfesonsiatg sna SOR AM superuser svetask chtemap force 1 sna sic superuser sveask chtemap torce 0 Figure 3 84 Audit Log pane 3 4 7 Settings menu The Setting menu provides access to the Notifications Network Security System Support and GUI Preferences panes Figure 3 95 shows the Settings menu Figure 3 95 Settings menu Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 129 Notifications pane The IBM Storwize V3700 can use Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP traps syslog messages emails and IBM Call Home to notify users and IBM when events are detected Each event notification method can be configured to report all events or alerts Alerts are the significant events and might require user intervention The event notification levels are critical warning and information Select Notifications in the Settings menu to open the Notifications pane which provides access to the Email SNMP and Syslog configuration panes IBM Call Home is an email notification for IBM Support It is automatically configured as an email recipient and is enabled when the Email event notification option is enabled by following the Call Home wizard Enabling Email Notification option shown in Figure 3 96 the Notifications pane provides access to the Email configuration pane 1
269. eating a new file system on a disk 220 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Definition In this context Volume refers to a Windows concept and not specifically Storwize V3700 volume 2 The New Volume Wizard opens Click Next on the first page to open the page shown in Figure 5 38 3 Choose which server and disk to provision and click Next Sem Cinese Destination WIN DNEIEPSUTL lec Virtual Disk Capacity Free Space Subsystem Figure 5 38 Choosing the Server and Disk Chapter 5 Volume configuration 221 4 The next step is to choose the size of the volume as shown in Figure 5 39 Set the volume size and click Next to continue Specify the size of the volume Aviatie Capacity 987 68 Minimums ago ms Figure 5 39 Choosing the volume size 222 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 Next choose whether to assign a Drive letter as shown in Figure 5 40 Click Next to continue Assign to a drive letter or folder Sc shutin ksi the ohare ch llr a de When you cai a ue ba folder te volume appears as folder vibina die suchas Asante Drive letten O Tre following k Dont ation to a dive letter or folder Figure 5 40 Assigning a Drive letter to the new volume Chapter 5 Volume configuration 223 6 Choose file system type unit size and name for the new volume as shown in Figure 5 41 Click Next to continu
270. ecAllocatod 1 017 0528 68 Figure 9 20 Easy Tier active As soon as a second MDisk of a different disk class is added the status of Easy Tier changes from Inactive to Active In this pool IOM has started and the other Easy Tier processes start to work Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 435 436 9 Figure 9 21 shows the Storage Pool changed to a multitiered Storage Pool containing Enterprise and Nearline tiers The Storage Pool icon changes from a single tiered to multitiered characteristic Note When Easy Tier functionality is licensed the IBM Storwize V3700 changes the Easy Tier status of the Storage Pool from Inactive to Active automatically pese cei Fs 7 ESS esi emt vectors sac pen vois were gaa pu free casas 92000 aes 3 see cy com pou CETA cS Figure 9 21 Multtiered Storage Pool Figure 9 22 shows three volumes on the mulitiered Storage Pool EasyTier Pool creme vowmes i Actions mer Caps Host Mappings Rvolume 0 v Onine 2 006 000000011 Volume 1 v Onine 2008 900507e090E80 F5s000000000000012 2 Onin 2man o 8005075000E501F55000000000000 15 Figure 9 22 Volumes by Pool Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 10 f you open the properties of a volume by clicking Actions Properties you can also see that Easy Tier is enabled on the volum
271. ed a multipath driver is also required on the host If iSCSI host is to be used they also require a Microsoft Multipath I O MPIO driver Both node canisters should be configured and connected to the network so that any iSCSI hosts see at least two paths to volumes and an MPIO driver is required to resolve these SAN Boot is supported by IBM Storwize V3700 The requirements are listed on the IBM Storwize V3700 support matrix and configuration instructions are provided in the BM Storwize V3700 Host Attachment Guide which can be found at the following website https ibm biz BdEzpM Verify that the hosts that access volumes from the IBM Storwize V3700 meet the requirements that are found on the following website https ibm biz BdEzpy 36 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Multiple operating systems OSs are supported by IBM Storwize V3700 For more information about HBA driver multipath combinations see the following website https ibm biz BdxQhe As indicated on the SSIC keep the following items under consideration Host OSs are at the levels that are supported by the IBM Storwize V3700 basic input output system BIOS device drivers firmware and multipathing drivers are at the levels that are supported by IBM Storwize V3700 Ifa start from SAN is required ensure that it is supported for the OSs that are deployed If host clustering is required ensure that it is supported for the OSs that are de
272. ed as described in Chapter 4 2 Preparing the host operating system on page 151 We also assume that FC addresses SAS addresses or iSCSI initiator names were recorded for host creation purposes Considerations when configuring hosts in IBM Storwize V3700 When creating a host object in IBM Storwize V3700 it is important to verify the configuration limits and restrictions which are published on the following website http www ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S1004921 Creating a host object using the GUI To create a host object complete the following steps 1 From the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI open the hosts view by navigating to Hosts gt Hosts as shown in Figure 4 31 Figure 4 31 Opening the hosts view 180 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 This should load the page shown in Figure 4 32 CERE a Figure4 32 The Hosts view with no host objects configured 2 Click the Add Host button to open the Add Host wizard as shown in Figure 4 33 Add Host x Choose the Host Type ox 7X Fibre Channel Host iSCSI Host SAS Host i ecu Figure 4 33 Choosing the host type in the Add Host wizard 3 Choose whether to create an FC host an iSCSI host or an SAS host and follow the steps in the wizard The following sections provide guidance for each attachment type Chapter 4 Host configuration 181 4 3 1 Creating FC hosts To create an FC host comple
273. ed volumes using Create and Map to Host on page 213 Complete the steps in that section to finish mapping the volumes The volumes should now be accessible from the host OS The following section describes how to discover and use mapped volumes from hosts 5 3 Discovering mapped volumes from host systems This section describes how to discover the volumes that were created and mapped in 5 1 Creating volumes in IBM Storwize V3700 on page 200 and 5 2 Mapping volumes to hosts on page 213 from the host operating system We assume that you have completed all of the following tasks described in this book so that the hosts and the IBM Storwize V3700 are prepare 1 Prepare your operating systems for attachment including installing multipath support For more information see 4 2 Preparing the host operating system on page 151 2 Create host objects using the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI For more information see 4 3 Configuring hosts in IBM Storwize V3700 on page 180 3 Create volumes and map these to the host objects using the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI For more information see 5 1 Creating volumes in IBM Storwize V3700 on page 200 and 5 2 Mapping volumes to hosts on page 213 First you need to look up the unique identifier UIDs of the volumes Knowing the UIDs of the volumes helps determine which is which from the host point of view To do this complete the following steps 1 Open the volumes by host view b
274. ed ID string that can consist of up to 40 characters Up to 100 keys can be stored on the system New IDs and keys can be added and unwanted IDs and keys can be deleted To use the CLI an SSH client must be installed on that system the SSH key pair must be generated on the client system and the client s SSH public key must be stored on the IBM Storwize V3700 system The SSH client that is used in this book is PuTTY There is also a PuTTY key generator that can be used to generate the private and public key pair The PuTTY client can be downloaded at no cost from the following website http www chiark greenend org uk Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The following tools should be downloaded gt PUTTY SSH client putty exe PuTTY key generator puttygen exe If using a Microsoft Windows OS it is suggested to download the Windows installer which includes everything required This is currently the putty 0 63 installer exe file Generating a public and private key pair generate a public and private key pair complete the following steps 1 Start the PuTTY key generator to generate the public and private key pair as shown in Figure A 1 Fie Key Conworsons Halo Key Noken Generate apiblc ptvale key mm Load an esting private key ka Save he generated key Pacmeles Type of key to generate OSs ASA CO SSH2 REA O SSH 205A Nuriber c bisin a generated ko 302
275. ed to automatically delete when the FlashCopy mapping reaches 100 completion Backup Creates a point in time replica of the production data After the copy completes the backup view can be refreshed from the production data with minimal copying of data from the production volume to the backup volume This preset automatically creates a volume with the same properties as the source volume The preset creates an incremental FlashCopy mapping with a background copy rate of 50 Presets All of the presets can be adjusted by using the expandable Advanced Settings section in the GUI Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 10 1 4 Managing FlashCopy using the GUI The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides a separate function icon to access copy service management The following windows are available for managing FlashCopy under the Copy Services function icon gt FlashCopy Consistency Groups FlashCopy Mappings The Copy Services function icon is shown in Figure 10 4 ie 2 Figure 10 4 Copy Services function icon Most of the actions to manage the FlashCopy mapping can be done in the FlashCopy window or the FlashCopy Mappings windows although the quick path to create FlashCopy presets can be found only in the FlashCopy window Chapter 10 Copy services 465 manage FlashCopy mapping complete the following steps 1 Click FlashCopy in the Copy Services functio
276. ed volume functions complete the following steps 1 Click Volumes as shown in Figure 8 39 and the Volumes pane opens as shown in Figure 8 40 crota volumes Aerona Cr ASTA v 8 S Fasnconyoo v onmo Sonais es esncooyvon m 000618 varoo es esnconyoe 2 esnconyos V ommo smaa mostre FesnConyol gem ab Lectesto n 2590608 v3700_RsPooL H Lestestt n 2 BOOGIE varoo asPooL ot Rive 8 V 20008 tasyi Fook No pe n 280GB temer p V Online temer Pook copy Roo o1 enosoraoooesonrsae sium 2 Poot wo edbookvoume easyTier Poot Mo z J m AE T T T 3 Figure 8 40 Volume pane Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 385 This pane lists configured volumes on the system and provides the following information Name Shows the name of the volume If there is a plus sign next to the name this sign means that there are two copies of this volume Click the plus sign to expand the view and list the copies as shown in Figure 8 40 on page 385 Status Provides the status information about the volume which can be online offline o
277. ed with the device latency that is 19 4 ms of physical latency at a minimum This latency is under the 80 ms limit of Global Mirror but this number is the best case number Link quality and bandwidth play a significant role here Your network provider likely ensures a latency maximum on your network link be sure to stay below the Global Mirror round trip time RTT limit You can easily double or triple the expected physical latency with a lower quality or lower bandwidth network link As result you are suddenly within range of exceeding the limit the moment a large flood of happens that exceeds the bandwidth capacity you have in place When you get a 1920 error always check the latency first The FCIP routing layer can introduce latency if it is not properly configured If your network provider reports a much lower latency this report can be an indication of a problem at your FCIP routing layer Most FCIP routing devices have built in tools that you can use to check the RTT delay When you are checking latency remember that TCP IP routing devices including FCIP routers report RTT by using standard 64 byte ping packets Figure 10 83 shows why the effective transit time should be measured only using packets large enough to hold a FC frame This packet size is 2148 bytes 2112 bytes of payload and 36 bytes of header and you should allow more capacity to be safe because different Switching vendors have optional features that might in
278. efining the available bandwidth and the background copy percentage between both systems Create Partnership x This system is in the replication layer Partnerships can he created with other systems in the replication layer Tee Parner system vsom Link bandwith bps Backuroundcoorrate c6 2 Figure 10 88 Select the remote storage system for the new partnership and configure partnership properties 534 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 The bandwidth that you must enter here is used by the background copy process between the clusters in the partnership To set the background copy bandwidth optimally make sure that you consider all three resources primary storage inter cluster link bandwidth and auxiliary storage to avoid overloading them which affects the latency 7 Click OK and the partnership task starts 8 When it finishes click Close and the partnership is complete on this system It is listed in the Partnership window but is displayed with an alert and the system health status turns yellow as shown in Figure 10 89 This is normal and happens because only one half of the partnership currently exists croto rarneramo Aerona Name a 77 TE Address db Conti rive channe Sees oa SEI EO e Figure 10 89 Partially configured partnership Chapter 10 Copy services 535 9 If you select the partnership more infor
279. el ports listed 176 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 Select of the VMkernel ports and click Edit The window shown in Figure 4 29 should open suce arietes MC Teaming Porthrepertes a T Figure 4 29 Editing VMkernel port Chapter 4 Host configuration 177 4 Go to the NIC Teaming tab select Override switch failover order and then ensure that each port is tied to just one physical adapter port as shown in Figure 4 30 i Genera Securty afte Shaping NEC Teaming ees m TIE peso 3 Sites Che 2 89 override snith falover order Select active and standby adapters for this port grouo In a falover stuetion standby adapters scivate in she order specfed row Speed 79 1 E Active Adapters Hg von None Standby Adapters Unused Adapters Hg sme 2000 Fa None Adapter Detals Nare Location Driver cms Figure 4 30 Configuring a VMkernel port to bind to a single physical adapter port These are the basic steps required to prepare a VMware ESXi 5 5 host for iSCSI attachment We provide more information later in this book For more information about configuring iSCSI attachment on the VMware ESXi side the following white paper pu
280. elease 4 Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved xiii Authors xiv This book was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working at the International Technical Support Organization ITSO Manchester Labs United Kingdom UK Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Jon Tate is a Project Manager for IBM System Storage storage area network SAN Solutions at the ITSO San Jose Center Before joining the ITSO in 1999 he worked in the IBM Technical Support Center providing Level 2 support for IBM storage products Jon has 28 years of experience in storage software and management services and support and is both an IBM Certified information technology IT Specialist and an IBM SAN Certified Specialist He is also the UK Chairman of the Storage Networking Industry Association SNIA Adam Lyon Jones is a Test Engineer in IBM Storage Systems at the IBM Manchester Lab as part of a global team developing testing and supporting IBM Storage products He has worked for two years performing system and integration testing for IBM SAN Volume Controller and IBM Storwize products His areas of expertise include storage hardware storage virtualization and SANs Before joining IBM he studied a Masters degree in Physics at Durham University Lee Sirett is a Storage Technical Advisor for the European Storage Competency Centre ESCC in Mainz Germany Before joining the ESCC he worked in IBM
281. elect node from the following table Attention Only perform service actions on nodes when directed by service procedures If used inappropriately service actions can cause a loss of access to data or even data loss If the node status is active select Monitoring Evonts in the management GUT to fix any errors that related to the active node Acions Enter Senice Se v z 0121750 v3700 Figure 11 75 Collect logs with the Service Assistance Tool 2 Support information can be downloaded With latest statesave or Without latest statesave as shown in Figure 11 76 Em m oc cee a dimid pg puni rts rode esa e ede he iti er spot suc bla nd Create a support package E With atest statesave Without latest statesave and Download Available Files 060706C Ltrc old 1 dipa heat 1 441027 40122 0 4 doa heak 0G07D6C 1 141028 011119 dete doa heat 0G07DEC L 141101 174511 dat dos heat OGO7DGC 1 121102 174505 data Figure 11 76 Download support fo using the Service Assistant Tool Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 627 11 6 3 Support informa n to USB stick Whenever the management GUI SA Tool or a remote connection is unavailable snaps can be collected from each node using a USB stick Complete the following steps to collect
282. em must have access to an SMTP server on the LAN that can forward emails to the default IBM service address callhomel de ibm com for Americas based systems and cal 1home0 de ibm com for the rest of the world D Email address of local administrators that must be notified of alerts IP address of Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP server to direct alerts to if required for example operations or Help desk Chapter 2 Initial configuration 37 After the IBM Storwize V3700 initial configuration you might want to add more users who manage the system You can create as many users as you need but the following roles generally are configured for users Security Admin Administrator CopyOperator Monitor Service The user in the Security Admin role can perform any function on the Storwize V3700 The user in the Administrator role can perform any function on the IBM Storwize V3700 system except create users User creation The create users function is allowed by the Security Admin role only and should be limited to as few users as possible The user in the CopyOperator role can view anything in the system but the configure and manage only the copy functions of the IBM FlashCopy The user in the Monitor role can view object and system configuration information but cannot configure manage or modify any system resource The only other role that is available is the Service role w
283. emotesoureet RemoteTargett CConsistertsynenronized 52 RemoteSourcet Remote Targeta tating Varo Romotesouree2 Figure 10 137 A stopped consistency group in the Idling state Note The CLI differentiates between stopping consistency groups with or without access using the access flag for example stoprcconsistgrp access 0 Chapter 10 services 567 Starting a consistency group The Remote Copy relationship can be started by completing the following steps 1 Click Start in the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 138 or right click the consistency group ERSUR S nac Create Consistency Group Taster Volum LIAE Create Relationship Ronchi oe Switch rues nemotesoureeo nemotesoureer Fores Gj Remotesourent PNE Ere ee Remote Sourc Remote Tora Delete Consistency Group Figure 10 138 Starting the consistency group 2 You are prompted to select whether the Master or Auxiliary volumes are to act as the primary volumes before the consistency group is started as shown in Figure 10 139 page 569 The consistency group then starts copying data from the primary volumes to the secondary volumes If the consistency group was stopped without access and is in the Consistent Stopped state you are not prompted to confirm the direction in which to start the group I
284. ems to make the partnership fully functional Interconnection Interconnects between IBM Storwize products were introduced in version 6 3 0 Because IBM Storwize V3700 supports only version 6 4 1 or higher there is problem with support for this functionality However any other Storwize product must be at a minimum level of 6 3 0 to connect to the IBM Storwize V3700 and the IBM Storwize V3700 must set the replication layer using the svctask chsystem layer replication command Layer limitations are described next Introduction to layers IBM Storwize V3700 implements the concept of layers Layers determine how the IBM Storwize portfolio interacts with the IBM SAN Volume Controller Currently there are two layers Replication and storage The replication layer is used when you want to use the IBM Storwize V3700 with one or more IBM SAN Volume Controllers as a Remote Copy partner The storage layer is the default mode of operation for the IBM Storwize V3700 and is used when you want to use the IBM Storwize V3700 to present storage to an IBM SAN Volume Controller as a back end system The layer for the IBM Storwize V3700 can be switched by running svctask chsystem layer replication Generally switch the layer while your IBM Storwize V3700 system is not in production This situation prevents potential disruptions because layer changes are not VO tolerant Figure 10 71 shows the effect of layers on IBM SAN Volume Controller and IBM Sto
285. enu B mne gj vm z Creme user Pu S YE Remove Passwora confauted Yes as Remove SSH Key Configured Ves QB omo M Figure 3 90 Users pane 126 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Creating a user group To create a user group complete the following steps 1 Click Create User Group to open the Create User Group pane 2 Enter the group name select the role then click Create as shown in Figure 3 91 3 Hover over each role to show a help icon that describes the role Create User Groun x Group name Dar shif operators Monitor Copy Operator ptr secunty aamini h Figure 3 91 Create User Group pane Creating a user To create a new user complete the following steps 1 Click New User to define a user to the system Figure 3 92 shows the Users pane and the New User option y seams F 8 8 Cubes Uer Group puerum aA superuser SecurityAdmin Figure 3 92 Create a new user amp amp 2 Using the Create User pane as shown in Figure 3 93 on page 128 itis possible to configure the user name password and authentication mode Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 127 The user name password group and authentication mode are mandatory fields but the public Secure Shell SSH key is optional 3 After the user is defined click Create
286. er configure and generate reports for an IBM Storwize V3700 system A detailed description about Tivoli Storage Productivity Center reporting is beyond the intended scope of this book 11 9 1 Basic configuration and administration By using Tivoli Storage Productivity Center you can administer monitor and configure your IBM Storwize V3700 system However not all of the options that are normally associated with the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI or CLI are available Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 635 configure Tivoli Storage Productivity Center complete the following steps 1 After successfully adding your IBM Storwize V3700 system click Disk Manager gt Storage Subsystems to view your configured devices as shown in Figure 11 88 a ne or b Coie asa at Figure 11 88 Storage Subsystem view 2 When you highlight the IBM Storwize V3700 system action buttons become available that you can use to view the device configuration or create virtual disks as shown in Figure 11 89 p Figure 11 89 Action buttons a The MDisk Groups option provides you with a detailed list of the configured MDisk groups including pool space available space configured space and Easy Tier configuration b The Virtual Disks option lists all of the configured disks with the added option to filter
287. er or SAN fabric configuration 25 Inter cluster link problem 15 Inter cluster link configuration 25 vYvvvv In practice the error that is most often overlooked is latency Global Mirror has a round trip time tolerance limit of 80 ms A message that is sent from your source cluster to your target cluster and the accompanying acknowledgment must have a total time of less than 80 ms or 40 ms each way The primary component of your round trip time is the physical distance between sites For every 1 000 km 621 36 miles there is a 5 ms delay This delay does not include the time that is added by equipment in the path Every device adds a varying amount of time depending on the device but you can expect about 25 ys for pure hardware devices For software based functions such as compression that is implemented in software the added delay tends to be much higher usually in the millisecond plus range Consider this example Company A has a production site that is 1 900 km from their recovery site Their network service provider uses five devices to connect the two sites In addition to those devices Company A uses a SAN Fibre Channel Router at each site to provide FCIP to encapsulate the Fibre Channel traffic between sites There are now seven devices and 1 900 km of distance delay All of the devices add 200 ps of delay each way The distance adds 9 5 ms each way for a total of 19 ms Chapter 10 Copy services 529 530 Combin
288. ere are more options under Capacity Management as shown in Figure 5 9 Advanced Settings Create Volume x Characteristics Capacity Mirroring Generic G Thin Provisioned Options Real Capacity 2 1 otvirtuat Capacity V Automatically Expand amp Warning Threshold so of Virtual Capacity Thir Provisioned Grain Size 25 Figure 5 9 Advanced Capacity Management options for Thin Provisioned volumes Some important points to note Forthin provisioned volumes mirroring does not apply The real capacity is the space that is actually allocated during creation This be specified as percentage of the virtual capacity or as value gibibytes GiB Increasing the real capacity reserves more space for the volumes ensuring that it does not get used elsewhere Increasing the real capacity diminishes the advantage of thin provisioned volumes compared to generic volumes however because there is less virtual capacity left to work with and more physical capacity allocated Enabling automatic expansion enables the real capacity to grow automatically as the amount of actual data stored on the volumes increases The warning threshold is the point at which the system begins to log capacity alerts for the volumes This gives system administrators advance warning to plan for expanding the real capacity of volumes If thin provisioned
289. ere the Elomert Manage Tab of tho Configursion Lit Select this option hen confi ring the Prad tivity Center For the IE DSANN Storage Manager cher device lener managers m pers the dashboard Select this cption you de not wich to werk withthe Configuration Uy inmediate io be stepped through the process of varies ta the Productivity erter E Do not decla this dialog again Figure 11 86 Add Devices window Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 Enter the details about your IBM Storwize V3700 into Tivoli Storage Productivity Center as shown in Figure 11 87 Fcon onee W Configure subsystem connections Te Mies auraga absystone CIS be cien paths ones ha conecten PONE bos daroma pos pon Em Stare verson secre User me EET in deem Faeroe ems Figure 11 87 Configure device in Tivoli Storage Productivity Center 6 Continue to follow the wizard after you complete all of the required fields After the wizard is completed Tivoli Storage Productivity Center collects information from IBM Storwize V3700 A summary of details is shown at the end of discovery process 11 9 Using Tivoli Storage Productivity Center to administer and generate reports for an IBM Storwize V3700 This section shows examples of how to use Tivoli Storage Productivity Center to administ
290. erface overview 81 Sorting columns To sort columns complete the following steps 1 Click the column heading Figure 3 15 shows the result of clicking the heading of the Capacity column The table is now sorted and lists volumes with the least amount of capacity at the top of the table To reverse the sort order click the heading again Create Volumes Actions filter Host Mappings contort Onine m pei as F um FlashCopyVo Online d Arcs reshCopyot Online a FlashCopyVol2 v Online Teneo x E uH FlashCopyvoi5 Online No ees oes i amp AEE Figure 3 15 Sorting columns by clicking the column heading Reordering columns To reorder columns complete the following steps 1 Figure 3 16 shows the location of the column with the Host Mappings heading positioned in the last column Drag heading left or right to reorder the columns in the table Online Fashcopyel nine sonce a am y ovce Viro TabCopyi n Y to 909 mosce vor or te a FlashCopyVol2 Online 5D00GiB V3700 R amp Pool 04 Ho v viro repone Z onte 00068 te Figure 3 16 Reordering columns 82 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 Figure 3 17 shows the co
291. ers and auxiliary clusters All relationships in a consistency group must also have the same copy direction and state Metro Mirror and Global Mirror relationships cannot belong to the same consistency group A copy type is automatically assigned to a consistency group when the first relationship is added to the consistency group After the consistency group is assigned a copy type only relationships of that copy type can be added to the consistency group Remote Copy and consistency group states Stand alone Remote Copy relationships and consistency groups share a common configuration and state model All of the relationships a non empty consistency group have the same state as the consistency group Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The following states apply to the relationships and the consistency groups except for the Empty state which is only for consistency groups InconsistentStopped The primary volumes are accessible for read and write I O operations but the secondary volumes are not accessible for either one A copy process must be started to make the secondary volumes consistent InconsistentCopying The primary volumes are accessible for read and write I O operations but the secondary volumes are not accessible for either one This state indicates that a copy process is ongoing from the primary to the secondary volume gt ConsistentStopped The secondary volumes contain a consistent image but it might be
292. es 1 5 IBM Storwize V3700 terms 1 5 1 Hosts 1 5 2 Node canister 1 5 3 VO Group 1 5 4 Clustered system 1 5 5 RAID 1 5 6 Managed disks 1 5 7 Quorum disks 1 5 8 Storage Pools 1 5 9 Child Pools 1 5 10 Volumes 1 5 11 iSCSI 1 5 12 SAS 1 6 IBM Storwize V3700 features 1 6 1 Volume mirroring 1 6 2 Thin provisioning 1 6 8 Easy Tier 1 6 4 Turbo Performance 1 6 5 Storage Migration 1 6 6 FlashCopy 1 6 7 Remote 1 7 Problem management and support 1 7 1 IBM Assist On site and remote service 1 7 2 Event notifications 1 7 3 Useful IBM Storwize V3700 websites Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved Chapter 2 Initial configuration 2 1 Hardware installation planning 2 2 Storage area network configuration planning 2 3 SAS direct attach planning 2 4 LAN configuration planning 24 1 Management IP address considerations 2 4 2 Service IP address considerations 2 5 Host configuration planning 2 6 Miscellaneous configuration planning 2 7 System management n 2 7 1 Graphical user interface 2 7 2 Command line interface 2 8 First time setup 2 9 Initial configuration 2 9 1 Adding expansion enclosures after initial configuration 2 9 2 Configure Call Home email alert and inventory 2 9 3 Service Assistant tool Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 3 1 Getting started 3 1 1
293. es by Pool pane Volume Allocation allocated to Voumes 520068 Capacity 7380008 Figure 3 57 Volume Allocation Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 105 106 Renaming pools To rename a pool complete the following steps 1 Select the pool from the pool filter 2 Click the name of the pool Figure 3 58 shows that pool V3700 R5Poo1 01 was selected to be renamed on 2 Mists 10 Volare co Figure 3 58 Renaming a pool Changing pool icons To change the icon that is associated with a pool complete the following steps 1 Select the pool in the Pool Filter 2 Click the large pool icon 3 Use the Choose Icon buttons to select the required image This helps to manage and differentiate between the classes of drive or the tier of the Storage Pool Figure 3 59 shows the pool change icon pane ey 3700 RSPool 01 Change icon tor 3700_RSPoot 01 m Senso fa ticity Es e Ties RSPool 0 oveja V3TK ChIMP 1 d FiashCopy Volt im ee Figure 3 59 Change Icon for a pool Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Volume functions The Volumes by Pool pane also provides access to the volume functions using the Actions menu the Create Volumes option and by right clicking a listed volume For more information about navigating the Volume pane see 3 4 3 Volumes menu on page 114 Figure 3 60 shows the volume functions that
294. escribes how to create volumes using the IBM Storwize V3700 graphical user interface GUI We assume that you have completed the steps described in Chapter 2 Initial configuration on page 27 and have storage arrays and pools already configured To create new volumes using the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI complete the following steps 1 Open the Volumes view by navigating to Volumes Volumes as shown in Figure 5 1 emma s Opening the Volumes view This loads the page shown in Figure 5 2 n u n Figure 5 2 The Volumes view with no volumes configured 2 Click Create Volumes to open the Create Volumes wizard as shown in Figure 5 3 on page 201 200 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Create Volumes x Selecta Prasat H4 d 4i Generic Thr Prorision Miror Thin irr Online SATB sane Gud Figure 53 Selecting a volume preset and pool in the Create Volume wizard 3 Choose whether to create Generic Thin Provision Mirror or Thin Mirror volumes and which pool to provision this storage from By default volumes created with the Storwize V3700 GUI are striped across all available managed disks MDisks in the chosen Storage Pool The following section provides descriptions of the volume presets and guidance for creating each volume type gt Generic A striped volume that is fully provisioned meaning that the
295. eseciec to asiste mappings Very ne mappings to Vanty he numberof mappings hat tie operation 4 Figure 8 38 Unmapping a volume from host Warning Ensure that the required procedures are run on the host OS before unmapping volumes on the IBM Storwize V3700 8 3 2 Properties Host Selecting a mapping and clicking Properties Host from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 8 37 on page 383 opens the Host Properties pane For more information see 8 1 5 Host properties on page 373 8 3 3 Properties Volume Selecting a mapping and clicking Properties Volume from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 8 37 on page 383 opens the Volume Properties pane For more information about volume properties see 8 5 Volume properties on page 396 8 4 Advanced volume administration This section describes volume administration tasks such as volume modification volume migration and creation of volume copies We assume that you have completed Chapter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 and so are familiar with volume creation and generic thin provisioned mirrored and thin mirrored volumes Figure 8 39 on page 385 shows the following options that are available in the Volumes menu for advanced features administration Volumes Volumes by Pool Volumes by Host 384 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 8 39 Volumes menu 8 4 1 Advanced volume functions To perform advanc
296. ess access toe storage subsystem for hosts that cout not be discover automates EE suctus eee hos group i you rape hose to share access isthe same gea es ET pee peine tede cry oed cvy Figure 6 30 Creating hosts Storage Manager GUI Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 wizard starts to guide you through the creation of each host Enter the host name and define the host type For IBM Storwize V3700 use IBM TS SAN VCE as shown in Figure 6 31 5 Click Next tial Setup Tasks E TEE B conngure Host Access manuan Specity Host Name and Host ex ten you deine ahost manust it wi bere molde t te storage subsystem for ges de Yous rot reed to use the core hosts atre dae nancy Ente host ae 30 characters mandi elect host oceratns syste iz Figure 6 31 Defining a host Storage Manager GUI 6 In the next pane assign the V3700 canister WWPN to the host definition as shown in Figure 6 32 Use the data gathered in 6 2 5 Recording migration information on page 252 gt contae taat css Ht connigureHost accoss Manual Specity HBA Host Ports mer own HA ter Abert port rte i m Figure 6 32 Adding WWPN to the host definition Chapter 6 Storage migration 275 276 7 Return to the S
297. et to reset the name field to the original name of the volume 4 Click Rename to apply the changes 5 Click Close after the task pane completes Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 391 8 4 7 Shrinking a volume 392 The Storwize V3700 can shrink volumes This feature should be used only if the host OS supports it This capability reduces the capacity that is allocated to the particular volume by the amount specified To shrink a volume complete the following steps 1 Select Shrink from the Actions menu 2 Enter the new volume size or by how much the volume should shrink as shown in Figure 8 48 Attention Before you shrink a volume ensure that the host OS supports this If the OS does not support shrinking a volume itis likely that the OS will log disk errors and data corruption will occur Shrink Volume Win2012 VoL 01 x You coloctod to shrink the capacity of volume Win2012 Vol 01 This action decreases the available capacity in the volume Ifthe volume contains data that s being used do not attempt under any Circumstances to shrink a volume without first backing up your data Currentsize 10 cn Shrinkby 5 Final size Figure 8 48 Shrink Volume pane 3 Click Shrink to start the process 4 Click Close when the task pane completes to return to the Volumes pane 5 Run the required procedures on the host OS after the shrinking process Important For v
298. ethods for copying IBM Metro Mirror IBM Global Mirror and Global Mirror with Change Volumes Metro Mirror is designed for metropolitan distances with synchronous copy requirement Global Mirror is designed for longer distances without requiring the hosts to wait for the full round trip delay of the long distance link through asynchronous methodology Global Mirror with Change Volumes is an added functionality for Global Mirror that is designed to attain consistency on lower quality network links Metro Mirror and Global Mirror are IBM branded terms for the functions of synchronous remote copy and asynchronous remote copy Throughout this book the term Remote Copy is used to refer to both functions where the text applies to each term equally 514 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 10 2 1 Remote Copy concepts Remote Copy concepts are described in this section Partnership When a partnership is created you connect two separate IBM Storwize V3700 systems or an IBM SAN Volume Controller Storwize V5000 or IBM Storwize V7000 and an IBM Storwize V3700 After the partnership creation is configured on both systems further communication between the node canisters in each of the storage systems is established and maintained by the storage area network SAN All inter cluster communication goes through the Fibre Channel FC network The partnership must be defined on both participating Storwize or IBM SAN Volume Controller syst
299. etween Storage Pools as described in Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system on page 1 A Storage Pool can have a threshold warning set that automatically issues a warning alert when the used capacity of the Storage Pool exceeds the set limit Single tiered Storage Pool MDisks that are used in a single tiered Storage Pool should have the following characteristics to prevent performance and other problems They should have the same hardware characteristics for example the same RAID type RAID array size disk type and disk RPMs The disk subsystems providing the MDisks must have similar characteristics for example maximum IOPS response time cache and throughput Use MDisks of the same size and ensure that the MDisks provide the same number of extents If this configuration is not feasible you must check the distribution of the volumes extents in that Storage Pool Multitiered Storage Pool A multitiered Storage Pool has a mix of MDisks with more than one type of disk tier attribute for example a Storage Pool that contains a mix of flash enterprise and Nearline MDisks A multitiered Storage Pool contains MDisks with different characteristics as opposed to the single tiered Storage Pool However each tier should have MDisks of the same size and MDisks that provide the same number of extents A multitiered Storage Pool is used to enable automatic migration of extents between disk tiers using the IBM St
300. etween your partners When you receive this error if your fabric has more than 64 host bus adapter HBA ports zoned you should check your fabric configuration to see if more than one HBA port for each node per I O group are zoned together The suggested zoning configuration for fabrics is one port of each node per O group associated with each host HBA For those fabrics with 64 or more host ports this recommendation becomes a rule You must follow this zoning rule or the configuration is technically unsupported Improper zoning leads to SAN congestion which can inhibit remote link communication intermittently Checking the zero buffer credit timer through IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center and comparing its value against your sample interval might reveal potential SAN congestion When a zero buffer credit timer is above 2 of the total time of the sample interval itis likely to cause problems Next always ask your network provider to check the status of the link If the link is okay watch for repetition of this error It is possible in a normal and functional network setup to have occasional 1720 errors but multiple occurrences indicate a larger problem If you receive multiple 1720 errors recheck your network connection and then check the IBM Storwize V3700 partnership information to verify the status and settings Perform diagnostic tests for every piece of equipment in the path between the two systems It often helps to have dia
301. ever there are more options under Mirroring as shown in Figure 5 13 Advanced Settings Create Volume 22 Creato Mirrored Copy Mirror Syne Reto E Characteristics Capacity Management ji vg Figure 5 13 Advanced Mirroring options for mirrored volumes Here itis possible to set the mirror sync rate Higher sync rates provide greater availability at a small cost to performance and vice versa 6 When you are done click OK to return to the main wizard 7 Click Create or Create and Map to Host when you are finished Create and Map to Host creates the volumes and then takes you to the Host Mapping wizard which is described in 5 2 Mapping volumes to hosts on page 213 Important The Create and Map to Host option is disabled if no hosts are configured on the IBM Storwize V3700 For more information about configuring hosts see Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 Chapter 5 Volume configuration 209 8 If you clicked Create the wizard completes as shown in Figure 5 14 Cres Volumes W Task completed 100 View more details gum Figure 5 14 Completion of the Create Volumes wizard Click Close to retur to the Volumes view which now lists your newly created volumes as shown in Figure 5 15 a Ps Figure 5 15 The Volumes view with the newly created volume listed 10 Repeat these steps for all mirrored volumes that you want to create
302. expansion enclosure connectivity only See Figure 2 4 on page 33 to correctly identify ports 1 2 and 3 Also note the keyway in the top of the SAS connector Important It is possible to insert the cables upside down despite the keyway Ensure that the blue tag on the SAS connector is underneath when inserting the cable Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure2 4 SAS port identification Although it is possible to attach six hosts one to each of the three available SAS ports on the two node canisters the suggested configuration for direct attachment is to have at least one SAS cable from the host connected to each node of the IBM Storwize V3700 This provides redundancy in the event that one of the nodes goes offline as shown in Figure 2 5 Node Canister 1 EH Host 1 IBM Storwize V3700 Host 2 Node Canister 2 Host 3 Figure 2 5 SAS host direct attach Note It is possible to connect further hosts using the optional SAS adapter interface card Chapter 2 Initial configuration 33 2 4 LAN configuration planning There are two Ethernet ports per node canister that are available for connection to the LAN on an IBM Storwize V3700 system Ethernet port 1 is for accessing the management graphical user interface GUI the service assistant GUI for the node canister and iSCSI host attachment Port 2 can be used for the management GUI and iSCSI host attachment Each no
303. ext On the Server Roles pane click Next On the Features pane select Multipath I O and click Next On the next pane click Install and wait for the installation to complete When this is complete restart the server to enable MPIO For FC attachment the installation of SDDDSM is also required The SDDDSM setup program should enable MPIO automatically Otherwise follow the previous steps to enable MPIO manually Installing the IBM SDDDSM multipathing software The SDDDSMis an IBM multipath I O solution based on Microsoft MPIO technology This is a device specific module designed to support IBM storage devices on a range of platforms including Microsoft Windows Its purpose is to support a fully redundant multipath configuration environment for IBM Storage Systems To ensure correct multipathing with IBM Storwize V3700 when using the FC protocol SDDDSM must be installed on Microsoft Windows hosts To install SDDDSM complete the following steps 1 Check the SDDDSM download matrix to determine the correct level of SDDDSM to install Windows 2012 R2 for IBM Storwize V3700 http www ibm com support docv i ew wss uid ssg1S7001350 Wi ndowsSDDDSM 2 Download the software package from the following website http www ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S4000350 Storwize Chapter 4 Host configuration 153 3 Copy the software package to your Windows server and on the server run setup exe to install SDDDSM A co
304. fferently to hard disk drives HDDs concerning RAID arrays or managed disks MDisks The SSDs managed by the IBM Storwize V3700 are combined into array usually in RAID 10 or RAID 5 format It is unlikely that RAID 6 SSD arrays are used because of the double parity effect with two SSD drives used for parity only Drive replacement procedure From Storwize software V7 4 it is possible to reseat or replace a failed drive in a Storwize V3700 by removing it from its enclosure and replacing with an appropriate new drive without requiring the DMP to supervise the service action The system automatically performs the drive hardware validation tests The system then promotes the drive into the configuration if these tests pass automatically configuring the inserted drive as a spare The status of the drive following the promotion is recorded in the event log either as an informational message or an error if some hardware failure occurs during the system action For more information about the drive replacement process see the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center on the following website http www 01 ibm com support knowl edgecenter STLMSA wel come At the website select a specific product version and browse to Troubleshooting gt Replacing parts Replacing a Drive assembly Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 589 11 2 6 Power supply unit All enclosures require two PSUs for normal operation A single PSU can
305. figuration on page 149 Hosts can be FC attached using an existing FC network infrastructure or direct attached iSCSV FCoE attached using an existing IP network or directly attached using SAS A significant benefit of having direct attachment is that you can attach the host directly to the IBM Storwize V3700 without the need for an FC or IP network 1 5 2 Node canister Each single processing unit is a node canister A node canister provides host interfaces management interfaces and SAS interfaces to the control enclosure A node canister has the cache memory the internal storage to store software and logs and the processing power to run the IBM Storwize V3700 virtualizing and management software A clustered system consists of a pair of nodes of the nodes within the system is known as the configuration node that manages configuration activity for the clustered system If this node fails the system nominates the other node to become the configuration node 1 5 3 Group 12 Within IBM Storwize V3700 there is one pair of node canisters known as an 1 O group The IBM Storwize V3700 supports a maximum of the two node canisters in the clustered system which provides a single I O Group When a host server performs I O to one of its volumes all of the I Os for a specific volume are directed to the I O Group Also under normal conditions the I Os for that specific volume are always processed by the same node within the O G
306. fined in the consistency group For example when the FlashCopy for the consistency group is started all FlashCopy mappings in the consistency group are started at the same time which results in a point in time copy that is consistent across all FlashCopy mappings that are contained in the consistency group A consistency group aggregates FlashCopy mappings not volumes Therefore where a source volume has multiple FlashCopy mappings they can be in the same or separate consistency groups If a particular volume is the source volume for multiple FlashCopy mappings you might want to create separate consistency groups to separate each mapping of the same source volume Regardless of whether the source volume with multiple target volumes is in the same consistency group or in separate consistency groups the resulting FlashCopy produces multiple identical copies of the source data The consistency group can be specified when the mapping is created You can also add the FlashCopy mapping to a consistency group or change the consistency group of a FlashCopy mapping later Important Do not place stand alone mappings into a consistency group because they become controlled as part of that consistency group FlashCopy consistency group states A FlashCopy consistency group is in one of the following states at any point Idle or Copied All FlashCopy Mappings in this consistency group are in the Idle or Copied state gt Preparing At least one
307. form to the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC 60320 IEC320 C13 C14 standards C1 A minimum of four Fibre Channel FC ports that are attached to the fabric are required However itis a leading practice to use eight 4 gigabits per second Gbps or 8 Gbps FC ports Fibre Channel ports FC ports are required only if you are using FC hosts You can use the IBM Storwize V3700 with Ethernet only cabling for Internet Small Computer System Interface iSCSI hosts or use serial attached SCSI SAS cabling for direct attach hosts a You should have eight 4 Gbps or 8 Gbps compatible FC cable drops T Up to six hosts can be directly connected by using SAS ports 1 2 and 3 on each node canister with SFF 8644 mini SAS HD cabling D You should have a minimum of two Ethernet ports on the LAN with four preferred for more configuration access redundancy or iSCSI host access 02 You should have a minimum of two Ethernet cable drops with four preferred for more configuration access redundancy or iSCSI host access Ethernet port 1 on each node canister must be connected to the LAN with port 2 as optional Ports Port 1 on each node canister must be connected to the same physical LAN or be configured in the same virtual LAN VLAN and be on the same subnet or set of subnets C1 Verify that the default Internet Protocol addresses that are configured on Ethernet port 1 on each of the node canisters 192 168 70 121 on node one a
308. g Easy Tier measured mode It is possible to enable Easy Tier in measured mode on either a single tiered or multitiered Storage Pool To do so complete the following step 1 Connect to your IBM Storwize V3700 using the CLI and run the svcinfo 1sndiskgrp command as shown in Example 9 1 This command shows an overview of all configured Storage Pools and their Easy Tier status In this example there are two Storage Pools Nearline Pool with Easy Tier in Multi Tier Pool with Easy Tier enabled Example 9 1 Show all configured Storage Pools IBM_Storwize ITSO_V3700 superuser gt svcinfo lsmdiskgrp id name status mdisk_count easy tier easy tier status type lNearline Poo online 1 auto balanced parent 3 EasyTier Pool 1 3 on active parent Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser 2 To get a more detailed view of the single tiered Storage Pool run the svcinfo 1sndiskgrp Storage Pool name command as shown in Example 9 2 Example9 2 Storage Pools details Easy Tier inactive Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser svcinfo Ismdiskgrp Nearline Pool id T name Nearline Pool status online mdisk count 1 easy tier auto easy tier status balanced tier ssd tier mdisk count 0 tier capacity 0 00 tier free capacity 0 00MB tier enterprise tier mdisk count 1 tier capacity 0 00 tier free capacity 0 00MB tier nearline tier mdisk count 0 tier capacity 1 63TB tier free capacity 1 63TB IBM Storwiz
309. g reporting 6 Figure 11 101 shows the different report options for Storage Tiering To eme Tl 85 risk Grous Vk Woridoad cet Detalle Report T B Details Raport ge T 85 voisk ceti Report T 85 utis d gin volare Migration Rerervmendeton Report Figure 11 101 Details reports 642 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 7 Figure 11 102 shows the output from VDisk Details report 73 Tot Storage Product Details Report M an Figure 11 102 VDisk Details report d B g B is 8 Figure 11 103 shows the Report Overview in pie chart format achage older Reports E Pesca ee rage ay tage sin car on p Susa BE Benen Figure 11 103 Reporting Overview Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 643 9 Figure 11 104 shows the Easy Tier usage for volumes To open this report in Tivoli Storage Productivity Center click Storage Resources Volumes Vol AL Ee Figure 11 104 Volume Easy Tier usage 10 Figure 11 105 shows a detailed list of Storage Pools r1 aae E waa mias act pd E Um em nter rre ana Figure 11 105 Pool Easy Tier information 644 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 11 Figure 11 106 shows Storage V
310. gram ar serves uses sparta volume or device ade that or device to or Cc Congre ta have SCST rate set voe tantes oio d arse devices d bnc the or device so hat on system estartt s nore ready aval fer use by the progam or service THaisony effertve if be traet ison fecere farce et Vole tit lune moun partes To cutorascaly confewe al volabe devices cick Auto To add aspect devs ld ada Toremove device select the deuce ard then ci Revove To irmeiatety remove al devices dek Cle Figure 5 51 iSCSI volumes and devices 11 Click Auto Configure and the mapped volumes should display under Volume List as shown in Figure 5 52 This ensures that on restart the volumes are available for use by dependent services and applications before these start peint evce ei roiosdiduon mtprod 21458vev DOCOSI87feac24801363 305530 726353 Figure 5 52 Configured iSCSI device 12 Follow the instructions in 5 3 1 Discovering Fibre Channel volumes from Windows 2012 R2 on page 218 to bring the disks online and initialize them The mapped volumes are now ready to be managed by the host operating system Chapter 5 Volume configuration 231 232 Creating a file system from a mapped volume To create file system from a mapped volume in Windows 2012 R2 complete the steps described in 5 3
311. gram that shows the path of your replication from logical and physical configuration viewpoints If your investigation fails to resolve your Remote Copy problems you should contact your IBM support representative for a complete analysis Chapter 10 Copy services 531 10 4 Managing Remote Copy using the GUI The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides a separate function icon for copy service management The following windows are available for managing Remote Copy which are accessed through the Copy Services function icon Remote Copy gt Partnerships As the names imply these windows are used to manage Remote Copy and the partnership 10 4 1 Managing cluster partnerships The Partnership window is used to manage a partnership between clusters To access the Partnership window complete the following steps 1 Click the Copy Services function icon 2 Click Partnerships as shown in Figure 10 84 Figure 10 84 Partnerships window 532 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Creating a partnership create a partnership complete the following steps 1 Click Create Partnership in the Partnership window as shown in Figure 10 85 TENET yp a E x al LO O o ANN SC E Figure 10 85 Create a cluster partnership 2 You are prompted to choose between an FC or IP partnership as shown in Figure 10 86 Create Partnership This system is in the replication laye
312. gration Permanently virtualizing external storage for use under the Storwize V3700 is not supported 6 2 2 Overview of the Storage Migration wizard 250 The Storage Migration wizard process includes the following considerations and steps 1 Typically storage systems divide storage into many SCSI LUs that are presented on a FC SAN to hosts Storage can also be presented through direct SAS attachment to a host Broadly speaking the steps to migrate either one of these storage systems are the same 2 Input output to the LUNs must be stopped and changes made to the mapping of the storage system LUs and to the SAN fabric zoning or SAS connectivity so that the original LUs are presented directly to the Storwize V3700 and not to the hosts The Storwize V3700 discovers the external LUs as unmanaged not a member of any Storage Pools managed disks MDisks Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 The unmanaged MDisks are then imported to the Storwize V3700 as image mode MDisks and placed into a Storage Pool This Storage Pool is now a logical container for the externally attached LUs 4 Each existing volume has a one to one mapping with an image mode MDisk From a data perspective the image mode volume represents the externally attached LUs exactly as they were before the import operation The image mode volumes are on the same physical drives of the existing storage system and the data remains unchanged The Storwize V3700 is presen
313. gure 6 3 You can also tell that the volume is using the IBM device specific module DSM for the native Microsoft Multipath I O MPIO feature Ficias Volumes MPIO Diver IBM 1726 2o FASET Vul Path Dick Devos Devicetype Ds dives Manufacturer Standard dsk drves Location Pot Bus 0 Target ID LUN D Devoe atatu Fis devs working prope Figure 6 3 Disk properties Windows 2012 Chapter 6 Storage migration 253 3 Using IBM System Storage DS Storage Manager connect to the external System Storage 053200 system as shown in Figure 6 4 and select Manage a Storage Subsystem Select the system that you want to manage and click OK YEN a SS RTT ERR HT at ee osi REPRE sesa Im m a REE o sedora a mar retenon Caa ER vtae nar Fieri alons EMS Suse ro ffe oe vou ere hah vour aint Figure 6 4 Selecting Storage system to manage DS Storage Manager 4 Anew window opens to enable management of the IBM DS3200 subsystem From the summary pane select the Storage Subsystem Profile option as shown in Figure 6 5 po smcr ds1200 01 ee ise nere Be domm Bless m fe a E creme negent
314. h MDisk in the Storage Pool is divided into several extents The size of the extent ranges from 16 mebibytes MiB 8 gibibytes GiB Default extent size The GUI of IBM Storwize V3700 has a default extent size value of 1 GiB when you define a new Storage Pool This is a change in the IBM Storwize code V7 1 The extent size directly affects the maximum volume size and storage capacity of the clustered system A system can manage 222 4 194 304 extents For example with a 16 MB extent size the system can manage up to 16 MiB x 4 194 304 64 tibibytes TiB of storage Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 15 16 The effect of extent size on the maximum volume and cluster size is shown Table 1 5 Table 1 5 Maximum volume and cluster capacity by extent size Extent size Maximum volume capacity for Maximum storage capacity of normal volumes GB cluster 16 2048 2 TB 64TB 32 4096 4 TB 128TB 64 8192 8 TB 256TB 128 16384 16 TB 512 TB 256 32768 32 TB 1 petabyte PB 512 65536 64 TB 2PB 1024 131072 128 TB 2048 262144 256 TB 8PB 4096 262144 256 TB 16PB 8192 262144 256 TB 32 PB Use the same extent size for all Storage Pools in a clustered system which is a prerequisite if you want to migrate a volume between two Storage Pools If the Storage Pool extent sizes are not the same you must use volume mirroring to copy volumes b
315. h host mappings are configured complete the following steps 1 Highlight a volume and select View Mapped Host from the Actions menu The Host Maps tab of the Volume Details pane opens as shown in Figure 8 45 In this example host Windows 2012 FCis mapped to the Win2012_Vol_01 volume voume potans vanzonz vor 01 Overview Member MDisks refresh rior SCSI tame Caching VO Gro Figure 8 45 Volume to host mapping 2 To remove a mapping highlight the host and click from Host If several hosts are mapped to this volume for example in a cluster only the selected host is removed 8 4 5 Duplicating a volume To duplicate a volume complete the following steps 1 After selecting a volume click Duplicate Volume from the Actions menu to make an exact copy of an existing volume 2 Entera name for the duplicate volume and click Duplicate to apply the change as shown in Figure 8 46 Duplicate Volume x Enter the new name wmzotz vor o3 IIS EIE Figure 8 46 Create a duplicate volume 390 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 4 6 Renaming a volume To rename a volume complete the following steps 1 Select Rename from the Action menu The Rename Volume window opens 2 Enter the new name as shown in Figure 8 47 Rename voume x ien Name Winzer voor winzotz Vol 01 Renamed Figure 8 47 Renaming a volume 3 Click Res
316. h nodes in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system that the mapping is assigned to is lost Copying The copy is in progress Read write caching is enabled on the source and target volumes Prepared The mapping is ready to start The target volume is online but is not accessible The target volume cannot perform read or write caching Read and write caching is failed by the Small Computer System Interface SCSI front end as a hardware error If the mapping is incremental and a previous mapping completed the mapping records only the differences between the source and target volumes The source and target volumes go offline if the connection to both nodes in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system that the mapping is assigned to is lost Preparing The target volume is online but not accessible The target volume cannot perform read or write caching Read and write caching is failed by the SCSI front end as a hardware error Any changed write data for the source volume is flushed from the cache Any read or write data for the target volume is discarded from the cache If the mapping is incremental and a previous mapping completed the mapping records only the differences between the source and target volumes The source and target volumes go offline if the connection to both nodes in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system that the mapping is assigned to is lost Stopped The mapping is stopped because you issued a stop command or an I O error
317. h the appropriate symbol or indicating US registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this information was published Such trademarks may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at http www ibn com Tegal copytrade shtml The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States other countries or both AS 400 InfoSphere System ib 0580009 Power Systems System Storage Easy Tier Redbooks System Storage DS FlashCopy Redbooks logo Tivoli IBM Storwize The following terms are trademarks of other companies Intel Intel logo Intel Inside logo and Intel Centrino logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States other countries or both Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States other countries or both Java and Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Other company product or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others X Implementing the IBM Stor v3700 IBM REDBOOKS
318. hapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 77 3 2 2 Breadcrumb navigation aid The IBM Storwize V3700 panes use the breadcrumb navigation aid to show the path that was browsed This breadcrumb navigation aid is in the top area of the pane and hovering over a breadcrumb in the trail shows a menu Figure 3 9 shows the breadcrumb navigation aid for the System pane Figure 3 9 Breadcrumb navigation aid 3 2 3 Suggested Tasks feature The Suggested Tasks feature is a pane that opens at login and displays any outstanding tasks The number of suggested tasks changes depending on the configuration of the system Clicking the suggested task opens the corresponding pane to complete the task Figure 3 10 shows the Suggested Task pane Add Hosts Create settings for hosts connected to the system Figure 3 10 Suggested Task pane 78 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 2 4 Presets The management GUI contains a series of pre established configuration options called presets which are commonly used settings to quickly configure objects on the system Presets are available for creating volumes for IBM FlashCopy mappings and for setting up a Redundant Array of Independent Disks RAID configuration Figure 3 11 shows the available internal storage presets Configure intemal Storage Use this wizard to allocate RAID arrays to pools After this Configuration wizard completes you can create volumes J
319. hat lists the functions Figure 3 35 shows all of the function icon menus Figure 3 35 All Function Icon menus 92 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 4 1 Monitoring menu As shown in Figure 3 36 the Monitoring menu provides access to the System Events and Performance panes rm os Figure 3 36 Monitoring menu Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 93 System pane access the System pane complete the following steps 1 Select System in the Monitoring menu to open the pane This pane shows a 3D graphical representation of the front of the system as shown in Figure 3 37 1e State y Onine Figure 3 37 System pane Front view 2 The following actions are possible Hover over any of the components to show a component overview Right click a component to show an Action menu appropriate to that component Click the arrow at the lower right of the graphic as shown in Figure 3 37 to rotate it to show the rear of the system This arrow can be blue yellow or red Blue indicates no issues yellow indicates a warning and red indicates an issue of some kind with a component 94 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 Click the arrow at the lower right of the graphic again as shown in Figure 3 38 to rotate it to show the front of the system 3 7 site omme Sees gi Figure 3 38 System pane Rear view The curved band below the graphi
320. hat use software such as some compression devices add much more time The time that is added by software assisted devices is highly variable and should be measured directly Be sure to include these times when you are planning your Global Mirror design You should also measure application performance based on the expected delays before Global Mirror is fully implemented The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides you with an advanced feature that enables you to test performance implications before Global Mirror is deployed and a long distance link is obtained This advanced feature is enabled by modifying the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system gmintradelaysimulation and gninterdelaysimulation parameters These parameters can be used to simulate the write delay to the secondary volume The delay simulation can be enabled separately for each intra cluster or inter cluster Global Mirror You can use this feature to test an application before the full deployment of the Global Mirror feature Figure 10 77 shows that a write operation to the master volume is acknowledged back to the host that is issuing the write before the write operation is mirrored to the cache for the auxiliary volume 1 Write 1 2 Ack gt ms Global Mirror Relationship Figure 10 77 Global Mirror write sequence Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The Global Mirror algorithms always maintain a consistent image on the auxiliary volume They achie
321. he dumps directory Even so it is important to save the configuration backup file after the system configuration is changed The command line interface CLI is used to start a manual backup Regularly saving a configuration backup file on the IBM Storwize V3700 is important and it must be done manually Download this file regularly to your management workstation to protect the configuration data a leading practice is to automate this download procedure by using a script and to save it daily on a remote system 11 3 1 Generating a manual configuration backup by using the CLI To generate a configuration backup using the CLI complete the following steps 1 Run the sveconfig backup command as shown in Example 11 1 Example 11 1 Example for backup CLI command svcconfig backup 2 The progress of the command is reported by dots as shown in Example 11 2 Example 11 2 Backup CLI command progress and output CMMVC6155I SVCCONFIG processing completed successfully 3 The sveconfig backup command creates three files that provide information about the backup process and cluster configuration These files are created in the tmp directory on the configuration node and can be retrieved using Battery Backup Unit PSCP as shown in Example 11 3 Example 11 3 PuTTY Using PuTTY PSCP from the CLI of an Microsoft Windows host pscp scp superuser lt Cluster IP addr gt tmp svc config backup xml c VRBtemp
322. he 2072 12 and 12E enclosures Figure 1 1 IBM Storwize V3700 front view for 2072 12C and 12E enclosures The 12C and 12E drives are positioned in four columns of three horizontal mounted drive assemblies The drive slots are numbered 1 12 starting at upper left and going left to right top to bottom Figure 1 2 shows the front view of the 2072 24C and 24E enclosures Figure 1 2 IBM Storwize V3700 front view for 2072 24C and 24E enclosure The 24C and 24E drives are positioned in one row of 24 vertically mounted drive assemblies The drive slots are numbered 1 24 starting from the left There is a vertical center drive bay molding between slots 12 and 13 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 1 4 IBM Storwize V3700 hardware The IBM Storwize V3700 solution is a modular storage system that is built on a common enclosure control enclosure and expansion enclosure Figure 1 3 shows an overview of the hardware components of the IBM Storwize V3700 solution IBM Storwize V3700 Each node canister em Contains expansion hardvere contains host irterface and SAS expansion ports Eachencoae cortanstvo nse tse De pgacelieto 808 ach endo contained SAS portsta conned the canisters and hosts Figure 1 3 Storwize V3700 hardware components Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 7 Figure 1 4
323. he DSFA website https www ibm com storage dsfa storwize selectMachine wss The authorization code can be used only once and the license key is specific to one machine Licenses cannot be transferred between systems and if the system is sold license ownership transfers with it Figure 3 110 shows the Licensed Functions pane within the Settings pane The licenses can be activated by right clicking the function and selecting the required activation method a Usa tnis panoi to vw curent calo funcions stat available a eanses or add ada RS Update System peser daa cese po Actuate sod Seno Figure 3 110 Update license Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 139 140 Update System IBM suggests that you use the latest software version The Update System pane shows the current software level If the system is connected to the Internet it connects to the IBM upgrade server to check whether the current level is the latest If an update is available direct link to the software is provided to the make code download process easier To update the software the IBM Storwize V3700 software and the IBM Storwize V3700 Upgrade Test Utility must be downloaded After the files are downloaded complete the following steps 1 tis best to validate the checksum to ensure that the files are sound 2 Read the release notes
324. he System page go to Settings System and choose Licensing as shown in Figure 9 3 Licensed Functions Gelso da Figure 9 3 Licensed functions window Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Alternatively you can click the question mark in the upper right of the system window as shown in Figure 9 4 Figure 9 4 Licensed Functions option 2 Select Easy Tier gt Actions and choose Active License Automatically or Activate License Manually as shown in Figure 9 5 Licensed Functions Use this panel to view currently activated licensed functions ster available tial licenses or add additional licenses Lae Activate License Automatically Activate License Manually Stoning 4 functcne Select 4 function Figure 9 5 Easy Tier activation mode When activating the Easy Tier function automatically you are required to apply the authorization code by copying or downloading it from the IBM DSFA website To activate the function Easy Tier manually you can either apply the authorization code or click the folder icon to upload the license code as a file To activate Easy Tier function automatically complete the next step To activate Easy Tier function manually go to step 4 on page 422 Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 421 3 Choose Activate License Automatically to activate the Easy Tier function automatically and click Activate as shown in Figure 9 6 Activate License Automatically x
325. he driver using VMware vSphere Client the ESXi CLI or vendor tools Chapter 4 Host configuration 163 164 3 Also check and update the firmware level of the HBA using the manufacturer s provided tools 4 Always check the readne file to see whether there is further configuration required for the HBA driver See the VMware Compatibility Guide for more information http www vmware con resources compatibility search php Configuring Brocade HBAs for VMware ESX Follow these steps to configure Brocade HBAs 1 After the firmware is installed load the default settings for all of your adapters that are installed on the host system 2 Ensure that the Adapter BIOS is disabled unless SAN Boot is used Configuring QLogic HBAs for VMware ESX After the firmware is installed you must configure the HBAs To perform this task use the QLogic QConvergeConsole software or the HBA BIOS 1 Load the adapter defaults 2 Set the following suggested host adapter settings Host Adapter BIOS Disabled unless the host is configured for SAN Boot Frame size 2048 Loop Reset Delay 5 minimum Adapter Hard Loop ID Disabled Hard Loop ID 0 Spinup Delay Disabled Connection Options 1 Point to point only Fibre Channel Tape Support Disabled Data Rate 2 Set the following suggested advanced adapter settings Execution throttle 100 LUNs per Target 0 Enable LIP Reset No Enable LIP Full L
326. he event that is being investigated and click Download IBM Support will notify the user of which package is required The following components are included in the support package Standard logs Contains the most recent logs that were collected from the system These logs are most commonly used by Support to diagnose and solve problems Standard logs plus one existing statesave Contains the standard logs from the system and the most recent statesave from any of the nodes in the system Statesaves are also known as memory dumps or live memory dumps Standard logs plus most recent statesave from each node This option is used most often by the support team for problem analysis They contain the standard logs from system and the most recent statesave from each node in the system Standard logs plus new statesave This option might be requested by the Support team for problem determination It generates a new statesave livedump for all of the nodes and packages them with the most recent logs 4 Save the resulting file in a directory for later use or to upload to IBM Support Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 625 Show full log listing The Support pane also provides access to the files that are on the node canisters as shown in Figure 11 74 To show the full log listing complete the following steps 1 Click Show full log listing to access the node canister files 2 To save a file to the user s workstation
327. he port to the Port Definitions list as shown in Figure 8 30 Repeat this step to add more ports to the host Channel Paris Host Name Windows_2012 FC Bum x x Figure 8 30 Adding online host ports field and click Add Port to List as shown in Figure 8 31 Add Fibre Channel Ports Host ame Windows 2012 FC AOU Porte To HOST Figure 8 31 Adding offline port To add an offline port manually enter the WWPN of the port into the Fibre Channel Ports The port shows as unverified because it is not logged in to the SAN fabric or known to the Storwize V3700 The first time the port logs in the state automatically changes to online and the mapping is applied to this port 5 To remove one of the ports from the list click the red X next to it In Figure 8 31 we manually added an FC port Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 379 Important When removing online or offline ports the IBM Storwize V3700 prompts you to confirm the number of ports to be deleted but does not warn about mappings Disk mapping is associated to the host object and logical unit number LUN access is lost if all ports are deleted 6 Click Add Ports to Host to apply the changes 8 2 3 Adding an SAS host port To add an SAS host port complete the following steps 1 After clicking Add as shown in Figure 8 29 on page 378 click SAS Port to open the Add SAS Ports pane
328. he required node canister software upgrade file as shown in Figure 11 43 intents apron eu ren pore errat otis atte ransel eandem ator snd rane new da manas c The Sencar pom sve Poa merase mae nodes must thar be anata doe ern rie ac uring the pecs tay Rede mum be iparada ta the same coe ere You camat mot curae and eto ta watalina rent methine code the connected ad the arent node the ane he creo tthe src orant mitt be ast code elo thase 2 eta and eed the thal orina the node you wan ma seene maae conan sata Ed EE co Figure 11 43 Select software file for upgrade Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 605 14 Click Upgrade to start the upgrade process on the first node The node is reintroduced automatically into the system after upgrade Upgrading and adding the node again can take 20 40 minutes as shown in Figure 11 44 The operation completed successfully Update completed successfully Wait until the node is available OK Figure 11 44 Non configuration node update complete The management GUI also displays the progress of the update as shown in Figure 11 45 E uu fe Licensin Ee s pem de Mor wettest ABA saver MO ga oe E Sees 6a Figure 11 45 Manual node software update progress 15
329. he tier 1 pool to the primary copy After the synchronization all writes are destaged to both pools but the reads are still done only from the primary copy Because the copies are fully synchronized you can switch their role online see step 3 previously and analyze the performance of the new pool When you are done testing your lower performance pool you can split or delete the old copy in tier 1 or switch back to tier 1 in seconds if the tier 2 Storage Pool did not meet your requirements Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 413 8 7 Volumes by Storage Pool see an overview of which volumes are on which Storage Pool perform the following steps 1 Click Volumes by Pool as shown in Figure 8 78 Sense Figure 8 78 Volumes by Pool 2 The Volumes by Pool pane opens as shown in Figure 8 79 EasyTier Pool Suto Capacty Host Mappings Ut mm v omine som v omine som Se seerti Cte Qo ee Figure 8 79 Volumes by Pool pane 414 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The left pane is called the Pool Filter and the Storage Pools are displayed there For information about Storage Pools see Chapter 7 Storage Pools on page 307 In the upper right you see information about the pool that you selected in the pool filter The following information is also shown Pool icon Becau
330. heir own threshold warning setting MDisk this value is always zero 0 for child pools Space Utilization in percent Easy Tier for a Child Pool this value must be the same as the parent mdiskgrp s Easy Tier setting vYvvvvvv Chapter 7 Storage Pools 355 Figure 7 68 illustrates the concept of Child Pools Storage Pool Volume 1 Volume2 Child Pool volume g Yamas Figure 7 68 Child Pool representation 7 4 1 Create Child Pools Example 7 9 demonstrates how to create a Child Pool using the CLI Example 7 9 Creating a Child Pool IBM Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser svctask mkmdiskgrp name V37K ChildP 1 warning 80 parentmdiskgrp V3700 Pool2 unit gb size 100 MDisk Group ID 0 successfully created The following parameters must be specified when creating Child Pools nane Child Pool name gt warning Generates a warning when the used disk capacity exceeds the specified threshold parentndi skgrp The ID or name of the Parent Pool unit Specifies the data unit it must be in multiples of extent size of the parent pool gt size Specifies the capacity of the Child Pool Note The capacity of the Child Pool is always limited by the free capacity of the parent pool Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Because a Child Pool must have a unique Parent Pool the maximum number of Child Pools per parent pool is 127 For mor
331. hen SSH was set up IBM2072 INSTALL upgradetest 12 26 is the file name of the utility use the current one superuser is the user name lt 9 174 152 17 gt is the management Internet Protocol IP address or name of the Storwize unit Change these components as appropriate to your environment 3 Itis also possible to upload the Upgrade Test Utility to the Storwize unit using the Storwize user name and password not using an SSH private key by using the following command pscp IBM2072 INSTALL upgradetest 12 26 superuser 9 174 152 17 home admin upgrade 4 You are prompted for the password for whichever user name you specified This is shown in Example 11 5 Example 11 5 Uploading test utility C Program Files x86 VPuTTY pscp IBM2072 INSTALL upgradetest 12 26 superusere9 174 152 17 home admin upgrade superuser 9 174 152 17 s password 18M2072 INSTALL upgradete 59 kB 59 6 kB s ETA 00 00 00 100 C Program Files x86 PuTTY gt Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Installing and running the Upgrade Test Utility install and run the Upgrade Test Utility complete the following steps 1 From the Storwize CLI install the Upgrade Test Utility using the following command sveservicetask applysoftware file IBM2072 INSTALL upgradetest 12 26 2 Then run the Upgrade Test Utility using the following command svcupgradetest f d The f switch specifies that this is a drive firmware update
332. herticaten 8862 on S Dista pre athentcation banner SSH 2 oriy Aherticaton methods S Aterpt athenteston ueng Pageare E Atenpt TIS or CryptoCard auth SS keyboardteractve auth SSH Autherticaton parameters Aton agert fomerding low atempted changes of serm in SSH 2 Pivate keyfio for authentication no EN ADMI Dn Yo Figure A 11 SSH authentication 8 From the Category pane on the left side of the PuTTY Configuration window click Session to return to the Session view as shown in Figure 9 on page 655 Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot 657 9 In the right side pane enter the host name or system IP address of the IBM Storwize 3700 clustered system in the Host Name field Enter a session name in the Saved Sessions field as shown in Figure A 12 ER configuration E Category Sesion Besc opora for ou sessen an Spec the destination you wart te cerned te Host Name fr Fades fot etd 2 Connecton yp C Tehet Rogn S34 Sei Lead cave or dole stored session in SSH mm Opon Canea Figure 12 Enter session information 10 Click Save to save the new session as shown in Figure A 13 BR PUTT Configuration EX Categor Session Best pos far yr PUTTY sesson Specky the dedind
333. hich is used if you create a user ID for the IBM service representative This user role enables IBM service personnel to view anything on the system as with the Monitor role It also enables them to perform service related commands such as adding a node back to the system after it is serviced or including disks that were excluded For more information about creating users see Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview on page 71 2 7 System management The GUI is used to configure manage and troubleshoot the IBM Storwize V3700 system It is used primarily to configure Redundant Array of Independent Disks RAID and logical drives assign logical drives to hosts replace and rebuild failed disk drives and expand the logical drives It enables troubleshooting and management tasks such as checking the status of the storage server components updating the firmware and managing the storage server The GUI also offers advanced functions such as FlashCopy Volume Mirroring Remote Mirroring and IBM EasyTier A command line interface CLI for the IBM Storwize V3700 system is also available This section describes system management by using the GUI and the CLI 2 7 1 Graphical user interface 38 A web browser is used for GUI access You must use a supported web browser to access the management GUI For more information about supported web browsers see Checking your web browser settings for the management GUI which is available
334. his example the Health Status bar menu shows the system as Unhealthy and provides a description of Internal Storage as the type of event that occurred 2 To investigate the event open the health status bar menu and click the description of the event to show the Events pane Monitoring Events as shown in Figure 3 34 This pane lists all events and provides Directed Maintenance Procedures DMPs to help resolve errors For more information see Events pane on page 100 ec cfe 707 E Actors Show AN ier B po m Message SAS discovery occurred confguraton changes compte suite sess Pe Message SAS discovery occured configuration changes perdi iam Meseme Array morsk routa start saasom Array mak is not hy balanced avana soat pu Aan Arrar maak a prion c ssa ana om Miert sasbon ports mot operational storage pp Figure 3 34 Events pane from the Health Status menu Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 91 3 4 Function icon menus The IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI provides function icons that are an efficient and quick mechanism for navigation As described in section 3 1 3 System pane layout on page 74 each graphic on the left side of the pane is a function icon that presents a group of interface functions Hovering over one of the seven function icons shows a menu t
335. his section shows how to find help while using the IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center e Learning modules Embedded pane help Question mark help Hover help IBM endorsed YouTube videos 144 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 5 1 IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center The best source of information for the IBM Storwize V3700 is the Information Center For direct access to the online version of the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center complete the following steps 1 Click the help icon in the upper right corner of any pane 2 Select Information Center as shown in Figure 3 117 ak Figure 3 117 Information Center 3 5 2 Watching an e Learning video IBM e Learning videos are also available from the Learning and Tutorials section of the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center 3 5 3 Embedded pane help The IBM Storwize V3700 provides embedded help for each pane 1 Click the help icon in the upper right corner of any pane 2 Select the first item in the list which is the pane name Figure 3 118 shows the selection of the pane help for the Volumes pane a macia varoa ot a varoa ot 50 00 02700 RsPool ot 50 0 03700 Figure 3 118 Embedded pane help Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 145 Figure 3 119 shows the embedded pane help for the Volumes pane and
336. hout parity Performance is improved at the expense of the redundancy provided by other RAID levels 1 Provides disk mirroring which duplicates data between drives A 2 RAID 1 array is internally identical to a two member RAID 10 array 5 Arrays stripe data over the member drives with one parity strip on every 3 16 stripe RAID 5 arrays have single redundancy with higher space efficiency than RAID 10 arrays but with some performance penalty RAID 5 arrays can tolerate no more than one member drive failure 588 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 RAID Where data is striped Drive count level Min Max 6 Arrays stripe data over the member drives with two parity strips 5 16 every stripe A RAID 6 array can tolerate any two concurrent member drive failures 10 Arrays stripe data over mirrored pairs of drives RAID 10 arrayshave 2 16 single redundancy The mirrored pairs rebuild independently One member out of every pair can be rebuilding or missing at the same time RAID 10 combines the features of RAID 0 and RAID 1 Disk scrubbing The scrub process runs when arrays do not have any other background processes The process checks that the drive logical block addresses LBAs are readable and that array parity is synchronized Arrays are scrubbed independently and each array is entirely scrubbed every seven days Solid state drives Solid state drives SSDs are treated no di
337. hown in Figure 6 63 Alternatively right click the selected volumes and click Finalize F sie tration fone ee I Seles Se Figure 6 63 Finalize storage migration 300 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 You are asked to confirm the number of volumes that you want to finalize as shown in Figure 6 64 Chapter 6 Storage migration 301 4 Verify the volume names enter the number of migrations to finalize and click OK The image mode volumes are deleted and the associated image mode MDisks from the migration Storage Pool are removed Figure 6 65 shows the tasks completing Figure 6 65 Removal of image mode volumes 302 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 The status of those image mode MDisks is now Unmanaged as shown in the MDisks by Pools view shown in Figure 6 66 6 When the finalization completes the data migration to the IBM Storwize V3700 is done Remove zoning and connectivity and then retire the external storage system In this example because there is SAS connection there is no zoning to remove EX IE amp i mise a es pope V bytes Mocated 1 017 00 018 oes mec v Aocoes 1 8018 meee ae amp E mossa 7 omne n PSs dE ime v omme bytes anocatea A6 n5 amp rome r3 bytes located 354 T8 dE neca rome 3 bytes o oyes Figure 6 66 U
338. i aion as he inier Ta remove support fr currenty devices select the devices and dek Remove Devices Deuce erdvare i 172 E 205 E 2145 E MSFTZDUSSCEIBLsT pe 0 0 Verdor Frocici 15 ore about edn and MPIO support Figure 5 49 MPIO properties Chapter 5 Volume configuration 229 230 Note IBM 2145 devices need to be added to the list of supported devices for MPIO to work with IBM Storwize V3700 Click Add to do this if they are not already listed 8 Go to the Discover Multi Paths tab and select Add support for iSCSI devices as shown in Figure 5 50 hi doin Adi support Br sas ce Figure 5 50 Adding support for iSCSI devices in MPIO 9 Click Add and then click Yes when prompted to restart Wait for the server to finish restarting When the server is back online the correct number of disks should now be listed under the Disks view in File and Storage Services Note some cases the Add support for iSCSI devices option is disabled To enable this option you must already have a connection to at least one iSCSI device 10 To make iSCSI devices readily available on system boot reopen the iSCSI Initiator properties and go to Volumes and Devices as shown in Figure 5 51 on page 231 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Favre Torget vanes and Tevez Conran fa pro
339. iable recommondod valuas or the RAID level and drive class The recommondeicorguration uses al the tives to build arrays that are protected wrth the appropriate amount af spare es Select a diferent configuration Configuration Summary 4a RAW S 2780 1 7 7 7 6 drives AHA Somes terese 10K rom OH RAD A 2750 58 15K en There ar not enough drive to satiety the target of drives that ie weeded for 16525 Nero 7200 4 casos DUcontars Dios AX RAID E 037 OD Enterprise 10K rom des ita See Durcontores Dives Figure 7 25 The recommended configuration 2 In the Configuration Summary section shown in Figure 7 26 on page 327 the wizard warns that there are not enough disk drives to satisfy the target number of the drives needed for the configuration as follows There are insufficient Enterprise disk classes 278 9 gibibytes GiB 15 000 rpm 326 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 Therefore the wizard automatically creates several MDisks as shown in Figure 7 26 Configuration Summary AX PAID S 27560 GEB Enterpris 10K rom TE dies 1 Hot Spares 27550 GB Brterpriss cron D There are not enough drives to satiety the target number of drives that io needed for the configura RAD 40525 009 Hearne 7200 p 10 dives 1 Hot Spares 0 Unconfigured Drives AX RAID 6 E57 85 GB Enterp
340. ial configuration 41 2 Select Create a new system as shown in Figure 2 10 Storwize V3500 V3700 System Initialization Tasks tha task vou would Iita to completa nin Soloct tho task you would like to coma Mos create a new system Use Flash Drita C Reset the superuser password Summary service IP adress Were Cancel Figure 2 10 System Initialization Create a new system There are other options available through the Tasks section However these are generally only required after initial configuration There is the option to Reset the superuser password or Set the service IP address of a node canister Selecting Create a new system and clicking Next as shown in Figure 2 10 progresses through the initial configuration of the IBM Storwize V3700 3 Setthe Management IP address as shown in Figure 2 11 Storwize V3500 V3700 System Initialization Management IP Address one Select the Internet Pratacol address iz use on your systa gt Management IP Game Cams Use Flash orive IP addressi 2174161138 summary Subnetmask 255 255 2880 3 174 181 254 Bark Annand er Caneel Figure 2 11 System Initialization Management IP 42 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 Click Apply and Next to show the IBM Storwize V3700 power on instructions as shown in Figure 2 12 Storwize V3500 V3700 System Initialization Power on 1 Plug in both power
341. icated IQN The QN contains a comma or leading or trailing spaces The QN is invalid some other way Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 381 8 2 5 Deleting a host port delete host ports complete the following steps 1 Click Host Ports by Host to open the Ports by Host pane 2 Select the host in the left pane and select the host port to be deleted then click Delete Port as shown in Figure 8 34 tcm M Win2012 SAS a 2 ports Win2012 FC D i ma ag ieee Delete Porn 2 riter 2 perk D Hu 21000024FF20076C arc V Active t 2000024200760 re Active Figure 8 34 Delete host port Multiple ports can be selected by holding down the Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting the host ports to delete 3 Figure 8 35 shows the Delete Ports confirmation pane Confirm the number of ports to be deleted and click Delete to apply the changes Delete Port x You selected 1 port to delete Vet be port to dete number af porte to delats 1 Lu Figure 8 35 Delete host port 4 Atask pane opens that shows the results Click Close to return to the Ports by Host pane 382 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 3 Host mappings overview access host mappings complete the following steps 1 Select Host Host Mappings to open the Host Mappings pane as shown in Figure 8 36 Host Mappings LS Vol
342. ick a listed drive to show the Actions menu 2 Alternatively the drives can be selected and then the Action menu used For more information see Multiple selections on page 85 Figure 3 61 shows the Drive Actions menu Drive properties Drive properties and dependent volumes can be displayed from the Internal Storage pane Select Properties from the Drive Actions menu The drive Properties pane shows the drive attributes and the drive slot SAS port status Figure 3 62 on page 109 shows the drive properties with the Show Details option selected Drive firmware upgrade In past versions of the IBM Storwize software the drive firmware could only be upgraded using the CLI Itis now possible to upgrade the firmware using the GUI The drives can either be upgraded all at once or individually See Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting on page 575 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 es ee came 5 Med Es moe Rusa NU MEL Figure 3 62 Drive Properties Configure Internal Storage wizard show the Configure Internal Storage wizard perform the following steps 1 Click Configure Storage as shown in Figure 3 63 a Internal Storage eg Di ora ga moon cere gt agli mmo meme uH oos Hating Figure 3 63 Internal Storage pane 2 4 Ail Internat v Member Online Member v Online Chapter 3
343. ifferent options for applying the disk drive firmware 1 If you are using Storwize code V7 1 or older disk drive firmware can only be manually applied to one drive at a time using the applydrivesoftware command for each individual disk The output from the test utility shown in Example 11 6 on page 663 gives the drive slot number as the identifier However to run the firmware upgrade on individual drives the drive ID is required not the slot ID To obtain the drive ID from the slot ID use the 1sdrive output as shown in Example 11 7 on page 665 The output shown has been abbreviated for the sake of clarity Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Example 11 7 The Isdrive command output Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lsdrive id status use tech type capacity mdisk id mdisk member id enclosure id slot id 0 online candidate sas 550 185 868 1 17 1 online candidate sas ssd 185 1 18 2 online candidate sas ssd 185 868 1 6 3 online candidate sas ssd 185 868 1 7 4 online candidate sas sd 185 1 16 5 online candidate sas sd 185 858 1 6 online candidate sas sd 185 858 1 15 7 online candidate sas sd 185 1 10 8 online candidate sas 550 372 168 1 1 9 online candidate sas 550 185 868 1 8 10 online candidate sas ssd 185 868 1 9 11 online candidate sas ssd 372 168 1 2 12 online member sas hdd 136 268 3 mdisk 3 1 1 13 online member 136 268 3 mdisk3 2 1 12 14 online member sas_hdd 136 268 3 mdisk
344. igure 11 51 Upgrade vs x Upgrade Drives oto software upgrade package to tne storage parade package 122072 DRIVE 20140826 G Instat firmato ovon th drivo ie running version andi diroctod by tbe support contor ntti eed Figure 11 51 Select Drive Upgrade package Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 609 3 The drive firmware update takes about 2 3 minutes per drive Figure 11 52 shows the completed task Uparade Drives Task compete 100 Figure 11 52 Drive firmware update complete Figure 11 53 shows the Pools Internal Storage pane which displays the result of the drive firmware update from BD2F to BD2H Wearing Sy tions Fier eee o gi epi montem 639008 Manon 2 Figure 11 53 Result of drive firmware update 610 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Upgrading the firmware on all drives There are two ways to upgrade all of the drives in an IBM Storwize V3700 system in the Management GUI From the Monitoring System pane From the Pools Internal Storage pane To upgrade the firmware on all drives complete the following steps 1 Upgrade all drives in one of the following ways Figure 11 54 shows how to upgrade all drives using the Actions menu in the System pane Select Update Drives Actions Add Enc
345. igured through the Initial Setup wizard when the system is first installed as described in Chapter 2 Initial configuration on page 27 They can also be configured after the initial setup through the management graphical user interface GUI which provides a set of presets to help you configure different Redundant Array of Independent Disks RAID types The suggested configuration presets configure all drives into RAIDs based on drive class and protect them with the appropriate number of spare drives Alternatively you can configure the storage to your own requirements Selections include the drive class the number of drives to configure whether to configure spare drives and optimizing for performance or capacity This chapter includes the following topics gt Working with internal drives Configuring internal storage Working with Storage Pools gt Working with child pools For information about using the IBM Storwize V3700 command line interface CLI see Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 307 7 1 Working with internal drives This section describes how to configure the internal storage disk drives using different RAID levels and optimization strategies The IBM Storwize V3700 storage system provides an Internal Storage window for managing all internal drives The Internal Storage window can be accessed by completing the following
346. ility finding issues with an IBM Storwize V3700 before continuing with the software updato The update rest utility detected issues that may affect the update Ploaso go tothe Update System page and click Read more for Figure 11 30 Test Utility detected issues 10 Close the warning window and then click the Read more link to display the results of the test utility as shown in Figure 11 31 Detail follow tool the software upgrade Update Test ny Results Warning found This tool has found the internal disks of this system are not running the recommended firmware versions Model Latest FW Current FW Drive count 157930065355 8620 111 Wo recommond that you upgrade tho drive microcode at an appropriate time you believe you are running the latest version of microcode then check for later version of this You do not need to upgrade the drive firmware before starting Figure 11 31 Test Utility results Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 599 In this example the test utility has found one warning This system has a drive with earlier firmware This issue does not prevent the software update from continuing 11 Clicking Close takes you back to the Update System pane Click Resume to continue with the software update or click Cancel to cancel the software update enabling the user to correct any issues The results of continuing with
347. imary C tary primary Figure 10 113 Choose the copy direction Chapter 10 services 551 Switching the direction of a stand alone Remote Copy relationship To switch the copy direction of the Remote Copy relationship complete the following steps 1 Select the relationship and click Switch from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 114 Lt Create Consistency Group faster Volume Volume Create Relationship Add to Consistoncy Group Star fife reren Remotesourcez RemoteTaet reres HemcteSonreet emote Target omotesourest RemoteTargot Figure 10 114 Switch Remote Copy relationship A warning message opens and shows you the consequences of this action as shown in Figure 10 115 page 553 If you switch the Remote Copy relationship the copy direction of the relationship becomes the opposite that is the current primary volume becomes the secondary while the current secondary volume becomes the primary Write access to the current primary volume is lost and write access to the current secondary volume is enabled If it is not a disaster recovery situation you must stop your host to the current primary volume in advance 2 Make sure that you are prepared for the consequences If so click Yes to continue 552 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 10 115 shows the warning message explaining what will happen
348. ime Protocol NTP server to syn nize time on the system UB 5 oss i Memini O NTP Server e amp quee Dats mean amp TT V Use Browser Settings dina zaa pu Figure 3 109 System pane 188 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Licensing The licensing pane shows the current system licensing The IBM Storwize V3700 is based on per system licensing and is not licensed per enclosure as are the other systems in the Storwize family The following optional licenses are available FlashCopy upgrade to 2040 target copies Remote Copy IBM Easy Tier Turbo Performance One time trial licenses can be enabled from the GUI for any function except the FlashCopy upgrade The trial licenses automatically disable after 90 days if they are not fully licensed in the meantime IBM sends a printed page with an authorization code when the optional license is ordered The following options are available for enabling the licenses gt Automatic The client enters an authorization code into the GUI of an internet attached IBM Storwize V3700 The system validates the code with IBM and enables functionality gt Manual The client enters an authorization code and machine details into the data storage feature activation DSFA website which validates and creates a license key The client enters the license key into the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI which enables the function For more information see t
349. ime data consistency across multiple volumes for applications that include related data that spans them For these volumes consistency groups maintain the integrity of the FlashCopy by ensuring that dependent writes are run in the application s intended sequence For more information about dependent writes see Dependent writes on page 460 When consistency groups are used the FlashCopy commands are issued to the FlashCopy consistency group which performs the operation on all FlashCopy mappings that are contained within the consistency group Figure 10 2 shows a consistency group that consists of two FlashCopy mappings Figure 10 2 FlashCopy consistency group FlashCopy mapping management After an individual FlashCopy mapping is added to consistency group it can be managed only as part of the group Operations such as start and stop are no longer allowed on the individual mapping Dependent writes To show why itis crucial to use consistency groups when a data set spans multiple volumes consider the following typical sequence of writes for a database update transaction 1 A write is run to update the database log which indicates that a database update is about to be performed 2 A second write is run to complete the actual update to the database 3 A third write is run to update the database log which indicates that the database update completed successfully The database ensures the correct ordering of these
350. ims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations To illustrate them as completely as possible the examples include the names of individuals companies brands and products All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an aciual business enterprise is entirely coincidental COPYRIGHT LICENSE This information contains sample application programs in source language which ilustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms You may copy modify and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM for the purposes of developing using marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions IBM therefore cannot guarantee or imply reliability serviceability or function of these programs Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved ix Trademarks IBM the IBM logo and ibm com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation inthe United States other countries or both These and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first occurrence in this information wit
351. in Genes oe Fibre Channel Ports Se Qoo om ooo G Figure 3 101 Network pane Management IP addresses The Management IP address is the IP address of the system and is configured during initial setup The address can be an IPv4 address IPv6 address or both The Management IP address is logically assigned to Ethernet port 1 of each node canister which enables for node canister failover Another Management IP address can be logically assigned to Ethernet port 2 of each node canister for fault tolerance 1 If the Management IP address is changed use the new IP address to log in to the Management GUI again 2 Click Management IP Addresses 3 Click the port to configure the corresponding port on the partner node canister is also highlighted 4 Provide the required IP Subnet and Gateway information Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 133 Figure 3 102 shows the Management IP Addresses configuration pane Management IP Addresses Management signed aut te nuaon ne ssim a stot Addresses enoooures onte system mat coins me management ut me command me oce wich manage me system Gigt on s portto systems management saaress you change F managsmen adsrsses use adsress t log managervenGLI agen Service IP Adresses T Ethornot Port t Primary T c agarose 8 174184 48 Gems 28528548
352. indow 7 1 2 Actions on internal drives 7 2 Configuring internal storage 7 2 1 RAID configuration presets 7 2 2 Customizing initial storage configuration 7 2 3 Creating an MDisk and Pool 7 2 4 Using the recommended configuration 7 2 5 Selecting a different configuration 7 2 6 MDisk by Pools pane 149 180 161 161 155 162 163 166 178 180 182 185 188 191 195 199 200 202 205 208 zai 218 218 215 216 218 233 234 235 247 249 250 250 250 250 251 252 252 259 307 308 809 81 820 821 824 326 329 836 vi 7 27 RAID action for MDisks 7 2 8 More actions on MDisks 7 3 Working with Storage Pools 7 8 1 Create Pool option 8 7 3 2 Actions on Storage Pools 7 4 Working with Child Pools 7 4 1 Create Child Pools 7 4 2 Actions on Child Pools 7 4 3 Resizing a Child Pool Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 8 1 Advanced host administration 8 1 1 Modifying Mappings menu 8 1 2 Unmapping volumes from a host 8 1 3 Renaming a host 8 1 4 Removing a host 8 1 5 Host properties x 8 2 Adding and deleting host ports 8 2 1 Adding a host port 8 2 2 Adding a Fibre Channel port 8 2 3 Adding an SAS host port 8 2 4 Adding an iSCSI host port 8 2 5 Deleting a host port
353. information about all MDisks made of internal and external storage The MDisks are categorized by the pools to which they are attached ono o a ee M rane im a iet Vise Qe ti Figure 7 38 MDisk by Pool window The following default information is provided Name The MDisk and the Pool name that is provided during the configuration process Status The status of the MDisk and Storage Pool The following statuses are possible Online All MDisks are online and performing optimally Degraded One MDisk is in degraded state for example missing SAS connection to an enclosure of member drives or a failed drive with no spare available A node could also be a contributing factor to this state 336 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 7 39 shows that the pool is degraded mm 4E onse x 17 m Aaen 2710 Gi m ero 3 eyer Maced 30 E sem wy J amo m T1 Dives acted 48 T E v one sesta E Figure 7 39 One degraded MDisk in pool Offline One or more MDisks in a pool are offline The pool V3700 RSPool 02 also changes to offline as shown in Figure 7 40 EA en 68 oened TT GI FL Ex L ome eyes Acea a n ome co ay Figure 7 40 Offline MDisk in a pool gt Capacity The capacity
354. insuf 312 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 Example 7 1 shows how to use the chdrive CLI commard to bypass this check and the drive to failed anyway Example 7 1 The use of the chdrive command to set drive to failed Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser chdrive use failed allowdegraded driveID The allowdegraded flag enables you to bypass the check for suitable spare drives For information about using the IBM Storwize V3700 CLI see Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 Mark as The internal drives in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system can be assigned the following usage roles as shown in Figure 7 10 Unused The drive is not in use and cannot be used as a spare gt Candidate The drive is available for use in an array Spare The drive can be used as a hot spare if required n macn a a E 2 5 E rasan _ Take Omine E Mark as D museo z E mace EI ES S33 RGB snow Dopondont volumes 892 86 60 proponos 2 1 2 anao 2 Deoa Customizr Columns E 2 D E v One 2 E MAGO Cove V Onine 2 m E 48626 GIB v Onine 2 LI macn v onne 2 3 Figure 7 10 Internal drive Mark as option Chapter 7 Storage Pools 313 14 The new role that can be assigned depends on the current drive usage r
355. ion gt Netrorkng to upcete ts effective teaming poly Select VMkernel adapter to bird vith the SCST adapter LE Adapter PhyatealAeanter 1 Some SS Diet wid mic 1000 Fal 7 9 meth mrica 1306 Fall Hp visao 10 Hal HB nna 1000 ral snitch Port Group Menegenert Network address p Sibret Mase 255 288 2880 IN Address Physical Network Adapter Name Device Intel Corporation 82574 Gigabit Network Connection Lune status Comeec Configured 1000 Mbps Full Duplex o Figure 4 25 Adding VMkernel ports to the iSCSI Adapter Important If the VMkernel ports are reported as Not Compliant complete the steps described in Configuring multipath support for iSCSI on VMware ESXi on page 176 and try again Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 15 The Network Configuration tab should now look like Figure 4 26 Click Close to finish binding the VMkernel ports Gees ynam Discovery Statie Decovey chem Pot Group Vikend Adapter Por Group foliy Path eo ee oS J Es mS 68 Port Group Policy compliant E 0 eee Configured Speed 1000 Mbps Ful Duplex Figure 4 26 The ports added to the iSCSI Adapter 16 The window show
356. ion cables example Chapter 2 Initial configuration 29 The following connections must be made Connect SAS port 4 of the left node canister in the control enclosure to SAS port 1 of the left expansion canisters in the first expansion enclosure Connect SAS port 4 of the right node canister in the control enclosure to SAS port 1 of the right expansion canisters in the first expansion enclosure Connect SAS port 2 of the left node canister in the first expansion enclosure to SAS port 1 of the left expansion canister in the second expansion enclosure Connect SAS port 2 of the right node canister in the first expansion enclosure to SAS port 1 of the right expansion canister in the second expansion enclosure Continue in this fashion adding expansion controllers on the SAS chains originating at port 4 on the control enclosure node canisters Disk drives The disk drives that are included with the control enclosure model 2072 12C or 2072 24C are part of the single SAS chain The expansion enclosures should be connected to the SAS chain as shown in Figure 2 1 on page 29 so that they can use the full bandwidth of the system 2 2 Storage area network configuration planning 30 The suggested storage area network SAN configuration is composed of a minimum of two fabrics that encompass all host ports and any ports on external storage systems that are to be virtualized by IBM Storwize V3700 The IBM Storwize V3700 ports are evenl
357. ions as shown in Figure 10 11 The progress bars for each target volume indicate the copy progress as a percentage The copy progress remains 0 for snapshots there is no change until data is written to the target volume The copy progresses for clone and backup continues to increase until the copy process completes Figure 10 11 FlashCopy in progress viewed in the FlashCopy Mappings window Chapter 10 Copy services 471 4 The copy progress can also be found under the Running Tasks status indicator as shown in Figure 10 12 Create FlashCopy Mapping Actions Finer E Mapping N Situs Source Volunue Target Volume Progress demapt copying FRehCopyVol FlashCopy a amp Qo rere Qe lal Figure 10 12 Running Tasks bar FlashCopy operations 472 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 This view is slightly different from the FlashCopy and FlashCopy Mappings windows as shown in Figure 10 13 4 FlashCopy operation x FlachCopyVol2 FlashCopyvol3 Figure 10 13 FlashCopy operations shown through Running Tasks After the copy processes complete you find that a FlashCopy mapping with the clone preset is deleted automatically There are now two identical volumes that are independent of each other Chapter 10 Copy services 473 1
358. ip Sema 4i Figure 10 117 Rename the Remote Copy relationship 2 Enter the new name for the Remote Copy relationship and click Rename Deleting a stand alone Remote Copy relationship The Remote Copy relationship can be deleted by completing the following steps 1 Select the relationship and select Delete Relationship from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 118 on page 555 or highlight the relationship and right click 554 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Errem Creste Consistency Group Create Reatonsnip Add to Consistency Group Messier Volume Auxitary Volume emote soureso Romero start sop E Be reet E Remotesources RemoteTargets rerea Rename Remote Sourcea emotelarget M Md 9 us Qoo immi elit Figure 10 118 Delete a Remote Copy relationship 2 You must confirm this deletion by verifying the number of relationships to be deleted as shown in Figure 10 119 Click Delete to proceed Delete Relationship x You selected 1 relationship to delete Verify the relationship to deleta ccrel RenoteScurcei gt Wemctelacqeti Verify the numbor of relationships that you doleting Delete the relationship even when the data on the target volume is inconsistent rif tho target volume has other dependencies a Figure 10 119 Confirm the relationship deletion Chapter 10 Copy
359. irtualized Pool details in graph format Figure 11 106 Pool details Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 645 646 Implementing the IBM Storwize 3700 Command line interface setup and SAN Boot This appendix describes the setup of the command line interface CLI and provides more information about the storage area network SAN Boot function This appendix includes the following sections gt Command line interface gt SAN Boot Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 647 Command line interface The IBM Storwize V3700 system has a powerful CLI which offers even more functions than the graphical user interface GUI This section is not intended to be a detailed guide to the CLI That topic is beyond the scope of this book The basic configuration of the IBM Storwize V3700 CLI and some example commands are covered The CLI commands are the same as those in the IBM SAN Volume Controller but in addition there are more commands that are available to manage the internal storage of the Storwize V3700 If a task is completed in the GUI the CLI command is always displayed in the details as shown throughout this book Detailed CLI information is available in the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center under the Command Line section which can be found on the following website http www 01 ibm com support knowl edgecenter STLMSA wel come Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 V7
360. is server IF this disk is elready online on another sever bringing the disk online on this server can cause data less Are you sure you want to bring this disk online on this server Ex Figure 5 33 Confirm that you want to bring the disk online Chapter 5 Volume configuration 219 9 The next step is to initialize the disk To do this right click the disk and click Initialize as shown in Figure 5 34 Figure 5 34 Initializing the disk 10 The window shown in Figure 5 35 opens Click Yes to confirm that you want to initialize the disk Performing this operation erases all deta on the disk and initializes it as a GPT disk Back up any data that you want to keep before initializing the Do you went to continue Figure 5 35 Confirm that you want to initialize the disk 11 The disk now shows as online and initialized with Globally Unique Identifier GUID Partition Table GPT partitioning as shown in Figure 5 36 Figure 5 36 The mapped volume online and initialized as a GPT disk 12 Repeat the previous steps for any other mapped volumes The mapped volumes are now ready to be managed by the host OS Creating a file system on a mapped volume To create a file system on a mapped volume in Windows 2012 R2 complete the following steps 1 In the Disks view in File and Storage Services right click the disk and click New Volume as shown in Figure 5 37 Figure 5 37 Cr
361. ish the Storage Migration wizard Finalize migrated volumes However the first task is to document the existing system and record the data needed for the migration 6 2 4 Storage migration example configuration The example scenario we use involves migrating existing volumes that are presented from direct SAS attached IBM System Storage DS3200 to a Microsoft Windows 2012 host There are three volumes presented from the System Storage DS3200 Redbookvolt drive letter 8 gigabytes GB Redbookvol2 drive letter E 15 GB and Redbookvol3 drive letter F 10 GB These three volumes are to be migrated from the System Storage DS3200 onto the internal storage capacity of the Storwize V3700 6 2 5 Recording migration information Before a successful migration can take place it is necessary to record certain information about the existing system 1 First record information about the existing external logical unit numbers LUNs In our example from the Windows 2012 Server Manager Dashboard select Tools gt Computer Management Storage Disk Management as shown in Figure 6 1 You can see the three volumes disk G disk E and disk F Fie Mes Ha s am Bs AF Computer Management cal tre Ties n 4 System Toole ET Simple Sei NTFS Goo Page Cn Dump F RIAs AGIRE Simple Seic Heathy Para Patton P bent Vener Si
362. istics Because of the defined presets this setup might leave drives unused The remaining unconfigured drives can be used in another array Figure 7 31 shows an example in which not all of the provisioned drives can be used in a performance optimized configuration five drives remain Select a dirrerent contiguration Drive Class 278 90 GiB Enterprise 10K rpm Preset RAIDS i Automatically configure spares Optimize for Performance Optimize for Capacity E Humber of drives to provision Configuration Summary RAID 5 278 90 GIB Enterprico 10K rpm 8 8 8 arvas 2Hot Spares Drives This configuration cannot uly use the number cf chives that was requested Select Optimize io alccais tho elerage to tho arrays Figure 7 31 Optimization for performance failed Chapter 7 Storage Pools 331 Figure 7 32 shows that the number of drives is not enough to satisfy the needs of the configuration 5 Select a different configuration Drive Class em 278 90 GiB Enterprise 10K rpm Preset Automatically configure spares amp Optimize for Performance Optimize for Capacity s Number of drives to provision Configuration Summary DXRAD 5 278 30 GIB Enterprise 10K rri The number of drives enteredis not enough to satisfy the target number of drives thatis needed tor the Figure 7 32 Not
363. isting a Figure 11 21 Configuration backup Show full log listing Search for the files named svc config backup xml_ svc config backup sh and svc config backup log 4 Select the files right click and select Download as shown in Figure 11 22 LES CMOM Logging Levet Low Idumpsisve confia cron bek_OGO7D6C A dumpe ave config oron bek_0CO7D6C 2 Figure 11 22 Configuration backup Download a w eumosiresomaaeousam arses ak Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 593 5 Save the configuration backup files to your management workstation as shown in Figure 11 23 You have chosen to open 18 dumps7917106040761428527 zip which is Compressed zipped Folder from htos 917425148 What should Firefox do with this filer a a Fare M H i t ww Jdumpsisve contioa a Seve Hle is automatically fer fle ice this from now Figure 11 23 Configuration backup Save File Even though the configuration backup files are updated automatically on a daily basis it might be of interest to verify the time stamp of the actual file 6 To do this open the svc config backup xnl xx file with an editor and search for the string timestanp which is found near of the top of the file Figure 11 24 shows the file and the timestamp information En ee a mul versica 2 0 2 gt 3 lt 1DOCTYPE 4 lt
364. k Create or Create and Map to Host to continue Figure 3 74 shows a quantity of 3 in the Quantity field and this creates three volumes named V3700 Yol 05 V3700 Vol 06 and V3700 Vol 07 reste Volumes x Primary Pot 2 Cae 10 Gan V5700_WoLO s 7 Summary trove votamos 30 00 58 514 0 ME a el sansa 225 T8 Foe Create and Wp Figure 3 74 Creating multiple volumes quickly 116 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Volume advanced settings To change other volume settings complete the following steps 1 Click Advanced to show more volume configuration options Use this feature when the preset does not meet your requirements 2 Afterthe advanced settings are configured click OK to return to the Create Volumes pane Figure 3 75 shows the Advanced Settings pane a Figure 3 75 Advanced Settings pane Volumes by Pool pane For more information see Volumes by Pool pane on page 105 Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 117 Volumes by Host pane Select Volumes by Host in the Volumes menu to open the pane In the Volume by Hosts pane it is possible to focus on volumes that are allocated to a particular host using the host selection filter Figure 3 76 shows the Volumes by Host pane a ypres o ib Tres Wop UN y Onine 00088 VIRG ee
365. kgrp id name status easy tier easy tier status 3 EasyTier Pool online on active Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser 444 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 Run the svcinfo Isvdisk to show all configured volumes within your IBM Storwize V3700 as shown in Example 9 8 We are interested only in the volume called Vol ume001 Example 9 8 Show all configured volumes IBM Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser svcinfo Isvdisk id name 10 group id status mdisk grp name capacity 0 Volumeoo1 0 online EasyTier Pool 5 0068 IBM Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser 3 To disable Easy Tier on single volumes run the svctask chvdisk easytier off volume nane command as shown in Example 9 9 Example9 9 Disable Easy Tier on a single volume Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser svctask chvdisk easytier off Volume001 Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser This command disables Easy Tier on all copies of the volume Example 9 10 shows Easy Tier turned off for Copy 0 even if Easy Tier is still enabled on the Storage Pool Note that on Copy 0 the status changed to measured because the pool is stil actively measuring the on the volume Example 9 10 Easy Tier disabled Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lsvdisk Volume001 190 name Volume001 mdisk grp Pool capacity 5 0068 parent mdisk grp id 3 parent mdisk grp name EasyTier Pool copy id 0 status online mdisk name EasyTier Pool
366. ks performance of SAN attached devices Monitors manages and controls through zones SAN fabric components Manages the capacity usage and availability of the file systems and databases Offers performance monitoring and reporting Provides report viewing using a web based GUI yrvyvyyy Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The examples provided in this section not based on the current version of Tivoli Storage Productivity Center For detailed guidance on configuring the most current version of Tivoli Storage Productivity Center see the IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center V5 1 Technical Guide 8024 8053 which is another IBM Redbooks publication http www redbooks ibm com abstracts s9248053 html 0 11 8 2 Adding IBM Storwize V3700 in Tivoli Storage Productivity Center After the Tivoli Storage Productivity Center is installed it is ready to connect to the IBM Storwize V3700 system Complete the following steps to connect Tivoli Storage Productivity Center to the IBM Storwize V3700 system 1 Open your browser and use the following link to start Tivoli Storage Productivity Center as shown in Figure 11 83 http TPC system Hostname 9550 1TSRM app en US index html Figure 11 83 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center front page You also can find a link on the web page to download IBM Java if required To start Tivoli Storage Productivity Center console click TPC GUI Ja
367. l supported platforms see the Multipath Subsystem Device Driver User s Guide This can be found on the following website http www bm com support docview wss rs 540 amp context ST5267 amp q ssg1 amp uid ssg1S7000 303 amp loc en US amp cs utf 8 amp lang ens20en Determining host WWPNs The worldwide port names WWPNs of the FC HBA are required to correctly zone switches and configure host attachment on the IBM Storwize V3700 These can be found using vendor tools the HBA BIOS the native Windows command line or SDDDSM 1 To determine the host WWPNs using SDDDSM we can open a Powershell terminal and run the datapath query wwpn command as shown in Example 4 2 Example 4 2 Query SDDDSM WWPNs PS C Program Files IBM SDDDSM gt datapath exe query wwpn Adapter Name PortWWN Scsi Port2 21000024 200 2 Scsi Porti 21000024FF2D0CC3 2 When the WWPNs are known connect the cables and perform any necessary switch configuration for example zoning The host is now prepared to connect to the IBM Storwize V3700 These are the basic steps to prepare a Windows 2012 R2 host for FC attachment For information about configuring FC attachment on the IBM Storwize V3700 side see 4 3 2 Configuring IBM Storwize V3700 for FC connectivity 4 2 2 Windows 2012 R2 Preparing for iSCSI attachment This section details the steps necessary for preparing for a successful implementation Installing and updating supported HBAs Inst
368. ld you nko to incide thom in your RAID Figure 7 24 Unused drives notification 5 When the decision is made to include the drives into the RAID configuration their status is set to Candidate which also makes them available for new MDisk 6 The use of the storage configuration wizard simplifies the initial disk drive setup and offers the following options Use the recommended configuration Selecting Use the recommended configuration guides you through the wizard that is described in 7 2 4 Using the recommended configuration on page 326 Selecta different configuration Selecting Select a different configuration uses the wizard that is described in 7 2 5 Selecting a different configuration on page 329 Chapter 7 Storage Pools 325 7 2 4 Using the recommended configuration To use the recommended configuration complete the following stey 1 As shown in Figure 7 25 when you click Use the recommended configuration the wizard offers a recommended storage configuration at the bottom of the window Configure ternal Stra x Uso this wizard ta allocate RAID arrays to this comnguranon completes you can create volumes j fremthese ponis Storage Fount 28 dives 278 S0 OE Eten 104 ran 17 drives 276 30 OB Enterprise 154 ram tives 465 26 OD Neate 7209 ram Vies 03 SE 10K rom Uso the recommended configuration Soloct this option to conngura ava
369. lect FlashCopyVo16 as shown in Figure 10 45 Because FlashCopyVo16 is the source volume for FlashCopyVol7 you are effectively reversing the copy direction by doing this Create FlashCopy Mapping x Selacr me source ana target v imes tor the FiasnCopy mapping Source volume Target Volume Fasicomiei soo GB Figure 10 45 Select target volume Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 Click Add A warning message displays as shown in Figure 10 46 Click Close This message is shown because you are using a source as a target Warning x The selected target volume is already designated as a source in another mapping relationship Starting this mapping will impact the other mappings if they are currently active Figure 10 46 FlashCopy restore warning Glick Next and you see a FlashCopy preset choice as shown in Figure 10 47 Create FlashCopy Mapping x Select Preeot Figure 10 47 Choose FlashCopy preset 6 Select Snapshot and click Next 7 Inthe next window you are asked if the new mapping is to be part of a consistency group shown in Figure 10 48 In this example the new mapping is not part of a consistency group so click No and then Finish to create the mapping Create FlashCopy Mapping x Do you want to add the FlashCopy mappings to consistency Group No do not add the mapoings to consistency ar
370. lick Download MIB to download the MIB file Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 131 3 Configure up to six servers using the Add option from the Actions menu Figure 3 99 shows the Add SNMP Server pane Add SNMP Server Server ip Port 12 Community public Figure 3 99 Add SNMP Server pane Syslog event notification As shown in Figure 3 100 the Notifications pane provides access to the Syslog configuration pane 1 Click Syslog to open the pane and enter the server details 2 Configure multiple servers by clicking plus to add more servers syslog mat spears pera eat e eg nr eae Iu b sume IP Address Facil Come cues a Figure 3 100 Syslog configuration pane 132 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Network pane Select Network in the Settings menu to open the pane As shown in Figure 3 101 the Network pane provides access to the Management IP Addresses Service IP Addresses Ethernet Ports iSCSI Fibre Channel Connectivity and Fibre Channel Ports configuration panes Management IP Addresses Tho management adress is assigned auring he initalizaton ofthe system and represents sot at Vocsures on he system mat contains me management GUI ana mne manage me system Gl on conngureme systems management IP adress change management adresses use new P adores olg mt fhe management GUI aga
371. ll data is copied to this target and all older targets Cascaded FlashCopy mappings The cascaded FlashCopy function enables a FlashCopy target volume to be the source volume of another FlashCopy mapping Up to 256 mappings can exist in a cascade If cascaded mappings and multiple target mappings are used a tree of up to 256 mappings can be created Cascaded mappings differ from multiple target FlashCopy mappings in depth Cascaded mappings have an association in the manner of gt gt where multiple target FlashCopy has an association in the manner A gt B1 and gt B2 Background copy The background copy rate is a property of a FlashCopy mapping that is defined as a value of 0 100 The background copy rate can be defined and dynamically changed for individual FlashCopy mappings A value of 0 disables background copy This option is also called the no copy option which provides pointer based images for limited lifetime uses With FlashCopy background copy the source volume data is copied to the corresponding target volume in the FlashCopy mapping If the background copy rate is set to 0 which means disable the FlashCopy background copy only data that changed on the source volume is copied to the target volume The benefit of using a FlashCopy mapping with background copy enabled is that the target volume becomes a real independent clone of the FlashCopy mapping source volume after the copy is complete When the backgrou
372. llocated Click Close after the task is complete Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 405 Editing thin provisioned properties To edit thin provisioned properties complete the following steps 1 Select Edit Properties as shown in Figure 8 63 on page 404 2 Edit the settings if required and click OK to apply the changes Figure 8 66 shows the Edit Properties window Edit Properties Win2012 Vol 03 Copy 0 x Warning Threshold 00 29 Enable Autooxpand 2 Figure 8 66 Edit Properties pane 3 After the task completes click Close to return to the Volumes pane 8 6 Advanced volume copy functions 406 In 8 4 1 Advanced volume functions on page 385 we described all of the available actions ata volume level and how to create a second volume copy In this section we focus on volumes that consist of two volume copies and how to apply the concept of two copies for business continuity and data migration Expanding a volume selecting a copy and opening the Action menu displays the following volume copy actions as shown in Figure 8 67 on page 407 Thin Provisioned for thin volumes Make Primary for non primary copy Split into New Volume Validate Volume Copies Duplicate Volume Delete this Copy Implementing the Storwize V3700 ioca mem pe a nae rines s Winaot2 S
373. lose access to volumes that are provided by this system Shutting down the system also shuts down all IBM Storwize V3700 nodes All data is flushed to disk before the power is removed Run the stopsystem command to shut down a clustered system as shown in Example 11 4 Example 11 4 Shutdown stopsystem Are you sure that you want to continue with the shut down Type to shut down the entire clustered system Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 631 11 7 2 Powering on Important This process assumes that all power is removed from the enclosure If the control enclosure is shut down but the power is not removed the power LED on all node canisters flashes at 1 Hz In this case remove the power cords from both power supplies and then reinsert them Complete the following steps to power on the system 1 Ensure that any network switches that are connected to the system are powered on 2 Power on any expansion enclosures by connecting the power cord to both power supplies in the rear of the enclosure and turning on the power circuit 3 Power on the control enclosure by connecting the power cords to both power supplies in the rear of the enclosure and turning on the power circuits The system starts The system starts successfully when all node canisters in the control enclosure have their status LED permanently on which should take no longer than 10 minutes 4 Start the host applications 11 8 Tivoli Sto
374. losure Rename System Turn Off All identify LEDS Figure 17 54 Upgrade all drives System pane Figure 11 55 shows how to update all drives using the Action menu in the Internal Storage pane Select Upgrade All Note If any drives are selected the Action menu displays actions for the selected drives and the Upgrade All option does not display If a drive is selected clear it by holding down the Ctr key and clicking the drive 3 a mermat a at mene a 27890 GiB Enterprise amp Home m Mc T Figure 11 55 Upgrade all drives Internal Storage pane Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 611 2 After initiating the drive upgrade process using either of the previous options the pane Figure 11 56 is displayed Select the Drive Upgrade package which was previously downloaded from the IBM Support site by clicking the folder icon and then click Upgrade to continue Upgrade Ali Drives x Upgrade All Eligible Drives Upload the software upgrade package to the storage system Upgrade package IGM2072 DRIVE 20140026 B Install the firmware even the drive is running a newer version and directed by the support center E 24 Figure 11 56 Upgrade all drives select firmware file All of the drives that require an upgrade are now upgraded 11 5 Event log 612 Whenever a significant change in the status of IBM Storwize V3700 is detected an event is submit
375. lowing steps to upload the key 1 Open the user section as shown in Figure A 6 Figure 6 Open user section 2 Right click the user you want to upload the key for and click Properties Figure A 7 x Em EE cms h nmm EQ service Figure 7 User properties Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot 653 3 To upload the public key click Browse select your public key and click OK as shown in Figure A 8 User Properties x RBUser Authentication Mace Local Remote Loca Creaentas Users must neve password an SSH pubiic key or bath Figure 8 Select public key 4 Click OK and the task to upload the key is started 5 Click Close to return to the GUI 654 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Configuring the SSH client Before the CLI can be used the SSH client must be configured Complete the following steps to configure the client 1 Start PUTTY as shown in Figure 9 acci E Sa Session Basic optione for your PUTTY session Spect castration you want to connect to pom Name or IP address Bort Bel Features E Wirdow opearence Behaviour Selecten Cornacton Dae Prog Fogn 4 35H Se Ocewnbwone _ Aways Never Oriy on clan eat Be jJ _ Cms Figure
376. lumes in the Storage Pool The following list describes the columns VDisk ID VDisk Copy ID Configured size or VDisk capacity VO percentage of extent poo The tiers that the volume is taking capacity from The capacity on each of the tiers The heat distribution of that Storage Pool yvrvvyyy Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The heat distribution of a volume is displayed using a color bar which represents the following The blue portion of the bar represents the capacity of cold extents in the volume Extents are considered cold when not used heavily or the IOPS is very low The orange portion of the bar represents the capacity of warm extents in the volume Data is considered warm when itis either used relatively heavily or the IOPS is relatively more compared to the cold extents or lower when compared to hot extents The red portion of the bar represents the capacity of hor data in the volume Data is considered hot when used heavily or when the IOPS is high Figure 9 34 shows a few examples of the volume heat distribution Volume Heat Distribution eem xcd UL meu mum Figure 9 34 Volume heat distribution The Systemwide Recommendation section can be viewed on another page which shows the recommended configuration for the tiers as applicable for the configuration of the system Typically it shows three recommended configurations Flash SSD Enterprise gt Nearline Cha
377. lumn heading Host Mappings as it is dragged to the required location Greate Volumes tions 9 Filer controller DODODOU00000 Online FlashCopyVorr Online FlashCopy ois Online 500GB V3700 RSPool 01 Fashcopwon v 20 00 G18 V3TUO FiashCopyvoit Online 5000618 V3TtO oF nol FiashCopyvol2 Online Fiasncopyvos v 5000618 FashCopyVoit Online 50 00 Gi8_V3700_AsPeol 01 Figure 3 17 Dragging a column heading to the required location 3 Figure 3 18 shows the result of dragging the column heading Host Mappings to the new location 3 Create Volumes contoller0_000000000000 Flashcop VelT l FushCopy eld 92 scope a FlashCopyVol2 Onine v a FlashCopyVvelt Onine Figure 3 18 Reordering column headings m 3M 01 no 5006 01 379 R Pocl 01 no no Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 83 Adding or removing columns add or remove a column complete the following steps 1 Right click the heading bar and select or clear the check box for the required column headings Figure 3 19 shows the addition of the Real Capacity column I Rashcomy vs asicomylo RsPoot CD et uam eas eee iR m E
378. mation is available through the Properties option on the Actions menu or by right clicking as shown in Figure 10 90 CHAP Configuration bd s a in amp amp o Figure 10 90 Partnership properties Important The partnership is in the Partially Configured Local state because we have not yet defined it on the other IBM Storwize system For more information about partnership states see Hemote Copy and consistency group states on page 524 536 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 10 From the Properties menu option the partnership bandwidth and background copy rate be altered by clicking Edit as shown Figure 10 91 FarsershpProperes x Location Porter site Party Contigured Local ae Fire chamei nctangusem 10 Hops Background copy rate sos Figure 10 91 Editing partnership bandwidth and background copy rate 11 When you have edited the parameters click Save to save changes or Cancel to quit without making changes Chapter 10 Copy services 537 12 Complete the same steps on the second storage system for the partnership to become fully configured The Remote Copy partnership is now complete between the two IBM Storwize systems as shown in Figure 10 92 and both systems are ready for Remote Copy relationships to be configured el TU ru u
379. me com 9569 srm 2 A login pane is displayed as shown in Figure 11 97 enabling a user to log in using their Tivoli Storage Productivity Center credentials Tivoli Storage Productivity Center me Figure 11 97 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center login pane 3 After you log in the Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web dashboard is displayed as shown in Figure 11 98 The Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web based GUI is used to show information about the storage resources in your environment It contains predefined and custom reports about performance and storage tiering Xuss N Pom Capacity Recent Jobs Unacknowiedged Alerts Storage Systems o Last Day Last Day E Mies aliia mcm Figure 11 98 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Dashboard Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 641 4 IBM Tivoli Common Reporting can be used to View predefined reports Create a basic report and Design a report from the web based GUI as shown in Figure 11 99 view predefined reports 3 espina Figure 11 99 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web based reporting 5 Figure 11 100 shows how to select predefined Storage Tiering reporting Tivoli storage Productivity Cantor Hstenoatnformation 188 Tel Storage Prodiit Comer Performance 200010 Eje aam Figure 11 100 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Storage tierin
380. me optional iscsiPorts li gre Port Definitions d9n 199 01 con vmware mcr Nost 136 00c85032 Use CHAP authentication all ports Advanced Settings Host Type Generic defaulg HPIUX Openvms TPGS fost Figure 4 44 Adding the iSCSI initiator Host Name 4 In the Advanced Settings it is possible to choose the Host Type If using HP UX OpenVMS or TPGS this needs to be configured Otherwise the default option Generic is fine Chapter 4 Host configuration 189 5 Click Add Host and the wizard completes as shown in Figure 4 45 Add Host Task completed 100 View more detaia Figure 4 45 Completion of the Add Host wizard Click Close to return to the host view which should now list your newly created host object as shown in Figure 4 46 a a u H ee 1 Figure 4 46 The Hosts view with the newly created host object listed 7 Repeat these steps for all of your iSCSI hosts After the host objects have been created see Chapter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 to create volumes and map them to the hosts Note iSCSI hosts might have Degraded status until volumes are mapped This is a limitation related to the implementation of iSCSI in IBM Storwize V3700 and not necessarily a sign of problems with network connectivity or the host configuration 190 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 3 4 Configuring IBM Storwi
381. me mappings to hosts are displayed Select the volume that you want to delete the mapping from then click Remove as shown in Figure 6 22 mr mr TEE gt Etienne Hors ly Edit Hostto Logical Drive Mappings sucia adi Qm Notez tere crangng a mapang yau shouid step any hoet arpeatorsaesoated wih te logical crue and unmount the eges drive F plead your oparstng ten m us Levis Ore Coach IH Hosta 1190 00 E tee tron i me Vinos i Figure 6 22 Removing a host volume mapping IBM DS3200 Chapter 6 Storage migration 267 4 Awarning message is presented as shown in Figure 6 23 ORA OE EM System Storage DS Storage Manage 10 Gubsstem Management Err F imeat setup Tasks mE TRES gt Edt Host to Loc rm anve f 1f yeu proceed tis ret to clea crve maning nil be removed The merscstediogia dv Ml be svala for uang reste Fosto ogcal Drie task Logical Dives Ra In ould wake appropriste changes at your haste that he Bs andis LUN are enger recoge em Are yeu sure you nant to remove tis host tica ve maorin D TEES 7 X Teen Redbone i Figure 6 23 Host mapping warning IBM 053200 5 Select Yes to remove the mapping 268 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 After all of the volumes h
382. ments tends to be complex gt itis often difficult to ensure that the latency and bandwidth requirements can be met Congested hosts on the source or target site can cause disruption Congested network links can cause disruption with only intermittent peaks To address these issues Change Volumes were added as an option for Global Mirror relationships Change Volumes use the FlashCopy functionality but cannot be manipulated as FlashCopy volumes because they are special purpose only Change Volumes replicate point in time images on a cycling period the default is 300 seconds This situation means that your change rate must include only the condition of the data at the point in time that the image was taken rather than all of the updates during the period This situation can provide significant reductions in replication volume Figure 10 78 shows a basic Global Mirror relationship without Change Volumes Hostio label miror relationship across long distanca ink Figure 10 78 Global Mirror without Change Volumes Chapter 10 Copy services 521 Figure 10 79 shows a Global Mirror relationship with Change Volumes Global mitrorraetionshia across lerc distance link FlashCoa mapping FlashCopy mapping Figure 10 79 Global Mirror with Change Volumes With Change Volumes a FlashCopy mapping exists between the primary volume and the primary Change Volume The mapping is updated during a cycling pe
383. mes the primary for the source volume Optionally a name for the new volume can be specified Figure 8 71 shows the Split Volume Copy pane Spr volume Copy x Ensure that both copies have been fully synchronized before the volume copies are split Anew volume is created from the selected volume copy Volume Ham era T care Figure 8 71 Split Volume Copy pane 2 After the task completes click Close to return to the Volumes pane where the copy displays as a new volume named vdisk0 unless a name was specified that can be mapped to a host as shown in Figure 8 72 SS aR Em REESE Soe L eer I s o eI T RE Ripe eee eS a Wisata Vo v Online S006 FasyTier Poot eovartototnotrsp 5 m cs TE PEDE Hz m er eee See Y 20 08 oo Yes sonra ants Y Onine 300006 Poot p tee Qi et Figure 8 72 Volumes New volume from split copy Important If you receive error message code CMMVC6357E while you are splitting a volume copy use the Isvdisksyncprogress command to view the synchronization status or wait for the copy to synchronize Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 409 Example 8 1 shows output of the 1svdisksyncprogress command Example 8 1 Output of the Isvdisksyncprogress command 18M_Storwize ITSO_V3700 superuser gt 1svdi
384. mit After it is full newer entries replace the older entries which are not required To avoid a repeated event that fills the event log some records in the event log refer to multiple occurrences of the same event When event log entries are coalesced in this way the time stamps of the first occurrence and the last occurrence of the problem are saved in the log entry A count of the number of times that the error condition occurred is also saved in the log entry Other data refers to the last occurrence of the event Event log pane columns Right clicking in any column header opens the option menu in which you can select columns that are shown or hidden It s also possible to click the Column icon on the far right of the column headers to open the option menu Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 613 614 Figure 11 59 shows all of the possible columns that can be displayed in the error log view wi Error Cove Sequence Number I Last Time Stamp Status Description W Object Type 7I obiecti Object name Reporting Node ID Reporting Node Name Root Sequence Number Faea Event Count Evontib Restore Default View Figure 11 59 Possible event log columns The following available fields are suggested at a minimum to assist you in diagnosing problems gt Event ID This number precisely identifies the reason why the event was logged Error code This number describes the servi
385. mit the syslog message You can use the management GUI or the CLI to configure and modify your syslog settings Call Home email The Call Home feature transmits operational and error related data to you and IBM through a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP server connection in the form of an event notification email When it is configured this function alerts IBM service personnel about hardware failures and potentially serious configuration or environmental issues You can use the call home function if you have a maintenance contract with IBM or if the IBM Storwize V3700 is within the warranty period To send email you must configure at least one SMTP server You can specify as many as five other SMTP servers for backup purposes The SMTP server must accept the relaying of email from the IBM Storwize V3700 clustered system IP address You can then use the management GUI or CLI to configure the email settings including contact information and email recipients Set the reply address to a valid email address Send a test email to check that all connections and infrastructure are set up correctly You can disable the Call Home function at any time by using the management GUI or CLI 1 7 3 Useful IBM Storwize V3700 websites For more information about the IBM Storwize V3700 see the following websites The IBM Storwize V3700 home page https ibm biz BdEqMi Storwize V3700 Configuration Limit and Restrictions https ibm biz Bd
386. mmand prompt window opens as shown in Figure 4 2 Enter Yes to confirm the installation his setup will install Subsystem Device Driver DSM on vour machine fantinue vo install Ies Nol Figure 4 2 Running setup exe to install SDDDSM on Windows 2012 R2 4 After the setup completes enter Yes to restart the system as shown in Figure 4 3 his setup vill install Subsystem Device Driver DSH on your machine jantinue to instali Yes No es etup is Subeysten Devise Driver DSH Enabling MPIO Thic may take sone tine please be patient Dolnctallation io inotalling IBM Spocific Modulo Updating Device ROOINMPIONO002 1 Devices installed Post Installing Dolnstallation finished DDDSN installation upgrade is completed For setup to take effect lease reboot your systen jo you vant to restart your system now Yes No m Figure 4 3 Completion of the SDDDSM installation on Windows 2012 R2 5 Alter the server comes back online the installation should be complete You can verify the installed driver version by opening a Powershell terminal and running the datapath query version command as shown in Example 4 1 Example 4 1 Query SDDDSM version details PS C Program Files IBM SDDDSM gt datapath exe query version SDDDSM Version 2 4 3 5 3 Microsoft MPIO Version 6 2 9200 16384 184 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 For more information about configuring SDDDSM for al
387. mode selection pane Update System x The system is ready to install update package 2072 141020 4g7 gpg Select the type of update to complete Automatic update Choose this option for faster update metanawon can take approtmatoly 20 minutos Tor oach node and 30 minutos or system Service Assistant Manual update Attention Automatic update isthe pre Manat updates Ir complood incorroctly red method for updating softwore n result m dat loss e Figure 11 27 Update mode decision 5 Ifthe Service Assistant Manual update option is selected see Updating software manually on page 601 6 Select Finish to start the update process on the nodes Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 597 7 The test utility and node canister software is then uploaded to the system as shown in Figure 11 28 Update System x Uploading 2072 141020 z9p3 Time remaining 1 20 00 gt 2 Figure 11 28 Software upload 8 When the software has been uploaded to the IBM Storwize V3700 the test utility is automatically run as shown in Figure 11 29 Update 5 P ome ana nme S temm E Er fe eae ean nodet left Not updated e tee ulmo Figure 11 29 Running test utility Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 9 Messages inform you of any warnings or errors that the test utility finds Figure 11 30 shows the result of the test ut
388. mode or sequential volumes I O monitoring for such volumes is supported but you cannot migrate extents on such volumes unless you convert image or sequential volume copies to striped volumes Storwize V3700 creates volumes or volume expansions using extents from MDisks from the Enterprise and Nearline tier Extents from MDisks in the flash tier are used if no Enterprise or Nearline space is available When a volume is migrated out of a Storage Pool managed with Easy Tier automatic data placement mode is no longer active on that volume Automatic data placement is also turned off while a volume is migrated even if it is between pools that both have Easy Tier automatic data placement enabled Automatic data placement for the volume is re enabled when the migration is complete Flash drive performance depends on block size small blocks perform much better than larger blocks Easy Tier measures I O blocks smaller than 64 KB but it migrates the entire extent to the appropriate disk tier gt As extents are migrated the use of smaller extents makes Easy Tier more efficient The first migration starts about one hour after automatic data placement mode is enabled It takes up to 24 hours to achieve optimal performance In the current IBM Storwize V3700 Easy Tier implementation it takes about days before hot spots are considered moved from tier to tier which prevents hot spots from being moved from a fast tier if the
389. mple Baie NTS Heatty Pray Pesto PE Ric NT Healthy amar Putin U 1B Local and Groupa reboot E Simple NTFS ima Patin taloia c sytem Reserved Simple Bei NTFS Healthy System Active Primary Porti Device Manager st a 5 1 Mp Windows Server Backup aie G amaa janoaa NTFS gt amp Sevices and Applications Parison Baie Redbookvot 3 150068 1500 GBRTES Online Henthy may Parson _ _ Basic Redbooivan Fa Tuch 1000 gers Online Heat Primary Parson U Figure 6 1 Host volume properties Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 Highlight either the Disk 1 Disk 2 or Disk 3 labels Right click and select Properties as shown in Figure 6 2 ips Basic G3 8 0068 Errem New Spanned Volume n New Striped Volume New Mirrored Volume Basic New RAID 5 Volume 150068 Online Convent to Dynamic Disk E Convert to GPT Disk _ Basic S Properties Online H 5 Figure 6 2 Selecting disk properties Windows 2012 The properties shown indicate that these volumes are presented from a System Storage 053200 as indicated by the device type 1726 2xx shown in Fi
390. mplementing the IBM Storwize V3700 c Figure 10 18 shows the following Advanced Settings for the Backup preset Background Copy 50 Incremental Yes Auto Delete after completion No Cleaning Rate 50 Create FlashCopy Mapping x Selecta Preset Advanced Settings Background Copy Rate 50 Incremental Delete mapping after completion Cleaning Rate 50 Lasc ia Figure 10 18 Default settings for the backup preset 4 Change the settings of the FlashCopy mapping according to your requirements and click Next 5 In the next step you can add your FlashCopy mapping to a consistency group as shown in Figure 10 19 If the consistency group is not ready the FlashCopy mapping can be added to the consistency group afterward Click Next to continue Create FlashCopy Mapping x Do you want to add the FlashCopy mappings tn consistency group No do not add the mappings to a consistency group Yos add tho mappings to a consistancy group Figure 10 19 Add FlashCopy mapping to a consistency group Chapter 10 Copy services 477 6 You can define how the new target volumes manage capacity as shown in Figure 10 20 The Create a Generic volume option is your default choice if you selected Clone or Backup as your basic preset Create FlashCopy Mapping x How do you want tne volumas to manage capacity Use Thin Provisioning Croato a gonoric volume Inherit p
391. ms can eave nas af te or ven gave ines ifthe nade sanos active management GU eo fix any errore that related the rtve node Change Nove 5 Node Name Node Status Error Panel System e n Nodo Errors a Node Detail E Node Hardware access Location Parts z Nace deo Nace Status Active artic iso 4537 1on2s4000 FRU onvses Configuration Node Na Tee system ise verna sta Nama System Machine Code 103 13 410200000 Wchire vereion 7400 code 05 11 415200008 Console S374 9440449 Has Fie Hocule Kay Ma Figure 2 48 Service Assistant Home window 70 3 The Current canister node is displayed in the upper left corner of the GUI As shown in Figure 2 48 this is node 2 To change the canister select the relevant node in the Change Node section of the window You see the details in the upper left change to reflect the new canister The SA GUI provides access to service procedures and shows the status of the node canisters It is advised that these procedures should only be carried out if directed to do so by IBM Support For more information about how to use the SA tool see the following websi https ibm biz BdEz3N Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Graphical user interface overview This chapter provides an over
392. n B Shed foes featedioclvo Simple NTS Healthy Primary Paton P Loca Users anci Groups E Redbonbva F Simple NTFS Hab Primary Partition ees Reserves espe See NUS 0 Hey Stem Acte Primary Par 8 1 B 4 5 imc ni o MENNNENENENNENNNNNN 21 Dak Management BEES Ba Senicesond oni Volume New strates Volume Bad NewRAD SNolume Bal ew Ran s vo Oni Convertto Byram Dist Convento GPT Disk ar p MX reete ne L M iun upna ec vraree ne Pws ma D tnetocatea M Primary sation Figure 6 20 Offlining 053200 volumes from Windows 2012 Next we must remove the volumes from the Windows 2012 host To do this we must first unmap from the host definition in the external storage system In this case this is the Storage Manager GUI controlling the DS3200 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 From the Subsystem Management summary window click the Modify tab and select Edit host logical drive mappings as shown in Figure 6 21 B rer 3000 01 18M System Storage D5 Storage Manager 10 Subsystem Management ela Ej Iiis Setu Tasks pen E55 Modity Storage Subsystem Configuration Dico o prm EAE to onc estt aaier e erore oam Storage Figure 6 21 Editing host volume mappings for IBM DS3200 3 Alistof volu
393. n the nodes fall back to become a fully redundant system GUI node canister software update process The automatic update process is started in the GUI by starting the Update wizard as shown in Figure 11 25 1 Browse to Settings System Update System gt Update Update System Qa Fico sc AR RENS M ercupeatetoapoly ine uocat Update System Figure 11 25 Start Update wizard 2 When updating the node canister software a Test utility and the node software must first be downloaded from the Internet This can be downloaded either using the Download link in the pane or manually from the IBM Support site The Test utility verifies that there are no issues with the current system environment such as failed components and earlier drive firmware Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 Select the Test utility and Update package files by clicking the folder icon in the corresponding input field and then enter the version of the code level that you are updating to as shown in Figure 11 26 Update System x Select the fles to be used for update Test METALL _sveuparadoiest 10 Bi Udatepeckage 2072 Figure 11 26 Select Test utility and software Update package 4 Select whether an automatic or manual code update is required The Automatic update option is the default and suggested choice Figure 11 27 shows the update
394. n Figure 5 27 Dashboard Local Server I Servers file and Storage Services Wg File and Storage gt bets Manageabiity Events Performance EPA results Figure 5 27 Opening File and Storage Services in Server Manager Note File and Storage Services should be enabled by default If not they can be enabled by going to Manage Add Roles and Features and following the wizard 3 In File and Storage Services go to Disks Here all storage devices known to Windows should be listed as shown in Figure 5 28 Figure 5 28 The Disks view in File and Storage Services 218 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 If your mapped volumes not shown go to Tasks Rescan Storage as shown in Figure 5 29 Figure 5 29 Rescan storage from File and Storage Services A bar displays at the top of the pane to show that Windows is attempting to scan for devices as shown in Figure 5 30 Wait for this to complete Figure 5 30 Waiting for Windows to rescan storage The mapped volumes are now listed as shown in Figure 5 31 Figure 5 31 The mapped volumes listed in Windows 2012 R2 7 You need to bring the disk online To do this in Figure 5 32 ight click and select Bring Online as shown Figure 5 32 Bring a disk online 8 The window shown in Figure 5 33 opens Click Yes to confirm that you want to bring the disk online on th
395. n icon menu and the FlashCopy window opens as shown in Figure 10 5 The FlashCopy mappings are organized by volumes Figure 10 5 FlashCopy window 2 Click FlashCopy Mappings in the Copy Services function icon menu and the FlashCopy Mappings window opens as shown in Figure 10 6 In this window the FlashCopy mappings are listed individually LR EAT Figure 10 6 FlashCopy Mappings window 466 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 The Consistency Groups window is used to manage the consistency groups for FlashCopy mappings Click Consistency Groups in the Copy Services function icon menu and the Consistency Groups window opens as shown in Figure 10 7 Sees jeanne Figure 10 7 Consistency Groups window Chapter 10 Copy services 467 Quick path to create FlashCopy presets Itis easy to create a FlashCopy by using the presets in the FlashCopy window Creating a snapshot create a snapshot complete the following steps 1 In the FlashCopy window choose a volume and click Create Snapshot from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 8 2 Alternatively you can highlight your chosen volume and right click to access the Actions menu FE xis rates TCapacily Tr 0 suc ree Lcx Create Clone Creato Backup Show Related Volumes Delete p gt Properties eres 6a Qn lili
396. n in Figure 4 27 should open Click Yes to rescan the adapter and complete this procedure Rescan 1 Arescan cf the host bus adapter is recommended for this configuration chenge Rescan the adapter 15 Figure 4 27 the iSCSI Software Adapter Chapter 4 Host configuration 175 Configuring multipath support for iSCSI on VMware ESXi As explained in Chapter 4 2 4 VMware ESXi 5 5 Preparing for FC attachment on page 163 the ESX server has its own multipathing software For iSCSI there is some extra configuration required in the VMkernel port properties to enable path failover Each VMkernel port must map to just one physical adapter port which is not the default setting To fix this complete the following steps 1 Browse to the Configuration tab and select Networking 2 Click Properties next to the vSwitch that you configured for iSCSI to open the window shown in Figure 4 28 Ua e M PE M Fm enims esae meme q Neonat 8 amp Hiper Tm vanne Nene tm aut T eanceLowinc uad Ee Mcsemos vac Ades pe m E sema diens wos u subnet a View Routing Table Securty fac Adis charges p FI Eel ea pes FERES Figure 4 28 vSwitch Properties with VMkern
397. n the Storwize V3700 and the External storage system If there are VMware ESX hosts involved in the data migration make sure that the VMware ESX hosts are set to allow volume copies to be recognized For more information see the VMware ESX product documentation on the following website http www vmware com support pubs vsphere esxi vcenter server pubs htnl After you have confirmed the restrictions and prerequisites complete the following steps 1 If all options can be selected click Next to continue 2 In all other cases Next cannot be selected and the data must be migrated without use of this wizard Figure 6 17 shows the Storage Migration wizard with all restrictions satisfied and prerequisites met Notice at the bottom of the wizard pane that additional help and an eLearning video are available To avo data oss back up he data stored on your eternal storage before using the wizard The folowing types of hosts cannol be migrated using hs wizard because addtional steps are required 2 tam not migranng hosts mcuting custers ot VINWare hosts and VIOS 2 tam not migrating SAN boot images gt system i cables tothe SAS storage system twant to migrate 2 Vittaro ESX hosts aro sot tu allow volumo copios to bo rocognizod oram not using VMWare ESX hosts DIT Figure 6 17 Confirming prerequisites Chapter 6 Storage migration 263 Prepare the environment
398. naming the target volume If the FlashCopy target volumes were created automatically by IBM Storwize V3700 the name of the target volume is the source volume name plus a suffix that includes numbers The name of the target volumes can be changed to be more meaningful in your environment 1 Select the FlashCopy target volume in the FlashCopy window 2 Click the Rename Target Volume option from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 32 or right click the selected volume Capacily Group AMINO voot vcn Aviron vam Comes 1 E Avin vor p Reston samo 9 ROC J a Fiastcopsven samon TessCopyict ramon E iae f amp pM H pen Move to Consistency Group Pasncopyvors amp TessCopyictt r Tishcopyvos x Pastcopyvors Rashomon se Tae eazockvole Delete Mapping cS Show voumes Properties Figure 10 32 Rename a target volume 3 Enter your new name for the target volume as shown in Figure 10 33 Click Rename to finish Rename Volume New lare 01 FashCopyvoi3_01 Lu LL cJ Figure 10 33 Rename a target volume 486 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Renaming a FlashCopy mapping The FlashCopy mappings are created with names that begin with fcmap You can change this to be something more meaningful 1 Select the FlashCopy mapping in the FlashCopy Mappings window 2 Click Rename
399. nc a BSS Figure 3 19 Adding column heading Real Capacity Important Some users might run into a problem in which a menu from the Firefox browser is shown by right clicking to change the column heading This issue can fixed by clicking in Firefox Tools gt Options Content Advanced for Java setting Select Display or replace menus In the newest versions of Firefox this option is not available If this is the case for you complete the following steps In the address bar type about config and press Enter b Click I l be careful promise c Inthe search bar search for dom event contextmenu enabled with no quotes d Right click the result dom event contextmenu enabled and click Tog To revert to the previous setting repeat these steps The web browser requirements and recommended configuration settings to access the IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI can be found in the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center on the following website http www ibn con support knowl edgecenter STLMSA welcome 84 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 It is also possible to add or remove columns by clicking the icon at the far right of the heading bar as shown in Figure 3 20 Mv Capacity Utilization cpm 2 men ana erasum z te soon Used Constr Poot l ER Figure 3 20 Adding columns icon Multiple selection
400. nd 192 168 70 122 on node 2 do not conflict with existing IP addresses on the LAN The default mask that is used with these IP addresses is 255 255 255 0 and the default gateway address that is used is 192 168 70 1 D You should have a minimum of three IPv4 or IPv6 IP addresses for system configuration One is for the clustered system and is what the administrator uses for management and one is for each node canister for service access as needed Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 IP addresses A fourth IP address should be used for backup configuration access This other IP address enables a second system IP address to be configured on port 2 of either node canister which the storage administrator can also use for management of the IBM Storwize V3700 system minimum of one and up to four IPv4 or IPv6 addresses are needed if iSCSl attached hosts access volumes from the IBM Storwize V3700 At least two 0 6 meter 1 5 meter or 3 meter SAS cables per expansion enclosure are required The length of the cables depends on the physical rack location of the expansion relative to the control enclosure or other expansion enclosures Locate the control enclosure so that up to nine expansion enclosures can be located as shown in Figure 2 1 The IBM Storwize V3700 supports one external SAS chain using SAS port 4 on the control enclosure node canisters control Enclosure Figure 2 1 Connecting the SAS expans
401. nd Auxiliary volume and clicking Add again You can remove any incorrect choices using the red X next to each added relationship Chapter 10 Copy services 559 11 When you finish click Next The next window prompts for whether the relationships synchronized as shown in Figure 10 127 Create Consistency Group m Are me volumes already synchronized Yes me volumes are already synchronized No the volumes are not synchronized Figure 10 127 Volume synchronization 12 In the next window you are asked whether you want to start copying the volumes now as shown in Figure 10 128 Create Consistency Group x Do you want to start copying now Yes start copying now No da not start copying Figure 10 128 Remote Consistency group start copying option 560 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 13 After you select this option click Finish to create the Remote Copy Consistency Group You can encounter an error during the creation task if one of the relationships you requested to be added to the group is not in the correct state because the group and any relationships must be in the same state to start with This error is shown in Figure 10 129 Create Remote Consistency Group The task completes wit errors View mare detaie Bunning command chrcrelationship consistgrp iecbookSecup revels suckask chrcrelapionship consis grp Zecbooksroup revel
402. nd copy is disabled only the target volume is a valid copy of the source data while the FlashCopy mapping remains in place Copying only the changed data saves your storage capacity assuming that itis thin provisioned and that the rsize option was correctly set up Chapter 10 Copy services 457 458 The relationship of the background copy rate value to the amount of data that is copied second is shown in Table 10 1 Table 10 1 Background copy rate Value Data that is copied per Grains per second Grains per second second 256 KB grain 64 KB grain 1 10 128 KB 05 2 11 20 256 KB 1 4 21 30 512 KB 2 8 31 40 1 megabyte MB 4 16 41 50 2MB 8 32 51 60 4MB 16 64 61 70 8MB 32 128 71 80 16MB 64 256 81 90 32MB 128 512 91 100 64 256 1024 Data copy rate The data copy rate remains the same regardless of the FlashCopy grain size The difference is the number of grains that are copied per second The grain size can be 64 KB or 256 KB The smaller size uses more bitmap space and therefore limits the total amount of FlashCopy space possible However it might be more efficient regarding the amount of data that is moved depending on your environment Cleaning rate The cleaning rate provides a method for FlashCopy copies with dependent mappings multiple target or cascaded to complete their background copies before their source goes offline or is deleted after a stop i
403. nd real capacity A volume that is created with a zero contingency capacity goes offline as soon as it needs to expand A volume with a nonzero contingency capacity stays online until it is used up Autoexpand does not cause the real capacity to grow much beyond the virtual capacity The real capacity can be manually expanded to more than the maximum that is required by the current virtual capacity and the contingency capacity is recalculated support the autoexpansion of thin provisioned volumes the Storage Pools from which they are allocated have a configurable warning capacity When the used free capacity of the group exceeds the warning capacity a warning is logged For example if a warning of 80 is specified the warning is logged when 20 of the free capacity remains A thin provisioned volume can be converted to a fully allocated volume by using volume mirroring and vice versa The thin provisioning feature is included as part of the base machine code and no license is required r IBM Easy Tier provides a mechanism to seamlessly migrate hot extents to the most appropriate tier in the IBM Storwize V3700 solution This migration might be to different tiers of internal drive within IBM Storwize V3700 The Easy Tier function can be turned on or off at the Storage Pool and volume level It is possible to demonstrate the potential benefit of Easy Tier in your environment before installing flash drivers by using the IBM Stor
404. nd select Delete from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 145 Alternatively right click the group to be deleted Create Consistency Group Create Reationstio Volume RemoteTarget ined RomoteSoureet emote Target nized gl Wemcteioureet memoteTargot 750 02700 wed Remolesourcer RemoteTagez pues j ee Figure 10 145 Delete a consistency group 2 You must confirm the deletion of the consistency group as shown in Figure 10 146 Click Yes if you are sure that this consistency group should be deleted Warning x group RedbookGroup wi bo Do you want to continue Figure 10 146 Warning to confirm deletion of the consistency group 572 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 The consistency group is deleted Any relationships that were part of it are returned to the Not in a Group list as shown in Figure 10 147 LACE isis line E ionis Consistent Syoetvonized Remote sourco Remotetaraoo E Consistent Synchronized RemoteSourent RemoteTarget Consistent Synetronzed 53 Remotesouree2 nemototarao Consistent Synchronized RemoteSourced RemoteTarge Consistent smenronizea 53 Remotesourees oa Figure 10 147 Remote Copy relationships returned to Not in a Group Chapter 10 Copy services 573 574 Impleme
405. ne m 5 NE me 5 g een ees ES ab FlashCopyvoia FEES cues ET FlashCopyvorT soci 5 cue EE uu E ae crum CER EBD Gassen Figure 10 23 New FlashCopy mapping is created with a new target Chapter 10 Copy services 479 Using existing target volumes Complete the following steps to use existing target volumes 1 If you already have candidate target volumes select Use Existing Target Volumes in the Advanced FlashCopy menu as shown in Figure 10 24 Eri c 1 S sm S RR TENES 1 DAS pem e meme J ias dp eem C pee poer T3 boo k EU pS ERE EE n ch FlashCopyvol SIMI RN Rasa mes CMS Use Existing Target Volumes ES Figure 10 24 Create FlashCopy mapping using existing target volume 2 You must choose the target volume for the source volume that you selected Select the target volume from the drop down menu in the right pane of the window and click Add as shown in Figure 10 25 Create FlashCopy Mapping x Select ne source and target volumes for ine HashCopy mapping Terget Volume Fiastcoprvorz 61 asncopyors FasnCopvels Figure 10 25 Select the target volume 480 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 After you click
406. ne to one mapping of extents between the MDisk and the volume For more information see Chapter 6 Storage migration on page 249 1 5 7 Quorum disks 14 A quorum disk is an MDisk that contains reserved area for use exclusively by the system In the IBM Storwize V3700 internal drives can be considered as quorum candidates The clustered system uses quorum disks to break a tie when exactly half the nodes in the system remain after a SAN failure Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The clustered system automatically forms the quorum disk by taking a small amount of space from an MDisk It allocates space from up to three different MDisks for redundancy although only one quorum disk is active If the environment has multiple storage systems allocate the quorum disk on different storage systems to avoid the possibility of losing all of the quorum disks because of a failure of single storage system It is possible to manage the quorum disks by using the CLI 1 5 8 Storage Pools A Storage Pool is a collection of MDisks up to 128 that are grouped to provide capacity for volumes All MDisks in the pool split into extents of the same size Volumes are then allocated out of the Storage Pool and are mapped to a host system MDisks can be added to a Storage Pool at any time to increase the capacity of the pool MDisks can belong in only one Storage Pool For more information see Chapter 7 Storage Pools on page 307 Eac
407. net ports Two Universal Serial Bus USB 2 0 ports one port is used during installation System flash vYvvvvv The battery is used in case of power loss The IBM Storwize V3700 system uses this battery to power the canister while the cache data is written to the internal system flash This memory dump is called a Fire Hose Dump FHD After the system is up again this data is loaded back to the cache for destage to the disks Figure 1 6 on page 8 also shows the following ports which are provided by the IBM Storwize V3700 node canister Two 10 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet ports Port 1 left port must be configured The second port is optional and can be used for management Both ports can be used for iSCSI traffic For more information see Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 gt Two USB ports port is used during the initial configuration or when there is a problem They are numbered 1 on the left and 2 on the right For more information about usage see Chapter 2 Initial configuration on page 27 gt Four SAS ports These ports are numbered 1 on the left to 4 on the right The IBM Storwize V3700 uses ports 1 2 and 3 for host connectivity and port 4 to connect to the optional expansion enclosures The IBM Storwize V3700 incorporates one SAS chain and nine expansion enclosures can be connected to each chain Service port Do not use the port that is marked with a wrench This port is a service port only
408. nformation from the GUI 624 11 6 2 Support information from the Service Assistant 627 11 6 3 Support information to USB stick 628 11 7 Powering on and powering off the Storwize V3700 629 11 7 1 Powering off the system 629 11 7 2 Powering on 632 11 8 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center 632 11 8 1 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center benefits 632 11 8 2 Adding IBM Storwize V3700 in Tivoli Storage Productivity Center 633 11 9 Using Tivoli Storage Productivity Center to administer and generate reports for an IBM Storwize V3700 i 635 11 9 1 Basic configuration and administration 635 11 9 2 Generating reports by using Java GUI 637 11 9 3 Generating reports using Tivoli Storage Productivity Center web console 641 Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot 647 Command line interface Me 648 Basic setup 648 Example commands 659 Upgrading Drive Firmware using the CLI 661 Copying installing and running the Upgrade Test Utility on the Storwize unit 662 SAN Boot 666 Related publications 667 IBM Redbooks 667 IBM Storwize V3700 publications 667 IBM Storwize V3700 support 667 Help from IBM 667 Vill Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult
409. ng Tasks bar menu To show the Running Tasks menu complete the following steps 1 Click the circular image to the left of the running tasks status bar This menu lists running and recently completed tasks and groups similar tasks Figure 3 31 shows the Running Tasks menu MM Le 3 c Figure 3 31 Running Tasks menu 2 Foran indication of the task progress browse to the Running Tasks bar menu and click the required task This opens the task and show its progress as shown in Figure 3 32 eine Sychronizaon x Figure 3 32 Volume Synchronization task pane 90 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 3 3 Health Status bar menu The health status bar provides an indication of the overall health of the system The color of the status bar indicates the state of IBM Storwize V3700 gt Yellow Red Unhealthy If a status alert occurs the Health Status bar can turn from green to yellow or to red show the health status menu complete the following steps 1 Click in the attention icon on the left side of the health status bar as shown in Figure 3 33 18521008 Member y Online mdiskt 4 s le 3021198 Candidae y Onine 1 2 1052108 Member Onine 1 e 3TAMGB Failed 1202258 Candidate Onine E 4387168 Spare v Onine Qe Figure 3 33 Health Status menu In t
410. ng the Download link within the pane or manually from the IBM Support site The Test utility verifies that there are no issues with the current system environment such as failed components and earlier drive firmware 3 Select the Test utility and Update package files by clicking the folder icon in the corresponding input field Enter the version of the code level that you are updating to and click Update to continue as shown in Figure 11 35 Update System x Select the to be used for the update Test utiy EN2145 INSTALL ccupgradetest 130 Up etepackage 2072 1410205704 Coge ieva g E Figure 11 35 Select Test utility and software Update package Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 601 4 At the next pane select Service Assistant Manual update as shown in Figure 11 36 Update System x The system is ready to install update package 2072 141020 tgz gpg Select the type of update to complete Automatic update Choose this option for a faster update Installation can take approximately 20 minutes for each node and 30 minutes for the system Service Assistant Manual update Attention Automatic update is the preferred method for updating software Manual updates if eomploted incorrectly can result in data loss e E SICH Figure 11 36 Select manual update mode 5 Select Finish to start the update process on the nodes The test utility and n
411. ng the IBM Storwize V3700 Table 6 2 shows an example table for capturing host information including host bus adapter HBA Table 6 2 Example table for capturing host information Host Name Adapter Slot Port WWPN HBA HBA Operating Multipath LU Names FW Device System Software Driver merhost 127 LSISAS22116 2 1 500082b200556140 16 0 Win2012 Native MPIO with DSM merhost 127 LSI SAS22116 2 2 500062b200556141 16 0 Win2012 Native MPIO with DSM mer host 127 LSI SAS22116 2 2 500062b200556142 16 0 2 0 55 84 Win2012 Native MPIO with DSM merhost 127 LSI SAS2 2116 2 2 500062b200556143 16 0 2 0 55 84 winzot2 Native MPIO with DSM Note In this example there are more than the four ports shown in Table 6 2 listed against the host profile on the System Storage DS3200 For direct attached SAS hosts this is sometimes necessary as described in the following support article https www ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S1004386 Our table is reduced for clarity 10 Next record the port numbers of the external storage controllers and the IBM Storwize V3700 To find the WWPN of the Storwize V3700 complete the following steps a Go to the System view and switch the 3D image to the rear b Hover over the point between both canisters and right click c Select View SAS Ports as shown in Figure 6 9 See gi eyo ety a
412. ng the following benefits Cluster error logging Asynchronous error notification Dump capabilities to capture software detected failures Concurrent diagnostic procedures Directed maintenance procedures vv vvv v Concurrent log analysis and memory dump data recovery tools Concurrent maintenance of all IBM Storwize V3700 components v Concurrent upgrade of IBM Storwize V3700 software and microcode Concurrent addition or deletion of a node canister in a cluster Software recovery through the Service Assistant SA tool Automatic software version correction when a node is replaced Detailed status and error conditions that are displayed in the SA tool vovv vvv Error and event notification through Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP syslog and email Node canister support package gathering using Universal Serial Bus USB in case of network connection problems At the heart of the IBM Storwize V3700 is a redundant pair of node canisters The two canisters share the data transmitting and receiving load between the attached hosts and the disk arrays Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 11 2 IBM Storwize V3700 components This section describes each of the components that make up the IBM Storwize V3700 system Components are described in terms of location function and serviceability 11 2 1 Enclosure midplane assembly The enclosure midplane assembly is the unit that contains the node or expansion canisters and the p
413. nister battery status The battery indicator status meanings are described in Table 11 3 Table 11 3 Battery indicator on Node canister Color Name Definition Green left Battery Status Fast flash Indicates that the battery is charging and has insufficient charge to complete a single memory dump gt Flashing Indicates that the battery has sufficient charge to complete a single memory dump only lid Indicates that the battery is fully charged and has sufficient charge to complete two memory dumps Amber mid Fault Indicates a fault with the battery Green right Battery inuse Indicates that hardened or critical data is writing to disk Canister status The status of each canister is displayed by three LEDs as shown in Figure 11 8 Figure 11 8 System status indicators Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The system status LED meanings are described in Table 11 4 Table 11 4 System status indicator Color Name Definition Green left System Power Flashing The canister is in standby mode the IBM Storwize 3700 code is not running gt Fast flashing The canister is running a self test gt On The canister is powered on and the IBM Storwize V3700 code is running Green mid System Status Off There is no power to the canister the canister is in standby mode power on self test POST is running on the canister or the operating system OS
414. nmanaged external MDisks Chapter 6 Storage migration 303 304 Host rescan After the host is mapped to the Storwize V3700 it is possible to perform a drive rescan and rediscover the volumes on the host side The data migrations do not have to complete for the host to access the volumes To rescan the drive to locate the new Storwize V3700 volumes complete the following steps 1 In this example from the Windows 2012 host go to the Server Manager Dashboard and select Tools gt Computer Management Storage gt Disk Management as shown in Figure 6 24 on page 269 The rescan should find the previous volumes as shown in Figure 6 67 esum nsu B erret va Yau Tissa ge risen or pr peso ET Stree Ree Ns ey Gen fase Cone impe Rc UD Hy Panay Betas Spe MS Hey ten Ace Penny Patin gt VB oc icare na 1 tss E m St MEN Emm Figure 6 67 Rescanning for new Storwize V3700 volumes Windows 2012 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 seen this example three volumes were found of the same size before the migration took place If we put these volumes online they are identical to those that we removed in Figure 6 24 on page 269 This is shown in Figure 6 68 sii us gea E Combiner gene ters Voie Terese Se I Sree dec HT Fagg
415. nt and Optimize Drives Event Viewer Internet Information Services IIS Manager C kal ie ODBC Data Sources 8248 ODBC Data Sources Performance Montor Resource Monitor Security Configuration Wizard Services System Configuration Figure 5 44 Starting the iSCSI Initiator 2 While in the iSCSI Initiator properties log on to an Storwize V3700 iSCSI port by typing the port Internet Protocol IP address into the Target box and clicking Quick Connect as shown in Figure 5 45 Tarot Bovey Favors Tages voles ades DIS ari Quek Connect Ta decoverandlog on to target using basic connection type the IP address or DnS name of e target ard ten dick Quick Connect oan CETS Figure 5 45 Connecting to the IBM Storwize V3700 iSCSI ports Chapter 5 Volume configuration 227 If the connection is successful the window shown in Figure 5 46 opens Click Done to proceed Targets that are avaiable for connection et the address or DNS rame thet you provided are isted belon IF targets are avaiabe you need to camect each tacet Correcter made here wil be added to the lst ofFavorte Targets and attempt to restore them wll pe made every ths conouter restarts Decvered targets Nane annected Progress report Tegn Succasded Figure 5 46 Successful iSCSI port connection 4 Repeat th
416. nt to add to your existing IBM Storwize V3700 and click Next as shown in Figure 2 35 Seleri tree o 7 T i mm Figure 2 35 Adding new expansion enclosure described in step on page 60 you are prompted to configure the new storage as shown in Figure 2 36 Adi Enclosures x Select Enclosure Configure Storage Configure Storage Automatic Use the recommended RAID and drive class configuration Custom Configuration Set a custom RAD configuration a a Figure 2 36 The new enclosure as part of the cluster Chapter 2 Initial configuration 61 If you choose Automatic configuration the system automatically configures the storage into optimal arrays for use MDisks If you choose Custom Configuration the wizard offers a more flexible way to configure the new storage as shown in Figure 2 37 and Figure 2 38 Custom configuration offers a more flexible way to configure the internal storage as compared to the Use the recommended configuration preset in terms of drive selection RAID level and Storage Pool to be used 6 As shown in Figure 2 37 select the class of the drivers that you want to include in the RAID arrays and click Next nsstncosures Select Enclosure Configure Storage gt Custom corfiguraton Drive Cass Solent adrve class Configure Pook Select a drive class 2 270 90 Enterprise TOK
417. ntial benefits of Easy Tier in your environment before actually installing higher MDisk tiers such as flash it is possible to enable the Easy Tier monitoring on volumes in single tiered Storage Pools Although the Easy Tier extent migration is not possible within a single tiered pool the Easy Tier statistical measurement function is possible Enabling Easy Tier on a single tiered Storage Pool starts the monitoring process and logs the activity of the volume extents The STAT tool is a no cost tool that helps you to analyze this data If you do not have an IBM Storwize V3700 use Disk Magic to get a better understanding of the required number of different drive types that are appropriate for your workload Easy Tier is available for IBM Storwize V3700 internal volumes only 9 3 1 Easy Tier licensing 420 To use the Easy Tier functions in the IBM Storwize V3700 you must obtain the authorization codes to your system Do so by connecting to the IBM data storage feature activation DSFA website When you acquire licensed functions for your IBM Storwize V3700 you receive license authorization document which contains detailed instructions about how to retrieve the license keys To generate and download your authorization code for Easy Tier function go to the following website https www ibm com storage dsfa home wss apply and activate the Easy Tier function on your IBM Storwize V3700 complete the following steps 1 Using t
418. nting the Storwize V3700 If your system is under warranty or you have a hardware maintenance agreement to enable pro active support of the IBM Storwize V3700 it is advised that Call Home be configured 11 Select Yes and click Next to move to the window in which you can enter the location details as shown in Figure 2 28 E Q System Location habeas Enter the company nama and address ta ship pars date and Timo Company name T3 Licensed Functions Sreet addres sears Sree Delect Enciasures Event Natieatons d ptem Lacan ca erating cade Sumnar Figure 2 28 Location details These details are shown on the Call Home data to enable IBM Support to correctly identify where the IBM Storwize V3700 is located Chapter 2 Initial configuration 55 12 next window enables you to enter the contact details of the main storage administrator as shown in Figure 2 29 You can choose to enter the details for a 24 hour operations desk These details are also sent with any Call Home which enables IBM Support to contact the correct people quickly to process any issues aaa Welcome Contact Details Sptem Emer the name ani contact formation for he persan in your organization ERES hat he spart center can contact help resolve problems e astm Tem Comset name C SS Eman even ott Stem ocn Telephone Fa Me
419. nting the IBM Storwize 3700 11 RAS monitoring troubleshooting This chapter describes the reliability availability and serviceability RAS features and how to monitor and troubleshoot the IBM Storwize V3700 This chapter includes the following topi Reliability availability and serviceability IBM Storwize V3700 components Configuration backup procedure Updating software Event log Collecting support information Powering on and powering off the IBM Storwize V3700 yrvyvyyy Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 575 11 1 Reliability availability and serviceability 576 This section describes the RAS features of the IBM Storwize V3700 in addition to reviewing monitoring and troubleshooting RAS features are important concepts in the design of the IBM Storwize V3700 Hardware and software features design considerations and operational guidelines all contribute to make the IBM Storwize V3700 reliable Fault tolerance and a high level of availability are achieved by the following features The Redundant Array of Independent Disks RAID capabilities of the underlying disk subsystems The software architecture that is used by the IBM Storwize V3700 nodes Auto restart of nodes that are hung Battery units to provide cache memory protection in the event of a site power failure system multipathing and failover support High levels of serviceability are achieved by providi
420. nvestigation is detected This feature is known as Call Home and is typically configured during the Initial Configuration of the system as described in step 10 on page 54 Chapter 2 Initial configuration 65 To configure the Call Home and email alert event notification in IBM Storwize V3700 after the Initial Configuration complete the following steps 1 Go to Settings Event Notifications as shown in Figure 2 44 Figure 2 44 Enabling Call Home 2 If your system has the Email Notification disabled you can re enable it by clicking Email Enable Notifications as shown in Figure 2 45 troi mea E el lt ge Senko Ck m AA Figure 2 45 Selecting Enable Notifications 66 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 If the Email and Call Home Notifications were never configured in the IBM Storwize 3700 a window opens and the wizard guides you through the procedure described in step 10 on page 54 However if the Email and Call Home Notifications were previously configured and you need to edit any of the fields click Edit and the fields to configure Call Home and Email Notification become available as shown in Figure 2 46 paneto contour sanera u sera alerts o species users ber es CT 25 F DC RE me momoran p xu Contact Name 7 Email Reply Address Comment Telephone Primar
421. ode canister software are then uploaded to the system as shown in Figure 11 37 Update System x 15 Uploading 2072 141020 2 opa amp Time remaining 12500 Figure 11 37 Software upload Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 After the software has been uploaded the test utility is automatically and if there are no issues the system is placed in a Prepared state as shown in Figure 11 38 EE E a Update System MAMMA frin TADA HO ONION Figure 11 38 Update System status Prepared state 7 Non configuration nodes are updated first leaving the configuration node until last In the management GUI select Monitoring System and hover over the canisters to confirm which is or are the non configuration node or nodes as shown in Figure 11 39 Actions PN Figure 11 39 Checking the Configuration node status Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 603 8 Select the canister that contains the node that you want to update and select Remove as shown in Figure 11 40 SezRSm Figure 11 40 Remove the non config node from the cluster Important Make sure that you select the non configuration nodes first 9 A waring message displays as shown in Figure 11 41 Click Yes to continue Warning When a node is removed from a system hosts might lose accese to data if the other node in the I O group fails Do you want to remove the node
422. of the individual MDisks The capacity for the Storage Pool which is the total of all of the MDisks in this Storage Pool is also shown The usage of the Storage Pool is represented by a bar and the number as shown in Figure 7 41 2107 EXCESS foo Gi ocana 273 00 SST tt Online n tar ne aeea ez rio Figure 7 41 Capacity of the Pool Chapter 7 Storage Pools 337 Mode An MDisk features the following modes Array mode MDisks are constructed from internal drives by using the RAID functionality Array MDisks are always associated with Storage Pools Unmanaged The MDisk is not a member of any Storage Pools which means it is not used by the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system This status is an intermediate status of the migration process and is described in Chapter 6 Storage migration on page 249 Image When an unmanaged MDisk is imported to an IBM Storwize V3700 Storage Pool the MDisk becomes an Image mode MDisk Storage System The name of the external storage system from which the logical unit number LUN is presented when working with storage migration gt LUN Represents the logical unit number of the MDisk Figure 7 42 shows an example of MDisk features Figure 7 42 Working with MDisks For more information about how to attach external storage to
423. ogin Yes Enable Target Reset Yes Login Retry Count 8 Extended event loggin RIO Operation Mode 0 Interrupt Delay Timer Disabled enable it for debugging only Configuring Emulex HBAs for VMware ESXi Follow these steps to configure Emulex HBAs 1 After the firmware is installed load the default settings for all of your adapters that are installed on the host system 2 Ensure that the Adapter BIOS is disabled unless SAN Boot is used Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Configuring multipath support for FC on VMware ESXi The ESXi server has its own multipathing software You do not need to install a multipathing driver on the ESXi server or on the guest operating systems The ESXi multipathing policy supports the following operating modes Round Robin gt Fixed Most Recently Used MRU The IBM Storwize V3700 is an active active storage device Since VMware ESXi 5 0 and later the suggested multipathing policy is Round Robin Round Robin performs dynamic load balancing for O If you do not want to have the I O balanced over all available paths the Fixed policy is supported This policy setting can be configured for every volume Set this policy after IBM Storwize V3700 volumes have been mapped to the ESXi host For more information about mapping volumes to hosts see Chapter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 Determining host WWPNs The WWPNs of the FC HBA are required to correctly zone
424. ole These dependencies are shown in Figure 7 11 Candidate Candidate no option wosg No change on member drives no option Figure 7 11 Internal drive usage role table Identify Use the Identify action to turn on the LED light so that you can easily identify a drive that must be replaced or that you want to troubleshoot 1 The pane that is shown in Figure 7 12 opens when the LED is on The identify LED is turned on for drive siot 40i enclosure 1 When you are ready to proceed click Tum LED Off Figure 7 12 Internal drive identification 2 Click Turn LED Off when you are finished 3 Example 7 2 shows how to use the chenclosureslot CLI command to turn the drive LED on and off Example 7 2 The use of the chenclosureslot command to turn and off drive LED Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser chenclosureslot identify yes no slot slot enclosureID For information about using the IBM Storwize V3700 CLI see Appendix Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Upgrade Using this option you can easily upgrade the drive firmware The GUI enables you to upgrade individual drives or upgrade all drives that have available updates For more information about upgrading drive firmware see Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting on page 575 Show Dependent Volumes To show dependent volumes complete the following steps
425. olumes Volumes tapped to me nost 10 9 ions 500 Flashcopy oit60697 00000 asnCopyvor 60807e009e50FH90000000000005 Fashcopyeis amp OOIIAOCOESOIESODDI OOOOODDLS ed oe Figure 8 4 Host mappings pane The Host menu lists the hosts that are attached to the IBM Storwize V3700 The left pane Unmapped Volumes shows the volumes that are available for mapping to the chosen host The right pane Volumes Mapped to the Host shows the volumes that are already mapped Figure 8 4 shows that the volumes named FlashCopyVo10 FlashCopyVo11 FlashCopyVol2 and FlashCopyVo16 with Small Computer System Interface SCSI ID s 0 1 2 and 3 are mapped to the Win2012 FC host The left pane shows that a further 13 volumes are available for mapping Important The Unmapped Volumes pane refers to volumes that are not mapped to the chosen host However they might be mapped to other hosts 362 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 To map further volumes to a chosen host select the volume from the left pane as shown in Figure 8 5 ost Happinas x Host waona nappes voume Volumes appod to tme Xu Sm unas FNS T Amon oaoa o Faancopyvov swvsorsovoeon savovooooonoonons avosoreocoeson5aooonooncooatooE ID Fasncopvvon
426. olumes that contain more than one copy you might receive a CMMVC6354E error In this case complete the following steps 1 Run the 1svdi sksyncprogress command from the IBM Storwize V3700 command line interface CLI to view the synchronization status 2 Wait for the copy to synchronize 3 If you want the synchronization process to complete more quickly increase the rate by running the chvdi sk command 4 When the copy is synchronized resubmit the shrink process Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 4 8 Expanding a volume The IBM Storwize V3700 can expand volumes This feature should be used only if the host OS supports it This capability increases the capacity that is allocated to the particular volume by the amount specified To expand a volume complete the following steps 1 Select Expand from the Actions menu 2 Enter the new volume size or by how much the volume should expand and click Expand as shown in Figure 8 49 Expand Volume Win2012 VoL O1 x You selected to expand me capacity or volume WInZO12 Voi 01 This action increases the available capacity in the volume Current size 10 sB Expand by s Final sie 18 Maximum Mat 252 144 00 GIB uer Figure 8 49 Expand Volume pane 3 After the task completes click Close to return to the Volumes pane 4 Run the required procedures on host OS to use the available space 8 4 9 Migrating a volume to ano
427. on for Port 1 4 In this example select None to restrict traffic on this port to host I O only 5 Click Modify to confirm the selection Note In doing this we are configuring Port 1 for FC ports on a per node basis II nodes It is not possible to configure You can view connections between nodes storage systems and hosts by selecting Fibre Channel Connectivity while in the network settings view 6 Choose which connections you want to view and click Show Results as shown in Figure 4 42 M vrati EE c Figure 4 42 Viewing Fibre Channel Connectivity between nodes storage systems and hosts Chapter 4 Host configuration 187 4 3 3 Creating iSCSI hosts To create an iSCSI host complete the following steps 1 Click iSCSI Host and the iSCSI host configuration wizard opens as shown in Figure 4 43 Add Host x gestans oi 1 iscsi Ports Port Definitions Yeu have not aed any iSCSI perts yat Use CHAP authontication porte Advanced Settings Host Generic default HPUX Oponvms TPGs a Figure 4 43 The iSCSI host configuration wizard 2 Enter a descriptive Host Name and enter the iSCSI Initiator Name into the iSCSI Ports box then click Add Ports to List 188 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 This displays under Port Definitions as shown in Figure 4 44 Repeat this step if several initiator names are required Add Host x Host Na
428. on functions are not available for image mode volumes so it is often useful to migrate the volume into a new Storage Pool After it is migrated the MDisk becomes a managed MDisk If you want to migrate data from an existing storage subsystem use the Storage Migration wizard which guides you through the process For more information see Chapter 6 Storage migration on page 249 If you add an MDisk containing data to a Storage Pool any data on the MDisk is lost If you are presenting externally virtualized LUNs that contain data to an IBM Storwize V3700 import them using the migration wizard to ensure data integrity 1 5 11 iSCSI iSCSI is an alternative method of attaching hosts to the IBM Storwize V3700 The iSCSI function is a software function that is provided by the IBM Storwize V3700 code not hardware In the simplest terms iSCSI enables the transport of SCSI commands and data over an IP network that is based on IP routers and Ethernet switches iSCSI is a block level protocol that encapsulates SCSI commands into Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP packets and uses an existing IP network rather than requiring FC host bus adapters HBAs and a SAN fabric infrastructure Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 19 The following concepts of names and addresses are carefully separated in iSCSI An iSCSI name is a location independent permanent identifier for an iSCSI node iSCSI node h
429. on settings are replicated across the node canisters in the clustered system To facilitate these tasks one or two management IP addresses are set for the clustered system By using this configuration you can manage the clustered system as a single entity There is a process to back up the system configuration data to disk so that the clustered system can be restored in the event of a disaster This method does not back up application data only IBM Storwize V3700 system configuration information is backed up System configuration backup After the system configuration is backed up save the backup data on your hard disk or at the least outside of the SAN If you are unable to access the IBM Storwize V3700 you do not have access to the backup data if it is on the SAN Perform this configuration backup after each configuration change to be safe The system can be configured by using the IBM Storwize V3700 management software GUI the CLI or the USB key 1 5 5 RAID The IBM Storwize V3700 contains several internal drives but these drives cannot be directly added to Storage Pools The drives must be included in a RAID to provide protection against the failure of individual drives These drives are referred to as members of the array Each array has RAID level RAID levels provide different degrees of redundancy and performance and have different restrictions regarding the number of members in the array The IBM Storwize V3700 support
430. on to log in to the IBM Storwize V3700 storage management gt User Name superuser gt Password passw0rd a zero replaces the letter o 72 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Note Older versions of the software allow low resolution graphics to be used by selecting a check box on the login pane Low resolution graphic mode is now selected using the GUI preferences pane See GUI Preferences pane on page 143 2 A successful login shows the System pane by default as shown in Figure 3 2 Alternatively the last opened window from the previous session is displayed Sees Figure 3 2 Storwize V3700 System pane 3 Click the logged in user name in the top banner as shown in Figure 3 3 This enables you to Log Out Modify Password and Manage SSH Public Key a Figure 3 3 User menu Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 73 3 1 3 System pane layout As shown in Figure 3 4 the System pane has three main sections Function Icons System view Status Indicators The System pane is new in this software release and replaces the Overview and System Details panes from older software releases Function Icons ee CT n 0 a a Figure 3 4 Three main sections of the Storwize V3700 System pane The Function Icons section shows a column of images Each image represents a group of interface functions The icons enlarge with mouse hover and the following menus are shown
431. one stripe of from the same chain parity are striped across wherever possible array members Basic Protects against two drive 6 12 5 16 1 All drives in the array are RAID6 failures Data and two stripes from the same chain of parity are striped across all wherever possible array members Chapter 7 Storage Pools 321 Preset Purpose RAID Drives Drive count Spare Chain balance level per Min Max goal array goal Protects against at least one 10 8 4 16 1 Alidrivesin the array are drive failure All data is evens from the same chain mirrored on two array wherever possible members Balanced Protects against atleastone 10 8 4 16 1 Exactly half of the drives RAID 10 drive or enclosure failure All evens are from each chain data is mirrored on two array members The mirrors balanced across the two enclosure chains PAIDO Providesnoprotection against 0 8 1 8 0 Alldrivesin the array are drive failures from the same chain wherever possible 7 2 2 Customi ig initial storage configuration If the initial storage configuration carried out during setup or the recommended configuration has been run and does not meet the requirements the pools created must first be deleted before you can customize the configuration 1 Select the Pool navigator in the GUI and click Pools gt MDisks by Pools 2 Right click the pool and then select Delete Pool as sh
432. onfiguration The basic host and volume features of IBM Storwize V3700 are described in Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 and Chapter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 These chapters also describe how to create hosts and volumes and how to map them to a host This chapter includes the following topics Advanced host administration Adding and deleting host ports Host mappings overview Advanced volume administration Volume properties Advanced volume copy functions Volumes by Pool Volumes by Host vYvYvvvvv Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 359 8 1 Advanced host administration This section describes host administration including host modification host mappings and deleting hosts Basic host creation and mapping are described in Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 It is assumed that hosts have already been defined and that volumes are mapped to them The following topics are covered in this section Modifying Hosts as described in 8 1 1 Modifying Mappings menu on page 362 Ports by Host as described in 8 2 Adding and deleting host ports on 377 Host Mappings as described in 8 3 Host mappings overview on page 383 The Hosts menu is shown in Figure 8 1 Figure 8 1 Host menu 360 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 access the available host Actions complete the following steps 1 Select Hosts to open the Hosts pane as shown in Fig
433. onger has access to this volume Click Close to return to the Host Maps window For more information about host mappings see 8 3 Host mappings overview on page 383 400 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 5 3 Member MDisks tab The third tab is the Member MDisks tab which lists all MDisks on which the volume is located 1 If there are multiple copies of the volume it is possible to select an individual copy or choose to display Both Copies as shown in Figure 8 58 The associated MDisks are displayed Coventew Host taps tenner tins ot Copes Trott TB ome sinon 5 teer rot Figure 8 58 Member MDisk tab 2 Select an MDisk and click Actions to see the available tasks as shown in Figure 8 59 For more information about the available tasks see Chapter 7 Storage Pools on page 307 a Figure 8 59 MDisk Actions menu 3 Click Close to return to the Volumes pane Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 401 8 5 4 Adding a mirrored volume If a volume consists of only one copy itis possible to add a second mirrored copy of the volume This second copy can be either generic or thin provisioned You can also use this method to migrate data across Storage Pools with different extent sizes add a second copy complete the following steps 1 Select the volume and click Actions Volume Copy Actions Add Mirrored Copy as shown in Figure 8
434. onsidered before a FlashCopy is performed which are described in this section Guidelines for FlashCopy implementation Consider the following guidelines for FlashCopy implementation The source and target volumes must be on the same IBM Storwize 5000 storage system The source and target volumes do not need to be in the same Storage Pool The FlashCopy source and target volumes can be thin provisioned Y v Y The source and target volumes must be the same size The size of the source and target volumes cannot be altered increased or decreased while a FlashCopy mapping is defined FlashCopy operations perform in direct proportion to the performance of the source and target disks If you have a fast source disk and slow target disk the performance of the source disk is reduced because it must wait for the write operation to occur at the target before it can write to the source Y Maximum configurations for FlashCopy Table 10 2 shows some of the FlashCopy maximum configurations For more information about the most current values see the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center on the following website http www ibm com support knowl edgecenter STLM5A 1anding V3700 welcome html Also see the planning and installation documentation on the following website https www ibm com support entry nyportal plan install system storage disk system s mid range disk systems ibm storwize V3700 productContext 2033461677 Table
435. onsistency group The Remote Copy relationships in the Not in a Group list can be added to a consistency group by completing the following steps 1 Select the volumes and click Add to Consistency Group from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 133 Now that the relationship that we tried to add earlier in Figure 10 126 on page 559 is in the same state as the consistency group you can add that to the TSOTest group 3 Greue Consistency Group f ASST ILI eg e Create Consistency Group cete aa pm emoretroem rerent t Remote Source RemoteTargett 98 Remotesourees Remote Target gg remo c Gu Eye emote tourer RemoteTgee e S emzRGOR _ reat Qon Figure 10 133 Add a Remote Copy relationship to a consistency group 2 You must choose the consistency group to which to add the Remote Copy relationships select the appropriate consistency group and click Add to Consistency Group as shown in Figure 10 134 Add Relationship to Consistency Group x Select the consistency group to move the relationship rere Consistency Group RedbookGroup ELLE EL Figure 10 134 Choose the consistency group to add the remote copies Your Remote Copy relationships are now in the consistency group that you selected You can only add Remote Copy relationships that are in the same s
436. ontroller and Storwize Family Native IP Replication REDP 5103 Interaction between Remote Copy and FlashCopy Table 10 5 lists which combinations of FlashCopy and Remote Copy are supported Table 10 5 FlashCopy and Remote Copy interaction Component Remote Copy primary Remote Copy secondary FlashCopy source Supported Supported When the FlashCopy relationship is in the Preparing and Prepared states the cache atthe Remote Copy secondary site operates in write through mode This process adds more latency to the already latent Remote Copy relationship FlashCopy target This combination is supported This combination is supported and has the following by the restriction that the restrictions FlashCopy mapping cannot be gt Running stop force copying stopping or might cause the Remote suspended Otherwise the Copy relationship to fully restrictions are the same as at resynchronize the Remote Copy primary site The I O group must be the same If you are not using Global Mirror with Change Volumes for disaster recovery purposes you can use the FlashCopy feature to create a consistent copy of an image before you restart a Global Mirror relationship Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 When a consistent relationship is stopped the relationship enters the consistent stopped state While in this state operations at the primary site continue to run However updates are not copied to the secon
437. ools available in the third generation of Easy Tier Tero Ther 1 Ter2 Three tior Poole Two Tier Pools Single Tier Pools Figure 9 1 Supported Easy Tier Pools Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 9 3 Easy Tier overview Easy Tier is an optional licensed function of IBM Storwize V3700 that brings enterprise storage enhancements to the entry level segment It enables automated subvolume data placement throughout different storage tiers to intelligently align the system with current workload requirements and to optimize the usage of storage This function includes the ability to automatically and non disruptively relocate data at the extent level from one tier to another tier in either direction This helps to achieve the best available storage performance for your workload in your environment Easy Tier reduces the I O latency for hot spots but it does not replace storage cache Easy Tier and storage cache solve a similar access latency workload problem but these methods weigh differently in the algorithmic construction based on locality of reference recency and frequency Because Easy Tier monitors I O performance from the extent end after cache it can pick up the performance issues that cache cannot solve and complement the overall storage system performance In general traditional storage environment I O is monitored on volumes and the entire volume is always placed inside one appropriate storage tier
438. orage system Table 7 1 Flash RAID presets Preset Purpose RAID Drivesper Drive count Spare drive level array goal Min Max goal Flash RAID 5 Protects against a single drive failure 5 8 3 16 1 Data and one stripe of parity are striped across all array members Flash RAID 6 Protects against two drive failures 6 12 5 16 1 Data and two stripes of parity are striped across all array members Flash RAID 10 Protects against at least one drive 10 8 4 16 even 1 failure All data is mirrored on two array members Flash RAID 1 Protects against at least one drive 1 2 2 1 failure All data is mirrored on two array members Flash Provides no protection against drive 0 8 1 8 0 failures Flash Easy Mirrors data to protect against drive 10 2 4 16 even 1 Tier failure The mirrored pairs are spread between Storage Pools to be used for the Easy Tier function Flash RAID instances In all flash RAID instances drives in the array are balanced across enclosure chains if possible Table 7 2 describes the RAID presets that are used for Enterprise SAS and NL SAS drives for the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system Table 7 2 HDD RAID presets Preset Purpose RAID Drives Drive count Spare balance level per Min Max goal array goal Basic Protects againsta single drive 5 8 3 16 1 Alldrivesinthearrayare RAIDS failure Data and
439. orage system or to see source volumes on the target system For more information about layers and how to change them see Chapter 10 Copy services on page 453 6 2 3 Storage Migration wizard tasks The Storage Migration wizard is designed to provide easy and nondisruptive migration of data from other storage systems to the internal capacity of the Storwize V3700 taking into account the considerations in 6 2 2 Overview of the Storage Migration wizard on page 250 Although this is true the initial information panes of the migration wizard should all be read first to prepare and enable a successful migration Some of the information in these panes needs to be recorded before actions in previous panes can be carried out In early releases of V7 4 code itis not possible to start the migration wizard unless you have already cabled or zoned the external system to the Storwize V3700 Therefore we list the Storage migration tasks in the same order as the wizard displays them but it is important to read this chapter fully before beginning any migration task and to collate the relevant information before starting the wizard The following are the storage migration wizard tasks as presented by the wizard Accessing the Storage Migration wizard Before you begin Prepare environment for migration Map storage Chapter 6 Storage migration 251 Migrating MDisks Configure hosts Map volumes to hosts Select Storage Pool Fin
440. orms a discovery process to update the state of the drive and enclosure objects Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 587 Slot numbers in enclosures The IBM Storwize V3700 is made up of enclosures There are six types of enclosures as described in Table 11 7 Table 11 7 Enclosure slot numbering Enclosure type Number of slots Enclosure 12x 3 5 inch drives Enclosure with 12 slots Control enclosure 2072 126 Expansion enclosure 2077 12E Enclosure 24x 2 5 inch drives Enclosure with 24 slots gt Control enclosure 2072 24C Expansion enclosure 2072 24E gt Direct current dc powered control enclosure 2072 2DC gt dc powered expansion enclosure 2072 2DE Array goal Each array has a set of goals that describe the location and performance of each array member sequence of drive failures and hot spare takeovers can leave an array unbalanced with members that do not match these goals The system automatically rebalances such arrays when appropriate drives are available RAID level An IBM Storwize V3700 disk array supports RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 6 or RAID 10 Each RAID level is described in Table 11 8 Table 11 8 RAID levels that are supported by an IBM Storwize V3700 array RAID Where data is striped Drive count level Min Max 0 Arrays have no redundancy and do not support hot spare takeover Data 1 8 is striped evenly across the drives wit
441. ort Center when significant events are detected Any combination of these notification methods can be used simultaneously Each event that IBM Storwize V3700 detects is sent to a different recipient You can configure IBM Storwize V3700 to send each type of notification to specific recipients or only the alerts that are important to the system SNMP traps SNMP is a standard protocol for managing networks and exchanging messages IBM Storwize V3700 can send SNMP messages that notify personnel about an event You can use an SNMP manager to view the SNMP messages that IBM Storwize V3700 sends You can use the management GUI or the IBM Storwize V3700 CLI to configure and modify your SNMP settings You can use the Management Information Base MIB file for SNMP to configure a network management program to receive SNMP messages that are sent by the IBM Storwize V3700 This file can be used with SNMP messages from all versions of IBM Storwize V3700 software Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Syslog messages The syslog protocol is a standard protocol for forwarding log messages from a sender to receiver on an IP network The IBM Storwize V3700 can send syslog messages that notify personnel about an event IBM Storwize V3700 can also transmit syslog messages in expanded or concise format You can use a syslog manager to view the sysiog messages that IBM Storwize V3700 sends IBM Storwize V3700 uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP to trans
442. orwize V3700 Easy Tier function as described in Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier on page 417 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 1 5 9 Child Pools A Child Pool is a logical subset object similar to a Storage Pool A Child Pool is in and gets capacity exclusively from one Storage Pool A user can specify the Child Pool capacity at creation and it can grow and decrease nondisruptively A Child Pool inherits the properties of the parent Storage Pool and provides most of the functions that Storage Pools have For more information see 7 4 Working with Child Pools on page 355 1 5 10 Volumes A volume is a logical disk that is presented to a host system by the clustered system In our virtualized environment the host system has a volume that is mapped to it by IBM Storwize V3700 The IBM Storwize V3700 translates this volume into several extents which are allocated across MDisks The advantage with storage virtualization is that the host is decoupled from the underlying storage so the virtualization appliance can move around the extents without affecting the host system The host system cannot directly access the underlying MDisks in the same manner as it can access RAID arrays in a traditional storage environment The following types of volumes are available Striped A striped volume is allocated one extent in turn from each MDisk in the Storage Pool This process continues until the space that is required for the volume is satisfie
443. oss the tiers if the Easy Tier function is not licensed 9 4 6 Easy Tier status Depending on Easy Tier mode attributes a Storage Pool can have one of the following Easy Tier statuses gt Active This status indicates that Easy Tier is actively managing the extents of the Storage Pool Balanced This status applies to homogeneous Storage Pools and indicates that Easy Tier is actively managing the extents to provide enhanced performance by rebalancing the extents among the MDisks within the tier This re balancing characteristic is called Storage Pool Balancing which is described in 9 4 7 Storage Pool Balancing gt Measured This status means that Easy Tier is constantly measuring the I O activity for all extents to generate an I O statistics report gt Inactive When the Easy Tier status is inactive no extents are being monitored and no statistics are being recorded 9 4 7 Storage Pool Balancing 428 Storage Pool Balancing is a new function in Storwize software V7 4 or higher that although associated with Easy Tier operates independently and does not require a license Storage Pool Balancing works with Easy Tier when multiple tiers exist in a single pool Storage Pool Balancing algorithms assess the extents in a storage tier and balance them automatically across all MDisks within that tier Storage Pool Balancing moves the extents to achieve a balanced workload distribution and avoid hotspots Storage Pool Balancing i
444. osures can be attached to this SAS chain The node canister uses SAS port 4 for expansion enclosures and ports 1 2 and 3 for host connectivity Important When an SAS cable is inserted ensure that the connector is oriented correctly by confirming that the following conditions are met The pull tab must be below the connector Insert the connector gently until it clicks into place If you feel resistance the connector is probably oriented the wrong way Do not force it When inserted correctly the connector can be removed only by pulling the tab The expansion canister has SAS port 1 for the channel input and SAS port 2 for the output which connects to another expansion enclosure 586 Implementing the IBM Storwize 3700 The SAS cabling is shown in Figure 11 17 Figure 11 17 SAS cabling A strand starts with an SAS initiator chip inside an IBM Storwize V3700 node canister and progresses through SAS expanders which connect to the disk drives Each canister contains an expander Each drive has two ports each of which is connected to a different expander and strand This configuration means that both nodes directly access each drive and there is single point of failure At system initialization when devices are added to or removed from strands and at other times the IBM Storwize V3700 software perf
445. ot ID of the enclosure in which drive is installed The default sort order is by enclosure ID This default can be changed to any other column by left clicking the column header To toggle between ascending and descending sort order left click the column header again Chapter 7 Storage Pools 309 4 You can see more details for example the drive s Technology Type by right clicking the blue header bar of the table which opens the selection pane as shown in Figure 7 3 CENE E 1 oz hu Ears mare SE cn rete VER gem 0 u DEA QUY amp dT ME w mcm ee Figure 7 3 Intemal storage window details selection 310 5 You can also find the overall internal storage capacity allocation indicator in the upper right corner The Total Capacity shows the overall capacity of the internal storage installed in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system The MDisk Capacity shows the internal storage capacity that is assigned to the MDisks The Spare Capacity shows the internal storage capacity that is used for hot spare disks The percentage bar that is shown in Figure 7 4 indicates how much capacity is allocated can jg All Internal 2 Disk Capacity Sparo Capacity 557 706 Tota Capacity 16 3376 Figure 7 4 Internal storage allocation indicator Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 7 1 2 Actions on internal drives
446. othe SAS storage system 1 want to migrate E VMWare ESX hosts are set to allow volume copies to be recognized or am not using VirWare ESX hosts Weth Lamina Marte Soran Figure 3 70 Storage Migration wizard For more information see Chapter 6 Storage migration on page 249 Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 113 3 4 3 Volumes menu As shown in Figure 3 71 the Volumes menu provides access to the Volumes Volumes by Pool and Volumes by Host functions Figure 3 71 The Volumes menu Volumes pane Select Volumes in the Volumes menu to open the pane as shown in Figure 3 72 The Volumes pane shows all of the volumes in the system The information displayed depends on the columns that are selected create Vouez Create Volumes Map to Host ARCET VEM R Pool 01 View Mapped Hosts Duplicate voume Rename RsPoci Of sttonornetrssatcocopoon Emana sance varoo sovsoreoooesorrssovovvovon Migrate to Another Poot Sees oa 1o 066 VID R PooL 1 Copy Figure 3 72 Volumes pane 114 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Volume actions Figure 3 72 on page 114 shows the Volume
447. ound Robin is the suggested option because this enables for O load balancing For more information about the available options see Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 246 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 ee OEO Nara T T Tc Se See es ae s Em z mE UTE I eem e cen es Figure 5 74 Data store multipath settings 4 When you are finished close both windows The mapped volume is now configured for maximum availability and ready to be used 5 3 6 Discovering SAS volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 This section describes how to discover SAS volumes Discovering mapped volumes To discover mapped SAS volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 complete the steps described in 5 3 4 Discovering Fibre Channel volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 on page 234 The steps required are identical for both FC and SAS The mapped volumes are now ready to be managed by the host operating system Creating a data store from a mapped volume create a data store from a mapped volume in VMware ESXi 5 5 complete the steps described in 5 3 5 Discovering iSCSI volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 on page 235 This procedure is common to all attachment types Configuring multipath settings for mapped volumes To configure multipath settings for mapped volumes in VMware ESXi 5 5 complete the steps described in 5 3 5 Discovering iSCSI volumes from VMware ESXi
448. oup Yes add the mappings to a consistency Figure 10 48 Choosing whether to add the mapping to a consistency group Chapter 10 Copy services 495 8 The new reverse mapping is now created and shown in the Idle state as shown Figure 10 49 Fusncopyvoo sowa Fuencopyvo som cn TieshCopyVoz saman TeshCopyVol Geass Cote Qe Figure 10 49 New reverse mapping 496 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 9 To restore the original source volume FlashCopyVo16 with the snapshot you took FlashCopyVol7 select the new mapping and right click to open the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 50 Tash Time unc Fusncopyuon unc Faencopyioz amca or FestCopyici FlashCopyVor TR T Nov 204 Tu PM Tanco suom Move to Consistency Group Sense 6 Ronamo Targot Volume Delete Mapping Show Related Volumes ai proporties Figure 10 50 Starting the reverse mapping Chapter 10 Copy services 497 10 Click Start to write over FlashCopyVo16 with the original bitmap data that was saved in the FlashCopy FlashCopyVo17 The command then completes as shown in Figure 10 51 Start FlashCopy Mapping Tack compote 100 View more tast startfomsp prep restore Task completed ais mom Figure 10 51 Fla
449. oup by completing the following steps 1 Select the Remote Copy relationship and click Remove from Consistency Group from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 143 Alternatively right click the relationship to be removed sp CS Reis a rites Crete Consistency Gro ia c wc emere om Consistency Group 9 emere E mm x nete netos retord 4 ITS0_V3700 vsaon cun remotesourest po Remnaiurel Renctenroet Consistent tronie homoteta Senso oa Cou Qe O Figure 10 143 Remove Remote Copy relationships from a consistency group 2 A warning displays as shown in Figure 10 144 Make sure that the Remote relationships that are shown in the field are the ones that you want to remove from the consistency group Click Remove to proceed Remove Relationship From Consistency Group x You selected 1 relationship to remove from consistency group RedbookGroup wow Figure 10 144 Confirm the relationships to remove from the Remote Copy consistency group Chapter 10 Copy services 571 After the removal process completes the Remote Copy relationships are deleted from the consistency group and displayed in the Not in a Group list as shown in Figure 10 145 Deleting a consistency group The consistency group can be deleted by completing the following steps 1 Click it a
450. oup is a logical entity that groups copy relationships By grouping the relationships you can ensure that these relationships are managed in unison and that the data within the group is in a consistent state For more information about the necessity of consistency groups see 10 1 6 Managing a FlashCopy consistency group on page 500 Remote Copy commands can be issued to a Remote Copy consistency group Therefore the commands can be issued simultaneously for all Metro Mirror relationships that are defined within that consistency group or to a single Metro Mirror relationship that is not part of a Metro Mirror consistency group Chapter 10 Copy services 523 524 Figure 10 82 shows the concept of Remote Copy consistency groups Because the RC Relationshipland RC Relationship are part of the consistency group they can be handled as one entity while the stand alone RC Relationship3 is handled separately RC Relationship Consistency Group 1 Figure 10 82 Remote Copy consistency group Remote Copy relationships do not have to belong to a consistency group but if they do they can only belong to one consistency group Relationships that are not part of a consistency group are called stand alone relationships A consistency group can contain zero or more relationships All relationships in a consistency group must have matching primary and secondary clusters which are sometimes referred to as master clust
451. out configuring SAN Boot see Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot on page 647 4 2 1 Windows 2012 R2 Preparing for FC attachment This section details the steps necessary for preparing for a successful implementation Installing and updating supported HBAs Install a supported HBA model with the current supported firmware and drivers for your configuration 1 Determine the current supported HBAs and levels for Windows 2012 R2 which are available at the following website http www ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S1004388 2 Install the driver using Windows Device Manager or vendor tools such as QLogic QConvergeConsole Emulex HBAnyware or Brocade HBA Software Installer 3 Also check and update the firmware level of the HBA using the manufacturer s provided tools 4 Always check the readne file to see whether there are Windows registry parameters that should be set for the HBA driver Important When using the IBM Subsystem Device Driver Device Specific Module SDDDSM for multipath support the HBA driver must be a Storport storport sys miniport driver Chapter 4 Host configuration 151 152 Configuring Brocade HBAs for Windows After the device driver and firmware are installed you must configure the HBAs 1 Use the Brocade host connectivity manager HCM software or reboot into the HBA basic input output system BIOS 2 Load the adapter defaults 3 Set the following values
452. over and bandwidth aggregation Further information about storage area network SAN configuration is provided in Chapter 2 Initial configuration on page 27 For attachment using SAS ensure that each host has at least one SAS HBA connection to each IBM Storwize V3700 canister Further information about configuring SAS hosts is provided in 2 3 SAS direct attach planning Before new volumes are mapped to the host of your choice it is advised that preparation is done that will help with ease of use and reliability There are several steps required on a host system to prepare for mapping new IBM Storwize V3700 volumes Use the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center SSIC to check which code levels are supported to attach your host to your storage SSIC is an IBM web tool that checks the interoperation of host storage switches and multipathing drivers Go to the SSIC web page to get the current IBM Storwize V3700 compatibility information http www ibm com systems support storage ssic interoperability wss The complete support matrix is published in the IBM Storwize V3700 Supported Hardware List Device Driver Firmware and Recommended Software Levels V7 4 documents which are available on the following website http www ibm com support docview wss uidsssg151004388 The following sections provide examples of host configuration for each supported attachment type on Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 and VMware ESXi 5 5
453. ower supply units PSUs The enclosure midplane assembly initially is generic and configured as a control enclosure midplane or an expansion enclosure midplane During the basic system configuration vital product data VPD is written to the enclosure midplane assembly which decides whether the unit is a control enclosure midplane or an expansion enclosure midplane Control enclosure midplane The control enclosure midplane holds node canisters and the PSUs The control enclosure midplane assembly has specific VPD such as worldwide node name WWNN 1 WWNN 2 machine type and model machine part number and serial number The control enclosure midplane must be replaced only by a trained service provider After a generic enclosure midplane assembly is configured as a control enclosure midplane it is no longer interchangeable with an expansion enclosure midplane Expansion enclosure midplane The expansion enclosure midplane holds expansion canisters and the PSUs The expansion enclosure midplane assembly also has specific VPD such as machine type and model machine part number and serial number After a generic enclosure midplane assembly is configured as an expansion enclosure midplane it is no longer interchangeable with a control enclosure midplane The expansion enclosure midplane must be replaced only by a trained service provider Figure 11 1 shows the back of the Enclosure Midplane Assembly LY Li
454. own in Figure 5 65 Select a volume to create the data store from In this example we have just mapped volume so the choice is easy Select pisk Lun Select a LLN to create a atre or expand the arent ane Select Name derit Path 10 LUN Capacty Eepandabie orvMPSLabal c sme see Figure 5 65 Choosing the disk or LUN from which to create the new data store Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 Select an option for the File System Version In this example select VMFS 5 as shown in Figure 5 66 Click Next to continue system Version Spey the verson af the VPS fr datastore ED Fle System lesen por Gime mS Select this pon to eroe aidon capabilites such as ZTB support IMPS rot suported by rost von X verson hon 3 varsa Realy Compete Sect tc opton If the wl be creed by legacy hosts m me ens canes Figure 5 66 Selecting the File System Version for the new data store Chapter 5 Volume configuration 241 242 5 Review the disk layout and click Next to continue as shown in Figure 5 67 Current Disk Layout You cen parton ed forret e entre device al fee mcr orange block of free pe EET evi the curent dignus peu verson Device tale Current Disk Layout TM SESTDisk an 0050703 No
455. own in Figure 7 20 etm co mocskot 27100 a tess 270068 SESS oe Figure 7 20 Delete selected pool Note The Delete Pool option only becomes available when the pool is not provisi volumes 322 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 Select Yes The MDisks associated to the are removed and the drives become candidate drives as shown in Figure 7 21 Delete Parent Poor v3700 A 1 MDisks will be removed 2 Drives will bocame candidato drivas Do you want to continue Figure 7 21 Delete pool confirmation These drives can now be used for a different configuration Attention When deleting a pool using the CLI itis possible to bypass checks with a force parameter In this case any volume provisioned from this pool is deleted including the data stored on it with no option for recovery Chapter 7 Storage Pools 323 7 2 3 Creating an MDisk and Pool To configure internal storage for use with hosts complete the following steps 1 Click Pools Internal Storage The IBM Storwize V3700 shows all internal drives their status and their use The status shows whether it is Online Offline or Degraded The Use status shows if a drive is Unused a Candidate for configuration a Spare a Member of a current configuration or Failed 2 Click Configure Storage as shown in Figure 7 22 dh 2700 ci Enterprise TCU
456. parent mdisk grp name EasyTier Pool Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser 9 7 IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool 446 The IBM STAT is a Windows console tool If you run Easy Tier in measured mode the tool analyzes the extents and captures I O profiles to estimate how much benefit you would derive from implementing Easy Tier automatic data placement with SSD MDisks If automatic data placement mode is already active the analysis also includes an overview of migrated hot data and recommendations about whether you can derive any benefit from adding more flash drives The output provides a graphical representation of the performance data collected by Easy Tier over a 24 hour operational cycle The tool comes as a iso file which needs to be extracted to a temporary folder The installation is initiated by running setup exe Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The STAT can be downloaded from the following website http www 01 ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S4000935 9 7 1 Processing heat log files STAT takes input from the dpa heat log file and produces a Hypertext Markup Language HTML file that contains the report Download the heat 1og file as described in 9 5 2 Downloading Easy Tier O measurements on page 438 and save it to the HDD of a Windows system For more information about the tool and to download it see the following website http www 01 ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S4000935 To pro
457. plementing the IBM Storwize V3700 10 To add further VMkernel ports to this switch click Properties to open the window shown in Figure 4 23 then click Add This reopens the same wizard you have just gone through so follow the same steps to add a second VMkernel port Forts Network Adapters CUN C m Sonn SLO woe maT seamy ni Mac As pas Trai Shaping eked z foyer and nd Falancng Load Belencing fot Net ote I Faltak Yes el ome nem neni memo d Ss Figure 4 23 Adding another VMkernel port in the vSwitch Properties 11 In this example you create a second VMkernel port with IP 10 0 10 7 The network configuration page should now look like Figure 4 24 Figure 4 24 The finished network Configuration page 12 You must now bind the VMkernel ports to the iSCSI Software Adapter To do this go to Storage Adapters right click the iSCSI Software Adapter and click Properties 13 Then go to Network Configuration and click Add to start adding the VMkernel ports Chapter 4 Host configuration 173 174 14 The window shown in Figure 4 25 should open Click OK to add the first port then repeat for the second Rony ta adaptare wih me CSI pert bar reuerentia ae targeted vvkemel adapter isnot Isted to Host gt Configurat
458. plit into New Volume cone Ei Validate Volume Copies ab Win2012 Voi Dopa 10 520 GiB Foo 0 Deets copy rasnon Dum SAGE NR i 2 X 202008 Pool Figure 8 67 Volume copy actions Looking at the volume copies that are shown in Figure 8 67 it is possible to see that one of the copies has an asterisk displayed next to its name as also shown in Figure 8 88 102090 tasyrier Poor v Online 10 00 GIB FasyTier Poor online ij 1020618 Nearine Pool Figure 8 68 Volume copy names Each volume has a primary and a secondary copy and the asterisk indicates the primary copy The two copies are always synchronized which means that all writes are destaged to both copies but all reads are always done from the primary copy Two copies per volume is the maximum number configurable and the roles of the copies can be changed To accomplish this task complete the following steps 1 Select the secondary and then click Actions Make Primary Usually itis a leading practice to place the volume copies on Storage Pools with similar performance because the write performance is constrained if one copy is on a lower performance pool Figure 8 69 shows the secondary copy Actions menu cons L a create Volumes f Creste Volumes Thin MersonPoe 102s rec po 50060 oat 00
459. ployed gt All direct connect hosts should have the HBA set to point to point For more information about host configuration see Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 2 6 Miscellaneous configuration planning During the initial setup of the IBM Storwize V3700 system the installation wizard asks for various information that you should have available during the installation process Several of these fields are mandatory to complete the initial configuration The information in the following checklist is helpful to have before the initial setup is performed The date and time can be manually entered but to keep the clock synchronized use a Network Time Protocol NTP service O Document the LAN NTP server IP address that is used for synchronization of devices 0 For alerts to be sent to storage administrators and to set up Call Home to for service and support you need the following information Name of primary storage administrator for IBM to contact if necessary Email address of the storage administrator for IBM to contact if necessary Phone number of the storage administrator for IBM to contact if necessary Physical location of the IBM Storwize V3700 system for IBM service for example Building 22 first floor Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP or email server address to direct alerts to and from the IBM Storwize V3700 n For the Call Home service to work the IBM Storwize V3700 syst
460. ps 1 Click Customize Columns in the actions menu This enables you to add or remove several options available in the Internal Storage view 2 To restore the current view select Restore Default View as shown in Figure 7 18 Lac Take v Omme mde 1 Meet 5 v onne D as pers b Online DI vonne mds D Upgrade v onne Shove Dependent Volumes 1 E Properties v Capacity E 3M GB 7 Use 2 EI DS S Status a GB v MDisk Name 1 1 2 4622 Gi s 1302368 Sparel ember ID 3 E 482360 CR sU ore 1 2 4 S Enclosure D v Stat sucer com a Part Number G3 GP Candie D 0 278 9068 caa Patt Identiy 2 m spare Terhnology Type amsoi cad RPM 24 2 associe Canad Drive Class 482 718 Spare terface Speed v 4 24 AID Spare o 2 iR m Figure 7 18 Customizing columns Chapter 7 Storage Pools 319 7 2 Configuring internal storage The internal storage of an IBM Storwize V3700 can be automatically configured into MDisks and pools using the system setup wizard during the initial configuration If the internal storage of an IBM Storwize V3700 was not configured during the initial setup you can manually configure arrays and MDisks 1 Click Configure Storage in the internal Sto
461. pter 9 IBM Easy Tier 451 len Each recommendation displays the Storage Pools the MDisk recommendation and the expected improvement An example is shown in Figure 9 35 Stonwize 12700 Systemwide Recommendation Recommended SSD Configuration Predicted Storage Pool m Configuration Performance Total improvement Improvement EX GT gcn imme RES TUE UE Recommended enterprise predicted 1075 vorat improvement Confiquration improvement au encensa ren gis Recommended NL Confiauration pne id Recommended NL configuration 098 Total improvement wed Configuration m 172 A pou RI Pe ET og dng 172 M Sons ne p uni Ras zm Adding 172K M SoDUG rio d SE Ej Senis Figure 9 35 STAT Tool systemwide recommendation 452 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 10 Copy services In this chapter we describe the copy services functions provided by the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system including IBM FlashCopy and Remote Copy Copy services functions are useful for making data copies for backup application test recovery and so on The IBM Storwize V3700 system makes it easy to apply these functions to your environment through its intuitive graphical user interface GUI This chapter includes the following topics
462. ption 2 You are prompted to enter the name of the new consistency group Following your naming conventions enter the name of the new consistency group in the name field and then click Create Chapter 10 Copy services 501 3 After the creation process completes you find new empty consistency group as shown in Figure 10 55 Tema KXEWOSUS cm POAT Copying Flash Time Nov 5 2014 2508 PM n Fasncopyvod __ Pasncopyvon GER fetoookConssrom2 Cems e Figure 10 55 New consistency group 502 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 You can rename the Consistency Group by selecting it and then right clicking or by using the Actions menu Select Rename and enter the new name as shown in Figure 10 56 Next to the of the consistency group the state shows that it is now an empty consistency group with no FlashCopy mapping in it cE c Sense Tagen TPE PAP menses a fomap2 HashCopyVoiz 01 3 08910 reaoorconsiscrou Copying Flash Time Nov 5 2014 2 58 28 RET emenkcwestort2 Empty qa roa Gro Crest FlashCopy Wapping Semis oe E hy I Properties Figure 10 56 Renaming a consistency group Chapter 10 Copy services 503 Adding FlashCopy mappings to a consistency group add FlashCop
463. r 46616B65436F6E74726F6C6C6572 State Active 0000000077040001 Active Unoptimized 004 000 001 000 0 TPG State Active Unoptimized TPG Id 1 TP Id 384 Adapter Microsoft iSCSI Initiator B D F 000 000 000 Controller 46616B65436F6E74726F6C6C6572 State Active 0000000077040000 Active Unoptimized 004 000 000 000 0 TPG State Active Unoptimized TPG Id 1 TP Id 384 Adapter Microsoft iSCSI Initiator B D F 000 000 000 Controller 46616B65436F6E74726F6C6C6572 State Active Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 MSDSM wide default load balance policy N A No target level default load balance policies have been set Confirm that all paths are active as expected and that the serial numbers match the UIDs recorded earlier change the load balancing policy for all devices run mpclaim L M policy where the allowed policies are shown in Table 5 1 e Table 5 1 MPIO load balancing policies Parameter Definition 0 Clear the Policy 1 Failover Only 2 Round Robin 3 Round Robin with Subset 4 Least Queue Depth 5 Weighted Paths 6 Least Blocks 7 Vendor Specific For detailed explanations of each policy see the following link http technet microsoft com en gb 1ibrary dd851699 aspx The following link provides further information and guidance about using mpclain exe http technet microsoft com en us 1ibrary ee619743 28v ws 10 29 aspx 5 3 3 Disco
464. r Partnerships be created with other systems in the replication layer we Channel C Figure 10 86 Creating FC or IP partnership Chapter 10 Copy services 533 3 If there is no partnership candidate an error window opens as shown in Figure 10 87 Create Partnership x This system is in the replication layer Partnerships can he created with other systems in the replication layer Fibre Channe Partner system Link bandwidth s Mbps Background copyrat doss mot av any candidats z WII Figure 10 87 No candidates are available to create a partnership 4 Check the zoning and the system status and make sure that the clusters can see each other The two systems should not be visible to each other using both FC and IP If you are going to use IP replication ensure that the two systems are not zoned in any way at the SAN level A system can have simultaneous partnerships over IP and FC with different systems but never the same one For more information see IBM SAN Volume Controller and Storwize Family Native IP Replication REDP 5103 In this example we choose to create an FC partnership with an IBM Storwize V5000 system 5 Ifthe Storwize V3700 can see a candidate system create your partnership by selecting the appropriate remote storage system from the Partner system drop down as shown in Figure 10 88 and d
465. r 559 mma 00090 o Formana ue devices isksjraa scoso7e3ovaftosbascooto00000007 tien nee heh ce ek ane ayer contguaton avalible Use he Next button to prone vith the other wizard p A partion wil be created and used ma we cance Figure 5 67 Review the current disk layout Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 Enter name for the data store and click Next as shown in Figure 5 68 Dc RTHEENEENEEN 0 Properties fr Pedale Sect kit Sate verson Properties Footing dy cw stas c Figure 5 68 Choosing a name for the new data store Chapter 5 Volume configuration 243 244 7 Select how much of the available disk space to use and click Next as shown in Figure 5 69 Uic Formatting oeny he marinum desse capacity of the Cast sace custom sce setina Sean Figure 5 69 Selecting how much of the available disk space to use Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 Review your selections and click Finish as shown in Figure 5 70 Ready to Complete TBM ISCST Disk 60050755002 Non SSD rr E vsru ssica osa non SUSDTSSsF E UOLUIT Primary parmons y YNFS CN ISEST Dist naa s0050 marce Ties Osee Reese Formatting Pie system m
466. r IBM Storwize V5000 is allowed The partnership must be defined on any partnered IBM Storwize storage systems or IBM SAN Volume Controller systems to make it fully functional The two volumes in a relationship must be the same size Chapter 10 Copy services 525 The Remote Copy relationship can also be established on the volumes within one IBM Storwize V3700 storage system When the two volumes are in the same cluster they must be in the same I O group You cannot use Remote Copy target volumes as Remote Copy source volumes However a FlashCopy target volume can be used as Remote Copy source volume Other restrictions are outlined in Table 10 5 on page 528 v v The Metro Mirror function supports copy operations between volumes that are separated by distances up to 300 km To manage multiple Remote Copy relationships as one entity relationships can be made part of a Remote Copy consistency group These relationships ensure data consistency across multiple Remote Copy relationships and provide ease of management One Remote Copy relationship can belong only to one consistency group Ali relationships in a consistency group must have matching primary and secondary clusters master clusters and auxiliary clusters All relationships in consistency group must also have the same copy direction and state Metro Mirror and Global Mirror relationships cannot belong to the same consistency group An IBM Storwize V3700
467. r configuration required for the HBA driver See the VMware Compatibility Guide for more information http www vmware com resources compatibility search php Important For Converged Network Adapters CNAs that are capable of both FC and iSCSI it is important to ensure that the Ethernet networking driver is installed in addition to the FCoE driver This is required for configuring iSCSI If you are using a hardware iSCSI HBA see the manufacturer s documentation and IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center for further details about configuring the hardware and host OS The following section describes how to configure iSCSI using the software initiator Enabling the iSCSI Initiator The iSCSI initiator is installed by default on VMware ESXi 5 5 and only needs to be enabled To do this you need to add and enable the iSCSI Software Adapter Complete the following steps 1 Connect to your ESXi server using the VMware vSphere Client 2 Browse to the Configuration tab and select Storage Adapters This should open the view shown in Figure 4 12 Figure 4 12 Adding new storage adapter using VMware vSphere Client Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 Click Add and the window shown in Figure 4 13 should open l Add Storage Adapter 77 E ndd Software Adapter 2 Figure 4 13 Software iSCSI Adapter 4 Select Add Software iSCSI Adapter and click OK The window shown in Figure 4
468. r creating and mapping Storwize V3700 volumes to hosts which is described in Chapter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 This chapter includes the following topics Host attachment overview gt Preparing the host operating system Configuring hosts in IBM Storwize V3700 Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 149 4 1 Host attachment over 150 Ww A host system is an open system computer that is connected to a switch through a Fibre Channel FC Internet Small Computer System interface iSCSI or a directly attached serial attached SCSI SAS connection short IBM Storwize V3700 supports the following host attachment protocols gigabit Gb FC 10 Gb iSCSl Fibre Channel over Ethernet FCoE or 6 Gb SAS optional host interface 6 Gb SAS standard host interface 1 GbiSCSI standard host interface In this chapter we assume that your hosts are physically ready and attached to your FC and Internet Protocol IP network or directly attached if using SAS host bus adapters HBAs We also assume that you have completed the steps that are described in 2 9 Initial configuration Follow basic switch and zoning recommendations Also ensure that each host has at least two network adapter ports that each adapter is on a separate network or at minimum in a separate zone and that at least one connection to each node exists per adapter This setup assures redundant paths for fail
469. r degraded Capacity The disk capacity that is presented to the host If a blue volume is listed next to the capacity this means that this volume is a thin provisioned volume Therefore the listed capacity is the virtual capacity which might be more than the real capacity on the system Pool Shows in which Storage Pool the volume is stored The primary copy is shown unless you expand the volume copies The volume unique identifier UID Host Mappings Shows if a volume has host mapping The value is Yes when host mapping exists and No when there are no hosting mappings Tip Right clicking anywhere in the blue title bar enables you to customize the volume attributes that are displayed You might want to add some useful information such as Caching I O Group and Real Capacity 2 To create a volume click Create Volumes and complete the steps as described in 5 1 Creating volumes in IBM Storwize V3700 on page 200 3 Right click a volume or select a volume and open the Actions menu to display the available actions for a volume as shown in Figure 8 41 F Crocro vournes 1 Aetons LG kie Create omes Mop to Host eem MESES coc vim seca s pem a Sescopua vero nspca ot soocremmisosstn ab wem s Van ereot ot sesarseecrsod H G 068 vamos ae sosoreontbn
470. r workstation unencrypted Any attacker that gains access to your private key will therefore gain access to all machines configured to accept it x key Public key for pastr into OpenSSH autherized kes fie bra BARABENzaCIucZEARAAELIIAANIEAUIS I HHDeev FS Ru MOCCOG2 Fw sDIUzGesb8 8h BT FUDFCFE NM Ss HB 2 5 se ta a ZABS Pepe sakay 2 Kay frgerpir sshesa 1024 3b d dE 56 88641859 27 Ta Ga cb S387 2a Key comment ra key 0101208 Cortim passphrase cms Grese riae kaynat _ Load aresiingpivae leis Savethe gereitedkey Save pivate key Em Tyre o key geret SSH MSA ssn2nse OSSH2DSA ina Figure 3 Save public key 5 You are prompted for a name for example pubkey and a location for the public key for example C Support Utils PuTTY Click Save Be sure to record the name and location of this SSH public key because this information must be specified later Public key extension By default the PuTTY key generator saves the public key with extension Use the string pub for naming the public key for example pubkey to differentiate the SSH public key from the SSH private key Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot 651 6 Click Save private key as shown in Figure 4 i PUTTY Key Generator Fle Key Conversons Heb
471. r zx TU Tum m m a en ee a amp tee EUNT a Figure 10 92 Fully configured partnership Stopping and starting a partnership You can stop the partnership by completing the following steps 1 Click Stop from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 93 on page 539 Stopping the partnership disconnects the relationship that uses it 538 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 restes Tui E Y on sae rura Can a Crone Puoi CHAP conuat se aL Em u Propornes Figure 10 93 Stopping a partnership 2 After you stop the partnership your partnership is listed as Fully Configured Stopped as shown in Figure 10 94 Partnerships reus LAN 00 n Q m c Figure 10 94 Fully configured partnership in Stopped state Chapter 10 Copy services 539 3 The Health Status turns yellow to indicate that the partnership is down This is normal You can restart a stopped partnership by clicking Start from the Actions menu The partnership returns to the fully configured status when restarted and the health bar returns to green Initially when restarting a partnership the status might change to a Not Present state and the health bar turns red as shown in Figure 10 95 This is normal and when the GUI refreshes it will correct itself and go to a Fully Configured state and the health bar will turn green Caen Oe Fig
472. rage 1 Total storage Total volunes monitored 33 Total capacity monitored 38630 data capacity of total cie 2 validity Latest Warnstart No Warnstart arrena test No Storage Capacity 589009 CQ Configuration Tier status Data Management status Epi OPS tpe econ ccc i um 2 ents Per age lt lt Sipayng rage oF Easy Tier management Vonslocated Figure 9 31 Selecting Storage Pool As shown in Figure 9 32 the STAT shows the MDisks that construct the Storage Pool If the Storage Pool is constructed by more than one MDisk the STAT shows additional lines for each MDisk The tool also shows the performance statistics and the projected IOPS for the MDisks after the Easy Tier processes and rebalancing operations are completed on the extents of the Storage Pool For each MDisk the STAT tool shows the following The MDisk ID The Storage Pool ID The MDisk type The number of IOPS threshold The utilization of MDisk IOPS The projected utilization of MDisk IOPS IBM Storwize V3700 Lo Storage Pool 0001 Performance Statistics and Improvement Recommendation Enterprise Tier Average Utilization of Mdisk IOPS is 131 EEUU Milk srorage TOPS Projected ulation of wis TO ype UMlaton of
473. rage Productivity Center The IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center provides set of policy driven automated tools for managing storage capacity availability events performance and assets in your enterprise environment Tivoli Storage Productivity Center provides storage management from the host and application to the target storage device It also provides disk and tape subsystem configuration and management Performance Management SAN fabric management and configuration and usage reporting and monitoring In this section we describe how to use Tivoli Storage Productivity Center to get usage reporting and to monitor performance data Tivoli Storage Productivity Center can help you to identify evaluate control and predict your enterprise storage management assets Because itis policy based it can detect potential problems and automatically make adjustments that are based on the policies and actions that you define For example it can notify you when your system is running out of disk space or warn you of an impending storage hardware failure By alerting you to these and other issues that are related to your stored data you can prevent unnecessary system and application downtime 11 8 1 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center benefits 632 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center includes the following benefits Simplifies the management of storage infrastructures Manages configures and provisions SAN attached storage Monitors and trac
474. rage window as shown in Figure 7 19 e mena uw x 7 A 10 Ce a r mel EL Rye o c cS Gm m 08 E amp HJ anman mmer v omne E AC EE C n Q0 e 00 8 Qmm Figure 7 19 Configuring internal storage 2 Choose one of the following optior Use the Recommended Configuration This option will configure all available drives based on the RAID configuration presets The setup creates MDisks and pools but does not create volumes If this automated configuration fits your business requirement it is advised that this configuration is kept Selecta Different Configuration This option starts a wizard to customize storage configuration A storage configuration might be customized for the following reasons The automated initial configuration does not meet customer requirements More storage was attached to the IBM Storwize V3700 and must be integrated into the existing configuration 320 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 7 2 1 RAII ID configuration presets RAID configuration presets are used to configure internal drives and are based on suggested values for the RAID level and drive class Each preset has a specific goal for the number of drives per array and the number of spare drives to maintain redundancy Table 7 1 describes the presets that are used for flash drives in the IBM Storwize V3700 st
475. re 10 28 Creato FlashCopy Wapping Do you want to add the FlashCopy mappings toa consistency oroup No do not add the mappings to a consistency group Yos add tho mappings to a concictoncy group La Figure 10 28 Select a preset and make your adjustments 482 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Creating new FlashCopy mappings To create FlashCopy mappings in the FlashCopy Mappings window complete the following steps 1 Click Create FlashCopy Mapping as shown in Figure 10 29 Soares VE Target Vere pe Bue Testen Avorn vot OTT temaga gue Fasncopyvor FusnCopyvon IE Ceres gi Figure 10 29 Create a FlashCopy mapping in the FlashCopy Mappings window 2 Awizard guides you through the process to create a FlashCopy mapping The steps are the same as creating an Advanced FlashCopy mapping using Existing Target Volumes as described in Using existing target volumes on page 480 Chapter 10 Copy services 483 Starting a FlashCopy mapping Most of the FlashCopy mapping actions can be performed in the FlashCopy window or the FlashCopy Mapping window For the actions that are available in both windows we show in the following sections the steps in the FlashCopy window although the steps are the same if you were to use the FlashCopy Mapping window To start mapping complete the following steps 1 Select the Fl
476. re not committed to the secondary volume If O operations on the primary volume are paused for a small length of time the secondary volume can become an exact match of the primary volume Global Mirror can operate with or without cycling When operating without cycling write operations are applied to the secondary volume as soon as possible after they are applied to the primary volume The secondary volume is generally less than 1 second behind the primary volume which minimizes the amount of data that must be recovered in the event of a failover However this requires that a high bandwidth link be provisioned between the two sites When Global Mirror operates with cycling mode changes are tracked and where needed copied to intermediate change volumes Changes are transmitted to the secondary site periodically The secondary volumes are much further behind the primary volume and more data must be recovered in the event of a failover Because the data transfer can be smoothed over a longer time period however lower bandwidth is required to provide an effective solution For more information about the IBM Storwize V3700 Copy Services see Chapter 10 Copy services on page 453 IBM Remote Copy is licensed per IBM Storwize V3700 Storage system Copy Services configuration limits For the current list of these limits see the following website https ibm biz BdEqMG Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 23 1 7
477. reads and writes a thin provisioned volume behaves as though they were fully allocated When a volume is created the user specifies two capacities The real capacity of the volume The virtual capacity of the volume The real capacity determines the quantity of MDisk extents that are allocated for the volume The virtual capacity is the capacity of the volume that is reported to IBM Storwize V3700 and to the host servers The real capacity is used to store the user data and the metadata for the thin provisioned volume The real capacity can be specified as an absolute value or a percentage of the virtual capacity The thin provisioning feature can be used on its own to create over allocated volumes or it can be used with FlashCopy Thin provisioned volumes can be used with the mirrored volume feature too A thin provisioned volume can be configured to aufoexpand which causes the IBM Storwize V3700 to automatically expand the real capacity of a thin provisioned volume as its real capacity is used This parameter prevents the volume from going offline Autoexpand attempts to maintain a fixed amount of unused real capacity on the volume This amount is known as the contingency capacity The default setting is 2 The contingency capacity is intially set to the real capacity that is assigned when the volume is created If the user modifies the real capacity the contingency capacity is reset to be the difference between the used capacity a
478. ribed in Restoring from a FlashCopy on 493 to create reverse mappings for each of the mappings that exist in the source consistency group RedbookConsistGroup When prompted to add to a consistency group select Yes Chapter 10 Copy services 511 4 From the drop down menu select the new reverse consistency group that you created step on page 511 In our example this group is RedBookReverseConsistGroup The result should be similar to that shown in Figure 10 67 PEP winsome p Em ggg remoonconsioay Copying Flash Timo Nov 6 2014 10 03 04 AM x das se EXE GO a aaen aD Be F u amp e Qoo is m Figure 10 67 Reverse Consistency group populated 512 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 a Sees amp 6 5 To restore the consistency group highlight the reverse consistency group and click Start as shown in Figure 10 68 nr nsum my netnocxconsniouy copying lah ov 6 201 10230 AM m onm p ones Radio x mom go tetrnteresetssetiep Mo or Copied gu Cete comstency emn Be Cen rusicopy napping rs eU Figure 10 68 Starting Consistency group restore 6 This overwrites the source volumes with the original bitmap data that was saved in the
479. riod 60 seconds 24 hours The primary Change Volume is then replicated to the secondary Global Mirror volume at the target site which is then captured in another change volume on the target site This situation provides a consistent image at the target site and protects your data from being inconsistent during resynchronization Figure 10 80 shows several I Os on the source volume the same number on the target volume and in the same order Assuming that this set is the same set of data updated over and over these updates are wasted network traffic and the I O can be completed much more efficiently as shown in Figure 10 81 on page 523 Remote Mirroring without Change Volumes IBM Storwize V3700 IBM Storwize V3700 Target Cluster eme m Source Cluster Figure 10 80 Global Mirror l O replication without Change Volumes Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 In Figure 10 81 the same data is being updated repeatedly so Change Volumes demonstrate significant I O transmission savings because you must send only I O number 16 which was the last I O before the cycling period Remote Mirroring with Change Volumes IBM Storwize V3700 IBM Storwize V3700 UJU Source Cluster Target Cluster Figure 10 81 Global Mirror VO replication with Change Volumes The cycling period can be adjusted by running the chrerelationship cycleperiodseconds l
480. ris 10K rom sales 1 Hot Spares 0 Unconfigured Drives Figure 7 26 The recommended configuration summary 4 Spare drives are also automatically created to meet the spare goals according to the chosen preset One spare drive is created out of every 24 disk drives of the same drive class on a single chain Spares are not created if sufficient spares are already configured Spare drives in the IBM Storwize V3700 are global spares which means that any spare drive that has at least the same capacity as the drive to be replaced can be used in any array Therefore a flash array with no flash spare available uses a SAS spare instead 5 If the proposed configuration meets your requirements click Finish and the system automatically creates the array MDisks 6 Storage Pools are also automatically created to contain the MDisks MDisks with similar performance characteristics including RAID level number of member drives and drive class are grouped into the same Storage Pool Important This option adds new MDisks to an existing Storage Pool when the characteristics match If this is not what is required the Select a different configuration option should be used Chapter7 StoragePools 327 7 After an array is created the Array MDisk members are synchronized with each other through a background initialization process You can monitor the progress of the initialization process by clicking the icon at the left of the Running Tasks sta
481. river must resolve A host with only two host bus adapters HBAs should not exceed this limit with proper zoning in a dual fabric SAN Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Maximum ports or WWPNs IBM Storwize V3700 supports a maximum of 16 ports or WWPNSs from a virtualized external storage system Figure 2 2 shows how to cable devices to the SAN Refer to this example as we describe the zoning 12 34 Node 5T Canister 1 Host 1 IBM Storwize 3700 Host 2 Node Canister 2 12 34 SAN Hosts Figure 2 2 SAN cabling and zoning diagram Create a host IBM Storwize V3700 zone for each server to which volumes are mapped to and from the clustered system as shown in the following examples in Figure 2 2 Zone Host 1 port 1 HBA 1 with both node canister ports 1 Zone Host 1 port 2 HBA 2 with both node canister ports 2 Zone Host 2 port 1 1 with both node canister ports 3 Zone Host 2 port 2 HBA 2 with both node canister ports 4 Similar zones should be created for all other hosts with volumes that are on the IBM Storwize 3700 Verify interoperability with which the IBM Storwize V3700 connects to SAN switches or directors by starting at the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center SSIC website https ibm biz BdxQhe Switches or directors are at the firmware levels that are supported by the IBM Storwize V3700 Important The IBM Storwize V3700 port login maximum that is liste
482. rncleSourcet RemeteTargett Remctesiourca2 RamoteTargerz RemeteSource3 sp RemeteTarget3 RemoteSources 82 RemoteTeruelt woe Figure 10 102 Define multiple independent relationships 544 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 The next prompt asks you to select if the volumes in the relationship are already synchronized In most situations the data on the master volume and on the auxiliary volume are not identical so click No and then click Next to enable an initial copy as shown in Figure 10 103 Create Relationship Are the volumes in this relationship already synchronized Yes the volumes are already synchronized No the volumes not synchronized RU co Figure 10 103 Activate initial data If you select Yes the volumes are already synchronized a warning message opens as 7 shown Figure 10 104 Confirm that the volumes are truly identical and then click OK to continue Warning x AA no synchronized dsta corruption wil occur Do you want to continue Figure 10 104 Waring message to make sure that the volumes are synchronized 8 You can choose to start the initial copying progress now or wait to start it later In this example we select Yes start copying now and click Finish as shown in Figure 10 105 Create Relationship Do you want to start copying now Yes start copying now No do no
483. roperties from source volume Figure 10 20 Defining how target volumes use capacity 7 If you select a thin provisioned volume more options are available as shown in Figure 10 21 The other option is to inherit the Source Volume properties Create FlashCopy Mapping x How da you want the volumes to manage capacity Uso Thin Provisioning Rea Capecity eof Virtual Capscty Automatically Expand Warning Threshold Create a generic volume Inherit proportios from source volume Figure 10 21 Advanced thin provision options 478 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 Click Next to continue You can choose from which Storage Pool you want to create your target volume as shown in Figure 10 22 You can select the same Storage Pool used by the source volume or select a different pool Create FlashCopy Mapping x Select the pool thatis used to automatically create new targets Uso tho same pocl that is usod by tho source volume Use the following poot Figure 10 22 Selecting Storage Pool for target volume 9 Click Finish when you make your decision The mappings and volume are created 10 Click Close to see the FlashCopy mapping created on your volume with a new target as shown in Figure 10 23 The status of the newly created FlashCopy mapping is Idle It can be started as described in Starting a FlashCopy mapping on page 484 ae ii
484. roup Both nodes of the Group act as preferred nodes for their own specific subset of the total number of volumes that the I O Group presents to the host servers a maximum of 2048 volumes per system However both nodes also act as a failover node for its partner node Therefore a node takes over the I O workload from its partner node if required without affecting the server s application an IBM Storwize V3700 environment that uses active active architecture the I O handling for a volume can be managed by both nodes Therefore servers that are connected through FC connectors must use multipath device drivers to handle this capability Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The IBM Storwize V3700 I O Group can be connected to the SAN so that all application servers can access the volumes from the I O Group Up to 256 host server objects can be defined to the IBM Storwize V3700 Important The active active architecture provides availability to process I Os for both control nodes and enables the application to continue running smoothly even if the server has only one access route or path to the storage controller This type of architecture eliminates the path logical unit number LUN thrashing typical of an active passive architecture 1 5 4 Clustered system clustered system consists of two node canisters a single O Group All configuration monitoring and service tasks are performed at the system level The configurati
485. rum disk A disk that contains a reserved area that is used exclusively for cluster management The quorum disk is accessed when it is necessary to determine which half of the cluster continues to read and write data Serial Attached SCSI ports SAS ports are connections for the host to get direct attached access to the IBM Storwize V3700 and expansion enclosure thin provisioned Snapshot An image backup type that consists of a p ime view of a volume Storage Pool A collection of storage capacity that provides the capacity requirements for a volume Child Pool A subset of a Storage Pool that provides the capacity for a volume Strand The SAS connectivity of a set of drives within multiple enclosures The enclosures can be control enclosures or expansion enclosures Thin provisioning The ability to define a storage unit full system Storage Pool or volume with a logical capacity size that is larger than the physical capacity that is assigned to that storage unit Turbo Performance Increases system maximum input output operations per second IOPS and maximum throughput Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 IBM Storwize V3700 term Definition Volume A discrete unit of storage on disk tape or other data recording medium that supports some form of identifier and parameter list such as a volume label or I O control Worldwide port WWPN Each
486. rview 87 Figure 3 26 shows the addition of more filters 6 Click the plus icon to the right of the filter to add further filters 7 Choose the appropriate logical operand AND or OR 8 Click Apply to display the filtered data Filters can also be removed by clicking the minus icon eer use 7 J 7 J canaaate spore mme Figure 3 26 Advanced Filter Additional filters Figure 3 27 shows the result of the filler used in Figure 3 26 This displays all internal drives that are Candidates or Spares 9 To reset a filter after the results have been displayed click the magnifying glass with a red cross through it in the filter field Capacity Allocation Online cangiaste v onie V Online V Online V Online Figure 3 27 Advanced Filter Results and reset of filter Saving tabular data to a file It is possible to save tabular data to a file 1 Click the diskette icon 2 Specify the name and location to save the file comma delimited file csv is created for input to a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel 88 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 3 28 shows saving internal storage data superuser Opening exportcs Configure Storage Internal You have chosen to open exporte which Microsoft Office Excel Comma Separated Values File 267 by from 841415448 What should Firefox do with this
487. rwize 3700 partnerships SVC 6 3 0 d SVC 6 3 0 M IBM Storwize V3700 Volumes presented to SVC IBM Storwize V3700 Partnership IBM Storwize V3700 ___ e la iacu Figure 10 71 IBM Storwize V3700 virtualization layers Chapter 10 services 515 516 The replication layer enables an Storwize V3700 system to be a Remote Copy partner with an IBM SAN Volume Controller The storage layer enables an IBM Storwize V3700 system to function as back end storage for an IBM SAN Volume Controller An IBM Storwize V3700 system cannot be in both layers at the same time Limitations on the IBM SAN Volume Controller and IBM Storwize V3700 partnership IBM SAN Volume Controller and IBM Storwize V3700 systems can be partners in a Remote Copy partnership However the following limitations apply The layer for the Storwize V3700 must be set to replication The default is storage If any other SAN Volume Controller or Storwize ports are visible on the SAN aside from the ones on the cluster where you are making the change you cannot change the layer The SAN Volume Controller and IBM Storwize V3700 will need to be zoned together after changing the layer on the IBM Storwize V3700 If any cluster partnership is already defined on the IBM Storwize V3700 you cannot change the layer Partnership topologies A partnership between up to four IBM Storwize V3700 systems is allowed The following typi
488. s 1 2 5 and 12 Days 1 4 7 15 and 30 Clear Log This option clears the complete error log even if only one event was selected Attention This action cannot be undone and might prevent the system from being analyzed when severe problems occur Properties This option provides more sense data for the selected event that is shown in the list Recommended Actions A fix procedure starts a wizard known a Directed Maintenance Procedure DMP that helps to troubleshoot and correct the cause of an error Some DMPs reconfigure the system based on your responses ensure that actions are carried out in the correct sequence and prevent or mitigate loss of data For this reason you must always run the fix procedure to fix an error even if the fix might seem obvious To run the fix procedure for the error with the highest priority go to the Recommended Action pane at the top of the Event page and click Run This Fix Procedure When you fix higher priority events first the system can often automatically mark lower priority events as fixed Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 11 5 2 Alert handling and recommended actions All events in Alert status require attention Alerts are listed in priority order and should be fixed sequentially by using the available fix procedures Example Fibre Channel small form factor pluggable SFP fault For this example we emulated an FC failure and to do so disabled an FC port on th
489. s It is also possible to select multiple items in a list by using a combination of the Shift or Ctrl keys Using the Shift key To select multiple items in a sequential order complete the following steps 1 Click the first item that is listed 2 Press and hold the Shift key 3 Click the last item in the list All of the items between the first and last items are selected as shown in Figure 3 21 ashcopyvert No p sosoca varoe spool ot ashcooyon ES sace varoo spoor o Figure 3 21 Selection of four sequential items Using the Ctrl key To select multiple items that are not in sequential order complete the following steps 1 Click the first item 2 Press and hold the Ctrl key 3 Click the other items that are required Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 85 Figure 3 22 shows the selection of two non sequential items Pool controler ooonen00000 Online p mcn 100GB Mirabonconl D sman spoor ot E FashCopy Vols Onine Mo smon 50060 varon pes Fishcopy oio Wo suc Online m 200000 RSPooL OY ruencopyvor mo swe varoo OF Figure 3 22 Selecting two non sequential items Filtering objects To focus on a subset of the listed items that are shown in a pane with columns use the filter field 1 This tool shows items that match
490. s contort Sink 9 Wake Primary Expand d Split into New Volume Edit Propertios Copy T Mona Validate voiume Copies vnnzorz vo d Duplicate Volume soosib nearne Poor Voiumeoot Delete this Copy Exeyrier Poo Testos J zws06i5 Neartme Poor Testo V 28000008 Wewrine Pool 2 Figure 8 70 Thin Provisioned menu items 8 6 2 Splitting into a new volume 408 If the two volume copies are synchronized it is possible to split one of the copies to a new volume and map this volume to another host From a storage point of view this procedure can be performed online which means that you can split one copy from the volume and create a copy from the remaining volume without any host effect However if you want to use the split copy for testing or backup purposes you must make sure that the data inside the volume is consistent Therefore the data must be flushed to storage to make the copies consistent For more information about flushing the data see your operating system documentation The easiest way to flush the data is to shut down the hosts or application before a copy is split Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 In this example volume Win2012 Vol 01 has two copies Copy 0 as primary and Copy 1as secondary To split a copy complete the following steps 1 Click Split into New Volume as shown in Figure 8 67 on page 407 on any copy and the remaining secondary copy automatically beco
491. s an algorithm based on MDisk IOPS usage which means that itis not capacity based but performance based It works on a six hour performance window When a new MDisk is added into an existing Storage Pool Storage Pool Balancing automatically balances the extents across all MDisks Figure 9 14 represents an example of Storage Pool Balancing Storage Tier Storage Tier E Ej Figure 9 14 Storage Pool Balancing Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 9 4 8 Easy r rules The following operating rules apply when IBM System Storage Easy Tier is used on the Storwize V3700 gt Automatic data placement and extent I O activity monitors are supported on each copy of mirrored volume Easy Tier works with each copy independently of each other Volume mirroring Volume mirroring can have different workload characteristics for each copy of the data because reads are normally directed to the primary copy and writes occur to both Therefore the number of extents that Easy Tier migrates is probably different for each copy Easy Tier works with all striped volumes including the following types of volumes Generic volumes Thin provisioned volumes Mirrored volumes Thin mirrored volumes Global Mirror and Metro Mirror sources and targets Easy Tier automatic data placement is not supported for image
492. s by Pool pane Using this pane itis possible to perform various tasks such as display MDisks in each pool create new storage pools and delete storage pools Figure 3 66 shows the MDisks by Pool pane I 3 4 ram v onne p M a vine M08 meae E al dE omo soos v Online TID Allocated 3 54 718 nes amy 2 4E 1887 ores Atene owes ane Clia Figure 3 66 MDisks by Pools pane Pool actions To create delete rename or change a Pool Icon view a Child Pool or view a Pool s properties complete the following steps 1 Right click a pool 2 Alternatively the Actions menu can be used Figure 3 67 shows the pool actions Pool dij mems amp Change Icon Rename Chil Pools Properties Online Reet amp gi 8 Bi viro eed 2 Figure 3 67 Pool Actions Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 111 112 Restriction In software release 7 4 a pool cannot be deleted if it contains volumes The volumes must first be deleted using the Volumes by Pool pane This is a safeguard against accidental volume deletion RAID actions Using the MDisks by Pool pane it is possible to perform MDisk RAID tasks such as Set Spare Goal Swap Drive and Delete To access these functions right click the MDisk or
493. s easy to see how 1920 errors can arise when your bandwidth is insufficient and why you should never use a TCP IP ping to measure RTT for FCIP traffic Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 10 83 on page 530 compares the amount of time in microseconds that is required to transmit a packet across network links of varying bandwidth capacity The following packet sizes are used 64 bytes The size of the common ping packet 1500 bytes The size of the standard TCP IP packet 2148 bytes The size of a Fibre Channel frame Your path maximum transmission unit MTU affects the delay that is incurred in getting packet from one location to another in the following circumstances When it causes fragmentation When itis too large and causes too many retransmits when a packet is lost After you verify your latency by using the correct packet size proceed with normal hardware troubleshooting 10 3 2 1720 error The 1720 error event ID 050020 is the other primary error code of Remote Copy Because the term system partnership implies that all involved virtualization systems are partners they must communicate with each other When a partner on either side stops communicating you see a 1720 error display in your error log According to official documentation there are no likely field replaceable unit breakages or other causes In practice the source of this error is most often a fabric problem or a problem in the network path b
494. s hot spare drives When an array member drive fails the system automatically replaces the failed member with a hot spare drive and rebuilds the array to restore its redundancy Candidate and spare drives can be manually exchanged with array members Each array has a set of goals that describe the required location and performance of each array A sequence of drive failures and hot spare takeovers can leave an array unbalanced with members that do not match these goals The system automatically rebalances such arrays when the appropriate drives are available Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system 13 The following RAID levels are available RAID 0 striping no redundancy RAID 1 mirroring between two drives implemented as RAID 10 with 2 drives RAID 5 striping can survive one drive fault with parity RAID 6 striping can survive two drive faults with parity RAID 10 RAID 0 on top of RAID 1 vv vv RAID 0 arrays stripe data across the drives The system supports RAID 0 arrays with one member which is similar to traditional just a bunch of disks JBOD attach RAID 0 arrays have no redundancy so they do not support hot spare takeover or immediate exchange A RAID 0 array can be formed by one eight drives RAID 1 arrays stripe data over mirrored pairs of drives A RAID 1 array mirrored pair is rebuilt independently A RAID 1 array can be formed by two drives only RAID 5 arrays stripe data over the mem
495. s issued When you create or modify a FlashCopy mapping you can specify a cleaning rate for the FlashCopy mapping that is independent of the background copy rate The cleaning rate is also defined as a value of 0 100 which has the same relationship to data copied per second as the backup copy rate see Table 10 1 The cleaning rate controls the rate at which the cleaning process operates The purpose of the cleaning process is to copy or flush data from FlashCopy source volumes upon which there are dependent mappings For cascaded and multiple target FlashCopy the source might be a target for another FlashCopy or a source for a chain cascade of FlashCopy mappings The cleaning process must complete before the FlashCopy mapping can go to the stopped state This feature and the distinction between stopping and stopped states was added to prevent data access interruption for dependent mappings when their source is issued a stop Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 FlashCopy mapping states A mapping is in one of the following states at any point Idle or Copied The source and target volumes act as independent volumes even if a mapping exists between the two Read write caching is enabled for the source and the target volumes If the mapping is incremental and the background copy is complete the mapping records only the differences between the source and target volumes The source and target volumes go offline if the connection to bot
496. s to Consistent Stopped if secondary read write access was not allowed Otherwise the state is Idling IS Inconsistent Copia RemoteSouree consistent Copying Remotesoureet RemoteTeget Inconsietont copra Romatesources Hemctorarge Inconsistent Stopped emote sources PemoteTargett mb i Se ee Qus mm Figure 10 111 Remote Copy relationship stop completes Chapter 10 Copy services 549 ems Ca S Starting a stand alone Remote Copy relationship The Remote Copy relationship can be started by completing the following steps 1 Select the relationship and click Start from the Actions menu or right click as shown in Figure 10 112 Create Consistency Group Create Relationship Consistency Group Master Voluine Tuatai Volume Remote Sourcet emoteToraett omoteSoures HemoteTargot femoteSoureet emoteTargett e TTC ee Figure 10 112 Re start a Remote Copy relationship Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 When a Remote Copy relationship is started the most important item is selecting the direction Both master and auxiliary volumes can be the primary Make your decision based on your requirements and click Start Relationship In our example choose the master volume to be the primary as shown in Figure 10 113 Sect me primary source voume ror remote copy reatonshi ps Master s pr
497. s valid and unique to the system To examine some of the available commands complete the following steps 1 Enter 1svdi sk as shown in Example A 2 to list all configured volumes on the system The example shows that six volumes are configured Example A 2 List all volumes Storwize lTSO V3700 superuser lsvdisk id name 10 group id 10 group name status mdisk grp id mdisk grp name capacity type FC id FC name RC id RC name vdisk UID count fast write state se copy count RC change compressed copy count 0 13700 Voll 0 io online 0 V3700 Pool 20 0068 striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 1 v3700 Vol2 0 io online 0 V3700 Pool 2 0068 striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 2 V3700 Vol3 0 io online 0 V3700 Pool 2 0068 striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 3 V3700 Vol4 0 io online 0 V3700 Pool 2 0068 striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 4 V3700 Vol5 0 io online 0 V3700 Pool 2 0068 striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 5 V3700 Vol6 0 io online 0 V3700 Pool 2 0068 striped 6005076300800 empty 1 no 0 Appendix A Command line interface setup and SAN Boot 659 660 Enter Ishost to see a list of all configured hosts on the system as shown in Example Example A 3 List hosts Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser lshost id name port count iogrp count status 0 windows2008r2 2 4 online map the volume to the hosts enter mkvdiskhostmap as shown in Example
498. s were migrated and to monitor if it makes sense to add more flash to the multitiered Storage Pool Heat data files are produced approximately once a day that is roughly every 24 hours when Easy Tier is active on one or more Storage Pools Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 download the statistics file complete the following steps 1 Click Settings Support as shown in Figure 9 25 ee Qe Qi i Figure 9 25 Settings menu 2 Click Show full log listing as shown in Figure 9 26 CD 8 Lacie Let Low sg sanana ian bna u uw teeta Qoo emen tt Figure 9 26 Download files menu This action lists all of the log files available to download The Easy Tier log files are always named dpa_heat lt canister_name gt _ lt date gt lt time gt data If you run Easy Tier for a longer period it generates a heat file at least every 24 hours The time and date that the file was created are included in the file name Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 439 To download the statistics file select the file for the most representative period and click Actions Download as shown in Figure 9 27 Usually this is the latest file EN nodet Astore E Dover n Delete dumpstaps neacrevecor nrri023 1N1255 data durnpafdpa heat T0022 idumpaiump 7802207 4 444013 170602 urmps kump LBI2207 4 444078 120127 JGumps dump r892201
499. sables ito the pov supply units 2 Wattforthe satus LED e nk D hie process can take up ta 10 minutos US Flach Drive o o gt Power on Ince a in summary meari tes Man ane Figure 2 12 Initialization application Storwize V3700 Power up 5 Any expansion enclosures that are part of the system should be powered on and allowed to come ready before the control enclosure Follow the instructions to power on the IBM Storwize V3700 and wait for the status light emitting diode LED to flash 6 Insert the USB stick in one of the USB ports on the left node canister as shown in Figure 2 13 Storwize V3500 V3700 System Initialization Insert USB flash drive into canister tone 1 Remove the USB fash drive fom the personal computer 2 sort tho Use fash diva nt oro of tho ports on ha ft canister S WS ortho LED tte ning and ten tap trie his process take up to 3 minutes o Y use Fash prve p Insert prive inta Canister Faser Ure mta BC 22 UR 3 00 Figure 2 13 Inserting the USB flash drive into the canister Chapter 2 Initial configuration 43 44 The left node canister becomes the control node and the other node is the partner node The fault LED begins to flash Clustered system creation While the clustered system is created the amber fault LED on the node canister flashes When this LED stops flashing remove the USB key from I
500. se Storage Pools can have different characteristics it is possible to change the Storage Pool icon For more information see 7 3 Working with Storage Pools on page 348 Pool Name The name that is given during the creation of the Storage Pool For more information about changing the Storage Pool name see Rename on page 353 Pool Details Shows you the information about the Storage Pools such as status the number of managed disks and Easy Tier status Volume allocation Shows you the amount of capacity that is allocated to volumes from this Storage Pool The lower right section as shown in Figure 8 80 lists all volumes that have at least one copy in the selected Storage Pool The following information is provided Name Shows the name of the volume Status Shows the status of the volume Capacity Shows the capacity that is presented to hosts Shows the volume unique identifier Host Mappings Shows if host mappings exist Volume Allocation EasyTier Pool Allocated to Volumes 100202 Capacity IE mbvolume 0 v Onine 20098 600s07e0c0eB01Fse000000000000011 Online 200ci8 e 60050750C0 84F5E000000000000012 2 v onne 20618 6003075000 B01FSE000000000000013 Recbookvol 0 Online 100 00 GiB Yes 00S0760002B04FSe000000000000018 RedbookVol 4 v Onine 100 00 618 Yes 60050 8000EB01F5800000000000001C RedbookVol 2 v Online 100 00 cin Yes c00s 759002004F58000000000000010 Rec
501. sent the last 5 minutes of performance statistics The performance graphs include statistics about CPU Utilization Volumes Interfaces and MDisks Figure 3 52 shows the Performance pane System Statice 7 cpu umanon voumes ECN g Bisnes Creer i Dumps Dunes Ome Ome uoke Hc Meee Hee E e mid e eee C ess wency C iter xr Ouspe On On Qus 0 eve loci ii Figure 3 52 Performance pane Custom tailoring performance graphs The Performance pane can be customized to show the workload of a single node which is useful to help determine whether the system is working in a balanced manner Figure 3 53 shows the custorr tailoring of the performance graphs by selecting node 1 from the System Statistics menu The measurement type can also be changed between throughput megabytes per second MBps or input output l O operations per second IOPS by selecting the relevant value System Statistics System Statisties Stalistics by Node nodet 2S yes Figure 3 53 Graphs representing Performance System Statistics of a single node Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 103 Performance peak value Peak values over the last 5 minute period can be seen by hovering over the current value as shown in Figure 3 54 for the serial attached Small Computer System Interface SAS
502. shCopy restore command Important The underlying command that is run by the IBM Storwize V3700 appends the restore option automatically 498 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 11 The reverse mapping is now reported as Copying as shown in Figure 10 52 The progress reported is the opposite of the original mapping because the direction is reversed The restore process is now complete and the original data from the snapshot is available on the source volume Volume Name Stile Progra Capacity oup r3 eencopyvate somos E Feenconrvott 4 moca eS ot p a eencopyvoe saos Fesncoprvolt Qmm E Hori 2044 ab Feshconyvet sosa B ovS 201 467 Pa y Looostt 2500 68 5 po Redocokiolume 0060 pv 3 gt 8g GEM Figure 10 52 Source volume restore complete Chapter 10 Copy services 499 10 1 6 Managing a FlashCopy consistency group FlashCopy consistency groups can be managed by completing the following steps 1 Click Consistency Groups under the Copy Services function icon This displays the view shown in Figure 10 53 BE mm mei di Senec tme ge Memor _ recover F dfg x gtemeicosistmep Copying Flash Tima Nov 5 2014 2 58 28 PAL conos asncooyew Sets sgi Figure 10 53 Access to th
503. sk of losing data when the Storage Migration wizard is used correctly is low However it is prudent to avoid potential data loss by creating a backup of all of the data stored on the hosts the existing storage systems and the Storwize V3700 before the wizard is used Accessing the Storage Migration wizard To navigate the Storage Migration wizard complete the following steps 1 Select System Migration in the Pools menu to open the System Migration pane as shown in Figure 6 12 The System Migration pane provides access to the Storage Migration wizard and displays the migration progress information Figure 6 12 Pools menu Chapter 6 Storage migration 259 2 Click Start New Migration to begin the storage migration wizard Figure 6 13 shows the System Migration pane caca Figure 6 13 System Migration pane Important If you have not already configured your zoning correctly or attached your external SAS storage or have the layer set incorrectly if this is another Storwize system you might receive a warning message indicating that no external storage controllers could be found as shown in Figure 6 14 on page 261 Click Close and correct the problem before trying to start the migration wizard again This occurs with early V7 4 release code The subsequent panes in the migration wizard as shown in Figure 6 18 on page 264 direct you to remove host zoning or SAS connectivity to the external storage You are also prompted
504. sksyncprogress vdisk_id vdisk_name id progress estimated completion time 30 2012 Vol 02 1 T7 141031132545 Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser 8 6 3 Validate Volume Copies option Itis possible to verify that the volume copies are identical or process the differences between them validate the copies of a mirrored volume complete the following steps 1 Select Validate Volume Copies as shown in Figure 8 67 on page 407 The Validate Volume Copies pane opens as shown in Figure 8 73 Validate Volume Copies x Validate Volume Copies Wina012 Vol 02 Generate Event of Differences Raporta the rs ifference found en synchronized enne copes of the spectes vole Overumie Diierences Corrects sectors that contain diffrent coments by copying contents fro primary voure copy 1o alter copies en the specifed volar Return Media Error to Host Converts sectors that contain differen contents into virtual medium errors on the specified volume Figure 8 73 Validate Volume Copies pane The following options are available Generate Event of Differences Use this option if you want to verify only that the mirrored volume copies are identical If any difference is found the command stops and logs an error that includes the logical block address LBA and the length of the first difference You can use this option starting at a different LBA each time to count the number of differences on a volume
505. snaps by using a USB stick 1 Create a text file that includes the following command satask snap dump 2 Save the file as satask txt in the root directory of the USB stick 3 Insert the USB stick in the USB port of the node from which the support data should be collected 4 Wait until no write activity is recognized this process can take 10 minutes or more 5 Remove the USB stick and check the results as shown in Figure 11 77 TOBA ampange 2128717 30 24 2C14032 0M Figure 11 77 Single snap result fles on USB stick satask_result file The satask_result htm file is the general response to the command that is issued using the USB stick If the command did not run successfully it is noted in this file Otherwise any general system information is stored here as shown in Figure 11 78 satask snap dump Tee De 40 09 32 12 MUT 2014 System Status sainfo Isservicenodes panel cluster dd o0 elster_nawe mede nede name relation node status error date 5 oooaoc zacieca io viti 1 7o Figure 11 78 The satask result htmi file on USB stick header only Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Snap memory dump on USB A complete statesave of the node in which the USB was inserted is stored in a tgz file The name of the file includes the node name and the time stamp The content of the tgz file is shown in Figure 11 79 Dy
506. sort oth suport your orth runc eyo warn se ican icc ct humo emai Event Figure 2 27 Call home setup Itis possible to configure your system to send email reports to IBM if an issue that requires hardware replacement is detected This function is called Call Home When this email is received IBM automatically opens a problem report and contacts you to verify whether replacements parts are required Call Home When Call Home is configured the IBM Storwize V3700 automatically creates a Support Contact with one of the following email addresses depending on country or region of installation US Canada Latin America and Caribbean Islands cal Thomel de ibm com gt All other countries or regions cal Thome0 de ibm com IBM Storwize V3700 can use SNMP traps syslog messages and Call Home email to notify you and the IBM Support Center when significant events are detected Any combination of these notification methods can be used simultaneously To set up Call Home you need the location details of the IBM Storwize V3700 Storage Administrators details and at least one valid SMTP server IP address If you do not want to configure Call Home it is possible to do it later by using the GUI option Settings gt Event Notification for more information see 2 9 2 Configure Call Home email alert and inventory on page 65 54 Impleme
507. ss lowest communes Esch alowed i cmmun wt ese and sage som sw SS a dies as uns ML ecco Ec e aaron L4 sors onec Figure 3 107 Fibre Channel Ports Security pane Select Security in the Settings menu to open the pane The Security pane provides access to the Remote Authentication wizard Remote authentication must be configured to create remote users on the IBM Storwize V3700 A remote user is authenticated on a remote service such as Tivoli Integrated Portal or a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP provider Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 137 Enabling Remote Authentication To enable remote authentication complete the following steps 1 Click Configure Remote Authentication as shown in Figure 3 108 to open the wizard 2 Follow the prompts to configure remote authentication g NS Use this configure user authentication REN ce caterer orate Gene g di Figure 3 108 Security pane System pane Select System in the Settings menu to open the pane This pane provides access to the Date and Time Licensing and Upgrade Software configuration panes Date and Time Click Data and Time to configure the date and time manually or using a Network Time Protocol NTP server Figure 3 109 shows the Date and Time configuration pane La NDE gee Ee Date and Time Network T
508. ss of a node in the I O Group from which the iSCSI volumes are mapped Keep the default value of 3260 for the port and click OK Bhai sod Taget ener iscotsever D n Parent Ig Authenteaton may need to be configured before e session can be established vith any decovered targets aue x ee Figure 5 59 Adding a target IP to the iSCSI Initiator Under Recent Tasks a task displays for connecting to the target as shown in Figure 5 60 Wait for this to complete F a Kp Qj retenia ma awans auias anseo Figure 5 60 Connecting to iSCSI targets Repeat the previous two steps for each IBM Storwize V3700 iSCSI port that you want to use for iSCSI connections with this host iSCSI IP addresses The iSCSI IP addresses are different from the cluster and canister IP addresses They are configured as described in Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 Alter all of the required ports have been added close the iSCSI Initiator properties window The window shown in Figure 5 61 opens Click Yes to rescan the adapter pe je Recon the dap Figure 5 61 Rescan the ISCSI Software Adapter Chapter 5 Volume configuration 237 8 In Storage Adapters click the iSCSI Software Adapter When the rescan has completed the mapped volumes are listed in the adapter details as shown in Figure 5 62
509. ss to all of the volumes for this host is removed Ensure that the required procedures are run on the host operating system OS before the unmapping procedure is performed 368 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 After you click the changes are applied to the system as shown in Figure 8 14 Click Close after you review the output volumes from Host Task compito 100 Figure 8 14 all volumes from host Figure 8 15 shows that the selected host no longer has any volume mappings E ForPorts Host Mappings Enanos aeons C Fiter ITO Veooc Y Online Generic Mint Online Generic i202 SA Online Generic Figure 8 15 Host mapping Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 369 8 1 3 Renaming a host To rename a host complete the following steps 1 Select the host and from the Actions menu click Rename as shown in Figure 8 16 For Pons Host Mappings Modiy mappings Generic may wes 5 mpor maona Genere 2 D ied Properties Figure 8 16 Renaming a host 2 Enter a new name and click Rename as shown in Figure 8 17 Clicking Reset changes the host name back to its original name where clicking Cancel cancels the name change and closes the Rename Host pane Rename Host Men Name winaora_rc Win2012_FC_Renamed Figur
510. st interface card The HIC replacement is shown in Figure 11 10 582 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Memory replacement For more information about the memory replacement process see the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center on the following website http www 01 ibm com support knowl edgecenter STLMSA wel come At the website select a specific product version and browse to Troubleshooting gt Replacing parts Replacing the node canister memory 2x 4 GB DIMM Figure 11 11 shows the memory location Figure 11 11 Memory replacement Battery Backup Unit replacement CAUTION The battery is a lithium ion battery To avoid possible explosion do not incinerate the battery Exchange the battery only with the part that is approved by IBM Because the Battery Backup Unit BBU is in the node canister the BBU replacement leads to a redundancy loss until the replacement is complete Therefore it is advised to replace the BBU only when advised to do so It is also suggested to follow the Directed Maintenance Procedures DMP For more information about how to replace the BBU see the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center on the following website http www 01 ibm com support knowledgecenter STLMSA welcome At the website select a specific product version and browse to Troubleshooting gt Replacing parts Replacing battery in a node canister Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 583 Complete th
511. stem 1 2 IBM Storwize V3700 terminology The Storwize V3700 system introduced some terminology which is consistent with the entire IBM Storwize family and IBM SAN Volume Controller as shown in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Storwize V3700 terminology IBM Storwize V3700 term Definition Battery Each control enclosure node canister in a IBM Storwize V3700 contains a battery Canister Canisters are hardware units that are subcomponents of an IBM Storwize V3700 enclosure Each enclosure contains two canisters Chain set of enclosures that is attached to provide redundant access to the drives that are inside the enclosures Each control enclosure has two chains Clone copy of a volume on a server at a particular point The contents of the copy can be customized while the contents of the original volume are preserved Control enclosure hardware unit that includes the chassis node canisters drives and power sources Data migration By using IBM Storwize V3700 you can migrate data from existing external storage to its internal volumes Drive IBM Storwize V3700 supports a range of hard disk drives HDDs and SSDs Enclosure An enclosure is the basic housing unit for the IBM Storwize V3700 It is the rack mounted hardware that contains all the main components of the system Canisters gt Drives Power supplies Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system
512. stem Storage 053200 Storage Manager GUI 278 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 remap the external LUNs complete the following steps 1 Connect to the external DS3200 system as shown in Figure 6 4 on page 254 and select Manage a Storage Subsystem 2 Select the system that you want to manage and click OK 3 Click the Configure tab and select Create Host to Logical Drive Mappings as shown in Figure 6 37 Ben Foren ff Ona or E AA Conture Hos Acces Dial pre Fr ons ht cod nol be veri ea lp estet gen orn ences fs hace eves ater hosts and resting dres avec ERE aaa iane voes anas wine sere oan eee vn ose Figure 6 37 Create host mappings IBM 053200 Chapter 6 Storage migration 279 280 4 Awizard starts to guide you through the steps of creating the new host mappings Select the new Storwize V3700 host group from those displayed and click Next as shown in Figure 6 38 Ej mmi setup tasks m En Tte 9 Creato Hostto Logical Drive Mappings Saloct Host Oston p W tast urei the cont reas p eene tf you nant to ge orate are oat yu run fat conl a hot group ang Cle Hast Grp tak unde Cnr 7m Figure 6 38 Selecting new Storwize V3700 host group IBM D
513. stem for the purposes of Remote Copy Partnerships iia CC E T A E Gene CON ie eee um Figure 3 87 Partnerships pane 3 From the Actions menu acces s the Partnership Properties pane shown in Figure 3 88 4 From here it is possible to change the Link bandwidth and background copy rate The Link Bandwidth in Megabits per second Mbps specifies the bandwidth that is available for replication between the local and partner systems The Background copy rate specifies the maximum percen itage of the link bandwidth that can be used for background copy operations This value should be set so that there is enough bandwidth available to satisfy host write operations in addition to the background copy Partnership Properties Name Location state pe Link bandwidth Background rate TS0_vs000 Partner Fully Configured Fibre Channel 100 Mbps sos Figure 3 88 Partnership Properties Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 125 3 4 6 Access menu The Access menu provides access to the Users and Audit Log functions as shown in Figure 3 89 Figure 3 89 Access menu Users pane Select Users in the Access menu to open the pane The Users pane shows the defined user groups and users for the system The users that are listed can be filtered by user group Figure 3 90 shows the Users pane and the Users Actions m
514. stems environment Thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project Martyn Spink Djihed Afifi Arthur Wellesley James Whitaker Imran Imtiaz Tobias Fleming IBM Manchester Lab John Fairhurst Paul Marris Merrison IBM Hursley gt Samrat Dutta IBM Pune Thanks to the following authors of the previous edition of this book Uwe Dubberke Justin Heather Andrew Hickey Imran Imtiaz Nancy Kinney Saiprasad Prabhakar Parkar Dieter Utesch yrvvyyy Preface xv Now you can become a published author too Here s an opportunity to spotlight your skills grow your career and become a published author all at the same time Join an ITSO residency project and help write a book in your area of expertise while honing your experience using leading edge technologies Your efforts will help to increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction as you expand your network of technical contacts and relationships Residencies run two six weeks and you can participate either in person or as a remote resident working from your home base Learn more about the residency program browse the residency index and apply online ibm com redbooks residencies html Comments welcome Your comments are important to us We want our books to be as helpful as possible Send us your comments about this book or other IBM Redbooks publications in one of the following ways Use the online Conta
515. steps 1 Open the System window 2 Click the Pools function icon 3 Click Internal Storage as shown in Figure 7 1 soe Figure 7 1 Internal Storage Details accessed from the Pools icon 308 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 7 1 1 Internal Storage window The Internal Storage window as shown in Figure 7 2 provides an overview of the internal drives that are installed in the IBM Storwize V3700 storage system 1 Selecting All Internal under the Drive Class Filter shows all of the drives that are installed in the managed system including attached expansion enclosures Alternatively you can filter the drives by their type or class For example you can choose to show only Enterprise drive class serial attached Small Computer System Interface SCSI called S45 Nearline SAS NL SAS or flash drives ease Ca ERARE At itera 278 GB Enterpise GID Enterprise 1516 GIB Enterprise m D mamae sme 1 a EC c NN ee Figure 7 2 Internal storage window the right side of the Internal Storage window the selected type of internal disk drives are listed By default the following information is also listed Logical Drive ID Drive capacity Current type of use unused candidate member spare or failed Status online offline or degraded MDisk name that the drive is a member of Enclosure ID that it is installed in Sl
516. storage system implements flexible resynchronization support which enables it to resynchronize volume pairs that experienced write I Os to both volumes and to resynchronize only those regions that are known to have changed Global Mirror with Change Volumes should have Change Volumes defined for the master and auxiliary volumes v v v v Remote Copy configuration limits Table 10 4 lists the Remote Copy configuration limits Table 10 4 Remote Copy configuration limits Parameter Value Number of Remote Copy consistency groups per cluster 256 Number of Remote Copy relationships per consistency group No limit beyond the Remote Copy relationships per system Number of Remote Copy relationships per O Group 2 048 4 096 per system Total Remote Copy volume capacity per I O Group 1024 terabytes TB This limit is the total capacity for all master and auxiliary volumes in the VO group SAN planning for Remote Copy In this section we describe some guidelines that can be used for SAN planning for Remote Copy Zoning recommendation Node canister ports on each IBM Storwize V3700 must communicate with each other so that the partnership can be created These ports must be visible to each other on your SAN Proper switch zoning is critical to facilitating inter cluster communication 526 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The following SAN zoning recommendation should be considered gt For each
517. switches and configure host attachment on the Storwize V3700 On VMware ESXi 5 5 these can be found using the VMware vSphere Client Note In VMware ESXi 5 5 some new features can only be accessed through the vSphere web client However we do not demonstrate any of these features so this and all of the following examples continue to focus on using the desktop client To determine the host WWPNs complete the following steps 1 Connect to the ESXi server or VMware vCenter using the VMware vSphere Client 2 Browse to the Configuration tab HBA WWPNs are listed under Storage Adapters as shown in Figure 4 11 Figure 4 11 FC WWPNs in VMware vSphere Client These are the basic steps required to prepare a VMware ESXi 5 5 host for FC attachment We provide more information later in this book Chapter 4 Host configuration 165 4 2 5 VMware ESXi 5 5 Preparing for iSCSI attachment 166 Installing and updating supported HBAs Install a supported HBA model with the current firmware and drivers for your configuration 1 Determine the current supported HBAs and levels for VMware ESXi 5 5 which are available on the following website http www ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S1004388 2 Install the driver using VMware vSphere Client the ESXi CLI or vendor tools 3 Also check and update the HBA firmware level using the manufacturer s provided tools 4 Always check the readne file to see whether there is furthe
518. t 60 86400 gt command If a copy does not complete in the cycle period the next cycle does not start until the prior cycle completes It is for this reason that the use of Change Volumes gives you the following possibilities for RPO gt If your replication completes in the cycling period your is twice the cycling period gt It your replication does not complete within the cycling period your RPO is twice the completion time The next cycling period starts immediately after the prior period is finished Careful consideration should be given to balancing your business requirements with the performance of Global Mirror with Change Volumes Global Mirror with Change Volumes increases the inter cluster traffic for more frequent cycling periods so going as short possible is not always the answer In most cases the default should meet your requirements and perform reasonably well Important When Global Mirror volumes with Change Volumes are used make sure that you remember to select the Change Volume on the auxiliary target site Failure to do so leaves you exposed during a resynchronization operation The GUI automatically creates Change Volumes for you However itis a limitation of this initial release that they are fully provisioned volumes To save space you should create thin provisioned volumes in advance and use the Existing Volume option to select your Change Volumes Remote Copy consistency groups A consistency gr
519. t can fl the system restart or he natar hanse ves o ecomocz w a target Viren evecmg to n target advanced comestin teatres alon ecse contro ota perder nss anaon Gp Toney rues kk Cha To set the mater CHAP secret for wth mutual CHAP En Tosetup the IPsec tunel made addresses far heats desc To generate repro al comeced targets ard deves on ess docteur Figure 4 6 Configuring the iSCSI Initiator 4 Make a note of the Initiator Name This is the iSCSI Qualified Name IQN for the host which is required for configuring iSCSI host attachment on the IBM Storwize V3700 The ION identifies the host in the same way that WWPNs identify an FC or SAS host From the Configuration tab it is possible to change the Initiator Name enable Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP authentication and more However these tasks are beyond the scope of our basic setup CHAP authentication is disabled by default For more information Microsoft has published a detailed guide about configuring the iSCSI Initiator on the following website http technet microsoft com en us 1ibrary ee338476 28v ws 10 29 aspx Chapter 4 Host configuration 157 158 Configuring Ethernet ports Itis advised to use separate dedicated ports for host management and iSCSI In this case we need to configure IPs on the iSCSI ports in the same subnet and VLAN as the external storage to which want to attach To config
520. t start copying Figure 10 105 Choose if you want to start copying now or later Chapter 10 Copy services 545 9 After the Remote Copy relationships creation completes two independent Remote relationships are defined and displayed in the Not in a Group list as shown in Figure 10 106 sistency Group prr qm Senso oa Imeonsistent Copying inconsistent Copying as Vatu emoteSourced Se a Hemotelarget Remotetarget Figure 10 106 Creating a Remote Copy relationship process completes 546 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 10 Optionally you can monitor the ongoing initial synchronization in the Running Tasks status indicator as shown in Figure 10 107 Taser Volume Auxiliary Volume E Inconsistent Copying RemoteSoureed emote Tart rren inconsistent copying Remotesoueet RencteTaett cem inconsistent Copying Remotesource Remotetaraet reren Unconestent Copying Remotesourees RemoteTanges inconsistent Copying NemoteSoureet Qu Figure 10 107 Remote copy initialization progress through Running Tasks 11 Highlight one of the operations and click to see the progress as shown in Figure 10 108 System ITS0_V3700 volume RernotoSource System ITS System ITS0_V3700 volume Remotesource2 System ITS System ITSO_V3700 volume RemateSource System IS System IT 0_V3700 volume Remo
521. t starts by default using the original primary volumes from when it was stopped Attention If you are starting a Consistency Group where access was previously allowed to auxiliary volumes when the group was stopped ensure that you choose the correct volumes to act as the Primary volumes when you restart Failing to do so might lead to loss of data 568 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Start Remote Consistency Group x Select ine primary source volumes for remote copy consistency RedbookGroup Masteris primary Auxiliary is primary emere Figure 10 139 Confirming replication direction Switching a consistency group As with the switch action on the Remote Copy relationship you can switch the copy direction of the consistency group 1 Click Switch from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 140 Ta ite e Create Consistency Group Create Reitonemp Volime Waster Vali prized RemoteBourceo RencteTaret aS RemoteTarget wonized 50 02100 150 Vio EE RemoteTarget Senso Se ee ed Figure 10 140 Switch the copy direction of a consistency group Chapter 10 Copy services 569 2 Awarning message opens as shown in Figure 10 141 After the switch the primary volumes in the consistency group change Write access to current master volumes is lost while write access to the current auxiliary volumes is enabled This change
522. t volume Metro Mirror Metro Mirror is a type of Remote Copy that creates a synchronous copy of data from a master volume to an auxiliary volume With synchronous copies host applications write to the master volume but do not receive confirmation that the write operation completed until the data is written to the auxiliary volume This action ensures that both volumes have identical data when the copy completes After the initial copy completes the Metro Mirror function always maintains a fully synchronized copy of the source data at the target site Figure 10 76 shows how a write to the master volume is mirrored to the cache of the auxiliary volume before an acknowledgment of the write is sent back to the host that issued the write This process ensures that the auxiliary is synchronized in real time if situation Host mwne 3 Ack Write Cache 2 Mirror Write Metro Mirror Relationship Figure 10 76 Write on volume in a Metro Mirror relationship The Metro Mirror function supports copy operations between volumes that are separated by distances up to 300 kilometers km For disaster recovery purposes Metro Mirror provides the simplest way to maintain an identical copy on the primary and secondary volumes However as with all synchronous copies over remote distances there can be a performance effect to host applications This performance effect is related to the distance between primary
523. tarts rescan of the FC network and SAS connections It discovers any new MDisks that were recently mapped to the IBM Storwize V3700 352 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Change Icon There are several Storage Pool icons available that can be selected as shown in Figure 7 64 These icons can be used to differentiate between different storage tier RAID level or types of drives Change Icon for V3 U Pools Icon Figure 7 64 Change Storage Pool icon Rename The Storage Pool can be renamed at any time as shown in Figure 7 65 Ranamo Pool Figure 7 65 Rename Storage Pool Chapter 7 Storage Pools 353 354 Delete A pool can be deleted using the GUI only if there are no volumes assigned to it A pane displays to confirm that all associated MDisks will be removed and the associated drives will become candidate drives as shown in Figure 7 66 Delete Parent Pont 03 x A 1 MDiske will be removed 1 Drives will become candidate drives Do you want to continue Figure 7 66 Confirmation to delete the Storage Pool Through the CLI you can delete a Storage Pool and all of its contents using the force parameter However all of the volumes and host mappings are deleted without being able to recover them Important After you delete the pool through the CLI all data that is stored in the pool is lost except for the image mode
524. tate as the Consistency Group to which you want to add them Chapter 10 Copy services 565 Stopping a consistency group The Remote Copy relationship can be stopped by completing the following steps 1 Highlight the consistency group and click Stop from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 135 or right click the consistency group create Consistency Group Crete Relationship HemcteSonreet emote Tart emctssoureot HemoteTargot arso vano rso HemcteSonreez emote Target omoteSoures3 HemoteTargo Qin 8 asm Figure 10 135 Stopping a consistency group 2 You are asked if you want to allow read write access to secondary volumes as shown in Figure 10 136 Make your choice and then click Stop Consistency Group Stop Remote Copy Consistency Group x Do you want to allow readiwrite access to the secondary Nolumes for remote copy consistency group RedbookGroup when stopping ine group Atow secondary readivirite access Figure 10 136 Allowing read write access when stopping a consistency group 566 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 The Consistency Group is now in the Consistent Stopped state if you chose not to allow read write access or in the Idling state if you chose to allow access as shown in Figure 10 137 Crente Consistency Group aster Volume uriliar Volume Consistent Synehronited Remote Soureed FemoteTareto Consistent synenroniea R
525. te copy relationships right click anywhere in the blue bar Creating stand alone Remote Copy relationships Important Before a remote copy relationship can be created target volumes that are the same size as the source volumes that you want to mirror must be created For more information about creating volumes see Chapter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 To create a Remote Copy relationship complete the following steps 1 Click Create Relationship from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 98 A wizard opens and guides you through the Remote Copy relationship creation process Create Consistency Group Create Relations h Relationship er Q i Figure 10 98 Creating a remote copy relationship 542 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 Next as shown Figure 10 99 you set the Remote Copy relationship type You select Metro Mirror synchronous replication or one of the two forms of Global Mirror asynchronous replication Select the appropriate replication type based on your requirements and click Next Create Relationship x Select the type of relationships that you want to create iri Metro Mirror gd Global Mirror with Change Volumes Figure 10 99 Select the appropriate Remote Copy type 3 You must select where your auxiliary target volumes are The local system The already defined second stor
526. te the following steps 1 Click Fibre Channel Host The Fibre Channel host configuration wizard opens as shown in Figure 4 34 Add Host x Host me xen T Fibre Channel Porte rere EER Advanced Settings HostType Generic defaut HPIUX Openvms TGs Figure 4 34 The FC host configuration wizard 182 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 Enter a descriptive Host Name and click the Fibre Channel Ports drop down menu to view a list of all FC WWPNSs visible to the system as shown in Figure 4 35 Add Host x HostName optional Fibre Chenne Porte a TETE zwowuezemo 21000024FF2D0CC2 SN Ne porem NILZN Figure 4 35 FC WWPNSs visible to the system 3 If you have previously prepared an FC host as described in Chapter 4 2 Preparing the host operating system on page 151 the WWPNs you recorded in this section should display 4 If they do not display in the list verify that you have completed all of the required steps check your SAN zoning and cabling Click Rescan in the configuration wizard Important It is possible to enter WWPNs manually However if these are not visible to IBM Storwize V3700 the host object shows as offline and is unusable for I O operations until the ports become visible Chapter 4 Host configuration 183 5 Select the WWPNs for your host and click Add Port to List for each These will be added
527. teSources System ITS System ITS0_V3700 volume Remotesourcet system ITS Figure 10 108 Running task expanded to show the percentage complete of each copy operation Chapter 10 Copy services 547 Stopping a stand alone Remote Copy relationship The Remote Copy relationship can be stopped by completing the following steps 1 Selectthe relationship and click Stop from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 109 Seres Consistoncy Grows 1 Aetons LG kr o Create Consistency Group Croato Roationctio Tuskan Volume Bac to Consnency Group LEES RemoteTarget start RemateSoureet emote target mm gt memotelargotz Swen BemoteTagets Rename mac DolctoR itoncti emRSR Figure 10 109 Stop Remote Copy relationship 2 A prompt displays Click to Allow secondary read write acces click Stop Relationship as shown in Figure 10 110 if required and then Stop Remote Relationship x Do you want to allow access to the secondary volume when stopping remote copy relationship Allow secondary readiwnte access Figure 10 110 Option to allow secondary read write access 548 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 After the stop completes the state of the Remote Copy relationship is changed to Inconsistent Stopped if it is stil in the process of copying as shown in Figure 10 111 If the relationship was Consistent Synchronized it change
528. ted to the event log All events are classified as alerts or messages An alert is logged when the event requires action Some alerts have an associated error code that defines the service action that is required The service actions are automated through the fix procedures If the alert does not have an error code the alert represents an unexpected change in state This situation must be investigated to see whether it is expected or represents a failure Investigate an alert and resolve it when itis reported A message is logged when a change that is expected is reported for instance an IBM FlashCopy operation completes Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Open the event log pane from the GUI by clicking Monitoring Events Figure 11 57 Actions Figure 11 57 Opening the Events pane Figure 11 58 shows the event log p rer 2 eg pom Sacer cre contortion changes compie Fan vane ul Menge Saco rug canes png 8 amissam eve oo mamie una SCP ces one SAS cover osoare no conten changes wee etod u o abducoe cured eur canes compte n 2 sana ra aser oranges penama eo Araya es et mas Quen Juni ovt protect bi aufer speres Figure 11 58 The event log view 11 5 1 Managing the event log The event log features a size li
529. tem Storage DS3200 to the Storwize V3700 host group definition The task is 10 complete complexes Figure 6 42 Discover Devices task Chapter 6 Storage migration 283 Migrating MDisks To migrate the MDisks perform the following steps 1 Inthe next step of the wizard select the MDisks that are to be migrated and then click Next to continue Hold the Ctrl key down while clicking MDisks to highlight more than one MDisk for migration Figure 6 43 shows the Migrating MDisks pane Figure 6 43 Migrating MDisks pane MDisk selection Select only the MDisks that are applicable to the current migration plan After the current migration completes another migration plan can be started to migrate any remaining MDisks 284 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 The Storwize 3700 runs the Import MDisks task After the task is complete click Close to continue Figure 6 44 shows the result of the Import MDisks task Task completed 100 The task az 765 complete p zez cuna auno morning comand sqyocaek rio iogrp io miak msi 1 Bt Migeasscndsol 6192 nane 0000000000000003 symaraze Figure 6 44 Import MDisks task Chapter 6 Storage migration 285 Configure hosts Optional This step is optional You can bypass it by selecting Next and moving to volumes to hosts on page 291
530. ter 5 Volume configuration on page 199 to create volumes and map them to the hosts 198 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Volume configuration This chapter describes how to use the IBM Storwize V3700 to create and map volumes A volume is a logical disk on the IBM Storwize V3700 that is provisioned out of a Storage Pool Mappings are defined in IBM Storwize V3700 between volumes and host objects at which point the storage is ready to be used by the host operating systems OSs For information about preparing host OSs and creating host objects in IBM Storwize V3700 see Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 The first part of this chapter describes how to create volumes of different types and map them to host objects in IBM Storwize V3700 The second part of this chapter describes how to discover these volumes from the host OS After completing this chapter your basic configuration is complete and you can begin to store and access data on the IBM Storwize V3700 For information about advanced volume administration such as reconfiguring settings for existing volumes see Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration on page 359 This chapter includes the following topics Creating volumes in IBM Storwize V3700 Mapping volumes to hosts gt Discovering mapped volumes from host systems Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 199 5 1 Creating volumes in IBM Storwize V3700 This section d
531. ter 6 Storage migration 271 4 Unpack the file to your host server and run the setup file as shown in Figure 6 27 When prompted type yes to install the device driver Em ARTE OCT n I DODAS SENS AROS WT SRO aT x x Deere rm Wen Fla E n impinge in pe a pre rr t Figure 6 27 Installing IBM SDDDSM Windows 2012 5 Inthis case MPIO is already installed so only the DSM is needed When complete the installation prompts you to reboot your host to activate the new device driver as shown in Figure 6 28 hie setup will install Subsystom Device Driver DSM on your machine fantinue to install Yes No ues Setup is installing Subsystem Device Driver P10 already enabled Dolnotallation ie installing IBM Specific Modulo Updating Device ROOTSMPIOSABBI 1 Devices installed Post Installing DoInstallation finished DDDSH installotion upgrade is completed For setup to take effect lease wehont your cysten Do you want to restart your system now Yes Hol Figure 6 28 SDDDSM installation complete Windows 2012 272 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 Type yes to reboot your host and activate the driver When the system restarts go into the Server Manager Dashboard select Tools gt MPIO and view the MPIO drivers as shown in Figure 6 29 MPIO De
532. terprise 10K chives 278 30 GB Erterre 15K em arves 55 Ib Nearne 7200 rem GB Erterorse 10K pm Use the recommended configuration Select this option to configure available drives based on recommended values for the RAID level and drive class The recommended configuration uses al the drives to build arrays that are protected with the appropriate amount of spare drives Select a different configuration Drive Class 22 278 30 GB Enterprise 10 rom 278 00 GiB Enterprise 15K rom 465 28 Gs Nearme 7200 rpm 837 88 GB Erterprise 10 rom 1 Preset 9 E Figure 7 29 Select drive class for new configuration Chapter 7 Storage Pools 329 2 Click Next and select the appropriated RAID preset as shown in Figure 7 30 x Configure Internal Storage Use this wizardto allocato RAID arrays to pools Aftor this Configuration wizard completes you can creato volumos Jy fremthese pools Storage Found Q8 tives 278 90 Erterpise 10K 278 90 GE Ertervise 15K rpm 1 aves 465 25 IB Nearine 7200 rem Cd 857 66 GIB Enters 10K pr Use the recommended configuration Select this option to configure all available drives based on recommended values or the RAID level and drive class The recommended configuration uses all the drives to build arrays that are protected with the appropriate amo
533. the Copied state 508 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Removing FlashCopy mappings from a consistency group FlashCopy mappings can be removed from a consistency group by completing the following steps 1 Select the FlashCopy mappings 2 Click Remove from Consistency Group from the Actions drop down menu of the FlashCopy mapping or right click as shown in Figure 10 63 T EINE Progress PEE inser es remoonconsetsroup Copying Flesh Time Nov 5 2014 2 58 28 PME Temap Copying Epig rermoonconsitsrouno Stopped Croato Consictoncy Group Remove trom Consistency Group do _ morus Figure 10 63 Remove from consistency group The FlashCopy mappings are returned to the Not in a Group list after they are removed from the consistency group Chapter 10 Copy services 509 Deleting a consistency group A consistency group can be deleted by completing the following steps 1 Click Delete from the Actions menu or right click the selected group as shown in Figure 10 64 scires Vane Target Valine Eg ig tectonic Create Comino Create FlashCopy Mapping Temapa E eS ak H E CITUR ed Figure 10 64 Delete consistency group 2 You are presented with confirmation pane as shown in Figure 10 65 Warning x The FlashCopy consistency group RedbockConsistGroup will be deleted Do you want to
534. ther Storage Pool The IBM Storwize V3700 supports online volume migration while applications are running Using volume migration volumes can be moved between Storage Pools The migration process is a low priority task One extent is moved at a time and the migration has a slight effect on performance Important To migrate a volume the source and target Storage Pool must have the same extent size For more information about extent size see Chapter 1 Overview of the IBM Storwize V3700 system on page 1 Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 393 To migrate a volume to another Storage Pool complete the following steps 1 Select Migrate to Another Pool from the Actions menu The Migrate Volume Copy pane opens 2 If the volume consists of more than one copy you are asked which copy you want to migrate to another Storage Pool as shown in Figure 8 50 If the selected volume consists of only one copy this option does not display Notice that the Win2012 Vol 01 volume has two copies stored in two different Storage Pools The Storage Pools to which they belong are shown in parentheses Figure 8 50 Migrate Volume 3 Select the new target Storage Pool and click Migrate 4 The volume migration starts as shown in Figure 8 51 Click Close to return to the Volumes pane grate Volume Copy Task 1008 Figure 8 51 Migrate Volume Copy
535. tiered pool the extents are migrated dynamically by the Easy Tier processes to achieve the best performance The movement is not apparent to the host server and applications A statistic summary file is created and can be offloaded and analyzed with the IBM STAT as described in 9 7 IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool on page 446 Easy Tier can be turned on for any single tier or multitiered pool Easy Tier Measured When Easy Tier is in measured mode it means Easy Tier measures the I O activity for all extents but does not move any extents in the Storage Pool A statistic summary file is created and can be offloaded from the IBM Storwize V3700 This file can be analyzed with the IBM STAT This analysis shows the benefits to your workload if you were to add or remove a different drive class to or from your pool before any actual hardware is acquired No license is required to have Easy Tier set to measured mode Chapter 9 IBM Easy Tier 427 Easy Tier Auto This is the operating mode default When you have Easy Tier set to on a single tiered Storage Pool Easy Tier is disabled for all volumes inside the Storage Pool and no extents are moved If you have Easy Tier set to auto on a multitiered Storage Pool Easy Tier becomes active for all volumes inside the Storage Pool and the extents are migrated dynamically by the EasyTier process This scenario is similar to Easy Tier being set to on but the extents are not migrated acr
536. tile scel dau Export to CSV 27890638 Candidate GE E Do this automaticaly for les like this from new on a 2749068 Candide v 25 asce Conse 2 81788618 Candidate anscia v EI Come Figure 3 28 Saving intemal storage data 3 3 Status Indicators menus This section provides more information about the horizontal bars that are shown at the bottom of the management GUI panes The bars are status indicators and include associated bar menus This section describes the Capacity allocation Running Tasks and Health Status bar menus 3 3 1 Allocated Virtual Capacity status bar menu The Allocated Virtual Capacity status bar shows the capacity status 1 Hover over the image of two arrows on the right side of this status bar to see a description of the capacity allocation that is in use Figure 3 29 shows the comparison of the used capacity to the real capacity Figure 3 29 The Allocated Virtual Capacity bar that compares used capacity to real capacity 2 To change the capacity comparison click the Allocated Virtual status bar This toggles between Allocated and Virtual Figure 3 30 shows the new comparison of virtual capacity to real capacity Figure 3 30 Changing the Allocated Virtual comparison virtual capacity to real capacity Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 89 3 3 2 Runni
537. ting active images of the externally attached LUs and is acting as a proxy 5 The hosts must have the existing storage system multipath device driver removed and then be configured for Storwize V3700 attachment Further zoning or SAS connectivity changes are made for host to V3700 SAN connections The Storwize V3700 hosts are defined with worldwide port names WWPNS and the volumes are mapped to the hosts After the volumes are mapped the hosts discover the Storwize V3700 volumes through a host rescan or restart operation 6 Storwize V3700 volume mirror operations are then initiated The image mode volumes are mirrored to generic volumes The mirrors are online migration tasks which means a defined host can still access and use the volumes during the mirror synchronization process 7 After the mirror operations are complete the volume mirror relationships and the image mode volumes are removed The external storage system LUs are now migrated and the now redundant external storage can be retired or reused elsewhere Restriction If you are going to be migrating volumes from another IBM Storwize product be aware that the target Storwize unit needs to be configured at the Replication layer in order for the source to discover the target system as a host The default layer setting for Storwize V3700 is Storage If this Replication layer configuration is not done it will not be possible to add the target system as a host on the source st
538. tion you wart te connect te Lian Host Name or IF adress Fot ae 917415448 2 Connacton pe O Raw C Tehet Rogn E oponen Land save ordei a stared session Saved Sessions Selection REND Colas es Stings Comecon iD Data Pry Tenet Rogn E DES Seral mr Open Ced Figure A 13 Save Session 658 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 11 Highlight the new session and click Open to connect to the IBM Storwize V3700 system 12 PUTTY now connects to the system and prompts you for a user name Enter admin as the user name and press Enter see Example 1 Example 1 Enter user name login as superuser Authenticating with public key rsa key 20130521 Last login Tue May 21 15 21 55 2013 from 9 174 219 143 IBM Storwize ITSO V3700 superuser The CLI is now configured for IBM Storwize V3700 administration Example commands A detailed description about all of the available commands is beyond the intended scope of this book Therefore we reference some sample commands used elsewhere in this book The svcinfo and svctask prefixes are no longer needed in IBM Storwize V3700 If you have scripts that use this prefix they still run without problems but aren t necessary If you enter svcinfo or svctask and press the Tab key twice of the available subcommands are listed Pressing the Tab key twice also auto completes commands if the input i
539. to create zones or SAS connections between the Storwize V3700 and the external storage However you must already have done this before you start the wizard See Prepare the environment for migration on page 264 and Map storage on page 278 for a list of instructions to complete before starting the data migration wizard Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 6 14 shows the error message indicating that no external controllers could be found d Figure 6 14 Error message displayed when no externally attached storage controllers are found 8 If there are both FC attached and SAS attached external storage systems that the IBM Storwize V3700 can see the wizard progresses with a choice of migrating an Fibre Channel or SAS host as shown in Figure 6 15 pn Select me noe of reo ba set Figure 6 15 Choosing FC or SAS attached storage for migration We have chosen SAS because in our example we are migrating from an external IBM 053200 system This choice does not display if there is only type of attached external storage Chapter 6 Storage migration 261 Before you begin The Before You Begin pane of the Storage Migration wizard describes the restrictions and prerequisites for the wizard to complete successfully as shown in Figure 6 16 ne tosowns toes hosts cannot be irte usino ware because adtonar stes are reaures tam notmgratng ness mang Ctr or Vivam posts VOS
540. torage Manager GUI and continue creating the Storwize V3700 hosts Click Next to add the host to a new host group as shown in Figure 6 33 In this example call the host group ITS0_V3700 pne m E seno ce ilem f n ge E Contigure Hest Access Manual Spscity Host Group tate ecto Figure 6 33 Adding host to host group Storage Manager GUI 8 Click Next and a confirmation window opens If everything is correct click Finish to create the host and add it to the host group as shown in Figure 6 34 roc p esf ie prr E Contiaure Host Access manuei contr Host Figure 6 34 Confirming host creation Storage Manager GUI The wizard completes and prompts you whether a second host needs to be created Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 9 Click Yes and follow the steps from Figure 6 31 on page 275 to Figure 6 33 on page 276 When adding the second host to a host group this time select an existing host group as shown in Figure 6 35 f ues gt Creat Acer nad E Specity Host aroup m Figure 6 35 Adding second host to existing host group Storage Manager GUI 10 Click Next and Finish to complete the task This time select No when prompted to create further hosts Configure the storage system for use with the Storwize V3700 To configure the storage system complete the following steps 1 Rec
541. torage system docs not alow you to restrict Volume access to specific hosts al volumes onthe system must be migrated Conngure me strage system tor use th iis system m Figure 6 19 Instructions to prepare the migration environment FC attached storage 3 For this example there is SAS attached storage so you must complete the following steps Stop host operations or stop all O to volumes that are being migrated b Update host device drivers including the multipath driver and configure them for attachment to the IBM Storwize V3700 Create a host or host group in the external storage system with the WWPNs for the Storwize V3700 system d Configure the storage system for use with the Storwize V3700 Chapter 6 Storage migration 265 266 Stop host operations or stop all I O to volumes that are being migrated To stop host operations or volume I O complete the following steps 1 To stop host I O stop all of the applications using the volumes and set them offline From the Windows 2012 Server Manager Dashboard select Tools Computer Management Storage Disk Management as shown in Figure 6 20 Acton View e ar image B Copt Management cal Vou Bec NES Healthy look Page Fig Crh Dump O TaskSchedler HA EN US DVS D Simple Baic Primary Paton H Eent Vier Cinese Simple Boie NTFS Hey Primary Parttio
542. tus bar and selecting the initialization task to view the status as shown in Figure 7 27 Shr Array Member Operation 2min Array ritiolizations amin Recently Completed Tasks Figure 7 27 Running task pane 8 Click the taskbar to open the progress window as shown in Figure 7 28 The array is available for I O during this process however performance is affected until the initialization task has completed x Name Progress Time Remaining Li Array maiek 322 Array maise _ 3 im ey maiers D Any masia om Array maiers ES 3 as masks 2 Figure 7 28 Initialization progress view 328 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The Select a different configuration option offers more flexible way to configure the internal storage as compared to the Use the recommended configuration preset in terms of drive selection RAID level and Storage Pool to be used Only one drive class RAID configuration can be allocated at a time Complete the following steps to select a different configuration 1 Choose drive class The drive class selection list contains each drive class available for configuration as shown in Figure 7 29 Conngure Internal Storage x Use this wizard to allocate RAID arrays fo pools After this Configuration wizard completos you can create volumes L2 DB fromthese pools Storage Found 28 dives 27880 IB Er
543. u Click Move to Consistency Group to continue Move FlashCopy Mapping to Consistency Group x Select me Fiasncopy consistency group to which to move FlashCopy mapping rcmapz Consistency Group RedbookConsistGroun Figure 10 58 Select consistency group Atter the action completes you find that the FlashCopy mappings you selected were removed from the Not In a Group list to the consistency group that you chose Starting a consistency group To start a consistency group complete the following steps 1 Highlight the required group and click Start from the Actions menu or right click the consistency group as shown in Figure 10 59 Mapping Target Volume rrr m Source Volome Epo reonoconsirean Copia Flash Nov 5 204 2 5820 Pt un ems Tempe necem emekcosstosen idle or Copt cum Bw create Consistency Group G3 Create Fiasncopy Mapping Geiss oe Qo e Qmm Figure 10 59 Start a consistency group Chapter 10 Copy services 505 2 After you start the consistency group all of the FlashCopy mappings in the consistency group start at the same time The state of the consistency group and all of the underlying mappings changes to Copying as shown in Figure 10 60 create Consistency Group iter n Volume Target cm P XL
544. u decide that you do want to use any of these relationships but you do want to create other relationships click Next 558 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 However if you choose relationships and then decide that you do not want any of them you cannot remove them from the consistency group at this stage You must stop the wizard and start again as shown in Figure 10 125 Create Consistency Group x Soloctorkting lations ips to ada to te group oponar Now relationships can bo cruatud and addod to the group on tho naxt panel reet emoteSourced RemoteTarget vam TrSO Remotesourcet RemoteTorgett vro Remotesoursez Remotetaraet2 so van vam Teen Remotosoureos RemoteTaraets varoo vam roren emotescurset Romoterargott vare vam Figure 10 125 Selecting existing relationships 9 The next window is optional and gives the option to create new relationships to add to the consistency group as shown in Figure 10 126 Select the master and auxiliary volumes for new remote copy relationships to add to the consistency group optional Master Auxiliary Figure 10 126 Adding new relationships in the consistency group wizard 10 Select the relevant Master and Auxiliary volumes for the relationship that you want to create and click Add Multiple relationships can be defined by selecting another Master a
545. ubnet mask and gateway for Port 2 of Node 1 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 6 The port should now be listed as Configured as shown in Figure 4 51 Figure 4 51 Showing configured port 7 Right click the configured port again This time the options that were previously disabled should now be available To confirm that the port is enabled for iSCSI click Modify iSCSI Hosts 8 The window shown in Figure 4 52 should open If the port is not enabled do so using the drop down box and click Modify to confirm Modify SCSiHosts x IPA iSCSI hosts Enabied IPyo iSCSI hosts Disabled ne Figure 4 52 Enabling an Ethernet port for iSCSI host attachment 9 To modify VLAN settings right click the port again and click Modify VLAN Chapter 4 Host configuration 193 10 The window shown in Figure 4 53 should open Check Enable to turn tagging and set the tag in the box provided It is advised that the failover port belong to the same VLAN so leave this box selected Click Modify to confirm Modify VLAN for port 2 on Node 1 VLAN Enable V Apply change to the failover port too Figure 4 53 Modifying VLAN settings for Port 2 of Node 1 11 Repeat the previous steps for all ports that need to be configured 12 It is also possible to configure iSCSI aliases an iSNS and CHAP authentication These options are in the iSCSI view To
546. ume Unique lentor acting HOG FE 2 o a FiashCopyvoiz rc Fasncopy vio sc spstooE amp oirsSooeboo o Gelso oa Qin Qus Figure 8 36 Host mappings The Host Mapping pane shows a list of mapped hosts and volumes along with their respective SCSI ID and Volume Unique Identifier UID Figure 8 36 shows the host Windows2012_FC has four mapped volumes FlashCopyVol0 1 2 and 6 and the associated SCSI ID 1 2 and 0 Volume Name UID and Caching I O Group ID 2 As shown in Figure 8 37 select a mapping and open the Actions menu to open the following options Unmap Volumes Properties Host Properties Volume ua d da Propertes Vonmo FlashCopy Voie 6905076000EB01F5B000000000900009 T IU p nit dcm oe Figure 8 37 Host mapping actions If multiple mappings are selected by holding the Ctrl or Shift keys only the Volumes option is available Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 383 8 3 1 Unmap Volumes To volumes complete the following steps 1 Select one or more mappings 2 From the Actions menu Select Unmap Volumes 3 Enter the number of mappings to be removed as shown in Figure 8 38 and click The mappings for all selected entries are removed Delete Mappings You
547. und process and might take some time depending on the volume size Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 411 3 You can check the status in the Running Tasks window shown in Figure 8 75 2Volume Repairs x N Vol C VIr20 2 Vol copy o Figure 8 75 Validate Volume Copies Running Tasks 8 6 4 Duplicate Volume option To make an exact copy of an existing volume copy complete the following steps 1 After selecting a volume copy click Duplicate Volume as shown in Figure 8 67 on page 407 2 Enter a name for the duplicate volume and click Duplicate to apply the change as shown Figure 8 76 Dupkcate Volume x Enter the new name 2_ Vol 08 Figure 8 76 Create a duplicate volume 8 6 5 Delete Volume Copy option To delete a volume copy complete the following steps 1 Click Delete as shown in Figure 8 67 on page 407 to delete a volume copy The copy is deleted but the volume remains online by using the remaining copy 412 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 Confirm the deletion process by clicking Yes Figure 8 77 shows the copy deletion Warning pane Waring x By copy 1 Irom volume Win20t2 Vol 02 Figure 8 77 Delete a copy 3 After the copy is deleted click Close to return to the Volumes pane 8 6 6 Migrating volumes by using the volume copy features In the previous sections
548. unt of spare drives 5 Select a diferent canfiguration Drive Class Preset Figure 7 30 Select the RAID preset 3 Define the RAID attributes including the following selections Configuration of spares Optimization for performance Optimization for capacity Number of drives to provision Each IBM Storwize V3700 preset has a specific goal for the number of drives per array For more information see the IBM Storwize V3700 Information Center on the following website https ibm biz BdEz7J Table 7 3 shows the RAID goal widths Table 7 3 RAID goal width RAID level Enterprise goal width Flash goal width 0 8 8 5 8 9 6 12 10 10 8 8 330 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The following RAID configurations are available Optimize for Performance Optimizing for performance creates arrays with the same capacity and performance characteristics The RAID goal width as shown in Table 7 3 must be met for this target In a performance optimized setup the IBM Storwize V3700 provisions eight physical disk drives in a single array MDisk except for the following situations RAID 6 uses 12 disk drives Flash Easy Tier uses two disk drives Therefore creating an Optimized for Performance configuration is only possible if there are enough drives available to match your needs As a consequence all arrays with similar physical disks feature the same performance character
549. uration 5 Storage Pool assignment Choose whether an existing pool must be expanded or whether a pool is to be created for the configuration as shown in Figure 7 35 Configure Internal Storage Preset RAD S Expand an existing pool Create one or more new pools Figure 7 35 Storage Pool selection Chapter 7 Storage Pools 333 Complete the following steps to expand or create a pool Expand an existing pool When an existing pool is to be expanded you can select an existing Storage Pool that does not contain MDisks or a pool that contains MDisks with the same performance characteristics which is listed automatically as shown in Figure 7 36 Configure Inernat Storage Prasat D ruo Expand an existing pool _RsPeot Create more new pools k Figure 7 36 List of matching Storage Pool 334 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 b Create one or more pools Alternatively a Storage Pool is created by entering the required name as shown in Figure 7 37 Congre Imernat Storage preset zd uos Create one or more new pools Pool Hame or Profix Warring Threshold Pyme CE C Figure 7 37 Create new pool All drives are initialized when the Configuration wizard is finished Chapter 7 Storage Pools 335 7 2 6 MDisk by Pools pane The MDisks by Pools pane as shown in Figure 7 38 displays
550. ure 10 95 Restarting a partnership Deleting a partnership You can delete a partnership by selecting Delete from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 93 on page 539 10 4 2 Managing stand alone Remote Copy relationships Remote Copy relationship can be defined between two volumes where one is the master source and the other one is the auxiliary target volume Use of Remote Copy auxiliary volumes as Remote Copy master volumes is not allowed manage stand alone Remote Copy relationships complete the following steps 1 Open the Remote Copy window to manage Remote Copy by clicking the Copy Services icon and then clicking Remote Copy as shown in Figure 10 96 on page 541 540 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 10 96 Open Remote Copy window The Remote Copy window is where management of Remote Copy relationships and Remote Copy consistency groups is carried out as shown in Figure 10 97 ame sas Mac Volume a Aua Volume FGF unam nbg Figure 10 97 Remote Copy window Chapter 10 Copy services 541 2 The Remote Copy window displays a list of Remote Copy consistency groups You can also take actions on the Remote Copy relationships and Remote Copy consistency groups Click Not in a Group and all the Remote Copy relationships that are not in any Remote Copy consistency groups are displayed 3 To customize the blue column heading bar and select different attributes of Remo
551. ure 3 119 Information pane 3 5 4 Hidden question mark help The IBM Storwize V3700 provides a hidden question mark help feature for some settings and items found in various configuration panes Access this help feature by hovering next to an item where a question mark is shown A help bubble is displayed as shown in Figure 3 120 Poot Mame EnsyTer Feo state 9 capacity Volume Count 21 Figure 3 120 Hidden question mark help 146 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 3 5 5 Hover help The IBM Storwize V3700 provides hidden help tags shown when hovering over various functions and items as shown in Figure 3 121 All Internal 3 DEE Nano Ln Figure 3 121 Hover help 3 5 6 IBM endorsed YouTube videos endorses various YouTube videos for the IBM storage portlolio Client feedback suggests that these videos are a good tool to illustrate management GUI navigation and tasks Check for new videos from IBM Storage to find useful information at the IBM System Storage Channel on the following website https www youtube com user ibmstorage Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 147 148 Implementing the IBM Storwize 3700 Host configuration This chapter provides overview of preparing open system hosts for use with IBM Storwize V3700 and using the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI to create logical host objects This chapter is a prerequisite fo
552. ure 8 2 CES Edom Fier ED Canone wan re 4 Onine Generic 2 w Tasi lapping F oi Pors mao sas v onmo Genere 2 a aD H amp Qt Qe ali Figure 8 2 Hosts pane Figure 8 2 shows several hosts some with volumes mapped to them 2 Select a host and click Actions as shown in Figure 8 3 or right click the host to show the available actions lest Pot Ports Tiest lapping T Genk s Im n Figure 8 3 Host Action menu As shown in Figure 8 3 there are several Actions associated with host mapping For more information see 8 1 1 Modifying Mappings menu and 8 1 2 Unmapping volumes from a host on page 367 Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 361 8 1 1 Modifying Mappings menu To 1 modify mappings complete the following steps From the Host pane after selecting a host and opening the Actions menu select Modify Mappings to open the Modify Host Mappings pane as shown in Figure 8 4 ody Hos Mappings n Pasncopyvoiz ot E ner d 4 mur Hd Time aoc epestrasocentrssactmcecatonoans E 7 2600 toDGIUSOQUDDIFEDONIOC00Q0UON lume 20064 9065 eoosozsocoesorrseoooooovocooonos Showing 19 ome Salen 0 votes Stowing raping Set brass ost FC Unmappea v
553. ure Ethernet port IPs on Windows 2012 R2 complete the following steps 1 Go to Control Network and Internet gt Network and Sharing Center This should take you to the window shown in Figure 4 7 NUM View your basic network information and set up connections events Change stor stigs Change anced sharing Neto c Pr cba pus a Teen VL dan er VPN connector ora outer or access point epe probleme or get ooo infomation Optone indows 2012 R2 Figure 4 7 Network and Sharing Center in In this case we have two networks visible to the system The first network is the one we are using to connect to the server consisting of a single dedicated Ethernet port for management The second network is our iSCSI network consisting of two dedicated Ethernet ports for iSCSI It is advised to have at least two dedicated ports for failover purposes Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 2 To configure an IP address click one of the iSCSI Ethernet connections in this case Ethernet 3 or Ethernet 4 The window shown in Figure 4 8 should open Connectivity o Internet access Pu Connectivity Na Internet access State sBeaye 02 51 40 sent Received Bytes 2 280 834557 165 5 478 512 710 358 Gea eee ee Figure 4 8 Ethemet Status Chapter 4 Host configuration 1
554. ures and environmental details Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 3 41 shows the System properties Properties for System TSO_V3700 x umm Version 740 build 102 15 1411020000 000000003 0709 Expansion enclosures 1 Internal capacity rone Temperature weas Temperature Peak 24 C 76 F Hov 4 2014 6 122 PM Power usage sro wans Powerusage Peak 570 Watte Nov 4 2044 5 57 53 PM Figure 3 41 Properties for System gt Enclosure The Enclosure properties pane shows various information such as the enclosure state the machine type and serial number and field replaceable unit FRU part number Figure 3 42 shows the Enclosure Control or Expansion properties Properties for Control Enclosure 1 x stare v Onme Product name IBM Storwize V3700 Control Enclosure me 2002 24C E 0G07D6C FRU PN 0Y2422 FRU ldontity 415002 441YM1BGGD7D6C Machine Signature S1CE BEBT 3BA4 49CE Figure3 42 Properties for Control Enclosure Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 97 gt Drive The Drive properties pane shows various information such as state capacity use unused candidate spare and member the drive specification and its FRU part number Figure 3 43 shows the Properties for drive 13 Properties for drive 13 x w LI State v Capacity 278 90 618 Use Member Enterprise Speed 0000 rpm Interface Speed
555. urs x Comment oS a Figure 2 29 Contact Details The next window shows the details of the email server 56 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 13 Click the green plus icon to enter more than one email server as shown in Figure 2 30 Sten seus watee Email Servers O System Name Spelt the IP address of at teast one email server that your company uses nas Time IP ad ress Server Port Licensed Functions C a j ee detected Enclosures trail vent Notifications Stom Location eat Sones ee Co Figure 2 30 Email Servers details 14 The initial setup wizard opens the Configure Storage option next as shown in Figure 2 31 CUEN wee e Configure Storage spem Hane Q date and Time Evon Notteaions Storage Figure2 31 System Setup Configure Storage Chapter 2 Initial configuration 57 This option takes all the disks in the IBM Storwize V3700 and automatically configures them into optimal arrays for use as managed disks MDisks If you do not want to automatically configure disks now select Configure storage later and you are taken to the summary window If you select Configure storage now the system examines the enclosures and provides the best array configuration 15 Select Configure storage now and then click Next to move to the summary
556. use the Actions menu as shown in Figure 3 68 omis roo ta ad Creme Poot c E7 Detect Disks e jb eg H Show Dependent Volumes L Figure 3 68 RAID Actions menu System Migration pane To migrate a system complete the following steps 1 Select System Migration in the Pools menu to open the System Migration pane as shown in Figure 3 69 This pane is used to migrate data from externally attached Fibre Channel or SAS based storage systems to the internal storage of the IBM Storwize V3700 The pane displays image mode volume information 2 To begin a migration click Start New Migration Target Pool o tens found Figure 3 69 System Migration pane Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 Storage Migration wizard The Storage Migration wizard is used for data migration from other FC or SAS attached storage systems to the IBM Storwize V3700 Figure 3 70 shows the Storage Migration wizard avoid data Jass back up al the data stored on your external storage before using the wizard Tho folowing types of Nests cannot be migrated using tnis wizara because steps are required C Lam not migrating clustered hosts including clusters or VMWare hosts and VIOS C not migrating SAW boot mages Prerequisites C7 This system s cabled t
557. usually in different Storage Pools all reads are handled by the primary copy This feature is similar to host based software mirroring but provides a single point of management and high availability HA to OSs that do not support software mirroring Creating mirror copies in different Storage Pools protects against array failures However the mirroring feature is a complete disaster recovery solution because both copies are accessed by the same node pair and are addressable only by a single cluster If you want to create a robust disaster recovery solution using IBM Storwize V3700 see 10 2 Remote Copy on page 514 Creating mirror volumes is described in 5 1 3 Creating mirrored volumes on page 208 Thin Miror A mirror volume that is also thin provisioned Creating thin mirror volumes is described in 5 1 4 Creating thin mirrored volumes on page 211 5 1 1 Creating generic volumes To create generic volumes complete the following steps 1 Select Generic as the preset as shown in Figure 5 4 2 From the list shown in Figure 5 4 select a pool to provision storage from 3 The view shown in Figure 5 4 opens From here you can choose how many volumes to create the capacity of each volume and what to name the volumes Creato Volumes Selecta Preset da ma Primary Fes nig m Volume Detaile Quantiy 4 Capet GB Summary 0 volumes 0 bres total 5 44 TD free in pool Figure 5
558. va Web Start Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 633 6 4 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center starts an application download as shown in Figure 11 84 If this is the first time you logged in it takes time to install the required Java packages to the local system ss We Sta EJ Downloading application Name Twal Storage Center GUT Publisher EN Corporation From toile bones Canes Figure 11 84 Downloading Tivoli Storage Productivity Center application 3 Use your login credentials to access Tivoli Storage Productivity Center as shown in Figure 11 85 TV Two Storage Product Bess chest Passwords ex Figure 11 85 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center login access 4 After successfully logging in you are ready to add storage devices to Tivoli Storage Productivity Center as shown in Figure 11 86 wacerne re M tool Sorge Pade Contr The ISH Tivol Storage Predativty Center provides the ably tn adniniter complex and heterogerenus storage environments To proceed select one ofthe anions below Adi Devices Opere the Corfigure Devices vi ading subsystems Fabrics and Cerfiguation pers the Services Tab of tho Configuration Lit Selec this option when configuring the Productivity Center to manage storage subsystems fabrie fempanerts or computers Nanagenere Op
559. ve this consistent image by identifying sets of Os that are active concurrently at the master assigning an order to those sets and applying those sets of I Os in the assigned order at the secondary In a failover scenario where the secondary site must become the master source of data depending on the workload pattern and the bandwidth and distance between local and remote site certain updates might be missing at the secondary site Therefore any applications that use this data must have an external mechanism for recovering the missing updates and reapplying them for example a transaction log replay 10 2 2 Global Mirror with Change Volumes Global Mirror within the IBM Storwize V3700 is designed to achieve recovery point objective RPO as low as possible so that data is as up to date as possible This capability places some strict requirements on your infrastructure and in certain situations with low network link quality congested hosts or overloaded hosts you might be affected by multiple 1920 congestion errors Congestion errors happen in the following primary situations Congestion at the source site through the host or network Congestion in the network link or network path Congestion at the target site through the host or network Global Mirror includes functionality that is designed to address the following conditions that negatively affect some Global Mirror implementations Estimation of bandwidth require
560. ver either volume can operate in the primary or secondary role as necessary The primary volume contains a valid copy of the application data and receives updates from the host application which is analogous to a source volume The secondary volume receives a copy of any updates to the primary volume because these updates are all transmitted across the mirror link Therefore the secondary volume is analogous to a continuously updated target volume When a relationship is created the master volume is assigned the role of primary volume and the auxiliary volume is assigned the role of secondary volume The initial copying direction is from master to auxiliary When the relationship is in a consistent state you can reverse the copy direction 518 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 The two volumes a relationship must be the same size The Remote Copy relationship be established on the volumes within one IBM Storwize V3700 storage system which is called an intra cluster relationship The relationship can also be established in different IBM Storwize V3700 storage systems or between an IBM Storwize V3700 storage system and an IBM SAN Volume Controller IBM Storwize V5000 or IBM Storwize V7000 which are called inter cluster relationships Important The use of Remote Copy target volumes as Remote Copy source volumes is not allowed A FlashCopy target volume can be used as a Remote Copy source volume and also as a Remote Copy targe
561. veral hundred megabytes Standard logs Standard logs plus one existing statesave Standard logs plus most recent statesave from each node Standard logs plus new statesaves Figure 3 113 Download Support Package wizard Chapter 3 Graphical user interface overview 141 Show full log listing The Support pane also provides access to the files that are on the node canisters as shown in Figure 3 114 1 Click Show full log listing to access the node canister files 2 To save a file to the user s workstation right click the file and select Download 3 To change to the file listing to show the files on a partner node canister select the node canister from the node selection menu Legg Levet Low dase hes BRIDE ampeiumpoctroec mms ose p unpeiumposerec 2 enos sa Downoad y dumpa dump 2GU DeC 2 41102 Ld p p trmpeercsureencosurecump ocvrosc 2 1 2 sare Htumpsencsureenciearccump 1 2 tao rcr 0 ye s m 77 o Figure 3 114 Full log listing Seles oa 142 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI Preferences pane As shown in Figure 3 115 this pane provides options to Refresh GUI Objects Restore Default Browser Preferences and configure the Information Center web address There are also two further check boxes that allow the Extent size to be changed when creating a new Pool and enable the low resolution graphics mode GUI Preferences You can
562. vering SAS volumes from Windows 2012 R2 This section describes how to discover SAS volumes Discovering mapped volumes discover mapped SAS volumes from Windows 2012 R2 complete the steps described in 5 3 1 Discovering Fibre Channel volumes from Windows 2012 R2 on page 218 The steps required are identical for both FC and SAS The mapped volumes are now ready to be managed by the host operating system Creating a file system from a mapped volume create a file system from a mapped volume in Windows 2012 R2 complete the steps described later in this chapter This procedure is common to all attachment types Configuring multipath settings for mapped volumes To configure multipath settings for mapped volumes in Windows 2012 R2 complete the steps described in Configuring multipath settings for mapped volumes on page 225 Chapter 5 Volume configuration 233 5 3 4 Discovering Fibre Channel volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 This section describes how to discover FC volumes Discovering mapped volumes discover mapped FC volumes from VMware ESXi 5 5 complete the following steps 1 Connect to your ESXi Server using the VMware vSphere Client 2 Browse to the Configuration tab and select Storage Adapters This opens the view shown in Figure 5 53 Figure 5 53 The storage adapters view in VMware vSphere Client Click Rescan all The window shown in Figure 5 54 opens Make sure Scan for New Storage Devi
563. vices Gscsver Mun Pats DSM Insta Configuration Snapshot Te add support tor a new device ick Add anc enter the encor Product ids as sinna of 5 characters by 1 characters Mulige Devices can be specified vang semicolon as be deiniter To remove support for curenty FIO d devices select the devices end dek Remove Devices Device Hardvare fe E Figure 6 29 Checking MPIO support Windows 2012 can be seen in the example the DSM has been loaded to support the Storwize range of Storage subsystems Chapter 6 Storage migration 273 274 Create a host or host group in the external storage system To create a host or host group complete the following steps 1 Using IBM System Storage DS Storage Manager connect to the external 093200 system as shown in Figure 6 4 on page 254 and select Manage a Storage Subsystem 2 Select the system that you want to manage and click OK 3 Each canister of the IBM Storwize V3700 needs to be defined on the System Storage 053200 as host and then added to a host group Click the Configure tab and select Configure Host Access Manual as shown in Figure 6 30 EJ Init setun Tasks 5m 8 i 1 Seeaty euaratealy hosta shoud acces gal ive ots coragosuboytom Corp is ink fore raping cal dies E ben ane anite you tonne new Pose he sorge contours Host Acc
564. view more options 5 Here you can configure Characteristics as for generic volumes Capacity Management as for thin provisioned volumes and Mirroring as for mirrored volumes When you are done click OK to return to the main wizard Chapter 5 Volume configuration 211 6 Click Create or Create and Map to Host when you are finished Create and Map to Host creates the volumes and then takes you to the Host Mapping wizard which is described in 5 2 Mapping volumes to hosts on page 213 Important The Create and Map to Host option is disabled if no hosts are configured the Storwize V3700 For more information about configuring hosts see Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 7 If you clicked Create the wizard completes as shown in Figure 5 17 Create Volumes Task completed 100 View more Lu Figure 5 17 Completion of the Create Volumes wizard 8 Click Close to return to the Volumes view which now lists your newly created volumes as shown in Figure 5 18 a u k M Figure 5 18 The Volumes view with the newly created volume listed 9 Repeat these steps for all thin mirrored volumes that you want to create If you did not choose Create and Map to Host in Step 5 see 5 2 2 Manually mapping volumes to hosts on page 215 for instructions about mapping volumes manually after host creation 212 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700
565. view of the IBM Storwize V3700 graphical user interface GUI and shows how to navigate the configuration panes This chapter includes the following topics gt gt gt gt gt Getting started Navigation Status Indicators menus Function icon menus Management GUI help Copyright IBM Corp 2014 2015 All rights reserved 3 1 Getting started This section provides information about accessing the IBM Storwize V3700 management GUI It covers topics such as supported browsers log in modes and the layout of the System pane 3 1 1 Supported browsers The IBM Storwize V3700 management software is a browser based GUI It is designed to simplify storage management by providing a single point of control for monitoring configuration and management For information about supported browsers see the IBM Storwize V3700 Knowledge Center on the following website http www ibm com support knowl edgecenter STLMSA 7 4 0 com ibm storwize v3700 740 doc v3700 ichome 740 html 3 1 2 Access the management GUI To access the management GUI complete the following steps 1 Open a supported web browser and enter the management Internet Protocol IP address or host name of the IBM Storwize V3700 The login pane is displayed as shown in Figure 3 1 User name Password Figure 3 1 Storwize V3700 login pane Default user name and password Change the default password immediately Use the following informati
566. volume becomes over allocated the system takes the volume offline so it is important to pay attention to the warnings You can also specify the grain size for the real capacity used This is relevant when creating FlashCopy mappings from the volumes For more information about FlashCopy see Chapter 10 Copy services on page 453 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 When you are done click OK to return to the main wizard 6 Click Create or Create and Map to Host when you are finished Create and Map to Host 7 creates the volumes and then takes you to the Host Mapping wizard which is described in 5 2 Mapping volumes to hosts on page 213 Important The Create and Map to Host option is disabled if no hosts are configured on the IBM Storwize V3700 For more information about configuring hosts see Chapter 4 Host configuration on page 149 Ifyou clicked Create the wizard completes as shown in Figure 5 10 Create Volumes Task completed 100 View more Figure 5 10 Completion of the Create Volumes wizard 8 Click Close to return to the Volumes view which now lists your newly created volume as shown in Figure 5 11 E Figure 5 11 The Volumes view with the newly created volume listed Repeat these steps for all thin provisioned volumes that you want to create If you did not choose Create and Map to Host in Step 5 see 5 2 2 Manually mapping
567. volume capacity reflects the same size physical disk capacity Creating generic volumes is described in 5 1 1 Creating generic volumes on page 202 Thin Provision A striped volume that reports a greater capacity than is initially allocated Thin provisioned volumes are sometimes referred to as space efficient Such volumes have two capacities The real capacity controls the quantity of extents that is initially allocated to the volume The virtual capacity is reported to all of the other components for example FlashCopy and to the hosts Thin provisioning is useful for applications where the amount of physical disk space actually used is often much smaller than the amount allocated Thin provisioned volumes can be configured to expand automatically when more physical capacity is used It is also possible to configure the amount of space that is initially allocated IBM Storwize V3700 includes a configurable alert which alerts system administrators when thin provisioned volumes begin to reach their capacity Creating thin provisioned volumes is described in 5 volumes on page 205 Creating thin provisioned Chapter 5 Volume configuration 201 Mirror A striped volume that consists of two striped copies and is synchronized to protect against loss of data if the underlying Storage Pool of one copy is lost In this case a single volume is presented to the host However two copies exist on the storage back end
568. volume to delete Verify the volume to delete tne numbor ot volumes that you are 1 Delete the volume even 1 1 has host mappings or is used in FlashCopy mappings or remote copy relationships a Figure 8 53 Delete Volume pane Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 395 3 Click De 4 After the task completes click Close to return to the Volumes pane and the volumes are removed from the system Important You must force the deletion if the volume has host mappings or is used in FlashCopy mappings To be cautious always ensure that the volume has no association before you delete it 8 5 Volume properties This section provides an overview of all available information that is related to IBM Storwize V3700 volumes To open the advanced view of a volume complete the following steps 1 Select Properties from the Action menu and the Volume Details pane opens as shown in Figure 8 54 on page 397 2 The following tabs are available and are described in the following sections Overview Host Maps Member MDisk 396 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 5 1 Overview tab The Overview tab gives you a complete overview of the volume properties The left part of the pane displays common volume properties and the right part of the pane displays information about the volume copies as shown in Figure 8 54 Volume orans vnnzo12 Vol 01 Overview Hostttaps Mem
569. we showed that itis possible to create synchronize split and delete volume copies A combination of these tasks can be used to migrate volumes to other Storage Pools The easiest way to migrate volume copies is to use the migration feature that is described in 8 4 9 Migrating a volume to another Storage Poo on page 393 Using this feature one extent after another is migrated to the new Storage Pool However the use of volume copies provides another way to migrate volumes if you have different Storage Pool characteristics in terms of extent size To migrate a volume complete the following steps 1 Create a second copy of your volume in the target Storage Pool For more information see 8 5 4 Adding a mirrored volume copy on page 402 2 Wait until the copies are synchronized 3 Change the role of the copies and make the new copy the primary copy For more information see 8 6 Advanced volume copy functions on page 406 4 Split or delete the old copy from the volume For more information see 8 6 2 Splitting into new volume on page 408 or 8 6 5 Delete Volume Copy option on page 412 This migration process requires more user interaction with the IBM Storwize V3700 GUI but it offers some benefits As an example we look at migrating a volume from a tier 1 Storage Pool to a lower performance tier 2 Storage Pool In step 1 you create the copy on the tier 2 pool while all reads are still performed in t
570. workload changes over a weekend Ifyou run an unusual workload over a longer period automatic data placement can be turned off and on online to avoid data movement Chapter 9 IBM Easy 429 Depending on which Storage Pool and which Easy Tier configuration is set a volume copy can have the Easy Tier states that are shown in Table 9 1 Table 9 1 Easy Tier states Storage Pool Single tiered or Volume copy Easy Tier status on volume copy multitiered Storage Easy Tier Pool setting Oft Single tiered Ott Inactive or Single tiered On Inactive or Multitiered Off Inactive off Multitiered On Inactive Single tiered ott Measured Auto Single tiered On Balanced Multtiered ott Measured Auto Multitiered On Active d On Single tiered Of Measured On Single tiered On Balanced On Multitiered ott Measured On Multitiered On Active Measure Single tiered On Measured Measure Single tiered Off Measured Measure Multitiered On Measured Measure Multtiered ott Measured a The default Easy Tier setting fora Storage Pool is Auto and the default Easy Tier setting for a volume copy is On This scenario means that Easy Tier functions are disabled for Storage Pools with a single tier b When the volume copy status is measured the Easy Tier function collects usage statistics for the volume but automatic data placement is not active c
571. x procedure at the top of the pane 618 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 5 The steps and panes of the DMP are specific to the error The following figures represent the recommended action DMP for the FC SFP failure example which shows as a Fibre Channel ports not operational event Figure 11 64 shows step 1 of the DMP for the Fibre Channel ports not operational event In this example we say that the change is not intentional Fibre Channel ports status changed There has been a change of status on the Fibre Channel ports Tho Fibre Channel ports are located on this node Hardware Type Node Mode Enclosure Enclosure Serial Canter panel Canister Position 1m Name Number ddentfer Name Enclosure node 5 moder 1 2 Pont The current status of the Fibre Channel ports Adapter siot ID Port ID Port WWPN Current status Expected status 1 1 50007080304 000 Inactive Inacive i a Inactive Tnactive sf this change is intentional due to administration or maintenance dick this box E hen cick Next Next to run the x procedure Figure 11 64 Recommended action DMP for Fibre Channel port not operational Step 1 Chapter 11 RAS monitoring and troubleshooting 619 Figure 11 85 shows step 2 of the DMP for the Fibre Channel ports not operational event The DMP recommends checking the FC cable connected to the inactive port You will
572. xed by adding more drives as spares Chapter 7 Storage Pools 339 340 During the internal drive configuration spare drives are automatically assigned according to the chosen RAID preset s spare goals see 7 2 Configuring internal storage on page 320 Swap Drive The Swap Drive action can be used to replace a drive in the array with another drive with the status of Candidate or Spare This action is used to replace a drive that failed or is expected to fail soon for example as indicated by error message in the event log Select an MDisk that contains the drive to be replaced and click RAID Actions Swap Drive ii In the Swap Drive window select the member drive that is to be replaced as shown in Figure 7 45 and click Next Shap Drive Belect a drive to swap out of masks o Member 4 Onine a 2 200008 Membor Onine 6 2 12 Emtrprioo 2703000 Member One 2 Enterprise a 2m306 Member v Onine 2 2 Enterprise 27080610 Member Onine 1 2 7 Enterprise as Member V onne 2 E member One 6 2 interpres 2104068 Member Onine 3 2 D Enterprise Figure 7 45 MDisk swap drive Step 1 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 iii In step 2 as shown as Figure 7 46 a list of suitable drives is presented One drive must be selected to swap into the MDisk Click Finish Swap Drive Selecta vo 10 swap into mella 218 90
573. xpansion enclosures that are connected with serial attached SCSI SAS cables which make up one system that is called an input output group 1 0 Group The control and expansion enclosures are available in the following factors and can be intermixed within an I O group gt 12x 3 5 inch drives in a 2U unit gt 24x 2 5 inch drives in a 2U unit Within each enclosure are two canisters Control enclosures contain two node canisters and expansion enclosures contain two expansion canisters The IBM Storwize V3700 scales up to 120 x 3 5 inch 240 x 2 5 inch or a combination of both drive form factors The SAS Nearline SAS NL SAS and solid state drives SSDs also known as flash are the supported drive types IBM Storwize V3700 provides host attachment through onboard 6 Gb SAS and 1 Gb Internet Small Computer System Interface iSCSI host interfaces In addition there are optional four port 8 Gb Fibre Channel FC two port 10 Gb iSCSI Fibre Channel over Ethernet FCoE or four port 6 Gb SAS host interface cards HIC Important IBM Storwize V3700 can be direct attached to a host For more information about restrictions see the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center SSIC on the following website http www ibm com systens support storage ssic interoperability wss Host attachment information also is available on the following website http www ibm con support knowl edgecenter STLMSA 7 4 0 com ibm storwize v3700
574. y going to Volumes Volumes by Host as shown in Figure 5 25 Figure 5 25 Opening the Volumes by Host view 216 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 This should load the page shown in Figure 5 26 a gt a ao u amp m Figure 5 26 The volumes by host view with a single host and volume mapping configured 2 Examine the UID column and note the value for each mapped volume Next you need to discover the mapped volumes from the host The following sections describe how to discover mapped volumes from Windows 2012 R2 and VMware ESXi 5 5 for each supported attachment type Fibre Channel FC Internet Small Computer System Interface iSCSI and serial attached SCSI SAS Note For Windows 2012 R2 we describe the use of IBM Subsystem Device Driver Device Specific Module SDDDSM for multipath for FC and SAS where 5 3 2 Discovering iSCSI volumes from Windows 2012 R2 on page 227 describes how to configure native Microsoft Multipath MPIO This is because only native MPIO is supported for iSCSI on Windows 2012 R2 Chapter 5 Volume configuration 217 5 3 1 Discovering Fibre Channel volumes from Windows 2012 R2 This section describes how to discover FC volumes Discovering mapped volumes To discover mapped FC volumes from Windows 2012 R2 complete the following steps 1 Connect to your Windows server and open Server Manager 2 Go to File and Storage Services as shown i
575. y is started and an indirection layer which enables data to be read from the source volume transparently 10 1 1 Business requirements for FlashCopy 454 When you are deciding whether FlashCopy addresses your needs you must adopt a combined business and technical view of the problems that you must solve Determine your needs from a business perspective and then determine whether FlashCopy fulfills the technical needs of those business requirements With an immediately available copy of the data FlashCopy can be used in the following business scenarios Rapidly creating consistent backups of dynamically changing data FlashCopy can be used to create backups through periodic running The FlashCopy target volumes can be used to complete a rapid restore of individual files or of the entire volume through Reverse FlashCopy by using the restore option The target volumes that are created by FlashCopy can also be used for backup to tape By attaching them to another server and performing backups from there it enables the production server to continue largely unaffected After the copy to tape completes the target volumes can be discarded or kept as a rapid restore copy of the data Rapidly creating consistent copies of production data to facilitate data movement or migration between hosts FlashCopy can be used to facilitate the movement or migration of data between hosts while minimizing downtime for applications FlashCopy enables
576. y mappings to consistency group complete the following steps 1 Click Not in a Group to list all of the FlashCopy mappings with no consistency group 2 You can add FlashCopy mappings to a consistency group by selecting them and clicking the Move to Consistency Group option from the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 57 itapa Name A liue Source Volume Target Volume E Y prr lt Flash Time Nov 5 2014 251 28 PM a e Start Rename Mapping Delete Mapping Show Related Volumes Senso tak Propernes LEES eo Ec 1c c Figure 10 57 Select the FlashCopy mappings to add to a consistency group Important You cannot move mappings that are copying Selecting a FlashCopy that is already running results the Move to Consistency Group option being disabled 3 Selections of a range are performed by highlighting a mapping pressing and holding the Shift key and clicking the last item in the range Multiple nonsequential selections can be made by pressing and holding the Ctrl key and clicking each mapping individually The option is also available by right clicking individual mappings 504 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 4 You are prompted to specify which consistency group you want to move the FlashCopy mapping into as shown in Figure 10 58 Choose from the list in the drop down men
577. y split between the two fabrics to provide redundancy in the event that one of the fabrics goes offline planned or unplanned Virtualized storage External storage systems that are to be virtualized are used for migration purposes only Zoning must be implemented after the IBM Storwize V3700 hosts and optional external storage systems are connected to the SAN fabrics To enable the node canisters to communicate with each other in band create a zone with only the IBM Storwize V3700 worldwide port names WWPNs two from each node canister on each of the two fabrics If there is an external storage system that is to be virtualized create a zone in each fabric with the IBM Storwize V3700 WWPNs two from each node canister with up to a maximum of eight WWPNS from the external storage system Assuming that every host has FC connection to each fabric then in each fabric create a zone with the host WWPN and one WWPN from each node canister in the IBM Storwize V3700 system The critical point is that there should only ever one initiator host bus adapter in any zone For load balancing between the node ports on the Storwize V3700 alternate the host FC ports between the ports of the IBM Storwize V3700 There should be a maximum of eight paths through the SAN from each host to the IBM Storwize V3700 Hosts where this number is exceeded are not supported The restriction is there to limit the number of paths that the multipathing d
578. y the number of FlashCopy mappings that you want to delete If you want to delete the FlashCopy mappings when the data on the target volume is inconsistent with the source volume select the option to do so Delete FlashCopy Mapping x You selected 1 FlashCopy mapping to delete Verity the FlashCopy mapping to delete Zenan FlashCopyol2 gt FlashCopyVo12_01 Delete the FlashCopy mapping even when the data on ihe target volume is inconsistent ifthe target volume has other dependencies ILU Figure 10 37 Confirm the deletion of FlashCopy mappings 4 Click Delete and your FlashCopy mapping is removed Important Deleting the FlashCopy mapping does delete the target volume If you want to reclaim the storage space occupied by the target volume you must delete the target volume manually Chapter 10 Copy services 489 Showing related volumes To show the FlashCopy mapping dependencies complete the following steps 1 Select target or source volume in the FlashCopy window 2 Click Show Related Volumes in the Actions menu as shown in Figure 10 38 or right click the selected volume Actos iter A varoo Vor oF vacca Coping FaehCopiVoi sooo cio FiashGopyvoit coming Faencopyvon FashCopyvoi2 Tescoonm 8 L3 ncopyvor Move to Consistency Group else oa FeshCop ot3 Fasncopyvas FashCop
579. yellow as shown in Figure 8 43 Click Map Volumes to apply the changes to the system Modify Hos Mappings x Host iL meters mechestat Snowing 39 come voua Stowe 3 racpnca Sent oreopnos hm EINE NIE Figure 8 43 Modify Host Mappings 4 After the changes are made click Close to return to the Volumes pane Modify Host Mappings pane For more information about the Modify Host Mappings pane see 8 1 1 Modifying Mappings menu on page 362 388 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700 8 4 3 Unmapping volumes from all hosts remove all host mappings from a volume complete the following steps 1 Select All Hosts from the actions menu This action removes all host mappings which means that no hosts can access this volume 2 Confirm the number of mappings that are to be removed and click as shown in Figure 8 44 Unmap Hosts x a you want to unmap the following mapping mo numbor of mappings mat this operation D MILI Figure 8 44 Unmapping from host or hosts 3 After the task completes click Close to return to the Volumes pane Important Ensure that the required procedures are run on the host OS before the unmapping procedure is performed Chapter 8 Advanced host and volume administration 389 8 4 4 Viewing which host is mapped to a volume To determine whic
580. your local IBM representative for information about the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead However itis the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non IBM product program or service IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such rovisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION ROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are
581. ze V3700 for iSCSI host connecti ity The iSCSI hosts are now configured on the IBM Storwize V3700 To provide connectivity the iSCSI Ethernet ports must also be configured Complete the following steps to enable iSCSI connectivity 1 Go to Settings Network as shown in Figure 4 47 Figure 4 47 Opening the network settings view 2 Select Ethernet Ports and the Ethernet port configuration view should open as shown in Figure 4 48 4 T ok B Ca ET H Figure 4 48 The Ethernet Ports view Chapter 4 Host configuration 191 192 3 To configure an IP address a node port expand the I O Group right click the wanted port and click Modify IP Settings as shown in Figure 4 49 erneete Figure 4 49 Opening the Modify IP Settings window for Node 1 Port 2 Note It is generally advised that at least one port is reserved for the management IP address This is normally Port 1 so in this example we configure Port 2 for iSCSI 4 The window shown in Figure 4 50 should open To configure IPv6 click IPV6 to reveal these options 5 Enter the wanted IP address subnet mask and gateway It is important to make sure that these exist in the same subnet as the host IP addresses and that the chosen address is not already in use Click Modify to confirm Modify Port2 of Node 1 x uua Figure 4 50 Configuring an IP address s

Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents